AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual

Service Manual
AM700
Audio Measurement Set
070-9055-00
Warning
The servicing instructions are for use by qualified
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so. Refer to the Safety Summary prior to performing service.
Copyright © Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. Information in this publication supercedes
that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 1000, Wilsonville, OR 97070–1000
TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix, Inc.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one (1)
year from the date of shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of
the warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible
for packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges
prepaid. Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country
in which the Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties,
taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction
caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other
products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY
OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE
AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY.
TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Service Assurance
If you have not already purchased Service Assurance for this product, you may do so at any time during the product’s
warranty period. Service Assurance provides Repair Protection and Calibration Services to meet your needs.
Repair Protection extends priority repair services beyond the product’s warranty period; you may purchase up to three
years of Repair Protection.
Calibration Services provide annual calibration of your product, standards compliance and required audit documentation,
recall assurance, and reminder notification of scheduled calibration. Coverage begins upon registration; you may purchase
up to five years of Calibration Services.
Service Assurance Advantages
H Priced well below the cost of a single repair or calibration
H Avoid delays for service by eliminating the need for separate purchase authorizations from your company
H Eliminates unexpected service expenses
For Information and Ordering
For more information or to order Service Assurance, contact your Tektronix representative and provide the information
below. Service Assurance may not be available in locations outside the United States of America.
Name
Company
Address
City, State, Postal code
Country
Phone
VISA or Master Card number and expiration
date or purchase order number
Repair Protection (1,2, or 3 years)
Calibration Services (1,2,3,4, or 5 years)
Instrument model and serial number
Instrument purchase date
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
xxi
xxiii
Key Features of the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-supplied Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cord Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–3
1–3
1–4
Power Requirements and Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Line Voltage Range and Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Operation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Controls and Touch Screen Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrating the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the AM700 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Setup for Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypassing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Communication Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Conversion Standards Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
2–2
2–2
2–3
2–3
2–3
2–3
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–9
2–9
2–9
2–10
2–11
2–12
2–15
2–19
2–21
2–23
2–24
2–25
2–28
Block Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–2
3–2
3–2
3–2
3–2
3–3
Specifications
Operating Information
Theory of Operation
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
i
Table of Contents
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Disk Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply (A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Circuit Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Acquisition Board (A1A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHA and CHB Input and Attenuator Boards (diagrams 1 and 2) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Differential-to-Single-Ended Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tunable Notch Filters (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiplying DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/D Converters (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Buffer and 5 V Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti-Aliasing Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Single-ended to Differential Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Resolution A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Offset DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80 kHz Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Bandwidth A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decimating Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Transmitter (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format PALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration, Control Registers, Interface, and Power Supplies (diagram 6) . . . .
Calibration Signal Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolated Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Status Read-back Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTL Trigger Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Over/Under Range Board (A1A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XLR Connector Board (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio Board (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio Board Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Interface Tester Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Signal Processor (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio Board DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Interface Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jitter Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) (diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Transmitter (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Offset and Jitter Generator (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jitter DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Shift PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase-Locked Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Generator (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ii
3–3
3–3
3–3
3–3
3–4
3–5
3–5
3–5
3–6
3–7
3–7
3–7
3–7
3–8
3–8
3–8
3–8
3–8
3–8
3–9
3–10
3–10
3–10
3–10
3–10
3–11
3–12
3–12
3–12
3–12
3–12
3–13
3–13
3–13
3–14
3–14
3–20
3–21
3–21
3–22
3–22
3–23
3–23
3–23
3–23
3–23
3–23
3–24
3–24
3–24
3–24
3–24
3–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Programmable Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Simulation Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unity Gain Output Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Receiver Input (diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency Offset (diagram 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/D, Frequency/Phase Counter, and Power Distribution (diagram 8) . . . . . . . . .
Frequency/Phase Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decoders (diagram 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Control (diagram 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eye Sampler (diagram 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Equalization (diagram 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel Board (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AES REF Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator Board (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram Description of the Analog Audio Generators . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Signal Processor (Generator) (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset and SSI Clock Pal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and I/O (diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Control PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DACs and Current to Voltage Converters (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data and Clock Isolators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oversampling Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DACs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current to Voltage Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAC Low-Pass Filters (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 kHz Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80 kHz Low Pass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tunable Bandpass Filters (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tunable Bandpass Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Channel and B Channel Gain/Attenuators (Generator Output) (diagram 6) . .
Relay Control Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A and B Channel Step Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A and B Channel Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A and B Output Amplifiers and Output Z Selectors (diagrams 7 and 8) . . . . . . .
A and B Output Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Impedance Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power and Floating Power Supply (diagram 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floating Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–25
3–25
3–25
3–25
3–25
3–26
3–26
3–26
3–26
3–27
3–27
3–28
3–28
3–29
3–29
3–29
3–32
3–32
3–35
3–36
3–36
3–36
3–36
3–38
3–38
3–38
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–39
3–40
3–40
3–40
3–40
3–40
3–40
3–40
3–41
3–41
3–41
3–41
3–41
3–42
3–42
3–42
3–43
3–43
3–43
3–43
iii
Table of Contents
Main/CPU Board (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU and DSP Bus Interface (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Board Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU/DSP Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Clock and Resets, Counter, and Address Decoder (diagram 2) . . . . . . .
System Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Halt Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host CPU Reset Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Address Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Controller, EPROM, FEPROM, and NVRAM (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . .
EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash EPROM (FEPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAM and Diagnostic Display (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic RAM Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Status Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Display Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Arbitration and Interrupt Encoder (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Registers and Timer (diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Status Register (BSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Program Register (BPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Code Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/0 Processor (diagram 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Processor RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU to Front Panel Interface Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video ASIC and VRAM (diagram 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video ASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting Hint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VRAMDAC and Floppy Drive Interface (diagram 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video RAM/DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floppy Drive Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232C Interface (diagram 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Controller and Host Interface (diagram 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Board (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Buffers and Connectors (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset and Clocks (diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Reset Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
3–44
3–44
3–44
3–46
3–46
3–46
3–47
3–47
3–47
3–47
3–47
3–48
3–48
3–48
3–49
3–49
3–49
3–49
3–50
3–50
3–50
3–50
3–50
3–51
3–51
3–51
3–51
3–51
3–51
3–52
3–52
3–52
3–52
3–52
3–52
3–52
3–53
3–53
3–53
3–53
3–53
3–54
3–54
3–54
3–55
3–55
3–55
3–55
3–56
3–57
3–57
3–57
3–57
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Clock Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Receivers (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Memory (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B Memory (diagram 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP/CPU Interface ASIC (diagram 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Board Registers, Bus Arbitrator and Audio Serializer (diagram 7) . . . . . . . . . . .
DMA Process Reset Register (PRR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serializer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Number Pal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Signal Processor (diagram 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Interrupts Inputs Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Board (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Register, Knobs, Beeper, and Resistive Touch Panel (diagram 1) . . . . .
Control Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Beeper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headphone Amplifier and Speaker (diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel LED Indicators (diagram 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Panel Push Buttons (diagram 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture Monitor Assembly (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Video Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+12 V and +5 V Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Deflection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trace Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Board (A11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Functional Block Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input, Inverter, and Regulators (diagram 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115 V/230 V Input Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse-Width Modulator and Control Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Switch Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preregulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Rectifiers and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+15 V Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Circuitry and Fan Drive (diagram 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overcurrent Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STBY/ON Switch Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Drive Assembly (A12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Driver Board (A13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color A/D Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Color Data Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–57
3–58
3–58
3–58
3–58
3–59
3–59
3–59
3–60
3–60
3–60
3–60
3–60
3–61
3–61
3–61
3–61
3–61
3–62
3–62
3–62
3–62
3–63
3–64
3–64
3–64
3–65
3–65
3–66
3–67
3–68
3–70
3–70
3–70
3–70
3–72
3–72
3–72
3–72
3–72
3–73
3–74
3–74
3–75
3–76
3–78
3–79
3–79
3–80
3–80
3–80
3–80
v
Table of Contents
LCD Flat Panel Display (A14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Backlight Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–82
3–82
3–82
Performance Verification
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabricated Test Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Power Supply Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check 115 V Power Supply Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check 230 V Power Supply Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power On Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator High Resolution and High Bandwidth
Mode Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Low Distortion Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check High Bandwidth Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Generator Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Analog Generator Output Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Follow Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Generator Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Audio Analyzer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check High Res Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check High BW Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check FFT Analyzer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check FFT Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Harmonic Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Acquisition Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Autorange Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Analog Acquisition Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Impedance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up the AM700 Audio Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Ch B and Ch B Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify CRT Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Display Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Size, Linearity, Trace Rotation, and Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Display Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Flat Panel Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify Digital Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Rate Range and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Main Output Residual Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ref Output Residual Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check High Frequency Jitter Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static Phase Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phase Jitter Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiver Interface Parameter Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Clock Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
4–1
4–2
4–5
4–5
4–5
4–5
4–6
4–6
4–10
4–12
4–14
4–15
4–16
4–17
4–19
4–19
4–20
4–20
4–26
4–28
4–28
4–29
4–29
4–30
4–31
4–32
4–32
4–32
4–32
4–33
4–33
4–33
4–33
4–33
4–35
4–36
4–36
4–37
4–37
4–38
4–38
4–39
4–40
4–41
4–41
4–42
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Check Static Phase Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Phase Jitter (Jitter spectrum flatness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Jitter Spectrum Noise Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Peak-to-Peak Jitter Measurement Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Eye Diagram Residual Jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Input and Output Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check the DSP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Port Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Digital Interface Tester (DIT) Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Disk Drive and File Transfer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Disk Drive Verification V1.02 Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Headphones, GPIB, and Hardcopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DUT Under Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Headphone Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check GPIB Remote Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check Hardcopy Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–42
4–43
4–44
4–45
4–46
4–47
4–50
4–50
4–53
4–54
4–55
4–59
4–59
4–59
4–59
4–60
Adjustment Procedures
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verification Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Service Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acquisition Board Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the High Bandwidth A/D MSB for Channels A and B . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the Attenuator Compensation for Channels A and B . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Clock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Monitor Adjustment (for CRT display monitor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation to Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn on Procedure After a Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Yoke Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check and Adjust Free-running Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust the CRT Display with a Test Pattern VGA Signal Applied . . . . . . .
Factory Service Geometry Fine Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRT Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Driver Board Adjustment (for LCD flat panel display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Needed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for the LCD Driver Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust ADC Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fine Adjustment of the ADC Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Verify the Gain and Offset Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjust Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Generator Board Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set up Test Equipment and the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio Board Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–1
5–4
5–5
5–5
5–5
5–6
5–6
5–7
5–7
5–7
5–7
5–9
5–10
5–11
5–11
5–12
5–13
5–13
5–14
5–15
5–17
5–18
5–20
5–20
5–20
5–20
5–22
5–22
5–22
5–23
5–23
5–23
5–26
5–26
vii
Table of Contents
Mechanical Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set up the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Phase-Locked Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Digital Generator Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibrate the Touch Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–26
5–27
5–27
5–30
5–30
5–30
5–30
5–31
5–31
Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Static-Sensitive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Mains Voltage Selection Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determining the Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Checks and Readjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Assembly Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NVRAM State Clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–1
6–1
6–2
6–3
6–5
6–5
6–5
6–6
6–6
6–6
6–7
6–7
6–8
6–11
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–13
Accessing the Diagnostics Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low Level Diagnostic Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Overall Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Run Mode Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Keyboard to Run Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Keystrokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backdoor Boot Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Diagnostics on a Remote Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Baud Rate Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOOT UP Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Probe Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Display Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOOT Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio Board Semiautomated Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–15
6–20
6–23
6–24
6–27
6–27
6–28
6–28
6–30
6–30
6–30
6–32
6–33
6–33
6–34
6–41
Board Exchange Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–49
Exchange Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating Exchange Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Board Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tektronix Service Offerings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Field Service Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–49
6–50
6–50
6–53
6–53
6–53
Removal and Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–55
Maintenance
Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
6–55
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Cover Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Cover Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Removal/Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Assembly Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Modules (Circuit Board Assemblies) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Acquisition (A1) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
XLR Connector (A2) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Audio (A3) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Panel (A4) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Audio Generator Board (A5) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Display Driver (A13) Removal/Replacement (Flat Panel
Display Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main/CPU (A6) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP (A7) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel (A9) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disk Drive (A12) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Touch Screen Removal/Replacement for CRT Display Instruments . . . . . .
CRT Picture Monitor Assembly (A10) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Flat Panel Display Assembly (A14) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . .
Replacing the LCD Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LCD Backlight and Backlight Inverter Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply (A11) Removal/Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the NVRAM Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–55
6–55
6–55
6–56
6–56
6–57
6–58
6–60
6–63
6–64
6–64
6–65
6–66
6–69
6–69
6–72
6–73
6–73
6–76
6–82
6–83
6–86
6–88
Firmware Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–91
Reprogramming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–91
Rack Adapter Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–93
Slide-out Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide-Out Track Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting the AM700 in the Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the Measurement Set from the Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–93
6–95
6–97
6–97
6–101
Options
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Replaceable Electrical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8–1
8–1
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagram Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Component Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grid Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9–1
9–1
9–1
9–2
9–2
Diagrams
Replaceable Mechanical Part
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
10–1
10–2
ix
Table of Contents
Appendix
Appendix A: Memory and Register Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Memory Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU/DSP Interface Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DRAM Address Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S3 Diagnostic Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMA Read Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DMA WRITE Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Translation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-4
A-5
A-5
A-16
A-18
A-20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 2–1: Rear panel fuse, power connector, On/Off Switch,
and line selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–2: Touch screen interface with main menu and submenu
displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–3: Representative icons and arrows seen in the display . . . . . . .
Figure 2–4: Application selection menu under the other button . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–5: Touch screen calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–6: AM700 Audio Measurement Set system clock . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–7: Applications selection buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–8: Configure button in the utilities selection block . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–9: Configuration menu initial selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–10: System status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–11: Input selection control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–12: Measurement channel assignment pull-down menu . . . . . .
Figure 2–13: A typical view setup control menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–14: FFT Analyzer view options in the view setup controls . . . .
Figure 2–15: Four different measurements in four views of the
Audio Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–16: Configure measurement screens for FFT Analyzer for FFT
and for multitone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–17: The copy configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–18: Hard copy output file selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–19: Configure system setup communicate menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–20: Configure system setup conversion standards menu . . . . . .
Figure 2–21: Generator output voltage divider for dBm calculations . . . .
Figure 2–22: Input circuit for dBm calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–23: Quick setup selections for the Audio Analyzer . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–1: Simplified block diagram of the AM700 Audio
Measurement Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–2: Simplified block diagram of one channel of the analog
input circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–3: Simplified block diagram of the high resolution analog
to digital converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–4: Sample transmitter block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–5: Digital audio generator simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–6: Digital audio board DSP section block diagram . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–1
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
2–8
2–9
2–10
2–10
2–12
2–13
2–15
2–16
2–17
2–19
2–20
2–21
2–23
2–24
2–25
2–26
2–26
2–28
3–1
3–6
3–9
3–11
3–15
3–17
xi
Table of Contents
Figure 3–7: Digital audio receiver simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–8: Digital audio connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–9: Digital signal processor port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–10: DSP port timing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–11: Analog generator simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–12: Analog generator DSP section block diagram . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–13: S-Clock disable used for DSP mode control . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–14: SSI clock, frame, B clock, and serial data waveform for
High Res and High BW modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–15: Switching waveform for –15 V floating power supply . . . .
Figure 3–16: Simplified block diagram of the A6 CPU board . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–17: DSP board simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–18: DSP/CPU host port interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–19: Picture monitor simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–20: Power supply block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–21: LCD driver board block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–1: Interconnection cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–2: Input configuration control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–3: Audio generator controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–4: Generator control display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–5: Waveform control display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–6: View window icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–7: Cable for generator output level check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–8: Advanced analog controls display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–9: Generator frequency check cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–10: Keypad entry buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–11: Impedance check adapter cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–12: Applications buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–13: Input Configuration control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–14: Audio Analyzer graphical display with real time (RT)
view visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–15: Keypad entry buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–16: Audio Analyzer main menu with input range and input
select submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–17: FFT Analyzer Window menu display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–18: Dual BNC to 110 W XLR adapter cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–19: Dual BNC to dual XLR cable adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–20: Dual BNC to 110 XLR female adapter cable . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
3–19
3–29
3–30
3–31
3–33
3–35
3–37
3–38
3–44
3–45
3–56
3–59
3–63
3–67
3–81
4–3
4–6
4–7
4–8
4–9
4–9
4–11
4–13
4–13
4–17
4–19
4–20
4–21
4–22
4–22
4–24
4–29
4–38
4–47
4–48
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Figure 4–21: Storage manager control screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–22: AM700 startup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–23: Low level diagnostics menu V1.02 firmware . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–24: Low level diagnostic OVERALL RUN MODE menu . . . .
Figure 4–25: Build CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE menu for
disk drive test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–26: Floppy diagnostic drive stress test results . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–27: GPIB setup in the communications configuration screen . .
Figure 4–28: Copy configuration menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–54
4–56
4–56
4–57
Figure 5–1: Power supply +5 V test points and adjustment locations . . .
Figure 5–2: Acquisition board test points and adjustment locations . . . . .
Figure 5–3: Disk drive flexible circuit board connector operation . . . . . .
Figure 5–4: CRT display monitor board adjustment locations . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–5: LCD display driver test points and adjustment locations . . .
Figure 5–6: Generator board adjustment locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–7: Pin arrangement for J33, the PLL voltage test points . . . . . .
Figure 5–8: Digital audio board test points and adjustment locations . . .
5–6
5–8
5–12
5–15
5–21
5–25
5–27
5–29
Figure 6–1: Rear panel Fuse, Power connector, On/Off Switch and
Line Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–2: Power supply status indicators for the CRT display
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–3: Power supply status indicators for the flat panel display
power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–4: Entering the user-interface diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–5: AM700 diagnostics menus overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–6: High level diagnostics main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–7: Instrument run modes in V1.02 firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–8: Instrument run modes in V1.0/V1.01 firmware . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–9: AM700 startup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–10: Low level diagnostics menu V1.02 firmware . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–11: Low level diagnostics menu for V1.0/V1.01 firmware . . . .
Figure 6–12: Low level diagnostic OVERALL RUN MODE menu . . . .
Figure 6–13: Custom run mode menu V1.02 firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–14: Custom run mode menu V1.0/V1.01 firmware . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–15: Build CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE menu for display . . .
Figure 6–16: Front panel diagnostic selection buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–17: Special power up boot modes for V1.02 firmware . . . . . . .
Figure 6–18: Special power up boot modes for V1.0/V1.01 firmware . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–57
4–58
4–60
4–61
6–3
6–11
6–11
6–15
6–16
6–18
6–18
6–19
6–19
6–20
6–20
6–24
6–24
6–25
6–26
6–27
6–28
6–29
xiii
Table of Contents
Figure 6–19: Circuit board assemblies for CRT display version . . . . . . .
Figure 6–20: Circuit board assemblies for flat panel color display . . . . .
Figure 6–21: Multiple-pin connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–22: Major module locations for the CRT display . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–23: Major module locations for the LCD flat panel display . . .
Figure 6–24: Bottom view showing the connections to the Analog
Acquisition board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–25: XLR connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–26: Bottom view showing the XLR connector board
cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–27: Digital audio board connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–28: Bottom view showing the Analog Audio Generator
cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–29: LCD Display Driver board with connector locations . . . . .
Figure 6–30: CPU board retaining screws and disk drive cable release . .
Figure 6–31: Rear panel screws holding the CPU board in place . . . . . .
Figure 6–32: Retaining screw locations for DSP (A7) circuit board . . . .
Figure 6–33: Trim ring and front panel removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–34: Front panel board connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–35: Touch screen gasket precaution areas when Installing the
trim ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–36: Disk drive flexible circuit board connector operation . . . . .
Figure 6–37: Power supply and monitor board cover plate screws and
cables (CRT display version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–38: Trim ring and LCD flat panel display retaining screws . . . .
Figure 6–39: Touch screen assembly removal B020253 to B020692 . . . .
Figure 6–40: Touch screen removal for serial number B020633
and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–41: LCD assembly exploded view serial number B020100
to B020632 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–42: Backlight removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–43: Touch panel reinstallation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–44: Power supply connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–45: Location of the backup battery in the AM700 . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–46: Partial CPU board showing location of BT1, the
backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–47: Exploded view of the slide-out track assembly . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–48: Locating mounting holes on front Rrails of equipment rack
Figure 6–49: Mounting the slide to the front rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–50: Installing bracket extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiv
6–51
6–52
6–56
6–57
6–58
6–59
6–61
6–62
6–63
6–65
6–66
6–67
6–68
6–69
6–70
6–70
6–71
6–72
6–74
6–77
6–79
6–80
6–81
6–84
6–86
6–87
6–89
6–89
6–94
6–95
6–96
6–96
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Figure 6–51: Removing the plastic handle screw cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–52: Removing the thumb release button from the swing arm . .
Figure 6–53: Removing the retaining screws holding the swing arms
to the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–54: Installing and removing the AM700 Audio Measurement
Set from the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–55: Exploded view of the rack adapter assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–1: AM700 overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–2: Analog Acquisition Channel A input section (Channel B in
parentheses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–3: Analog Acquisition input section CH A notch filter . . . . . . .
Figure 9–4: Analog Acquisition A/D section CH 1 (CH 2) . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–5: Analog acquisition, part 1 of data formatter PAL . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–6: Analog acquisition, part 2 of the data formatter PAL . . . . . .
Figure 9–7: Analog acquisition board cal circuitry, control registers,
power decoupling, and trigger input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–8: Analog generator simplified block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–9: Analog generator, DSP section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–10: Analog generator DAC and current-to-voltage converters .
Figure 9–11: Analog Generator, analog filters block diagram . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–12: Analog Generator output section, attenuators and gain,
detailed block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–13: CPU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9–14: DSP block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–1: Front view – SN B019999 and below only . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–2: Front view – SN B020100 and above only . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–3: Top view – SN B019999 and below only . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–4: Top view – SN B020100 and above only . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–5: Left side view CRT Display version – SN B019999
and below only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–6: Left side view LCD Display version – SN B020100
and above only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–7: LCD display assembly subparts – SN B020100
and above . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–8: Chassis and bottom view – SN B019999 and below only . .
Figure 10–9: Chassis and bottom view – SN B020100 and above only . .
Figure 10–10: Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–11: Standard and optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–98
6–99
6–100
6–101
6–103
9–5
9–6
9–7
9–8
9–9
9–10
9–11
9–12
9–13
9–14
9–15
9–16
9–17
9–18
10–7
10–9
10–11
10–15
10–17
10–19
10–21
10–23
10–25
10–27
10–29
xv
Table of Contents
List of Tables
xvi
Table 1–1: Power cord identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–3: Electronic trigger specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–6: Display system specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–7: Nonvolatile memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–8: Software update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–9: Floppy disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–10: Front panel hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–11: Rear panel hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–12: Power distribution system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–13: Safety standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–14: Safety standards compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–15: Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–16: Dynamic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–17: Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–18: Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–19: Remote control protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–20: Generator control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–21: Generator signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–23: FFT analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–24: Audio monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–25: Digital interface tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–26: Software update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–3
1–4
1–9
1–10
1–14
1–19
1–21
1–21
1–21
1–22
1–22
1–23
1–23
1–23
1–24
1–24
1–25
1–26
1–28
1–28
1–30
1–31
1–33
1–36
1–38
1–39
Table 2–1: Quick setups by application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–28
Table 3–1: Interrupt level encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–2: Diagnostic LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–3: Interrupt inputs and sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–46
3–51
3–60
Table 4–1: Required test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–2: Generator test voltages at 120 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–3: High resolution generator checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–1
4–11
4–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Table of Contents
Table 4–4: High bandwidth generator checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–5: High resolution analyzer checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–6: High bandwidth analyzer checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–7: Main output and XLR output test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–8: BNC output and main output test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–9: Phase Jitter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–10: Phase Jitter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–11: Test AM700 jitter measurement accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–16
4–24
4–26
4–41
4–42
4–44
4–44
4–46
Table 5–1: Equipment required list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–2: AM700 adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–3: Power supply voltages and ripple tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–1
5–3
5–5
Table 6–1: Static susceptibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–2: CPU diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–3: Display diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–4: DSP diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–5: Digital audio diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–6: Generator diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–7: Floppy diagnostic (LL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–8: Baud rate setting for diagnostic output to the serial ports . . .
Table 6–9: Bus probe checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–10: Diagnostic LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–2
6–21
6–22
6–22
6–22
6–22
6–23
6–30
6–32
6–33
6–42
Table A-1: Interrupt level encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-2: System memory map summary (host CPU side) . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-3: CPU/DSP interface address map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-4: EPROM address space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-5: NVRAM address space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-6: Mapping access by the MC68040 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-7: Flash SIMM module capacity identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-8: DRAM address map (68040 access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-9: DRAM address map (96002 DMA access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-10: Diagnostic LED definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-11: Dip switch S3 functional specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-12: CPU MC68040 interrupts priority table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-13: Board status register address: 12000000 Operation:
read only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-5
A-6
A-6
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
A-6
xvii
Table of Contents
Table A-14: Board program register address: 13000000 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-15: Timer registers and addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-16: Interrupt inputs and sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-17: DUARTA register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-18: DUARTB register addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-19: UART port B output port register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-20: GPIB controller read registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-21: GPIB controller write registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-22: Port A memory map summary (DSP side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-23: Port B memory map summary (DSP side) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-24: AHR address (CPU side): $1900 0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-25: Status register (SR), U52 and U53, address: $4000 0000 . .
Table A-26: Program register, U54 and U62, address: $4100 0000 . . . .
Table A-27: SMOD1 and SMOD0 bit settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-28: Host interface bootstrap operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-29: DMA interface address translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table A-30: Host/DMA address translation examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
A-7
A-10
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-12
A-13
A-13
A-13
A-14
A-14
A-14
A-15
A-15
A-16
A-20
A-20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To avoid potential hazards, use this product only as specified.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Use Proper Voltage Setting. Before applying power, ensure that the line selector is
in the proper position for the power source being used.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
xix
General Safety Summary
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
WARNING
High Voltage
xx
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
Double
Insulated
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Service Safety Summary
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service
procedures.
Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.
Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the main power by means
of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Use Caution When Servicing the CRT. To avoid electric shock or injury, use
extreme caution when handling the CRT. Only qualified personnel familiar with
CRT servicing procedures and precautions should remove or install the CRT.
CRTs retain hazardous voltages for long periods of time after power is turned off.
Before attempting any servicing, discharge the CRT by shorting the anode to
chassis ground. When discharging the CRT, connect the discharge path to ground
and then the anode. Rough handling may cause the CRT to implode. Do not nick
or scratch the glass or subject it to undue pressure when removing or installing it.
When handling the CRT, wear safety goggles and heavy gloves for protection.
Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.
X-Radiation. To avoid x-radiation exposure, do not modify or otherwise alter the
high-voltage circuitry or the CRT enclosure. X-ray emissions generated within
this product have been sufficiently shielded.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
xxi
Service Safety
xxii
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Preface
This AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual is intended for use by
qualified service personnel as a tool for troubleshooting, repair, and understanding of the AM700. No servicing of circuit boards should be attempted
during the Warranty period of the instrument. Repair of the instrument when a
defective circuit board is determined to be the cause of a failure is by board
exchange. Both the CRT display and the flat-panel color display versions of the
AM700 are covered in this service manual.
Specifications
This section provides a brief description of the features of the AM700 Audio
Measurement Set, a list of the options and accessories available for use with the
AM700. That is followed by the specification for the AM700 in tabular form.
These tables provide numerical values for measurement accuracies for those
characteristics that may be measured and functional descriptions for those
functions that require a definition of their operation.
Operating Information
An introduction to how the AM700 operates is provided in this section to assist a
service person in becoming familiar with the user interface and accessing the
many application menus. A description of the power requirements and main fuse
location is also found at the beginning of the section.
Theory of Operation
A quick overview of the functional blocks of the AM700 introduces the service
person to the basic architecture of the circuit boards in the Block Circuit
Description. That is followed by a more detailed description of the circuitry of
the AM700 with block diagrams and references to the schematic diagrams to
assist in obtaining a more indepth understanding of the functional blocks of the
AM700. The circuit descriptions are mainly to assist the service person in
narrowing the number of choices of circuit boards that may require swapping to
effect repairs to a malfunctioning instrument.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
xxiii
Preface
Verification Procedure
Test procedures to verify the functional performance of the AM700 are found in
this section. A list of test equipment needed to perform the procedures precedes
the test procedures. These verification procedures require test equipment and
automated testing software that is not readily available to most service departments.
Adjustment Procedure
The adjustment procedures are shorter that the verification procedures. While
there are many parameters of the AM700 that require specification and verification, there are relatively few adjustments. A list of test equipment need to
perform the adjustments of the AM700 is provide, and, as with the verification
procedure, some of the equipment may not be readily available to the service
person. Some the adjustments can be made only with the circuit board on
extender cables to be able to access the adjustable controls.
Maintenance
Maintenance of the AM700 is described in this section. General maintenance
procedures for external and internal cleaning and static protection precautions are
followed by some specific maintenance procedures for the AM700. Also in this
section is a description of the internal self-diagnostics that the AM700 runs,
information on the board exchange program, the removal and replacement steps
to remove the assemblies from the AM700, and the rack adapter instructions.
Options
The available options for the AM700 are very briefly discussed. Option
information is incorporated in the appropriate location throughout the manual,
but this space is provided to summarize the options and add information for
future options as they are developed.
Replaceable Electrical Parts
The parts list of modules and replaceable electrical parts is supplied in this
section. Attempts to repair a circuit board by a non-Tektronix approved service
person during the warranty period of the instrument will void the warranty, and
credit for a damaged board will not be given for an exchange if the module is
included in the board exchange program.
xxiv
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Preface
Diagrams
Detailed block diagrams and circuit diagrams are found in this section. The block
diagrams are provided to assist in determining board functions and functionality
in the event of a circuit board failure. Schematic circuit diagrams are provided to
assist in locating components and troubleshooting for circuit board repairs.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Part numbers for the replaceable mechanical parts and a mechanical exploded
view of the AM700 are found in this section.
Appendix A
Memory and register mapping tables are provided to assist in signal tracing and
troubleshooting.
Related Manuals
The AM700 Audio Measurement Set User Manual and the AM700 Audio
Measurement Set with Color Display User Manual can be referred to for
additional operating information.
Programming information for the standard GPIB interface is found in the AM700
Programmer Manual and the AM700 Programmer Reference Manual.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
xxv
Preface
xxvi
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
The Tektronix AM700 Audio Measurement System is a programmable highperformance, mixed signal audio analyzer designed for use in product design,
characterization, quality control, manufacturing test, and servicing. It is also a
valuable tool for monitoring and testing of signal distribution systems used in
broadcasting and related applications.
The AM700 Audio Measurement System is an advanced audio test set combining the signal generating capability of a two-channel analog and digital audio
generator with the measurement / analysis capability of a two-channel analog and
digital audio analyzer using digital signal processing. All hardware control,
instrument configuration, data storage and I/O operations may be accomplished
with the front-panel interface. The AM700 can be operated remotely through its
GPIB port. Timed functions may be programmed using remote control.
Key Features of the AM700
H
The AM700 is compact, light weight, and self contained making it suitable
for both bench and portable audio testing applications.
H
The AM700 is the first advanced audio analyzer to employ the proven
touch/turn/zoom interface consisting of hard keys, knobs, and touch screen
soft key controls.
H
The AM700 provides manual, semiautomatic, and fully automatic testing
operation.
H
Graphical and text displays of measurements on early versions of the AM700
are displayed on a 7-inch monochrome raster-scan CRT. Later versions use a
flat-panel LCD color display. A touch screen and soft key menu structure
provides the user interface to the extensive applications of the AM700.
Larger, external color displays of the AM700 screens are supported with a
VGA port and user-supplied VGA monitor.
H
Printed copies of screens of the AM700 may be output to printers connected
to RS-232C or GPIB ports. In addition, you may store the information on a
1.44 Mbyte, 3.5-inch floppy disk, using the internal disk drive, for later use
or analysis.
H
LISTEN mode on all applications (except Digital Interface Tester) allows
monitoring of signals through headphones.
H
The physical size of the AM700 is approximately 7.7 inches high, 18.2 inches wide (with handle), 18.8 inches deep, and it weighs about 31 pounds.
This size allows the instrument to fit laboratory bench space and enhances
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–1
Specifications
portability. The standard accessory front cover provides extra protection to
the face of the AM700 when used as a portable instrument or when stored.
The AM700 may also be rackmounted in a standard 19-inch rack using the
optional rackmounting accessory kit.
Options
The following options are available for use with the AM700:
H
Options A1 through A5 substitute an appropriate power cord for the country
of use (see Table 1–1).
H
Remedial Service Support
Option M2
H
Repair Protection
Option M9
H
AM700 Audio Measurement Set User Manual
H
AM700 Programmer Manual
H
AM700 Programmer Quick Reference Manual
H
Standard power cord (optional power cord substituted when ordered)
H
Protective Front Cover
Standard Accessories
Optional Accessories
Accessories may be used for remote control, signal interfacing, and rackmounting. They are:
H
1–2
GPIB Cable: double shielded in various lengths
H
1 meter
Tektronix part number 012-0991-01
H
2 meter
Tektronix part number 012-0991-00
H
4 meter
Tektronix part number 012-0991-02
H
Tektronix ASW 100F Input Signal Switcher
H
Tektronix ASW 100M Output Signal Switcher
H
Rackmounting kit
Tektronix part number AM7FR1
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
User-supplied Accessories
H
Standard VGA monitor (for viewing the AM700 display in color)
H
Ariel digital microphone (for direct audio input to the DSP input port)
H
XLR interconnection audio cables
H
BNC to XLR adapters
H
RCA Phono to XLR adapters
H
AT compatible keyboard
Power Cord Options
Table 1–1: Power cord identification
Plug configuration
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Normal usage
Option number
North America
125 V/15A Plug
NEMA 5-15P
Standard
Europe
230 V
A1
United Kingdom
230 V
A2
Australia
230 V
A3
Switzerland
230 V
A5
1–3
Specifications
Characteristics
The performance limits in this specification are valid with the following
conditions:
H
This instrument must have been calibrated/adjusted at an ambient temperature between +20° C and +30° C.
H
The instrument must be in an environment with temperature, altitude,
humidity, and vibration within the operating limits described in Table 1–15
on page 1–24.
H
The instrument must have had a warm-up period of at least 20 minutes.
H
The instrument must have had its signal-path-compensation routine last
executed after at least a 20 minute warm-up period at an ambient temperature
within ±5° C of the current ambient temperature.
Any conditions that are unique to a particular characteristic are expressly stated
as part of that characteristic.
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications
Capabilities
Description
Input characteristics
Number of Input Channels
Two channels: A and B
Input Type
Balanced, differential
Input Impedance
100 kW per side in parallel with ≈ 300 pF (with no internal loads)
Internal Load Impedance
600 W, 150 W or 200 kW, software selectable
Vmax Internal Load
Approximately 34.65 V peak or 24.5 VRMS (sinusoidal) at 600 W (+30 dBm)
Overload exerted for inputs peaks greater than +35 V
Maximum Input Voltage
176 V (DC + peak AC)
NOTE: Installation Category I – Signals must be isolated from the mains.
DO NOT CONNECT TO MAINS VOLTAGES.
Full Scale Input Ranges
From –22 dBu (62.5 mVRMS) to +44 dBu (125 VRMS) in 12 6-dB steps
Input gain ranges are in 6 dB steps from –22 dBu to +8 dBu and in 12 dB
attenuator steps (with intermediate 6 dB gain steps) from +8 dBu to
+44 dBu.
Autoranging can be selected to switch the gain appropriately on the level of
the input signal.
Auto Ranging
Input level sensing circuitry exists which allows software control of the input
gain and attenuation, automatically selecting the optimum dynamic range
for the current input level.
Minimum Input for ±1 dB Accuracy
1 mV (–57.8 dBu) (–36 dB on 62.5 mV scale) in “high resolution mode.”
1–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Input characteristics
Maximum Resolution
96 dB below 62.5 mV = 0.9875 mV
Maximum Useable Bandwidth
High Bandwidth Mode
80 kHz
High Resolution Mode
24 kHz
Common-Mode Rejection
At 50 or 60 Hz
≥50 dB
At 1 kHz
≥50 dB. Typically 80 dB on +8 dBu scale, 60 dB on +14 dBu and up,
and typically > 80 dB on less than +8 dBu scale
At 10 kHz
≥45 dB. Typically 80 dB on +8 dBu scale, 45 dB on +14 dBu and up,
and typically > 80 dB on less than +8 dBu scale
At 20 kHz
≥40 dB. Typically 80 dB on +8 dBu scale, 45 dB on +14 dBu and up,
and typically > 80 dB on less than +8 dBu scale
Load R = 200 kW
Load R = 600 W
10 Hz to 1 kHz
≥90 dB
≥140 dB
>1 kHz to 80 kHz
≥80 dB
≥100 dB
Isolation, Generator to Analog Acquisition
Crosstalk +Noise, Channel-to-Channel
This is a wideband measurement of the level difference
between the undriven channel and the driven channel.
Driven channel input is a +8 dBu sine wave. Undriven input terminated in
≤600 W
Both Channel Input Ranges Set to +8 dBu
High Resolution Mode
15 Hz to 20 kHz
≤–88 dB, typically ≤–100 dB (noise-limited).
Typically ≤–100 dB at full scale on the +2, +8, +14, +20, and +26 dBu
ranges from 10 Hz to 20 kHz.
High Bandwidth Mode
70 Hz to 80 kHz
≤–65 dB, typically ≤–70 dB (noise-limited)
Undriven Channel Set to Autorange
(Set driven channel input range to FS value
indicated below.)
High Resolution Mode
15 Hz to 20 kHz
Input (FS)
+8 dBu
+14 dBu
+20 dBu
≤–100 dB, typically ≤–115 dB (noise-limited)
Typically ≤–120 dB
Typically ≤–125 dB
High Bandwidth Mode
70 Hz to 80 kHz
Input (FS)
+8 dBu
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
≤–95 dB, typically ≤–100 dB, 70 Hz to 40 kHz (noise-limited)
1–5
Specifications
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Input characteristics
Channel Separation (High Resolution Mode)
This is a measurement of the level of the driven channel
with respect to the undriven channel with a bandpass
filter centered on the driven channel frequency. The
measurement is primarily noise-limited, therefore,
measured values improve as input amplitude increases.
Channels A and B Equal Gain Settings
(both channel input ranges at +8 dBu)
Typically ≥110 dB, 20 Hz to 5 kHz, from +2 dBu on the +2 dBu input range
through +30 dBu on the +32 dBu input range.
10 Hz to 5 kHz
≥100 dB
>5 kHz to 20 kHz
≥90 dB
Undriven Channel Set to Auto Range
15 Hz to 5 kHz
≥120 dB (noise-limited)
>5 kHz to 20 kHz
≥110 dB
Channel Separation (High Bandwidth Mode)
Channels A and B Equal Input range Settings
(driven input = +8 dBu on +8 dBu input range)
CH A into CH B
70 Hz to 5 kHz
≥85 dB
>5 kHz to 40 kHz
≥75 dB
>40 kHz to 80 kHz
≥65 dB
CH B into CH A
70 Hz to 5 kHz
≥85 dB
>5 kHz to 40 kHz
≥80 dB
>40 kHz to 80 kHz
≥70 dB (typically ≥85 dB)
Undriven Channel Set to Autorange
(driven input = +8 dBu on +8 dBu input range)
CH A into CH B
70 Hz to 5 kHz
≥115 dB
>5 kHz to 40 kHz
≥105 dB
>40 kHz to 80 kHz
≥ 95 dB
CH B into CH A
1–6
70 Hz to 5 kHz
≥112 dB
>5 kHz to 40 kHz
≥110 dB
>40 kHz to 80 kHz
≥108 dB
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Amplitude measurement
Amplitude Accuracy at CAL Frequency
+8 dBu FS
±0.1 dB at 120 Hz
Other gain steps FS
±0.15 dB at 120 Hz
Amplitude Accuracy (relative to Accuracy at CAL
Frequency) (High Resolution Mode)
10 Hz to 20 kHz
Inputs >1 mV (–57.8dBu) to10mV (–37.8dBu)
±1.0 dB
Input >10 mV (–37.8 dBu) to 1.946 V (+8 dBu)
±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB, 50 Hz to 10 kHz
Input >1.946 V (+8 dBu) to <64 V (+36 dBu) for
input frequency below 20 kHz and to <16 V
(+26 dBu) for input frequencies from 20 to
80 kHz
±0.15 dB, typically ±0.05 dB, 50 Hz to10 kHz
Amplitude Accuracy (relative to Accuracy at CAL
Frequency) (High Bandwidth Mode)
10 Hz to 20 kHz
20 to 70 kHz
70 to 80 kHz
Inputs >1 mV (–57.8dBu) to10mV (–37.8dBu)
±1.0 dB
±1.0 dB
±2.0 dB
Input >10 mV (–37.8 dBu) to 1.946 V (+8 dBu)
±0.15 dB
(Typically ±0.05 dB from
50 Hz to10 kHz)
±0.2 dB
±1.0 dB
Input >1.946 V (+8 dBu) to < 64 V (+36 dBu) for
input frequency below 20 kHz and to <16 V (+26
dBu) for input frequencies from 20 to 80 kHz
±0.20 dB
(Typically ±0.05 dB from
50 Hz to10 kHz)
±0.25 dB
±1.0 dB
Interchannel Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz
High Resolution Mode
At +8 dBu FS
±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB
At other gain steps FS
±0.15 dB
High Bandwidth Mode
At +8 dBu FS
±0.2 dB, typically ±0.05 dB
At other gain steps FS ≥62.5 mV (–22 dBu)
±0.25 dB
Interchannel Amplitude Flatness Relative to Interchannel
Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz
High Resolution Mode (10 Hz to 20 kHz)
At +8 dBu FS
±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB
At other gain steps FS
±0.15 dB, typically ±0.05 dB
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–7
Specifications
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Amplitude measurement
High Bandwidth Mode
10 Hz to 20 kHz
20 to 70 kHz
70 to 80 kHz
At +8 dBu FS
±0.2 dB
(Typically ±0.05 dB from
50 Hz to 10 kHz
±0.35 dB
±1.0 dB
At other gain steps FS ≥62.5 mV (–22 dBu)
±0.25 dB
±0.35 dB
±1.0 dB
The accuracy of the measurement may be noise-limited for
amplitudes below 62.5 mV (–22 dBu).
Interchannel Phase Difference
High Resolution Mode
±1 degree from 100 Hz to 20 kHz
ADC Sampling Rate
High Resolution Mode
6.144 MHz, decimated to 48 kHz (two channels, 64 times oversampling on
each channel)
High Bandwidth Mode
192 kHz
THD + N measurement
High Bandwidth Mode Residual THD + N
THD + N measured using the high bandwidth ADC over
an 80 kHz BW. The measurement is noise-limited for
amplitudes below 125 mV (–16 dBu).
Input > 125 mV (–16 dBu);
frequency ≤20 kHz to ≥72 Hz.
Typically ≤0.03%, maximum 0.05%.
High Resolution Mode Residual THD + N
Measurement bandwidth = 20 kHz
Input Amplitude > 62.5 mV (≈–21.9 dBu)
≤0.015%, noise-limited for amplitudes <250 mV (≈–10 dBu)
Input Amplitude Between 250 mV (≈–10 dBu) and
16 V (≈+26 dBu) and frequencies between 20 Hz
and 6.6 kHz
On +2, +8, +14, +20, and +26 dBu
Input Ranges
1–8
At Full Scale
At Full Scale –6 dB
400 Hz to 6.6 kHz
≤0.003%,
typ. ≤0.0015%
≤0.003%,
typ. ≤0.002%
100 Hz to <400 Hz
≤0.005%,
typ. ≤0.0025%
≤0.003%
typ. ≤0.0025%
20 Hz to <100 Hz
≤0.011%
≤0.005%,
typ.≤0.003% at 20 Hz
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–2: Analog analyzer specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
THD + N measurement
On –4 dBu Input Range
At Full Scale
At Full Scale –6 dB
400 Hz to 6.6 kHz
≤0.003%
≤0.006%
100 Hz to <400 Hz
≤0.0075%
≤0.006%
20 Hz to <100 Hz
≤0.0125%
≤0.0075%
400 Hz to 6.6 kHz
≤0.005%
≤0.010%
100 Hz to <400 Hz
≤0.0075%
≤0.010%
20 Hz to <100 Hz
≤0.015%
≤0.011%
On –10 dBu Input Range
THD + N is limited by the A/D distortion (primarily 3rd harmonic) near
full-scale at frequencies below 200 Hz. At –6 dB relative to FS, the
increase in distortion at low frequencies is much less, typically 0.003%
versus 0.0075% (FS) at 20 Hz. Under some conditions (measurements
below 200 Hz), it may be desirable to manually set the input range one
setting higher, sacrificing 6 dB of noise floor for better distortion readings.
The auto-range circuitry optimizes dynamic range, somewhat compromising distortion near full-scale.
Table 1–3: Electronic trigger specification
Capabilities
Description
Trigger input
Number of Trigger Inputs
One input located on the rear panel.
Electrical Characteristics
TTL-level, Schmitt-trigger input.
Connector Type
BNC female
Psuedo triggers
Trigger Events
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Two trigger events may be generated by remote control using the
commands in the SCPI TRIGger subsystem: STARt starts the sweep
running and STOP ends the sweep.
1–9
Specifications
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications
Capabilities
Description
Output characteristics
Number of Output Channels
Two, labeled A and B
Signal Format
Switchable between balanced and unbalanced.
Source Impedance
Selectable between: 600 W, 150 W, and 10 W.
Minimum
Typical
Maximum
600 W
594
600
608
150 W
148.5
150
155
10 W (nominal)
9.5
11.8
13.5
A user-defined impedance may be used in place of either the 600 W or the
150 W source impedance. (Internal modification is required.)
Output Control Enable
Switchable on-off, with terminating resistance remaining as selected.
Output Float Enable
Switchable floating/grounded output.
Floating Mode
R to Ground
≈1 kW
Capacitance to Ground
≈1 nF (@ 1 kHz)
Maximum Float Voltage
±25 V peak
Channel Separation
High Resolution Mode
≥100 dB for frequencies ≥20 Hz
High Bandwidth Mode
≥70 dB for frequencies ≥70 Hz
Signals and control
All signals are generated digitally using software running on a DSP56002 digital-signal processor, driving audio digital-to-analog
converters.
Types of Signals Supported by Hardware
Signals that are band limited to 80 kHz.
Independence of Generated Signal Outputs
The hardware allows either stereo or mono mode generation. In stereo
mode, each channel is generated from a separate DAC, while for mono
mode, a signal DAC is used, followed by separate output drivers for each
channel (A and B).
The AM700 does not support stereo mode with the high bandwidth
generator.
Frequency related characteristics
Sine Wave Frequency Range
High Resolution Mode
10 Hz to 20 kHz
High Bandwidth Mode
11.719 Hz to 79992.188 kHz
Sine Wave Frequency Resolution
1–10
High Resolution Mode
0.1 Hz
High Bandwidth Mode
11.719 Hz
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Frequency related characteristics
Sine Wave Frequency Accuracy
±0.01%
Interchannel Phase Difference
These specifications apply only if generator channels are set to Follow A.
When channels are not in follow, their relative phases are arbitrary.
High Resolution Mode
±1 degree at 1 kHz
Typically ±1 degree, 100 Hz to 20 kHz
High Bandwidth Mode
Typically ±1 degree at 1 kHz; ±2 degrees at 20 kHz
Amplitude related characteristics
Full Scale Output Amplitude Ranges
(Balanced outputs with source R = 10 W nominal)
Measured into a high impedance load. Amplitudes will be
approximately 0.14 dB lower if measured across a 600 W
load when the source R = 10 W nominal.
Every 6 dB from –22.1 dBu (60.8 mVRMS) to +13.9 dBu (3.84 VRMS) plus
+20 dBu (7.75 VRMS), +26.0 dBu (15.45 VRMS), and +30 dBu (24.5 VRMS)
for frequencies up to 20 kHz. Maximum output is limited to +28 dBu from
20 kHz to 80 kHz.
For 600 W source impedance, all amplitudes are 6 dB lower if measured
across a 600 W load.
Maximum Generator Output Amplitude into a
600 W Load
10 Hz to 20 kHz
Source Impedance = 10 W
+28 dBu
Source Impedance = 600 W
+24 dBu
Minimum Output Amplitude for ±1 dB Accuracy
1 mV
Maximum Resolution
High Resolution Mode
10 Hz to 20 kHz
1 mV
High Bandwidth Mode
11.7 Hz to 80 kHz
3 mV
Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz, High Resolution
Generator
Normal Mode
At +13.9 dBu
±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB
–16.1 dBu to +30 dBu
±0.1 dB
–34.1 dBu to <–16.1 dBu
±0.15 dB, typically ±0.1 dB
–52.1 dBu to <–34.1 dBu
±0.25 dB
Low Distortion Mode
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
+0.2 dB to –0.0 dB relative to Normal Mode
1–11
Specifications
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Amplitude related characteristics
Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz, High Bandwidth
Generator
At +13.9 dBu
±0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB
–16.1 dBu to +30 dBu
0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB
–34.1 dBu to <–16.1 dBu
0.15 dB, typically 0.1 dB
–52.1 dBu to <–34.1 dBu
±0.25 dB
Amplitude Flatness, High Resolution Generator
Relative to 120 Hz
Levels from –22.1 dBu to +30 dBu
Normal Mode
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±0.1 dB
>10 kHz to 20 kHz
+0.1 / –0.2 dB
Low Distortion Mode
10 Hz to 1 kHz
+0.1 / –0.25 dB
>1 kHz to 10 kHz
+0.1 / –0.6 dB
Amplitude Flatness, High Bandwidth Generator
Relative to 120 Hz
Level from –22.1 dBu to +30 dBu
11.7 Hz to 20 kHz
± 0.1 dB
>20 kHz to <70 kHz
+0.1 / –0.5 dB
70 kHz
>70 kHz to <80 kHz
80 kHz
Typically ≤–0.3 dB
+0.5 / –1.0 dB
Typically ≤–0.5 dB
Interchannel Amplitude Accuracy at 120 Hz
High Resolution Mode
At +13.9 dBu
±0.2 dB; with respect to amplitude accuracy at 120 Hz and 13.9 dBu,
typically ±0.05 dB
–22.1 dBu to +30 dBu
±0.3 dB
High Bandwidth Mode
At +13.9 dBu
±0.2 dB with respect to amplitude accuracy at 120 Hz and 13.9 dBu
–22.1 dBu to +30 dBu
±0.3 dB
Interchannel Amplitude Flatness Relative to 120 Hz
Levels from –22.1 dBu to +30 dBu
High Resolution Generator
Normal Mode
1–12
10 Hz to 10 kHz
±0.2 dB
>10 kHz to 20 kHz
±0.4 dB
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Amplitude related characteristics
Low Distortion Mode
10 Hz to 1 kHz
±0.5 dB
>1 kHz to 10 kHz
±1.0 dB
High Bandwidth Generator
11.7 Hz to 20 kHz
±0.2 dB
>20 kHz to 70 kHz
±1.0 dB
>70 kHz to 80 kHz
±1.0 dB
THD + N
High Resolution Generator Residual THD + N
(Normal Mode)
Measurements over 80 kHz BW are noise limited below –4 dBu.
Measurements over 22 kHz BW are noise limited below –10 dBu.
Residual THD+N of the high resolution generator without
the bandpass filter in place. These specifications are
baseline for nonsine-wave signals and for sine-wave
signals not generated in the low-distortion mode.
Load R ≥ 600 W.
10 Hz to 5 kHz
Amplitude ≥–10 dBu
Over 22 kHz BW
≤0.01% (–80 dB)
typ. ≤0.008% (–82 dB)
≤0.0175% (–75 dB)
typ. ≤ 0.011% (–79 dB)
10 Hz to 20 kHz
Amplitude ≥+8 dBu
Amplitude ≥–4 dBu
Residual THD + N (Low Distortion Mode)
Over 80 kHz BW
≤0.025% (–72 dB)
Amplitudes less than –16 dBu are noise limited (22 kHz BW).
Residual THD+N with the bandpass filter in place. These
specifications are baseline for sine waves generated in
the low-distortion mode.
Load resistance ≥ 600 W
100 Hz to 749 Hz
Amplitudes ≥+4 dBu to ≤+26 dBu
Over 22 kHz BW
Typ. ≤0.001%
(–100 dB)
20 Hz to 749 Hz
Amplitudes ≥+8 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB)
Amplitudes ≥0 dBu
≤0.0025% (–92 dB),
typ. ≤ 0.0015% (–96.5 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–4 dBu
≤0.0025% (–92 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–10 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–16 dBu
≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Over 80 kHz BW
≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB)
1–13
Specifications
Table 1–4: Analog generator specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
THD + N
750 Hz to 7.3 kHz
Amplitudes ≥+8 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB)
Amplitudes ≥0 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB),
typ. ≤ 0.003% (–90.5 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–4 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–10 dBu
≤0.005% (–86 dB)
Amplitudes ≥–16 dBu
≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB)
≤0.0075% (–82.5 dB)
High Bandwidth Generator Residual THD+N
Residual THD+N of the high bandwidth generator.
Load resistance ≥ 600 W outputs ≥–4.0 dBu
Over 22 kHz BW
Over 80 kHz BW
11.7 Hz to 5 kHz
≤0.015% (–76.5 dB)
typ. ≤0.01% (–80 dB)
≤0.018% (–75 dB)
>5 kHz to 20 kHz
Not applicable
≤0.025% (–72 dB)
>20 kHz to 40 kHz
Not applicable
≤0.03% (–70.5 dB)
>40 kHz
Not applicable
Not applicable
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications
Capabilities
Description
The Digital Audio Unit includes a generator, a reference generator, a main receiver, and a reference receiver. These four sections can
operate simultaneously, each at its own sample rate.
Interface Characteristics
The generator always drives the Digital Out XLR, Unbalanced Out BNC,
and Optical Out connectors. The main receiver selects one of: Digital XLR,
Unbalanced In BNC, Optical In, or AES generator as its source.
The reference receiver normally selects the Digital Ref In XLR as its
source, except when the AES generator is selected as the main input, the
reference receiver input switches to the reference generator.
Connector Types
Front Panel
Digital In, Digital Out
Balanced XLR, conforms to AES3-1992 and EBU 3250-E
Rear Panel
1–14
Unbalanced In, Unbalanced Out
BNC
Optical In, Optical Out
F05 snap-in type, 10 meter capability using APF (980/1000 mm
[micrometer]) optical fiber
Digital Reference In, Digital Reference Out
Balanced XLR, conforms to AES3-1992 and EBU 3250-E
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
DSP
Description
15-pin D, TTL/CMOS compatible. Pinout is compatible with Ariel Digital
Microphone.
Input and Output Impedances
Digital In, Digital Out, Digital Reference In,
Digital Reference Out
110 W ±10%, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
Unbalanced In, Unbalanced Out
75 W ±5%, 0.1 MHz to 6 MHz
Input and output levels
AES/EBU I/O Levels
Input levels required for normal operation and the output
levels available. For details on measured or programmable parameters, see either Main Receiver Interface
Parameter Measurements or Generator Variable
Parameters.
Digital In
0.15 V to 10 V peak-to-peak
Unbalanced In
30 mV to 2 V peak-to-peak
Digital Reference In
0.2 V peak-to-peak minimum eye opening. 10 V peak-to-peak maximum
amplitude, 20% minimum eye height
Digital Out
Programmable from 0.2 V to 8 V peak-to-peak into 110 W
Unbalanced Out
Programmable from 50 mV to 2 V peak-to-peak into 75 W
Digital Reference Out
Fixed at 5.4 ±0.5 V peak-to-peak into 110 W
DSP I/O Levels
DSP Inputs
Vil = 0.8 V, Vih = 2 V, Iil = 4 mA, Iih = 0 (CMOS with 1.2 kW pull-up)
DSP Outputs
Iol = 4 mA, Ioh = –5.3 mA, Vol = 0.6 V, Voh = 2.4 V
Optical I/O Levels
Conforms to TOSLINK parameters
Receiver interface parameter measurements
Main Input Level
This is the level in Volts peak-to-peak being applied to
the selected digital input (the front-panel Digital In or
rear-panel Unbalanced In).
Measurement Range
XLR: 0.15 V to 8.0 V peak-to-peak
BNC: 30 mV to 2.0 V peak-to-peak
Accuracy with Factory Calibration Factors
XLR: ±(30 mV + 15% of reading)
BNC: ±(15 mV + 15% of reading)
Clock Rate
Range
All inputs: 30 kHz to 52 kHz.
Accuracy
±10 ppm
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–15
Specifications
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Receiver interface parameter measurements
Input Equalization
The Main Input includes automatic line equalization to
measure and correct roll-off due to typical 110 W digital
audio cable.
Range
0 to 20 dB loss at 10 MHz
Accuracy
±2 dB
Static Phase Difference
This is the phase difference between the selected main
input and the reference input. The primary function of the
measurement is to check compliance with AES11-1991
section 5.3.
Range
+49.6% to –50.0% of the digital audio frame
Accuracy
±1% of the digital audio frame
Eye Diagram
This is the data source for the eye diagram display and
its accompanying peak-to-peak jitter measurement. It is
the equivalent-time sample points of the selected main
input.
Time-base PLL Bandwidth
120 Hz or 1.2 kHz, user selectable
Bandwidth Accuracy
±10%
Amplitude Accuracy
±10% with calibration, ±20% with factory calibration factors
Eye Diagram Peak-to-Peak Jitter
Range
0 to 0.8 UI peak-to-peak jitter
Accuracy
LF Reject = 120 Hz. (Response falls 6 dB per
octave below about 100 Hz.)
±(0.02 UI + 5%) for sinusoidal jitter above 500 Hz
LF Reject = 1200 Hz. (Response falls 6 dB per
octave below about 1000 Hz.)
±(0.02 UI + 5%) for sinusoidal jitter above 30 kHz
Eye Diagram Residual Jitter
1–16
0.03 UI (combined residual jitter of reference generator and main receiver,
with 120 Hz time-base bandwidth)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Receiver interface parameter measurements
Phase Jitter
This is the jitter amplitude in unit intervals (UI) as a
function of jitter frequency.
Range
10 UI p-p from 20 Hz to 500 Hz, decreasing proportionally to 0.5 UI p-p
from 10 kHz to 50 kHz.
Accuracy
For sinusoidal jitter greater than –20 dBUI
(0.1 UI p-p) at jitter gain = 1, or greater than
–40 dBUI (0.01 UI p-p) at jitter gain = 8.
Jitter Gain = X1 or X8
50 Hz to 500 Hz
±2 dB
500 Hz to 10 kHz
±1 dB
Jitter Gain = X8
10 kHz to 50 kHz
±2 dB
Spurious Response
Jitter Gain = X1
50 Hz to 100 Hz
–20 dBUI
100 Hz to 50 kHz
–30 dBUI
Jitter Gain = X8
50 Hz to 100 Hz
–30 dBUI
100 Hz to 50 kHz
–40 dBUI
Reference input parameter measurements
Clock Rate
Range
30 kHz to 52 kHz
Accuracy
±10 ppm
Generator variable parameters
Clock Rate Range
All Inputs and Outputs
27.2 kHz to 55.2 kHz (32 kHz –15% to 48 kHz +15%)
Clock Rate Accuracy
The primary clock rates (32, 44.1, and 48 kHz) are
synthesized exactly, so accuracy depends solely on the
accuracy of the reference used (internal or external).
Internal Ref Accuracy
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
±10 ppm
1–17
Specifications
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Generator variable parameters
Static Phase Difference
This is the phase difference between the generator
output and the selected reference (input or output). The
primary function of the measurement is to check
compliance with AES11-1991 section 5.3.
Range
–64 to 63.5 UI (Unit Intervals)
Resolution
0.5 UI
Accuracy
Offset <50 ns, nonlinearity <5 ns
Phase Jitter Generation
Range
0 to 10 UI p-p from DC to 500 Hz, decreasing proportionally to 0.5 UI p-p
from 10 kHz to 50 kHz.
Resolution
0.02 UI p-p
Accuracy
DC to 20 kHz
±(10% of value + 0.02 UI)
20 kHz to 50 kHz
±(20% of value + 0.02 UI)
Cable Simulator
Simulated Cable Response
A selectable cable simulator inserts the response of a long, typical digital
audio cable in the front-panel Digital Out signal.
125 ns to 175 ns rise time measured at the second transition of the
preamble of subframe 1.
Output Level
Range
XLR: 0 to 8.0 V p-p into 110 W
BNC: 0 to 2.04 V p-p into 75 W
Resolution
XLR: 10 mV
BNC: 2 mV
Accuracy
XLR: ±(10 mV + 5% of setting)
BNC: ±(2 mV + 2% of setting)
Main Output Residual Jitter
Clock Source From Audio
Frequency Offset = 0
0.05 UI p-p maximum
Frequency Offset < > 0 or Clock Source is
Variable
0.08 UI p-p maximum
Clock Source From Ref
(0.08 UI p-p + reference jitter) maximum
Reference signal jitter up to 15 kHz adds directly to output jitter. Reference
input jitter above 15 kHz is attenuated by 6 dB per octave.
1–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–5: Digital audio unit specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Reference output variable parameters
Clock Rate Range
The reference output can be driven from the same clock that drives the
main output, in which case the specifications of the main clock apply.
Alternately, the reference output can be timed from the internal 48 kHz
clock, or from the clock applied to the Digital Reference In connector.
Clock Rate Accuracy
Same as Internal clock rate accuracy.
Reference Output Residual Jitter
Clock Source From Audio
Frequency Offset = 0
0.03 UI p-p maximum
Frequency Offset < > 0 or Clock Source is
Variable
0.08 UI p-p maximum
Clock Source From Reference
(external reference is required)
(0.08 UI p-p + reference jitter) maximum
Table 1–6: Display system specifications
Capabilities
Description
CRT display
Display Type
Monochrome CRT; magnetic deflection; raster scan
Display Size
7 inches diagonal
Phosphor
P4 White
LCD flat panel display
Display Type
Color LCD flat panel; backlighted
Display Size
6.4 inches (162.6 mm) diagonal
Display Resolution
640 (H) × 480 (V) pixels (VGA)
Touch panel
Description
Analog resistive touch screen
Size
Width
6.615 inches (168 mm)
Height
5.33 inches (134.5 mm)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–19
Specifications
Table 1–6: Display system specifications (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
VGA output
Resolution
640 × 480 VGA
Signal Levels
Level
Voltage
White Level
Black Level
Blanking
Horizontal Sync
Vertical Sync
0.7 V
0V
0V
TTL, low true
TTL, low true
Signal
Load Impedance
Red
Green
Blue
Horizontal Sync
Vertical Sync
75 ohms
75 ohms
75 ohms
TTL compatible
TTL compatible
Signal
Time/Frequency
Dot Clock
Horizontal Rate
Vertical Rate
25.175 MHz
31.469 kHz
59.940 Hz
Pin Number
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Red
Green
Blue
NC
Ground
Red Ground
Green Ground
Blue Ground
NC
Ground
NC
NC
Horizontal Sync
Vertical Sync
NC
Load Impedance
Timing
Pin Out
1–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–7: Nonvolatile memory
Capabilities
Description
Battery-backed SRAM
Storage Capacity
1 Mbyte
Retention Time (The length of time that stored
waveforms and setups are retained without power to the
instrument)
Internal batteries, installed at the time of manufacture, have a life of greater
than 10 years when operated and stored at an ambient temperature from
0_ C to 50_ C. Retention time of the nonvolatile memories is equal to the
remaining life of the batteries.
Battery life can be reduced when stored for extended time above 50_C.
Retained data may be lost when stored for extended time below 0_ C.
Backup Battery
Rated Voltage
Lithium inorganic
3.0 V
Flash EPROM
Storage Capacity
8 Mbyte
Retention Time (The length of time that data stored in
flash memory will remain useable)
10 years (minimum)
Maximum Rewrites
100,000
Table 1–8: Software update procedure
Capabilities
Description
Update Procedure
AM700 firmware may be updated from a 1.44 Mbyte diskette.
Table 1–9: Floppy disk drive
Capabilities
Description
Mechanical
Size of Floppy Disk
3.5 inches, 1.44 Mbytes, DSHD
Mounting Location and Orientation of Disk Drive
Left side of CRT, vertically oriented
Disk drive must not be operated when it is upside down (with the left side
of the AM700 down).
Ejection Tab Orientation
Toward the bottom of the cabinet
Logical
User File Format
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
MS-DOS
1–21
Specifications
Table 1–10: Front panel hardware
Capabilities
Description
Analog Audio
Standard XLR female. Pin 1 shield, pin 2 is +, pin 3 is –
Digital Audio
Input: XLR female, Output: XLR male
Headphone Jack
Standard 1/4 inch, stereo; channel A is left, channel B is right
Headphone Nominal Impedance
8 to 2000 W
Output Power to Headphones
20 mW minimum into 8 to 2000 W headphones at full volume
Table 1–11: Rear panel hardware
Capabilities
Description
Remote Connector
Female DB9
Normally Open Contact, Pin 3 to Pin 9
Maximum Voltage
28 VDC
Maximum Current
500 mA
Maximum Power
14 W
Relay Closure Input Pin 1
Pulled to +5 V ≤100 mA; input is protected
Ground Pins
2, 4, 6, and 8
Normally Closed Contact, Pin 5 to Pin 9
Maximum Voltage
28 VDC
Maximum Current
500 mA
Maximum Power
14 W
+5 V Output, Pin 7
+ 5 V @ 5 mA
Use ground pins 2, 4, or 6 to pull the relay-closure input low through an
external contact-closure relay.
The +5 V output is provided to drive the relay-closure input pin through an
external contact-closure relay.
GPIB Connector
Meets electrical specifications described in IEEE–488
COM1 and COM2 Connectors
DB9 male, configured as RS–232C, DTE; provides connection for serial
printers
VGA Connector
DB15 female; supports external VGA monitor
Keyboard Connector
Supports AT-type keyboard
1–22
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–12: Power distribution system
Capabilities
Description
AC power source
Source Voltage
Low Range (115 V nominal)
90 to 132 VACRMS
High Range (230 V nominal)
180 to 253 VACRMS
Source Frequency
50 or 60 Hz
Fuse Rating
Low Range
4 A, 3AG, slow-blow
High Range
2 A, 3AG, slow-blow
Power Consumption
Maximum
185 watts (240 VA)
Typical
180 watts
Table 1–13: Safety standards
Capabilities
Description
U.S. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listing
ANSI/ISA S82.01 – Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,
Measuring, Controlling, and Related Equipment, 1994
Canadian Certification
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1 – Safety Requirements for Electrical
Equipment for Measurement, Control and Laboratory Use
European Union Compliance
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, Amended by 93/768/EEC.
EN601010-1 – Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for
Measurement, Control. and Laboratory Use
Additional Compliance
UL3111-1 – Standard for Electrical Measuring and Test Equipment
IEC1010-1 – Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use
Table 1–14: Safety standards compliance
Capabilities
Description
Temperature (operating)
+5_ C to +40_ C
Altitude (maximum operating)
2000 Meters
Equipment Type
Test and Measuring
Safety Class
Class I (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex H) – grounded product
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–23
Specifications
Table 1–14: Safety standards compliance (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Overvoltage Category
Mains – Overvoltage Category II (as defined in IEC 1010-1, Annex J)
Analog Input – Overvoltage Category I
Pollution Degree
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 1010-1)
Note – Rated for indoor use only
Table 1–15: Environmental characteristics
Capabilities
Description
Atmospherics
Temperature
Operating
–10_ C to +50_ C, Class 5
Nonoperating (storage)
–51_ C to +71_ C. Class 3
Humidity
To 95% relative humidity at or below +55_ C
Altitude
Operating
To 15,000 feet (4572 meters)
Maximum operating temperature to be decreased 1d C per 1000 feet
(305 meters) above 5000 feet (1524 meters).
Nonoperating (storage)
To 50,000 feet (15240 meters)
Table 1–16: Dynamic characteristics
Capabilities
Description
Vibration
Random Vibration
Class 3 levels
Sinusoidal Vibration
MIL-T-28800E, para. 4.5.5.3.1, Sinusoidal Vibration test, 5 Hz to 55 Hz.
Shock
Functional Shock
30 g, 11 ms, half-sine input
Transit Drop
Nonoperating Transit Drop with 8-inch drops, front cover installed.
Bench Handling
MIL-T-28800E, para. 4.5.5.4.3, Bench Handling test, with cabinet on and
instrument operating. Each edge lifted four inches and allowed to free fall
onto a solid wooden surface.
Packaged Product Drop
Drop of 18 inches on each edge, face, and corner of packaged product;
additional drop of 36 inches on bottom face.
Warehouse Stacking
Up to five units high
1–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–16: Dynamic characteristics (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Shock
Loose Load Vibration
1 inch p-p sinusoidal at approximately 4.5 Hz with at least 1/16 inch peak
separation between the packaged product and the surface. Thirty minutes
in normal shipping orientation, 30 minutes split between other possible
shipping orientations.
Vehicle Vibration
1.33 gRMS, random vibration, from 5 to 500 Hz, 60 minutes on each axis.
Storage Shelf-Life (uncontrolled warehouse climate)
Six months or more if desiccant is included inside normal package, and
normal package is placed inside a vacuum sealed bag with additional outer
package.
Table 1–17: Electromagnetic compatibility
Capabilities
Description
EMC requirements
Emissions
Emissions shall be within the limits specified by the following requirements.
Enclosure
EN55022 Class B limits for radiated emissions
AC Mains
EN55022 Class B limits for conducted emissions
To ensure compliance with the above requirements, only high-quality
shielded interface cable should be attached to this instrument. High-quality
cables have a reliable, continuous outer shield (braid and foil) that has low
impedance connections to shielded connector housings at both ends. The
shield of the cable used to connect to the DSP must be clamped by the
housing where the cable enters the connector.
The cables used for the front panel Digital Out and the rear panel AES
REF OUT must be wired with the cable shield connected to both pin 1 and
to the shell of the female XLR connector (sometimes labeled “G” within the
connector). Both of these connections should be as short as possible, less
than 0.25 inch (0.1 cm).
Immunity, Enclosure, Electrostatic Discharge
IEC 801-2 1984
Up to 8 kV with no loss of stored data, change to control settings,
degradation of performance, or temporary loss of function.
Immunity, Enclosure, Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Field
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
IEC 801-3 1984
No degradation of performance when the instrument is subjected to a 3
V/M electromagnetic field over the frequency range of 27 MHz to 500 MHz.
1–25
Specifications
Table 1–17: Electromagnetic compatibility (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
EMC requirements
Immunity, Fast Transients, Common Mode
IEC 801-4 1988
No loss of stored data, change to control settings, degradation of
performance, or temporary loss of function will occur when the instrument
is subjected to transients as described below.
FCC
Port
Peak (kV)
Tr/Th (ns)
Rep Frequency (kHz)
Signal & Control
0.5
5/50
5
DC Power
0.5
5/50
5
AC Power
1.0
5/50
5
The instrument complies with the radiated and conducted emissions
requirements of FCC 47 CFR, Part 15, Subpart B, for Class A equipment.
To ensure compliance with the above requirements, only high-quality
shielded interface cable should be attached to this instrument. High quality
cable is described in the Emissions Specification.
Table 1–18: Mechanical characteristics
Capabilities
Description
Standard instrument
Weight (nominal)
CRT Display Instrument
Instrument by Itself
32.25 lbs (14.66 kg)
With Front Cover and Accessories
34 lbs (15.45 kg)
Domestic Shipping Weight (with shipping box,
including instrument, manuals, foam, and snap-on
cover. Optional service manual not included.)
45 lbs (20.454 kg)
LCD Flat Panel Display Instrument
Instrument by Itself
30.62 lbs (13.92 kg)
With Front Cover and Accessories
32.38 lbs (14.72 kg)
Domestic Shipping Weight (with shipping box,
including instrument, manuals, foam, and snap-on
cover. Optional service manual not included.)
43.37 lbs (19.71 kg)
Shipping Box
1–26
Length
28 in (711.2 mm)
Width
23 in (584.2 mm)
Height
19.5 in (495.3 mm)
Volume
7.3 cubic feet (0.207m3)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–18: Mechanical characteristics (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Standard instrument
Overall Dimensions
Height (with feet installed)
Without Optional Front Cover
7.7 in (195.6 mm)
With the Optional Front Cover
8.0 in (203.2 mm)
Width
Without the Handle
16.6 in (422 mm)
With Handle
18.2 in (462.3 mm)
Depth
Instrument Alone
18.8 in (477.5 mm)
With Optional Front Cover
19.0 in (482.6 mm)
With Handle Fully Extended
23 in (584 mm)
Cooling Method
Forced-air circulation with no air filter
Finish Type
Gray paint finish on aluminum cabinet
Construction Material
Chassis parts constructed of aluminum alloy; front panel constructed of
plastic laminate; circuit boards constructed of glass-laminate; plastic parts
are polycarbonate
Rackmounted instrument
Weight of Rackmounted Instrument, and the Rackmount
Conversion Kit
The handle of the AM700 must be removed to mount it in the rackmount
adapter.
Kit Weight
3.5 lbs (1.6 kg)
Domestic Shipping Weight
6 lbs (2.73 kg)
Weight of Rackmounted Instrument
30 lbs (13.64 kg) plus the weight of rackmount parts for the rackmounted
instrument
Domestic Shipping Weight
45 lbs (20.5 kg) plus the weight of rackmount parts
Overall Dimensions of the Cradle Rackmount Adapter
Height
8.75 in (222.3 mm)
Width
19 in (482.6 mm)
Depth
20 in (508 mm)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–27
Specifications
Table 1–19: Remote control protocol
Capabilities
Description
Remote Control Protocol
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) 1994
External Keyboard
Keyboard Operation
The external keyboard is used to enter text and numbers into those
portions of the user interface that accept such input. The front-panel
keypad may also be used for numeric entry. In the absence of an external
keyboard, a keyboard that is operated using the touch-screen interface
appears on the AM700 display when character input is permitted.
Table 1–20: Generator control
Capabilities
Description
Generator Capabilities
The analog and digital generators calculate signals in real time. The analog
signals are derived digitally, providing a great deal of flexibility, but the
output signals are restricted to those that can be realized with digital-toanalog converters and standardized sampling rates.
Sine wave test signals may be swept in amplitude and frequency. The test
signals may also be driven from a sequence within the capability of SCPI
lists. More complicated modes may be created using the AM700 function
capability as required by the user.
There are some differences in the signal set and specifications between
analog and digital generators, and the analog generator capabilities differ
between high bandwidth and high resolution.
Analog Signal Generation
Several predefined signals or arbitrary user-defined signals.
Mono and Stereo Signals
Monophonic and stereophonic test signals.
Each channel of a stereo pair is treated as a separate entity in SCPI and
the AM700. This permits a great deal of flexibility in providing test signals
to the outputs of the AM700. It is possible, for example, to have completely
separate signals and sweeps at the A and B outputs.
The same signal may be applied to both channel outputs. This mode is
often needed for testing with the AM700. From a remote controller the
SOURce:FOLLow command causes one channel to track the other.
The high bandwidth generator outputs only monophonic signals (the same
signal on both the A output and the B output).
User-Defined Signals
User-defined signals may be generated.
User-defined signals may be loaded to the AM700 from a file in the internal
file system or from a DOS formatted 1.44 Mbyte diskette.
1–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–20: Generator control (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Time-Dependent Signals
Simple user-defined audio sweeps and tone sequences are permitted.
The sweep feature permits sweeping frequency and amplitude separately,
or both simultaneously if necessary. The sweep test signal is a set of
discrete test frequencies, not a linear sweep of frequencies from start to
stop.
Digital Signal Generation
Digital signal generation is similar to analog signal generation. This
includes the ability to generate the same signal simultaneously on the
analog and digital outputs.
In order to operate analog and digital generators from the same controlling
parameters, it is necessary for the user to supply a conversion factor
between generator voltage and full-scale digital amplitude. This conversion
factor may be entered from the user interface under System Setup
Conversion Factors.
Generator Signals
Table 1–21 describes each signal that may be generated in the AM700.
Some signals cannot be generated by every generator. Please refer to the
following table for each generator signal output capability.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Signal
Analog high resolution
generator
Analog high bandwidth
generator
Digital AES
Digital DSP
sine
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
tone burst
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
smpte imd
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
ccif imd
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
shaped noise
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
chirp
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
polarity
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
tek polarity
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
user
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
multitone
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
jittered sine
No
No
Yes
No
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–29
Specifications
Table 1–21: Generator signals
Capabilities
Description
Generated signals
Sine
A single sine-wave tone with variable amplitude and frequency. The
amplitude or frequency or both may be swept or stepped to provide a wide
range of sinusoidal test signals.
Tone Burst
A sine-wave burst tone with variable amplitude, frequency, burst width, and
burst period
Width
10 to 100000 cycles, resolution 1
Period
64 to 100064 cycles, resolution 1
The generator converts the width time parameter into the nearest number
of cycles of sine wave to generate.
SMPTE/DIN type IMD
A two-tone intermodulation signal with one tone variable in frequency
Amplitude Ratio
0.01 to 8
Variable Frequency
3 kHz to 18 kHz, resolution 0.1
Fixed Frequency
40 Hz and 500 Hz
With appropriate parameter choices this signal can be used in a SMPTE or
DIN intermodulation distortion test.
CCIF type IMD
A two-tone intermodulation signal. Both tones are typically swept in tandem
with a constant frequency separation.
Amplitude Ratio
0.01, 100
Center Frequency
2.5 kHz, 19 kHz
Frequency Spacing
80 Hz, 1000 Hz
With appropriate parameter choices this signal can be used in a CCIF
intermodulation distortion test.
Shaped Noise
A periodic pseudo-random noise signal with a specified spectral distribution
The available colors of the noise are white and pink.
Chirp
A periodic sine sweep with a flat spectral distribution (equal energy per Hz
of bandwidth). The chirp may optionally be restricted in bandwidth, with
parameters for the lower and upper band edges.
Polarity
An IEC-type polarity test signal. The signal resembles a half-wave rectified
sine wave with the negative values removed.
Tek Polarity
A Tektronix ASG100-style polarity test signal. The signal consists of a sine
wave and its second harmonic added together.
Arbitrary Waveform
A user-defined waveform of up to 176,384 samples is repeatedly played.
The waveform is provided by the user in a file loaded from a DOS
formatted 1.44 Mbyte diskette.
1–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–21: Generator signals (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Generated signals
Multitone
A multitone test signal with variable amplitude. This signal consists of
multiple simultaneously generated sine waves. The multitone may be
specified in either of two ways: file mode or list mode.
File Mode: A user-provided file contains the description (frequency and
amplitude) of each tone included in the multitone signal and the buffer size
to use for the fft-based generation of the multitone. Up to 128 tones may be
generated, in buffer sizes from 512 to 8192 bytes.
List Mode: The multitone is generated using the same frequencies and
amplitudes as used when making sweeps in list mode. The built-in list
editor may be used to enter this information. The buffer size is fixed at
1024.
Jittered Sine
This is a jittered sine wave with user-controlled jitter frequency and
amplitude.
Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application
Capabilities
Description
Human interface
The analyzer has a touch and zoom interface.
Number of Display Screens
1
Number of Measurements per Screen
Up to 4 measurements at once
Analysis modes
Major Modes of Operation
Open Loop
Acquisitions are controlled by the received signal. Measurements (except
for the real-time readouts) are subject to settling criteria, and no special
knowledge of the generated signal may be assumed by the analyzer.
Closed Loop
The local generator is coupled to the analyzer. This can be signalled by the
user to enable the analyzer to optimize its behavior (only plotting points
during generator sweeps, for example).
Minor Modes of Operation
Regulation Mode
The analyzer controls the generator amplitude or frequency to get a desired
reading. When the reading is obtained a measurement is triggered. This
may be used to produce amplitude versus frequency plots at a constant
distortion level, for example.
Relative to Reference
All measurements may be made relative to a previous measurement. This
reference measurement may be recalled from a file or loaded with GPIB.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–31
Specifications
Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Analysis modes
Major Acquisition Modes
An acquisition may take one of the following forms:
Automatic
Whenever trigger conditions are met, and the measurement can be made,
a new reading is taken.
Track Generator Sweeps
Acquisition does not occur except when the internal generator is producing
a sweep.
Automatic sweep detection will be present for detecting the beginning of
sweeps. The user may indicate whether sweeps are rising or falling, and
data plotting will not commence until the appropriate sweep direction is
detected.
Measurements
Y-Axis Measurements
The analyzer is capable of measuring the following and displaying them on
the Y-axis:
Received level
Stereo phase difference
THD
THD+N
IMD
Received frequency
Crosstalk + noise
Channel separation
Received level difference
In addition, a Wow and Flutter measurement is made and displayed in the
Real Time measurements only.
Sweep signals generated by the Tektronix ASG100 and ASG140 can be
used as stimulus signals for making the above measurements (except IMD,
THD, THD+N, and Wow and Flutter). These signal generators produce
‘stepped sweeps’ as opposed to continuous frequency sweeps. Frequency
content and dwell time for each step are described in the relevant user
manual for each model.
X-Axis Measurements
Types of measurements that may control the X-axis
Frequency (received or generated)
Level
1–32
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–22: Audio analyzer application (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Filters
This application gives the user a choice of several predefined filters.
Supplied Filters
Low Pass Filter
15 kHz, 20 kHz, 22 kHz
High Pass Filter
400 Hz
Weighting Filters
A-weighting, CCIR-468-3 (required by AES 17-1993), C-messaging,
B-weighting, F-weighting, CCIR-ARM
Table 1–23: FFT analyzer
Capabilities
Description
Frequency related characteristics
Span (the bandwidth of the displayed data)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Span is dependent on the input and Zoom as shown in the following table
for typical inputs and sampling rates.
Input
Sampling rate
Width
Zoom factor
High Res
48 kHz
200.156
400.312
800.624
1000.78
2000.56
4003.12
5003.9
10007.8
20015.6
100
50
25
20
10
5
4
2
1 (full)
High Bw
192 kHz
16012.5
20015.6
40031.2
80062.5
5
4
2
1 (full)
AES
48 kHz
Same as High Res
AES
44.1 kHz
183.894
367.787
35.574
918.468
1838.94
3677.87
4597.34
9194.69
18389.4
100
50
25
20
10
5
4
2
1 (full)
1–33
Specifications
Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Frequency related characteristics
Span (the bandwidth of the displayed data) (cont.)
Input
Sampling rate
Width
Zoom factor
AES
32 kHz
133.438
266.875
533.75
667.187
1334.38
2668.75
3335.94
6671.82
13343.8
100
50
25
20
10
5
4
2
1 (full)
Measurement Range
High Resolution Mode
DC to 20 kHz
High Bandwidth Mode
DC to 80 kHz
Displayed Bins
Zoomed
16
Unzoomed
428
Bin Width
0.781 Hz (min. span) to 156.3 Hz (max. span); calculated as span divided
by 512.
FFT Record Length
1024 data points
Window Parameters
Window Functions
Weighting Functions
Hann
Kaiser-Bessel
Blackman-Harris
Flat-top
Uniform
Saramaki-Rajan
User-defined
Amplitude Related Characteristics
Amplitude Resolution
0.1 dB with a flat-top window
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
±0.15 dB at 120 Hz
Full Span FFT Noise Floor
Input terminated with 600 W or less, auto range and
averaging ON.
High Resolution Mode
1–34
170 Hz to 1000 Hz
<–120 dBu
1 kHz to 20 kHz
<–140 dBu
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Amplitude Related Characteristics
High Bandwidth Mode
>400 Hz
Residual DC Response
<–120 dBu
<–60 dBFS within two hours of offset calibration
FFT dynamic range
Spurious Free Dynamic Range
>105 dB
Phase
FFT Cross-Channel Phase Accuracy
±1 degree
Display related characteristics
Displays Available
Spectral Display (amplitude versus frequency for A and B)
Spectrogram (time versus frequency with amplitude color/gray coded)
Display Update Rate
>10 updates per second at full span
Frequency Axis
Linear or Log
Averaging
Displays
The following average displays are available:
Max Hold
Min Hold
Average
Type of Averaging
Exponential only
Cursor functions
Number of Cursors
One or Two
Cursor Modes
The following cursor modes are provided:
Continuously displayed amplitude and frequency at each cursor
Peak locator function
Multitone
Multitone analyzer is a measurement that may be run in the FFT application. When the user turns on the multitone analysis mode, the
AM700 starts looking for a multitone signal. When it detects the specified multitone, it starts making the user-selected measurements,
as long as the multitone is present.
Multitone Measurements
The following measurements may be made in Multitone analysis:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Multitone Graphical Displays
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Level versus frequency: A, B
Stereo interchannel level difference
Stereo interchannel phase difference
Stereo crosstalk versus frequency
Distortion + Noise (with FFT-like display)
Graphical display will be available for each of the multitone measurements.
1–35
Specifications
Table 1–23: FFT analyzer (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Multitone
Multitone Record Size
16 Kbytes or less for detecting multitones
Multitone Detection
Each channel may be set to recognize one multitone, which can either be
the current tone in one of the generator channels or a multitone described
in a file.
Files are provided in the AM700 file system that contain multitone
specifications for the Tektronix ASG 100/140 audio generators.
Minimum Multitone Detection Level
–60 dBu
The minimum detection level is for individual tones that make up the
multitone signal. The generator amplitude readings are 0.707 × peak
voltage, which is RMS voltage for sine waves only. The level of transmitted
multitones depend on the crest factor of the signal, which varies each time
the multitone signal is computed (unless in file mode with absolute phases
provided).
In both file mode and list mode, the amplitude parameters for individual
tones are only used to control the relative amplitude of the tone with
respect to the other tones.
The only way you can determine the received level of each tone is to work
backwards from the peak level of the complex waveform, with knowledge
of the crest factor.
Table 1–24: Audio monitor
Capabilities
Description
Human interface
This application has the primary use of verifying the presence of audio and making simple time-domain measurements of the signal
amplitude.
Primary Display
Oscilloscope (voltage versus time)
Signal acquisition
Input Channels
High Resolution analog inputs
High Bandwidth analog inputs
Digital audio inputs
Inputs from the DSP connector
This application follows the <primary input> global SCPI parameter to
determine which input to display.
Oscilloscope display
This display emulates a traditional digitizing oscilloscope, but with a ‘touch-and-zoom’ touch screen human interface.
Measurement Range
1–36
Depends on the analog performance and digital input word lengths
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–24: Audio monitor (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Oscilloscope display
Display Appearance
The display is similar to the ones used in the VM700A audio option. Both
channels may be overlaid or put in a ‘split window’ mode. Touch-and-zoom
affects both channels in a window, and graticules track their signals.
Waveform Display Resolution
Nominal 400 pixels vertical × 500 pixels horizontal
The reserved pixels for display will shrink during generator control and
programmed text display.
Display Update Rate
Minimum of 15 screen updates per second with proper triggering and time
base conditions
Digitized Record Length
Amount of data in a waveform record obtainable without
missing samples.
Inputs with Sample Rates up to 48 kHz
Continuously variable from 32 to 48000 samples per channel
Inputs with Sample Rates Above 48 kHz
Continuously variable from 32 samples to 4 milliseconds. All samples
returned must be in the vicinity of the trigger.
Time Base Range
Four samples per screen to 48000 samples per screen, continuously
variable with touch-and- zoom
Trigger Sources
Channel 1 (A channel)
Channel 2 (B channel)
External (rear-panel TTL input trigger)
Trigger Modes
Auto
New data is displayed in the absence of an edge trigger being detected.
Normal
New data is displayed only following detection of a trigger. Trace is erased
if no trigger occurs.
Trigger Slope
Rising or Falling edge
Trigger Level
Adjustable
Trigger Position
The trigger may be positioned anywhere in the digitized record, with all
samples valid. Pretrigger samples and post-trigger samples must fit within
one record. Trigger position is determined automatically from the views
being displayed. There is no direct control for selecting trigger position in
the record.
Trigger position is at the 0 horizontal graticule marking.
Cursors
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Cursors can measure time difference and level difference on a waveform.
Cursor position difference for both amplitude and time is displayed in the
cursor readout line above the view. Position difference is obtained by
subtracting the readings obtained from cursor 2 (the dashed cursor) from
the readings obtained from cursor 1 (the solid cursor). The time reading of
the cursor position displayed above the cursor is with respect to the trigger
point in the waveform.
1–37
Specifications
Table 1–24: Audio monitor (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Listen capability
LISTEN
A user can listen to input channels.
Table 1–25: Digital interface tester
Capabilities
Description
Intended Use
The digital interface tester application is used to monitor and troubleshoot
the digital audio interface. It allows you to view incoming data streams at
the logical (bit), or electrical interface level, and to create special signals to
probe the interface.
Number of Primary Modes
There are four major modes of operation.
Bit Activity
Displays instantaneous bit probability (with no history or averaging) of each
bit of each subframe. The four preamble bits are not available to be
displayed, and are grayed out in the display.
Channel Status
Displays the current contents of the 192 channel status bits in both
subframes of the digital input stream. The data can be displayed in four
styles:
Binary (most-significant-bit or MSB on the left)
Transmission order (MSB on right)
Hex (same bit order as binary, displayed in base 16)
Decoded (raw data translated into words)
In the raw and decoded styles, the user can optionally underline data
elements which differ between the two subframes. This allows a quick
visual check for identical subframe information.
The user can choose to display either the subframe 1 data, the subframe 2
data, or both subframes.
Eye Diagram
Displays a “cloud of dots” representing an equivalent-time sampled
time-domain graph of the digital main inputs. In addition, the following
seven numeric readouts are displayed above the diagram in a real-time
readout box (when measurements are available for the category):
Measured sample frequency on the main input
Measured sample frequency on the reference input
Measured ratio between the main and reference sample frequencies
Phase difference between the main and reference
Voltage level of the main input
Equalization applied to the main input
Peak-to-peak jitter of the interface
1–38
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Specifications
Table 1–25: Digital interface tester (cont.)
Capabilities
Description
Jitter Spectrum
Displays the energy spectrum of the jitter on the digital main input signal.
Like FFT, this spectrum can be viewed as an interpolated graph, a bar
graph, or a spectrogram.
Averaging is available (exponential averaging, min hold, and max hold) in
the jitter spectrum display. Averaging is not available in the other displays.
Enhanced Stimuli
Within this application, the DIT menu choices provide extra features for
controlling the digital generator.
Electrical interface modifications include:
Cable Simulator
Jitter Generation with Controlled Frequency and Amplitude
Table 1–26: Software update procedure
Capabilities
Description
Update Procedure
AM700 firmware may be updated from a 1.44 Mbyte diskette. (Update
procedure is given in the Maintenance Section of this manual.)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
1–39
Specifications
1–40
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
This section provides the installation information needed for the AM700 Audio
Measurement Set and the basic operating information that a service person might
need to check for proper operations of the instrument.
Power Requirements and Power On
The AM700 operates with line frequencies of 50 or 60 Hz over two line voltage
ranges. The nominal setting of the low voltage range is 115 VAC. The nominal
setting of the high voltage range is 230 VAC. The AM700 power requirement is
185 watts or 230 volt-amperes at maximum power consumption.
There are two power switches on the AM700. They are the main power switch, a
push button switch on the rear panel above the power cord receptacle, and the
Stby/On button on the front panel. Both must be on to operate the instrument.
WARNING. Dangerous voltages are present within the Power Supply module
when the rear-panel power switch is on, regardless of the position of the
front-panel power switch. Do not operate the AM700 with any covers removed.
Refer all servicing of the instrument to a qualified service person.
Figure 2–1: Rear panel fuse, power connector, On/Off Switch, and line selector
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–1
Operating Information
Changing Line Voltage
Range and Fuse
The voltage range selection switch and fuse holder are located in the lower left
corner of the AM700 rear panel (see Figure 2–1). The AM700 is shipped from
the factory set for the operating voltage of the destination nation (115 VAC or
230 VAC). If the setting is not correct, it must be changed before connecting the
power cord to the power source.
1. Turn off the rear-panel power switch and disconnect the power cord from the
mains supply.
2. Set the voltage range selection switch (located on the rear panel of the
AM700) to the correct position for operation.
Instruments are shipped with the power cord most appropriate for the country of
destination. Available power-cord option information is given in the Options
section. Contact your Tektronix representative or local Tektronix field office for
additional power-cord information.
CAUTION. When changing the line voltage selector switch you must also change
the fuse to provide proper protection for the operating voltage in use.
The mains fuse provides protection in the event of a major failure of the
AM700 power supply. Two sizes of fuses are specified, one for 115 V
operation and the other for 230 V operation. See the Fuse specification in
Appendix A for the correct fuse rating to use for each voltage range.
3. Replace the fuse with the correct one, as indicated on the rear panel, for the
new mains voltage selection.
CAUTION. Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition with a proper safety ground
connector.
4. Replace the power cord with the correct one for use with the local mains
outlets.
5. Turn on the rear power switch, then the front power switch to operate the
AM700.
Power Cord
2–2
A detachable three-wire power cord with a three-contact plug is provided with
each instrument for connecting to both the power source and protective ground.
The protective-ground connector in the plug connects (through the protectiveground conductor) to the accessible metal parts of the instrument. For electricalshock protection, insert this plug only into a power-source outlet that has a
properly grounded protective-ground contact. The voltage to ground from either
pole of the power source must not exceed 250 VRMS. For electric-shock protec-
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
tion, the grounding connection must be made before making connections to the
instrument input or output terminals.
Power-on Procedure
Starting with Version 1.02 firmware, the power-up diagnostics are normally
bypassed, and the measurement set initializes with the FFT application running.
You can start an application other than FFT by pressing and holding in the
front-panel button for the application you want to start as you turn on the front
panel power switch. The AM700 will beep twice, and you can then release the
application front-panel button. To run the power-up diagnostics, press and hold
in the front-panel Limits button as you press the front-panel power button. The
AM700 beeps twice, displays the message ‘Start mode “RUN DIAGNOSTICS”
recognized,’ and then runs the diagnostics before initialization.
Before Version 1.02 firmware, at power up the AM700 normally performs the
power-up diagnostics before initializing. To bypass these diagnostics, press and
hold the front-panel button of the application you wish to start as you press the
front-panel power button. The AM700 will beep twice and flash a message about
which start up was recognized, and then initialize without running the diagnostics.
Should a power-up diagnostic fail, the measurement set should be referred to
your local Tektronix representative for servicing. You may bypass the diagnostic
routines and check to see if you can still make the measurements you require as
some diagnostic failures may not affect all the applications.
Basic Operation Information
Touch Screen
The AM700 Audio Measurement Set is controlled by selecting from measurement parameters and menus on the instrument display. A touch screen detects the
user’s selections.
Many operations are started by selecting soft keys using the touch screen
(touching the display in the right place to invoke some function) as shown in
Figure 2–2. In some menus, numerical values are entered either from the keypad
or with the control knob.
Front Panel Controls and
Touch Screen Interface
Buttons with gold outlines (Copy, Average, Cursor, Sound, Filter, Sound On,
User, and Units) have two possible behaviors, depending on how you use them.
and the application or display that is running. If an application does use a button,
no action is produced when the button is pressed.1
1
An example is the Filter menu. Filters are only available in Audio Analyzer, so when
the Digital Interface Tester or the FFT analyzer is running, pressing the Filter button
has no effect.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–3
Operating Information
1. When pressed and immediately released, each of these buttons performs a
default action (turning on or off the specified feature).
2. When any of these buttons is pressed and held for one second or more, a
configuration menu related to its operation is displayed.
NOTE. The button default action (selected when you press and release the
front-panel button) does not occur when exiting a press/hold menu. Instead, you
must again press and release the button to perform the default action.
The LEDs associated with these buttons track the action you select, not the
configuration menu associated with the hard key. For example, the Filter hard
key LED lights only when you select filtering.
Application name
Input signal source
Submenu bar appears when
a Main Menu selection is made.
Main Menus appear when the front-panel menu button is pressed.
When selected, the button is highlighted.
Figure 2–2: Touch screen interface with main menu and submenu displayed
2–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
During operation of the AM700 the following objects may appear on the screen:
Display Icons
H
One to four measurement view windows
H
Generator Status area
H
Generator Control Panel
H
Menu and Soft Keys selections
H
Operational status and Real Time measurement displays
H
Notifier messages
The AM700 uses icons in its menus and control panels to represent actions or
available choices. Some of these icons are displayed in Figure 2–3.
DISPLAY VIEW
GENERATOR STATUS READOUT
REAL TIME MEASUREMENTS
TWO OR MORE CHOICES ARE TOGGLED
A LIST OF CHOICES IS AVAILABLE
CHOICE IS SELECTED
CHOICE IS NOT SELECTED
SELECTION IS ENABLED
SELECTION IS NOT ENABLED
MOVE OR EXPAND HORIZONTALLY
MOVE OR EXPAND VERTICALLY
HORIZONTAL ZOOM POINT
VERTICAL ZOOM POINT
LARGE CONTROL KNOB
GENERATOR KNOBS ASSIGNED
Figure 2–3: Representative icons and arrows seen in the display
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–5
Operating Information
Calibrating the Touch
Screen
The measurement set is shipped from the factory with its touch screen fully
calibrated. Although it will seldom be necessary, the touch screen can easily be
recalibrated.
To calibrate the touch screen:
H
Press the front-panel button labeled Other.
H
Use the large control knob to scroll through the menu choices and select the
touch screen calibration choice from the menu that appears (see Figure 2–4).
Press Enter on the keypad to activate the selection.
The choice may also be made by touching the selection directly on the touch
screen interface, however, the above procedure can be used if the touch screen
should ever become uncalibrated.
Figure 2–4: Application selection menu under the other button
Full instructions for calibration are given on the screen when the calibration
display appears (see Figure 2–5). A small circle with a dot is highlighted in
succession in each of three corners. View the screen directly on to avoid parallax
errors and use a small blunt pointed scribe, such as a pencil eraser tip, to produce
the best accuracy for the calibration. Touch the screen directly over the first dot.
The dot in the next corner then lights. Touch the second dot, then the third dot to
finish the calibration.
2–6
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
After calibration, the screen will display the Paint screen. You can test areas of
the screen for activity by touching the screen at various points. The touch point
will become highlighted. The Clear soft key on the touch screen erases the
highlighted areas of the Paint screen. Press any application front-panel button to
exit the paint screen and start the application.
Figure 2–5: Touch screen calibration
Setting the AM700 Clock
The AM700 has a system clock with an internal backup battery. After setting for
your local time, it is ready to use. Performing this exercise for the first time will
also introduce you to the Configure menus that you will use as you set up the
AM700. To set the clock use the following procedure:
1. Press the Configure button on the front panel. This displays the choices for
configuring the various user selections of the AM700. Clock setting is done
in the System Setup option.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–7
Operating Information
2. Touch the System Setup selection to display the setup menu choices. Setting
the clock is the default selection, and the clock face appears as seen in
Figure 2–6.
3. Check the date and time settings. If any are not correct, they may be selected
and adjusted to the correct setting. A selected choice changes intensity to
show that editing of that setting is active.
Figure 2–6: AM700 Audio Measurement Set system clock
4. Setting may be done by rotating the large control knob or by making a direct
keypad entry of the new value and pressing the Enter button. Changes made
to the time are shown in the clock as they are entered, but those changes are
not permanent until the Accept Changes soft key is touched.
5. When the date and time are correct, touch the Accept Changes soft key. This
changes the time to the new values and returns to the previous application.
2–8
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Backup Battery
The nonvolatile memory of the AM700 is maintained by an internal backup
battery. Stored data will be retained for the life of the battery. A fresh battery
installed at the factory has a life of greater than 10 years when operated and
stored at an ambient temperature between 0° C and 50° C.
NOTE. The backup battery used to retain stored data has an operating life of
greater than 10 years when operating between 0° and 50° C. If operating out of
that range for extended periods of time the battery life may be reduced or stored
data may be lost.
AM700 Setup for Operation
Turn the AM700 on. Unless otherwise directed, it runs the power-up diagnostics
and loads the FFT Analyzer application.
After completing the power up diagnostics and loading of the FFT application,
you may select any of the applications you wish to use from the Applications
section of the front panel buttons (see Figure 2–7). After making another
application request, you should wait until that application is running before
making another choice or button press. It takes some 30 seconds to load an
application, during which time the action of other button presses will not be
seen, but they will be answered after the application is running.
Figure 2–7: Applications selection buttons
Bypassing Diagnostics
To bypass the power-up diagnostics and go directly an application other than
FFT, press and hold the application button in when turning on the power to the
AM700. Hold the button in until a double beep is heard; then it may be released.
The AM700 starts up in quick start mode with the selected application loaded.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–9
Operating Information
Configuration
Press the Configuration button (shown in Figure 2–8) to display the Configuration options menu. There are seven selection choices displayed in the Configuration menu shown in Figure 2–9. The summary of the configuration choices is
followed by a more detailed explanation of the configuration menus for
operation of the AM700.
Figure 2–8: Configure button in the utilities selection block
Figure 2–9: Configuration menu initial selection screen
2–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Configuration Summary
Quick Setup. Touch this soft key to display a menu of template selections. These
selections save time by providing one-touch instrument configuration for some
common AM700 measurements. See Quick Setup at the end of this section for
information on the quick setup templates and the measurements that are available
with the quick setups.
Input Selection. Touch this soft key to display the Input Configuration menu.
From this menu you can select the type of input and front panel connection,
input impedance and whether the instrument is to auto range on the input signal,
and the type of signal source that is applied to the input channels.
Measurement Setup. Touch this soft key to display the Measurement Configuration menu. From this display other soft keys display various measurement
configuration options in various categories. The contents of the menus are
application specific and change by application.
System Setup. Touch this soft key to display the System Setup menu. Soft keys
in this display allow you to set the date and time, configure the serial and GPIB
communications parameters, select copy format and destination for display
captures, activate calibration, and specify the external input and output resistance
values to be used for units conversions between volts, dBu, and dBm, and the
specify the conversion factor to dBFS.
View Setup. Touch this soft key to display the View Setup menu. Here is where
you select the measurements to be displayed and the type of view in which the
selected measurement is displayed. In this menu you can also touch the View
Options soft key to display a menu where you may configure the type of display
axes and waveform, whether cursors are enabled (turned on or not), and whether
the cursors will be constrained to the trace data (Snap to Data) or will permitted
to be positioned anywhere in the display window.
System Status. Touch this soft key to display a summary of the AM700 system
configuration selections as seen in Figure 2–10. This display is useful for quickly
determining what measurement the views in the running application are set up to
display, how the trace data is displayed (interpolator, point plot, tabular, etc.), the
measurement channel input selection, and the generator signal type choices for
the analog and digital generators.
State Saving. This selection provides two choices: one saves the present state of
instrument settings that can be saved, and the other restores the factory default
settings. If you want to save a particular setup state for an application, it should
be done immediately before turning off the AM700. Settings for many of the
controls are saved each time an application is changed. Any settings that are
saved when State Save is used are overwritten if further changes are made and
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–11
Operating Information
another application is started prior to power off. State Save does not return the
application that was running at power off when power is again turned on, but the
user selections for an application that were saved will be restored.
Also, refer to the Save AM700 State function discussion in the AM700 Audio
Measurement Set User Manual. The Save AM700 State function generates new
functions that store customized application setups. These application setup
functions are then used in making repetitive tests and for building a standardized
set of application setups that can be transferred to other AM700 Audio Measurement Sets.
Figure 2–10: System status display
Input Selection
From the Configure screen, first select Input Selection. In here are the choices
you need to make for input connector selection for the digital and analog signals,
the input impedance and gain range of the analog inputs, and the signal
selections to apply to the two measurement channels of the AM700. Alternately,
you may wish to select a Quick Setup. In the Quick Setup choices you will find
setup templates for often-used measurements. Those are given in the Quick Setup
discussion at the end of this section.
The Input Selection block diagram shown in Figure 2–11 graphically shows the
input section of the AM700. Touch screen selections allow the user to choose a
wide variety of signal sources and paths.
2–12
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Figure 2–11: Input selection control panel
Analog Input Connections. Touch the select soft key associated with the Analog A
and Analog B input connections to toggle between the front-panel XLR
connector and the internal Generator routing. The front-panel XLR inputs are the
default choice for signal input to the AM700. Selecting the internal generator
routing permits testing of the generator/analyzer pair without using interconnecting cables.
Input Impedance. Analog Input Impedance is selected from a three-choice
pull-down menu. The choices are 150 W, 600 W, and 200 kW (high). The 200 kW
choice is the default selection. Perform the following steps to change input
impedance:
1. Touch the Impedance soft key to display the pull-down menu choices.
2. Rotate the large control knob to select the proper choice for your measurement.
3. Touch the Impedance soft key a second time to make the assignment and
clear the menu.
The Input Impedance choice is not available for an internally connected
generator.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–13
Operating Information
Input Range and Auto. The gain range for the analog inputs defaults to Auto
enabled to provide auto ranging on the applied signal. This avoids possible
overloading of the A/D converters and is the recommended setting for normal
operation. When you know the amplitude of the signal being measured, you may
choose to make a manual gain setting. Follow these steps when changing the
input range setting:
1. Turn off the Auto enabling (check goes away) by touching the Auto soft key.
2. Make the new gain range setting by either rotating the large control knob to
the new setting and again touching the soft key or make a direct keypad
entry of the new number and press enter.
The gain range steps of the AM700 have fixed upper limits for each range,
therefore when a number is entered that is not exactly one of the available range
numbers, the gain switches to the next highest valid setting above the number
you entered.
Input gain range settings are also available as menu choices from within the
applications that make measurements on analog signals. From within a running
application you may make the change and observe the effects on the signal.
Digital Input Connector Selection. The Digital Main Input connector selection
choices are: Front-panel XLR connector (the most common selection and made
by default), the Rear-panel BNC, and the Rear-panel Optical connector. An
internal connection to the AES generator is also available. Touching the selection
soft key associated with the digital generator choices advances the selection box
through the list.
Measurement Channel Assignment. A pull-down menu (see Figure 2–12) is used
to individually assign the signal to the two measurement channels of the AM700.
The same range of signals input choices is available for both Channel 1 and
Channel 2, and the channels may have the same signal applied to each as well. If
you wish both inputs to be obtained from the same type of generator (High
Resolution, High Bandwidth, or Digital Main), the fast selection soft keys along
the lower right of the screen may be used (see Figure 2–12). (These choices are
also available within the Main menu for the applications with the Input menu
displayed.) With a single touch of the choice both measurement channels may be
set simultaneously to the A and B High Resolution generator, the A and B High
Bandwidth generator, or the Digital Main Inputs.
If you want to use the digital generator or the digital reference signal as inputs to
the measurement channels, select the appropriate one instead of the analog high
bandwidth or analog high resolution route. The most common selections (and the
default connections) are the Analog A high resolution input connected to
measurement Channel 1 and the Analog B high resolution input connected to
measurement Channel 2.
2–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
When finished making your selections, press Clear Menu to exit the Input
Selections menu.
Touch the measurement
channel soft key to display
the pull-down menu.
Pull-down Input
Selection Menu.
Use the large
knob to move the
selection box to
the signal you
want.
Touch the measurement
channel soft key a second
time to assign the input to
the channel and clear the
pull-down menu.
Use the quick select soft
keys to set both channels to
the same generator type.
Figure 2–12: Measurement channel assignment pull-down menu
View Setup
The View Setup menu permits AM700 users to specify how measurement results
should be displayed on the screen. Contents of this menu vary depending upon
the current application. In the follow description, the FFT application is active.
View Selection Bar. The top line in the View Setup screen is a view selection bar
as shown in Figure 2–13. The selections that are made in the remaining portion
of the View Setup window apply only to the selected view. The view choices in
the view selection bar include an icon that indicates the type of view that is
selected. For example, the possible choices for FFT Analyzer in FFT mode are
Interpolator, Bar Graph, and Spectrogram. View Setup choices are illustrated in
each of the applications in Section 4 of this manual.
For each type of view, the AM700 also offers options that allow you to configure
the display for your viewing requirements. You may configure the display in the
View Setup menu (see Figure 2–13).
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–15
Operating Information
Figure 2–13: A typical view setup control menu
To select a view type and define the view options:
1. Press the Configure button and touch the View Setup soft key to enter the
View Setup menu.
2. Select the desired view type by touching the icon on the display.
3. If desired, touch the View Options icon to display available options for the
view you have selected.
4. Select the desired view options (a checked box indicates that an option is
selected).
5. Save your selections and return to the main display by touching the Accept
Changes soft key or cancel your changes and return to the main display by
touching the Cancel soft key.
2–16
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
View Types. The View Types column in the figure shows the icons for these view
types. Each view may be a different view type. Selecting a particular view type
of a view is done by first selecting the view you wish to change in the View
Selection bar. Only the selected view is affected by a change in the choices. The
Measurement column shows the measurement types that are available for
viewing in a view window. Altering those choices is done in the Measurements
Setup menu that will be discussed later.
You may set up a view to display FFT measurements or Multitone measurements
but not both. The View Types that are available also depend on the measurement
selected as they are different for FFT and Multitone. The applicable choices will
be displayed for the Measurement Type selected for a view. Notice that both FFT
traces may be displayed in the same view window.
View Options. The View Options menu permit selection of axis types, display
persistence, and cursor actions as shown in Figure 2–14. When selected by
touching the enable soft key, a check mark appears in the soft key to show that it
is enabled. Touch the enable soft key again to remove the check mark and return
to the alternate choice.
Figure 2–14: FFT Analyzer view options in the view setup controls
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–17
Operating Information
The choices in the Axes column allow the linear/log selection for the x- and
y-axes and a choice of Dual Y Axis. Dual Y-Axis displays are permitted when
more than one trace is displayed in a single view. In Dual Y-Axis displays, the
vertical or y-axis scale of the front trace is seen on the left side of the graticule
and y-axis scale for the back trace is seen on the right side of the graticule. Other
axes choices are determined by the view type.
When persistent is enabled, trace data is accumulated and held in the display in a
continuous storage mode. This feature is very useful for gathering history of
waveform changes and showing the bounds of varying signals in either
frequency, voltage, or both. Turning persistent off restores the trace to showing
data for a single acquisition only.
Cursor controls for enabling the cursors and holding the cursors to the displayed
data are found in the Cursors column. Enabling or disabling cursors is the same
as turning them on or off using the Cursor button on the front panel. Selecting
Snap to Data is used to hold the cursors on actual data points in the trace display.
NOTE. When cursors are viewed on a Dual Y-Axis display, they are associated
only with the front trace. The amplitude readouts accompanying the cursors
reflect the amplitude at the cursor positions in the front trace.
Saving Changes and Exiting the Input Selections Menu. Soft keys to exit the input
selection menu are located at the bottom of the screen. When Accept Changes is
touched, any selections made are entered. If Cancel is touched, all changes are
deleted before returning to the current application. Pressing Clear Menu also
exits back to the application.
2–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Measurement Setup Menu
The Measurement Setup menu permits AM700 users to define which measurements are to be performed and displayed by the current application. An example
of setting up different measurements in the four measurement views of Audio
Analyzer is shown in Figure 2–15. Figure 2–16 shows the FFT and Multitone
Measurement Setup controls. See the specific application in Section 4 for
information on setting up the measurements for the applications.
Figure 2–15: Four different measurements in four views of the Audio Analyzer
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–19
Operating Information
FFT Configure
Measurements
FFT Multitone
Configure
Measurements
Figure 2–16: Configure measurement screens for FFT Analyzer for FFT and for multitone
2–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
System Setup Menu
The System Setup menu is used to set the system clock, the serial and GPIB
communication parameters, the hard copy output format, run the AM700
calibration routine, and set the input, output, and dBFS conversion factors.
System Copy. The control screen display for setting the Copy parameters is
reached either through the Configure System Setup menu or directly by pressing
and holding the Copy front-panel button to bring up the same menu. Press and
hold the Copy button to display the Copy Configuration screen see Figure 2–17.
NOTE. Pressing and holding the Copy button immediately brings up the
Configure menu, with the System Setup choices for Copy displayed. This is the
same screen that is displayed by pressing the Configure button, then System
Setup.
In this screen you may set the following copy functions:
H
copy output format
H
copy destination
H
file name when File is the selected copy destination
Figure 2–17: The copy configuration menu
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–21
Operating Information
After setting copy options, touch the Accept Changes soft key to save your
selections, exit the Copy Configuration screen, and return to the measurement
display.
To delete all copies from the spooler, press and hold the copy button to display
the Copy Configuration menu. Touch the Cancel Pending Hardcopy soft key to
delete all the spooled hard copies.
Screen dumps print when you press the Copy button. The image currently on the
screen is printed. Graphic displays are printed only when the printer port is
formatted for a graphics printer.
Copy Formats. The AM700 supports the following printer and hard-copy types:
H
PostScript Image
H
HP DeskJet
H
Epson (24 pin)
H
Tag Image File Format (TIFF)
H
Interleaf Image
When the Copy Format is either PostScript or TIFF the Copy Style may be set to
Color.
Copy Destination. Printouts are spooled to the currently selected printer port,
which may be one of the following:
H
GPIB
H
Serial Port 1 (COM 1) or Serial Port 2 (COM 2) (RS-232)
H
File on floppy disk
H
File in internal nonvolatile file system
H
None (This choice disables hard copy output.)
When the Copy Destination is set to File, the Output File selection is active. This
choice brings up a file browser, shown in Figure 2–18, to let you select or name
the output file name for the hard copy. You may name a file by touching the
Filename soft key. This displays a keyboard to type in the new file name. Hard
copy files may be sent directly to the floppy disk for later printing. A limited
number of screen dumps may be stored in NVRAM for later transfer to a floppy
disk. The available memory in the internal NVRAM of the AM700 depends on
how much of the memory is used for other user files.
2–22
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Figure 2–18: Hard copy output file selector
Copy Styles. Sets the choice of the color output for PostScript and TIFF
formatted files. When set to Color, printer output will be color formatted. If a
copy format other than PostScript or TIFF is used, the Color state is ignored, and
the file is output as monochrome (gray scale) only.
System Communication
Menu
The Communicate Configuration menu (shown in Figure 2–19) is used to define
the serial communication parameters for serial ports 1 and 2, and the GPIB port.
GPIB choices permit you to select the mode of operation and the GPIB address
of the AM700. GPIB modes of operation are Talk/Listen, Hardcopy, and Off
Bus. Talk/Listen mode is used for remote control of the AM700 via the GPIB
port. Hardcopy is the talk only mode and is used to output screens and data to a
GPIB printer. Off Bus turns of the GPIB interface, and the AM700 will not
communicate with any other device on the bus.
Saving Changes and Exiting the Input Selections Menu. Soft keys to exit the input
selection menu are located at the bottom of the screen. When the Accept
Changes soft key is touched, any selections made are entered. If the Cancel soft
key is touched, all changes are deleted before returning to the current application.
Pressing Clear Menu also exits back to the application.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–23
Operating Information
Figure 2–19: Configure system setup communicate menu
System Calibration Menu
The Calibrate menu provides a soft key to start calibration. Calibration of the
analog acquisition system is done after touching the Calibrate Now soft key.
Offset changes that occur with temperature will be removed. If operating the
AM700 in conditions that permit large ambient temperature changes, a calibration of the analog system improves the accuracy of the measurements. If ambient
temperatures are stable, a calibration done infrequently is adequate to compensate for component aging. A calibration should be done at the ambient operating
temperature to produce the best accuracy.
When Audio Analyzer, FFT Analyzer, or Monitor is the running application,
calibration switches the analog acquisition system to a known test signal (a
120 Hz symmetrical square wave) to acquire the positive and negative peak
values seen at the output of the A and B high resolution A/D converters and at
the output of the A and B high bandwidth A/D converters. The values obtained
are used to determine the DC offset of the acquisition system at the time of
calibration and the calibration factor needed to remove the offset from the
converted data values. The calibration constants obtained are stored and used
until a subsequent calibration is done.
If the Digital Interface Tester application is running when calibration is
performed, the digital acquisition system offset is calculated and the calibration
factor obtained is used to remove the offset from the peak-to-peak jitter
measurements.
2–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
NOTE. Calibrate does not perform an analog acquisition system calibration
when Digital Interface Tester is the running application.
System Conversion
Standards Menu
The Conversion Standards menu shown in Figure 2–20 permits you to define
certain values to be used in deriving measurement results.
Output dBm. This setting defines the value of the external load resistor. The
divider formed by load resistance and the internal series resistance selected for
use (10, 150, or 600 W) is taken into account for the calculation (see
Figure 2–21). Thus, generator signal level can be specified in dBm, and the
correct power will be delivered to the load.
NOTE. This is calculated dBm, so if the external load is not as stated in the
Output dBm box, the output value stated in dBm will not be correct.
Figure 2–20: Configure system setup conversion standards menu
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–25
Operating Information
When the generator is driving an output load of 600 W, and the internal series
resistor is also set for 600 W, the generator dBm reading will be correct. This
also true when driving a 150 W load with the internal 150 W series resistor
selected. Since half the voltage is dropped across the internal resistor and half
across the external resistor, the dBu (voltage across the load) output will be
6 dBu down from the output value in dBm for these matching conditions.
Internal series
resistor
User load
resistance
Eout
Figure 2–21: Generator output voltage divider for dBm calculations
Input dBm. This setting defines the external resistance on the input of the AM700
and is used for calculating the input signal amplitude in terms of dBm. Since the
AM700 is measuring voltage, the internal termination load of the AM700, which
is in parallel with the external load, has no effect on the calculation as the
applied voltage is dropped across both in parallel (see Figure 2–22).
NOTE. This is calculated dBm, so if the external load is not as stated in the Input
dBm box, the measured value stated in dBm will not be correct.
To acquisition
Ein
User’s external
parallel resistor
AM700 internal
load resistance
Figure 2–22: Input circuit for dBm calculations
Analog to Digital Conversion Factor. This selection permits measurement results
obtained from digital audio sources to be represented as analog values as if they
were produced by a D/A converter. The scale factor of a hypothetical D/A
converter is specified in this entry.
2–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Digital Audio Sampling Rate. In certain situations, the actual sample rate of a
digital audio signal may differ from the value contained in the channel status
bits. When digital audio is a source of input signals, the frequency measurements
of the AM700 can be referred to the actual sample rate or the sample rate
obtained from the channel status byte. Selection of the choice depends on
whether the user wishes the calculation to reflect frequencies present in the
original sampled data, or those which will result from a playback at the actual
sample rate. The user must make the appropriate choice.
NOTE. When actual sample rate and channel status content match, either setting
produces identical measurement results.
Saving Changes and Exiting the Input Selections Menu. Soft keys to exit the menu
are located at the bottom of the screen. When Accept Changes is touched, any
selections made are entered. If Cancel is touched, all changes are deleted before
returning to the current application. Pressing Clear Menu also exits back to the
application.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
2–27
Operating Information
Quick Setup
One of the configuration choices is the Quick Setup selection. Under this
selection is a set of application specific setups that can be used to quickly make
the needed instrument configuration changes for an often used measurement
setup. Figure 2–23 shows the selection screen with the Audio Analyzer
selections; Table 2–1 gives the application-specific choices and the views that
the selection produces. In the table, those views in parentheses are available but
not displayed. To do a quick setup, touch the measurement you want to make.
When the setup has finished, the selection screen is exited. If you want to exit
the screen without making a selection, press the Clear Menu button.
Figure 2–23: Quick setup selections for the Audio Analyzer
Table 2–1: Quick setups by application
Application
Measurements
Views displayed
(views available but not displayed)
FFT Analyzer
FFT Analysis
FFT1: Channel 1
FFT2: Channel 2
Multitone Level Measurements
Meas1: Level Ch1
Meas2: Level Ch2
Meas3: Level Diff Ch1 –> Ch2
2–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Operating Information
Table 2–1: Quick setups by application (cont.)
Application
Measurements
Views displayed
(views available but not displayed)
FFT Analyzer
FFT Analysis
FFT1: Channel 1
FFT2: Channel 2
Multitone Level Measurements
Meas1: Level Ch1
Meas2: Level Ch2
Meas3: Level Diff Ch1 –> Ch2
Digital Interface Tester
View Enables
Jitter Spectrum
Eye Height
Bit Activity
Channel Status
Audio Analyzer
THD and THD+N
Meas1: Ch1 THD+N versus Frequency
Meas2: Ch2 THD+N vs. Freq.
(Meas3: Ch1 THD vs. Freq.)
(Meas4: Ch2 THD vs. Freq.)
Crosstalk and Separation
Meas1: Ch1 Crosstalk 1–>2
Meas2: Ch2 Crosstalk 2–>1
(Meas3:Ch1 Separation 1–>2)
(Meas4: Ch2 Separation 2–>1)
Frequency Response
Meas1: Ch1 Level vs. Freq.
Meas2: Ch2 Level vs. Freq.
(Meas3: Level Difference)
(Meas4: Phase Difference)
Linearity
Meas1: Ch1 Level versus Gen A Level
Meas2: Ch2 Level versus Gen A Level
(Meas3: Not defined)
(Meas4: Not defined)
Stereo Differences
(Meas1: Ch1 Level vs. Freq.)
(Meas2: Ch2 Level vs. Freq.)
Meas3: Level Difference
Meas4: Phase Difference
Monitor
Single Trace
View 1 – Meas1 on View 1
(View 2 – Meas 2 on View 2)
Dual Trace
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
View 2 – Meas2 and Meas1 on View 2
2–29
Operating Information
2–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Digital
Audio
Rear
Panel
Digital
Audio
In
Out
In AES Ref
Out Optical
In
Out
In Unbal
DSP
Digital
Out
A3
Sample
Analog
Acquisition
Sample
XLR
CH A
Audio In
A1
CH B
Analog
Control Port
CH A
CH B
Serializer
Audio
Generator
Audio Out
A2
DSP
A5
A7
DMA
Remote
DMA
Front Panel
Keyboard
4–Wire
Interface
COM 2
Rear
Panel
Host
Interface
Main/CPU
PC Keyboard
Interface
At Keyboard
(optional)
Option
Board
Sound
Headphones
A8
A9
Touch Screen
CRT
GPIB
GPIB
Touch
Panel
Á
Á
COM 1
Serial
Interface
VGA Video
68340
Front Panel
mP
Picture
Monitor
A10
Display
A6
To All
Blocks
LCD Display
A11
Display Drive
Floppy Disk Drive
1.44 MbyteA12
Power
Supply
AC Mains
A4
A13
Touch Screen
Backlight
Inverter
Figure 3–1: Simplified block diagram of the AM700 Audio Measurement Set
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–1
Theory of Operation
Block Circuit Description
A simplified board-level block diagram of the AM700 is shown in Figure 3–1.
Only the main signal paths are shown. More detailed block diagrams of the
circuitry are shown with the detailed circuit descriptions and in the diagrams
section of this manual.
CPU
The CPU (central processing unit) controls the operation of the AM700 using the
programming contained in the flash EPROM (electrically programmable
read-only memory). That memory is programmed at the time of manufacture
with the standard programming plus any optional programming purchased. The
CPU has access to all the devices on the busses for either reading of the ROM
programming or reading and writing to the other devices for either memory
storage (to the NVRAM or other RAM) or controlling the activity of other
devices (output to the VGA connector for example).
DSP
The DSP (digital signal processor) accepts digital analog signal inputs from
either the Digital or the Analog input boards through sample transmitter/receiver
ASICs. Communication with the Main/CPU is through a DMA ASIC. The
digitized audio signal is serialized and converted to analog signals for driving the
front panel headphone circuit. Control circuitry on the DSP circuit board
provides signals to set up the acquisition gain, bandwidth, filters, etc., on the
Analog Acquisition board.
The DSP has port A and port B memories to handle the processed data and
commands. Instructions to the DSP are written to the Port B memory by the
CPU. The DSP then runs the programmed instructions for the Port B memory.
Analog Acquisition
Analog audio signals applied to the CHA and CHB XLR connectors are digitized
for application to the DSP for processing. A small over/underrange circuit board
assembly, which is physically attached to the Analog Acquisition board,
determines if the applied analog input signal is overrange (signal too big for
application to the A/D converter) or underrange (signal amplitude that is small
enough that a higher gain step or less attenuation should be used to provide a
better dynamic range signal to the A/D converter). The gain or attenuation of the
input circuitry is set to optimize the signal amplitude to the A/D converter.
Selectable filtering conditions the applied signal for either high resolution or
high bandwidth measurements depending on the selections made from within a
measurement application. The digitized input signals are formatted by the
Sample Transmitter for application to the DSP (digital signal processor).
Digital Audio
3–2
Digital audio signals from the front panel XLR connectors or the rear panel
connectors (BNC, optical, or, XLR) are processed for application to the DSP.
The digital audio generator is also located on the Digital Audio board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Audio Generator
There are two analog generators: High Resolution and High Bandwidth. Each
generator has two channels of output. The High Resolution generator output
channels are independent (output completely different signals on either channel).
The High Bandwidth Generator outputs the same signal on both channels.
There also two digital audio generators: AES/EBU and the DSP (digital signal
processor). Either of these generators may be used to produce the same signals
capable of being produced by the High Resolution analog generator. In addition,
the AES/EBU digital generator has the added signal of jittered sine which is used
to jitter modulate the digital signal to test for jitter immunity of a circuit or
device under test.
Front Panel
The Front Panel contains the touch screen circuitry, the front panel key pad
circuitry, and the sound circuitry. Inputs from the analog resistive touch screen
and the key pad are processed by the Front Panel mP, located on the Main/CPU
board. Communication between the Front Panel and the Front Panel mP is done
on a special 4-wire interface circuit.
The touch screen consists of two opposing transparent resistive layers made of
7 mil polyester coated with indium tin oxide. The two layers are joined together
around the perimeter, but they are kept apart by insulating spacers in the middle.
The two layers are laminated to a chemically strengthened glass backing panel
using a special optical adhesive. The touch screen may be activated by a press of
a finger tip or stylus.
Picture Monitor
Floppy Disk Drive
Power Supply (A12)
Vertical, horizontal, and video circuitry to display the AM700 visual interface are
contained in the Picture Monitor. The 7-inch (diagonal) display is non-interlaced
raster scan, operating at 31.469 kHz horizontal deflection rate and 59.940 Hz
vertical deflection rate. The monochrome CRT uses P4 white phosphor.
The 1.4 Meg floppy disk is on the Front Panel mP bus. Waveforms, files, and
programming data may be uploaded and downloaded through the floppy disk
drive.
The power supply is an pre-regulator inverter switching supply composed of a
primary rectifier, a housekeeping supply, pre-regulator, the inverter switching
circuit, output rectifiers, 15 V regulators, an alarm sensing circuitry that monitors
for overvoltage, overcurrent, and over temperature conditions, and the alarm
logic circuitry that shuts down the inverter switching circuitry in the event of a
problem.
The mains AC voltage is rectified to provide the drive power to the pre-regulator
switching circuitry. A line voltage switch sets the supply to operate on a nominal
voltage of either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. On 230 V operation, the primary
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–3
Theory of Operation
rectifier acts as a full-wave bridge rectifier; for 115 V operation, the primary
rectifier is configured as a full-wave voltage doubler.
The primary bridge rectifier is protected by the mains line fuse and surge
suppressors. A mains line filter at the input of the power supply reduces
conducted and radiated EMI from and to the AM700. Additional components in
the rectifier output provide line filtering and common-mode noise rejection for
further reduction of conducted electromagnetic interference. Input surge current
and overvoltage protection components are included in the input rectifier circuit
to prevent major component damage in the event that incorrect line voltage is
applied to the AC input.
Housekeeping Supply. A second power supply provides the housekeeping (or
keep-alive) power source. This supply provides power to the logic circuitry that
controls the power supply STBY/ON logic circuitry. It is supplied through a
transformer that is wired with the power line switch to provide the correct
voltage to the primary for either line voltage. The rectifiers for the + and –14.5 V
housekeeping supply are full-wave with capacitive filtering of the rectified
voltages. The filtered voltages are regulated by 3-terminal regulators. Both sides
of the transformer secondary are fused with self-healing fusing devices. One of
the sensing signals (LINE SENSE) to the power supply logic circuitry is
developed from the secondary of the housekeeping supply transformer.
Floating Power Supply. In CRT display instruments, these supplies are located on
the Generator board (A5). In LCD flat panel display instruments, the floating
supplies are part of the power supply board.
The floating power supply provides the isolated voltages to power the analog
audio generator. This isolation permits the generator outputs to float with respect
to chassis ground. The +22 V and –22 V outputs of the power supply power a set
of 3-terminal regulators that provide the +15 V, +5 V, and –15 V to the Generator
board. Those voltages, along with the +22 V and –22 V voltages and the floating
return line are connected to the Generator board through J12 on the power supply
board.
AM700 Circuit Description
The remainder of this section provides more information regarding circuit
operation of the AM700. It is arranged by assembly (board number) and follows
the schematic diagram in order. Refer to the appropriate schematic diagram in the
diagrams section to follow the circuit descriptions. Simplified block diagrams
are provided in the circuit descriptions. Diamond symbols in the blocks indicate
the schematic diagram or diagrams associated with that functional block. More
detailed block diagrams are also included in the diagrams section of this manual.
3–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Schematic diagrams are numbered sequentially by circuit board, for example,
A5 diagram 3 and A6 diagram 3.
Analog Acquisition Board (A1A1)
Analog audio signals applied to the CHA and CHB XLR connectors are digitized
for application to the DSP for processing. A small over/underrange circuit board
assembly, that is physically attached to the Analog Acquisition board, determines
if the applied analog input signal is overrange (signal too big for application to
the A/D converter) or underrange (signal amplitude that is small enough that a
higher gain step or less attenuation should be used to provide a better dynamic
range signal to the A/D converter). The gain or attenuation of the input circuitry
is set to optimize the signal amplitude to the A/D converter.
Selectable filtering conditions the applied signal for either high resolution or
high bandwidth measurements depending on the selections made from within a
measurement application. The digitized input signals are formatted by the
Sample Transmitter for application to the DSP (digital signal processor).
CHA and CHB Input and Attenuator Boards (diagrams 1 and 2)
Refer to schematic diagrams 1 and 2 of the A1A1 circuit board for the following
circuit description.
Analog Inputs
The Channel A and Channel B Input circuitry are identical in operation. The
Channel A circuitry is described. Like components in Channel B perform the
same function. A simplified block diagram of the analog input circuitry is shown
in Figure 3–2.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–5
Theory of Operation
EMI Filter
XLR
Input
Input
Attenuator
CAL In
Termination
Select
Differential Input
Amplifier and
Gain Select
Underrange
Overrange
Protection
Clamp
To High Bandwidth A/D
Tunable
Notch
Filter
To High Resolution A/D
Auto
Range
Figure 3–2: Simplified block diagram of one channel of the analog input circuitry
Differential analog audio signals are applied to the front panel XLR connectors
on the XLR board, A2 and passed to the CHA input through EMI filters. The
CHA input provides a selection of terminations of 150 W, 600 W, or 200,000 W.
Relays are switched to make the selection under firmware control. There is also a
selection of signal source. Either the front-panel XLR connector or the AM700
generator may be selected, also using relays. If an excessive amplitude signal is
applied while one of the termination resistors is being used, an overload sense
circuit causes a relay to open the circuit path to the termination resistors. The
generator input is used during auto-calibration of the input circuitry to check for
amplitude flatness and for measurements of the generator without using an
external cable.
Attenuators
3–6
Attenuation is actually a combination of attenuator and gain stages that provide a
wide dynamic operating range for the input signal from –22 dBu (62.5 mVRMS)
to +44 dBu (125 VRMS) in 12, 6-dB steps. Input gain ranges are in 6 dB steps
from –22 dBu to +8 dBu and in 12 dB attenuator steps (with intermediate 6 dB
gain steps) from +8 dBu to +44 dBu. Autoranging is normally selected to
automatically switch the gain based on the level of the input signal, however,
manual range setting is available to the user. Relay switching and solid-state
relays are used to select the various attenuation and gain settings. Control signals
for the relays are applied through the Control Register, U103.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
At the output of the Attenuator a clamp circuit across the two sides of the
differential signal prevents the signal from exceeding + or –10 V. This clamp
protects the Input Amplifier from the accidental application of excessive signal
amplitudes that would damage it. If the autorange function is enabled, the
attenuator will be switched to the appropriate range for the applied signal.
Gain Selection. Both sides of the differential input signal are handled on different
paths through the attenuator and gain stages. The positive phase of the signal is
applied to U3A, and the negative side is amplified through U3B. These gain
stages may be set for unity gain, 6 dB gain, or 12 dB gain. The separate outputs
are then applied to the Combining Amplifier, U4.
Differential-to-SingleEnded Amplifier
Amplifier U4 converts the differential audio signal into a single-ended signal.
This stage may be set for either unity gain or 18 dB gain. The overall gain is the
sum of the gain from the previous amplifiers and the input amplifier in dB. The
output of U4 may be viewed with an oscilloscope at TP6 for troubleshooting the
input circuitry. With an input signal applied, the output at TP6 should range
between 1 and 2 VRMS, with 2 VRMS being full scale to the A/D converter.
Tunable Notch Filters (diagram 3)
Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A1A1 circuit board for the following circuit
description.
Notch Selection
At the input to the Notch Filter, a solid-state relay, U35, either selects the notch
filter or permits the audio signal to bypass the filter completely. At the output of
the notch filter, another solid-state relay, U36 selects either the output of the
notch filter or the bypass signal to be applied to the A/D Converters. When in
use, the notch filter is tuned to the fundamental frequency so that it is notched by
20 dB. The notched signal is then amplified by 20 dB. This increases the
amplitude of the harmonic content in the signal so that harmonic distortion
measurements may more easily be made. The 20 dB gain is later removed from
the measurement readouts of harmonic distortion.
Multiplying DAC
The center frequency of the notch is determined by the DSP. Binary data applied
to U29 determines the gain that is applied to the state variable notch, thus setting
its center frequency. At the notch frequency, the amount of signal passed is
reduced by greater than 20 dB. The current output steps from U29 are converted
to voltage by U33A, and the steps are reintegrated by U33B.
The reintegrated and out-of-phase signal is fed back to the input minus pin of
U31A where it is summed with the incoming analog signal. That output signal is
also summed with the input signal and the minus input of operational amplifier
U31B where it subtracts from the output of the operational amplifier at the notch
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–7
Theory of Operation
frequency. The notch has a Q of 2.7 and a depth of greater than 20 dB throughout
its 20 kHz tuning range.
Test points, TP11 for CHB and TP12 for CHA, are provided for viewing the
signal at the output of the notch filter. Analog ground is available at TP10.
A/D Converters (diagram 4)
Channel A and Channel B of the High Resolution A/D Converter are identical in
operation as are Channel A and Channel B of the High Bandwidth A/D
Converter. Figure 3–3 is a simplified diagram of the Channel A A/D Converter.
Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A1A1 circuit board for the following circuit
description.
Input Buffer and 5 V
Clamp
Anti-Aliasing Low Pass
Filter
3–8
In the input to the High Resolution A/D Converter, a unity-gain buffer, U45A
and + and –5 V clamp isolates the input of the A/D converter from the output of
the Input Amplifier (or notch filter) and prevents overload of the A/D Converter
IC.
The anti-aliasing low pass filter, U60B, is a 3-pole, bessel filter. The 3 dB rolloff point is at 150 kHz so within the 24 kHz bandwidth of interest there is
minimal phase shift.
Single-ended to
Differential Converter
The output of U60B is fed to the plus input of U58, the High Resolution A/D
Converter. It is also fed to the inverting (minus) input of U60A, a unity-gain
inverting buffer. The output of this state provides the negative differential side of
the input signal to the A/D Converter.
High Resolution A/D
Converter
The High Resolution A/D Converter, U58, is a two-channel delta-sigma
converter. Both Channel A and Channel B differential signals are applied to the
converter inputs. The analog input signal is converted to a serial digital data
stream with a L/R output signal provided to indicate to following devices when
the data applies to the left channel and when it applies to the right channel. The
A/D Converter also outputs a serial clock (1SCLK) used to synchronize the High
Resolution output data into the Sample Transmitter (diagram 5). The High
Resolution analog data is 64 times oversampled.
Offset DAC
The Offset DAC, U81, converts serial digital data to analog output voltages on
its outputs. During calibration, the amount of offset seen in the analog channels
is measured. That measurement determines a calibration constant used to derive
the offset correction voltages to the A/D Converters. In the High Resolution A/D
Converters, that offset is applied to the 150 kHz anti-aliasing filters. The offset
corrections for the High Bandwidth A/D Converter are applied to the A/D
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Converter offset inputs. The high resolution A/D Converter also contains
circuitry to measure and store DC offset and subtract that value form all
readings. This offset value is updated each time a different measurement
application is selected or when requested through the calibration menu.
CH A HBW
Low-Pass
Filter
High BW A/D
Clamp
CH B HBW
R Data
L Data
Convert CLK
R Offset
L Offset
Low-Pass
Filter
12.288 MHz
CH A HIRES
Unity-Gain
Buffer
R Offset
Low-Pass
Filter
Clamp
L Offset
CH B HIRES
Unity-Gain
Buffer
Low-Pass
Filter
Differential
Converter
Differential
Converter
20 Bit /
18 Bit A/D
Converter
12.288 MHz
Control In
Control CLK
Control
DAC
Load
R Offset
L Offset
R Offset
L Offset
High Res
A/D
12.288 MHz
Xtal
Oscillator
L/R Serial Data
L/R
SCLK
CAL-Busy
Offset CAL
12.288 MHz
Divide
by 4
3.072 MHz
Figure 3–3: Simplified block diagram of the high resolution analog to digital
converter
80 kHz Low Pass Filter
The analog bandwidth of the Input Amplifier is approximately 300 kHz. The
operating bandwidth of the High Bandwidth A/D Converter is approximately
96 kHz. The 80 kHz low-pass filter, FL10, is an 11-pole filter hybrid circuit that
sharply limits the bandwidth of the signal applied to the A/D Converter. At
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–9
Theory of Operation
96 kHz, the roll off is better than 90 dB. A servo circuit following the filter
(U122 and associated components), looks at the DC offset of the output and
feeds back an offsetting signal to the filter. At the output of the filter, the DC
offset is reduced to a few millivolts.
High Bandwidth A/D
Converter
Decimating Filter
In the High Bandwidth A/D Converters, the left and right signals are applied
single-ended. Both channels also have separate serial data outputs instead of
being interleaved as in the High Resolution A/D Converter.
This device provides the clocking signals to the High Bandwidth A/D Converter.
Although the decimated data from the A/D is derived, it is not currently used by
the AM700 software.
Sample Transmitter (diagram 5)
A simplified block diagram of the Sample Transmitter is shown in Figure 3–4.
The Sample Transmitter formats data from the A/D Converters into a form that
can be applied to the DSP. Data from the A/D Converters does not follow a
standard format, and both A/D Converters, High Resolution and High Bandwidth, output data in different formats. This means that each data stream must be
reformatted into a pattern that the Sample Transmitter ASIC, U120, can use.
Both transmit and receive capabilities are included in the Sample Transmitter
ASIC. A single bit is set to switch between using the device as a transmitter or as
a receiver. Refer to schematic diagram 5 of the A1A1 circuit board for the
following circuit description.
3–10
Format PALS
These PALs, U117, U118, and U119, accept data from the A/D Converters and
format it into data streams that contain a Start bit, a Stop bit, and the appropriate
number of bits between that are the digitized audio signal. A second job of these
PALs is to accept the eight bits that define the gain and attenuation settings and
encode them into a four-bit signal that tells the Sample Transmitter ASIC how
much shift is needed to restore the actual input audio signal level.
Sample Transmitter
The formatted serial data is received from the Format PALS and shifted as
necessary to remove the gain and attenuation from the signal that was applied
prior to being digitized by the A/D Converters. That data is then arranged into
eight-bit data bytes to be sent to the DSP. A block of nine bytes is sent to the
DSP. The first byte defines the channel source of the data; the remaining eight
bytes are 32 bits of left data followed by 32 bits of right data. A Start bit,
TIDENT, goes high at the first byte, then low for the remaining bytes of the data
block. The data is clocked into the DSP by the TCLK signal. (In the block
diagram of Figure 3–4, this is block labeled Transfer Control.) Those signals are
applied to the DSP board through connector J26, shown on diagram 6. A trigger
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
bit is included as the LSB bit of the data. That bit is set high or low depending
on the state of the output of the trigger circuitry.
Data (24 Bits)
Control (6 Bits)
Eye Data In
Eye Data Start
Parallel Input
from DSP
Serial Input
from
Eye Sample
Eye Data Clock
Left Data In
Left Data Start
Left Data End
Right Data In
Right Data Start
Right Data End
Bit Clock
Control (10 Bits)
Serial Input
from ADCs
or AES/EBU
Receiver
Left Data In
Left Data Start
Left Data End
Right Data In
Right Data Start
Right Data End
Bit Clock
Control (10 Bits)
Serial Input
from ADCs
or AES/EBU
Receiver
Master Control (5 Bits)
Master Clock
Transfer
Control
Transfer Clock
Start Flag
Data (8 Bits)
Master Control
and
Global Signal Distribution
Figure 3–4: Sample transmitter block diagram
Diagnostics
As the normal data through the Sample Transmitter is highly uncorrelated, it is
difficult to troubleshoot the logic circuitry. To overcome this problem, the
diagnostic routine at power up uses known test patterns to check that the various
sections of the formatting logic are working properly and bits are not being
missed or dropped.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–11
Theory of Operation
Calibration, Control Registers, Interface, and Power Supplies (diagram 6)
Refer to schematic diagram 6 of the A1A1 circuit board for the following circuit
description. The circuitry shown on this diagrams is composed of unrelated
circuitry that includes the calibration test signal generator, the TTL trigger input
circuit, the isolated power supplies for the A/D Converters, and a 72-bit serial
control register used to store the controlling signals for switching the attenuators,
gain settings, and input terminations. Other control bits determine the setting of
the notch filter frequency and control the calibration sine-wave oscillator and
square-wave chopper.
Calibration Signal Source
Two calibration signals to the analog acquisition circuitry are provided. One is a
5 V, 120 Hz, symmetrical square-wave signal. The other is a highly accurate
±2.5 V sine wave. The square-wave signal is produced by chopping between a
precision 5 V voltage reference and ground. When this precise duty-cycle square
wave is AC-coupled, it provides a ±2.5 V reference used to calibrate the gain of
the A/D Convertors and signal path.
A test point, TP31, is provided to check this signal using an oscilloscope. Test
points are also provided to check the precision 5 V reference and the output of
the sine-wave oscillator. Switching relays under control of signals from the
Serial Control Register are applied to a relay driver, U82, to select the calibration
signals and direct them to the channel being calibrated. During calibration, offset
and gain calibration constants are derived. These are used to correct offset and
gain shifts due to thermal effects and component aging. Maximum accuracy for
measurements is obtained immediately after a calibration cycle.
Serial Control Register
The Control Register, U116, is a 72 bit serial register. It is formed by a series of
registers mounted on a SIMM chip. Serial control data bits are loaded from the
DSP. When any control bit is changed, all 72 bits must be re-sent to the register,
but when the data is latched, only those bits that have changed are written to the
register output pins.
Isolated Power Supply
Power to the isolated power supply is provided from the + and –15 V sources.
Test points are provided to check these inputs. These inputs are also separately
fused on the board by 5 A fuses, F3 and F4. Additional filtering is done on each
side of these sources before being applied to three-terminal regulators. There are
two three-terminal regulators with + 5 V output and two more with –5 V output.
Test points are provided on each of these outputs to verify the voltage levels. The
isolated supplies are used to provide power to the A/D Converters to limit the
introduction of noise to the converters.
Interface Status
Read-back Register
3–12
Interface status reports under- and over-range conditions, CAL BUSY, and input
overload conditions. The status bits are parallel loaded in read-back register
U109 and clocked out serially. There is also a read-back signal that is serially
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
loaded. That path permits a diagnostic routine to write serial data on the
CONTROLAIN data line and read it back to determine if the control path is
functioning correctly. The CAL BUSY signal tells the DSP that a calibration is
in progress.
TTL Trigger Input
A TTL trigger signal input is applied to a Schmitt trigger device, U111D. The
output of the Schmitt trigger is buffered by U121C. When U121C is enabled, a
trigger event is output to the Sample Transmitter where it is included as the LSB
bit of the digitized audio data.
Over/Under Range Board (A1A7)
This assembly is a small circuit board that is physically attached to the A1A1
Analog Acquisition board. Its circuitry is composed of comparators used to
determine if the applied analog input signal is overrange (signal too big for
application to the A/D converter) or underrange (signal amplitude that is small
enough that a higher gain step or less attenuation should be used to provide a
better dynamic range signal to the A/D converter).
The fixed input of the comparators is supplied through a voltage divider circuit.
One output of the divider is the voltage that is the overrange level and the other
is the underrange level. The analog signal from the A and B Input Attenuators
(after the gain and attenuation stages) is applied to the comparators. The output
of each comparator is applied to a latch circuit that holds the state of the
comparison. A (CLRORANGE) (clear overrange) signal is applied to the latches
to clear the states in preparation for a new comparison.
Those states are applied to a data selector, U5, that is checked to determine if
over- or under-range conditions exist. If either condition is found, the control
signals to the Channel A or Channel B Input Attenuator boards are modified to
change the gain or attenuation as needed to adjust the input signal level to the
A/D converters. The CHA/(CHB) SEL signal switches the data selector between
the Channel A and Channel B range states so each channel can be checked
separately.
XLR Connector Board (A2)
The XLR connector board interfaces between the input and output XLR
connectors and the Analog Acquisition, Analog Audio Generator, and Digital
Audio circuit boards. Each of the XLR connector signal lines is fed through EMI
filters to reduce the affects of external electromagnetic pickup through the
connectors and attached cabling. The Digital Audio Output connector includes
transformer T1 to couple the digital audio signal, as required by the AES
standard for digital audio signals.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–13
Theory of Operation
Digital Audio Board (A3)
The information for the A3 digital audio board is provided in two manners. First
is a discussion of the digital audio board functions as related to the user
interface. The first discussion follows the functional operation of the board. The
second part of the discussion more closely follows the schematic layout for the
digital audio board.
Digital Audio Board
Functional Description
Digital audio signals from the front panel XLR connectors or the rear panel
connectors (BNC, optical, or, XLR) are processed for application to the DSP
(Digital Signal Processor) circuit board. The Digital Audio board is composed its
own DSP, the Digital Generator, and the Digital Receiver.
Digital Audio Board Terminology. The following terms are used in the discussion
of the functions of the digital audio board.
H
Interface Signal. This is the voltage versus time waveform present on the
AES interface cable. The voltage changes represent a serial bit stream of 1’s
and 0’s. It is characterized by digital waveform parameters including:
amplitude, clock frequency, jitter, phase (relative to another interface signal),
and eye opening.
H
Audio Data. This is the digital data conveyed by the interface signal. It can
be characterized by audio signal measurements such as level, distortion,
frequency, channel separation, and so on.
Main Audio Data Generation. Main Audio data generation includes both the AES
and the DSP generator modes. A simplified block diagram of the digital
generator is shown in Figure 3–5. Either of these generators may be used to
produce the same signals capable of being produced by the High Resolution
analog generator. In addition, the AES/EBU digital generator has a jittered sine
wave that is used to jitter modulate the digital signal to test for jitter immunity of
a circuit or device under test.
3–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Frequency
Offset
XTAL
7
Select
INT
ACQ CLK
Reference
Generator
AES IN
9
DARS IN
9
XLR (Rear)
U88
U145
PRGM
Gain
U107,Q7,Q8
Encoder
U108
Cable
Simulator
XLR (Front)
BNC (Rear0
AMPL 0 – 9
AES3 Waveform
Generator
Received
Reference
Data
5
DSP Port (Rear)
Synchronous
Serial
Interface (SSI)
Received
Audio
Data
Optical (Rear)
Bit and Frame Clocks
Phase Offset
and
Jitter Generator
2
4
Phase and Jitter
Values
VUCP, Block Start
SSI,SCI
DSP
Serial
Control
RAM
1
1
Host Port
10
Counter
8
Sample
Transmitter
3
To CPU
Figure 3–5: Digital audio generator simplified block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–15
Theory of Operation
User Controlled Audio Data Parameters. The user can set the following software
controlled audio data parameters for the digital signal generator: waveform,
frequency, amplitude, audio sample rate, number of bits, dither, channel status,
and user bits. Changes to these signal parameters involve no hardware beyond
that required to communicate from the CPU to the Digital Audio Board.
The hardware supporting the normal operation of these functions consist of the
following circuitry blocks:
H
Power Input. Power to the digital audio board is supplied through the cable
connected to J30. The +5 V source is protected by an on-board 2 A fuse.
H
DSP Core. The DSP core circuitry is composed of the DSP chip, and address
decoder, a random-access memory SIMM, and the host interface buffers. A
simplified block diagram of the DSP core is shown is Figure 3–6.
H
Clock Sources. There are two clock sources to the DSP. A crystal clock
circuit supplies a 12.288 MHz OSC signal to the timing generator PAL
circuit that produces the DSP clock signal. That clock signal is multiplied by
the DSP to provide an internal DSP clock of 39.74 MHz. The second clock
is a differential clock signal from the Analog Acquisition circuit board on
J31 pins 39 and 40. It is a more accurate 12.288 MHz clock that provides the
digital generator output timing.
H
DSP Resets. The reset to the DSP is a combined reset signal: the power-on
reset and a reset from the CPU. At power up, the DSP is held in reset until
the power and PLL has stabilized. The active low reset from the CPU is
applied to the Digital Audio board on J31 pin 33.
When the reset (DSPRST) is asserted (low), the DSP is initialized and held
in the reset state until the reset line goes high. This reset signal is widespread
on the Digital Audio board.
3–16
H
Host Port. The CPU and the DSP communicate through the host interface on
J31. Two buffers between the CPU and the DSP isolate the two devices from
each other when they are not communicating. One buffer isolates the control
signal and the second is a bidirectional parallel data buffer.
H
Interconnection Cables. The power cable on J30, the host port cable on J31,
the rear panel cable on J27, the sample transmitter cable on J32, and the front
panel cable on J29 provide the interconnections to and from the Digital
Audio Board. Check that they are properly seated and securely connected.
H
Variable interface clock phase. Main output phase changes with respect to
Ref output phase.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
RAM_CE
Address
Decoder
A(0 –15)
Address
RAM
Control
1
D(0 – 23)
12.288 MHz
Oscillator
(STX_CE)
(PHASE_CE)
(ENCJIT_CE)
(COUNT_CE)
Data
1
Control
9
A(0 –15)
Address
Timing
Generator
Address
DSPCLK
D(0 – 23)
Data
9
To/From
Sample Transmitter
Phase Shift Control
AES Encoder Control
Jitter Control
Frequency/Phase Counter
DSP
SSI
Reset
Control
(DSPRST)
2
3
Generator Clock
Generator Data
DSP Port
1
8
(RST)
SSI Interface
and
Sample
Transmitter
Host Reset
ONCE
Port
1
Serial Control
10
Host
Port
1
Serial Control
of Frequency Synthesizer
and ADC
Serial
Control
Registers
Control
Functions
10
Host Cable
to CPU Board
Decimal Point is
Power ON Indicator
Figure 3–6: Digital audio board DSP section block diagram
H
Interface jitter generation. Works only with the jittered sine-wave waveform.
H
Cable simulator. Rolls off the digital waveform to the front panel XLR
output connector.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–17
Theory of Operation
H
Variable interface amplitude. Controls both the XLR and BNC output signal
amplitude in a 5:1 XLR to BNC ratio.
User Controlled Interface Parameters. The user can make the following parameter
changes to control the generated digital audio interface signal. Control of these
parameters depends on correct operation of specific hardware circuitry on the
Digital Audio board.
H
Interface clock source selection. These selections are: Follow Audio,
Variable, or Ref In.
H
Variable interface clock frequency. Available for use at sample frequencies
other than 48 kHz.
The second synthesizer circuit is similar to the first with a loop filter and
amplifier that drives a varactor in the second oscillator. This oscillator has an
output that is fed to a current-to-ttl converter to produces complementary
OFFSET and (OFFSET).
Reference Output Generation. The AES Reference output signal is present when
the AM700 is on. The reference clock frequency is the same as the main output
clock frequency. The variable main output parameters (jitter, amplitude, cable
simulator) do not affect Ref output. The audio data and channel status of the
Reference signal is fixed.
Digital Receiver. A simplified block diagram of the digital receiver is shown in
Figure 3–7. The following functional blocks receive the digital audio signal.
H
Source selection. A solid-state FET switch selects the source of the digital
audio signal.
H
AGC. The input signal is applied to the AGC circuit to provide about a 5 V
peak-to-peak signal at TP3 for any of the selected inputs.
H
Auto-equalizer. Compensates for rolloff of the digital waveform from the
AGC output at TP3. The compensated waveform is on TP19. The Auto
Equalization circuitry provides a controllable amount of peaking to the
leading edge (or top) of the digital square-wave signal. Rolled off signals are
peaked to produce a flatter top signal while peaked signals are rolled off to
produce a flatter top signal.
With AGC and auto equalization, the AM700 is able to lock on to a wide
dynamic range of input signals that may be applied from external sources.
H
3–18
AES decoder. The AES decoder decodes the serial data stream and outputs
data and clock signals to the Sample Transmitter.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
H
Data formatter. The Data Formatter creates the start and stop bits for the
serial data from the AES Decoder. These bits control the formatting of the
serial data into parallel data bytes in the Sample Transmitter.
H
Sample transmitter. The sample transmitter arranges the serial data into
eight-bit data bytes to be sent to the DSP circuit board.
Input
6
11
Eye Sampler
Source Select
From Generator
XLR (Front)
BNC (Rear)
Optical (Rear)
AGC
U110A,
U111,
U112A
Eye Source
Eye/Jitter
Sampler
U109
U130
Gain
Phase
Error
EQ In
Auto
Equalization
EQ Out
3
Sample PLL
U113A,U122,
U123,Q16,Q17
Eye
3
Eye Source
12
Sample
Transmitter
To DSP
U101
AES1
In Source
AES2
9
Sample
Transmitter
Main Decoder
U86
XLR (Rear)
Reference
Decoder
EQ Level
3
U87
ADC
Gain
8
Data
Formatter
U102
TRI SRD
To Serial Control
U137
Figure 3–7: Digital audio receiver simplified block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–19
Theory of Operation
Digital Interface Tester
Measurement Functions
The digital audio board has circuitry that supports the following interface
measurements. These are the qualities of the serial data waveform itself and not
the coded audio data.
H
Amplitude. A DC level from the AGC circuit provides a measure of the
input signal level.
H
Cable loss. A DC level from the auto equalization circuit provides a measure
of the signal degradation (rolloff) caused by the transmission path.
H
Clock frequency and relative phase. A digital counter cycles through a series
of measurements. These measurements provide the numbers for the Main
Sample Frequency, the Reference Sample Frequency, and the Phase
Difference (Main versus Ref) readouts in the Eye Diagram display.
H
Eye diagram. Data for the eye diagram is generated by an equivalent-time
sampling circuit. The eye diagram display will not appear if the eye/jitter
phase-lock-loop circuit is not locked to a valid input signal (such as when the
signal is too noisy, has too much jitter, or is outside the sample frequency
range). The output of the sampler is sent to the DSP by the Sample
Transmitter. The DSP plots the eye diagram and derives the Peak-to-Peak
Jitter readout in the Eye Diagram display.
H
Jitter spectrum. Data for the jitter spectrum display is generated by real-time
sampling of eye/jitter phase-lock-loop phase error signal. The output of the
sampler is sent to the DSP by the Sample Transmitter. The DSP performs a
FFT on the data to produce the jitter spectrum display.
H
LF Rejection 120 Hz/1200 Hz. The low frequency rejection of the eye/jitter
phase-lock-loop circuit is selectable between 120 Hz and 1200 Hz. For the
Eye diagram jitter components below the selected cutoff frequency are
reduced. In Jitter Spectrum display, this filtering effect is compensated out
by software to maintain the jitter spectrum flatness.
H
X1/X8 Jitter Gain. With a low-jitter signal, the amplifier gain for the jitter
spectrum display may be switched from unity to X8 gain to increase the jitter
amplitude for better digitization thereby decreasing the noise floor. The X8
gain is compensated out by the software to maintain constant reference level
in the jitter spectrum display.
H
Equalization Bypass. In Jitter Spectrum mode only, the auto-equalization
circuitry is bypassed. This provides a truer representation of the effects of
transmission path induced jitter on an unequalized receiver.
Reference Receiver. The Reference Receiver, also shown as part of Figure 3–7,
decodes the reference input digital audio signal and supplies timing signals for
relative timing measurements. The Reference Receiver depends on the following
circuitry for proper operation.
3–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
H
Source Selection. A solid-state FET switch selects the source of the AES
reference signal from either the AES Ref input or, when the main input
selection is From Generator, the Reference output.
H
The decoded data is applied to the DSP through the Data Formatter and
Sample Transmitter just as for the main audio signal.
DSP Mode. The DSP Mode overrides the normal (AES) mode generator. Control
of the main output is disabled. DSP mode provides a direct I/O path to the
Digital Audio board DSP through the DSP port connector.
The DSP mode requires an external clock. If an external clock is not present in
DSP mode, then all control and measurement of the interface parameters is
suspended until returning to the AES mode.
Digital Signal Processor (diagram 1)
The following portion of the Digital Audio board circuit descriptions follows the
layout of the schematic diagrams. Some information will be duplicated from the
previous discussion, but is included again with references to the circuit schematic diagrams.. The Digital Audio board is composed of the Digital Signal
Processor, the Digital Generator, and the Digital Receiver. A simplified block
diagram of the DSP part of the digital audio board was shown previously in
Figure 3–6. In the DSP board circuitry, there are local registers, an analog
interface port, a DMA interface, and fast static memories that reside on the port
A and port B processor buses. Refer to schematic diagram 1 of the A3 circuit
board for the following DSP circuit description.
Digital Audio Board DSP
The DSP circuitry on diagram 1 is composed of the DSP chip, U4, address
decoder U5, random-access memory SIMM U98, and the host interface buffers,
U99 and U100.
The DSP chip, U4, is a 24-bit general purpose digital signal processor. Physically, it is a 132 pin flat-pack integrated circuit. It has a host interface for communications with the CPU of the AM700, a synchronous serial interface, a 24-pin
data bus, a 16-pin address bus, and control pins for handling bus control and
interrupts. The DSP also has an on-board phase-lock loop (PLL) circuit.
DSP Data and Address Buses. The data and address buses of the DSP provide
access to external memory and other devices on the DSP bus. The address
decoder, U5, provides the required chip selects so the DSP can address individual devices on the common bus. There are no other controlling devices on the data
bus of the DSP so no provisions are needed to grant bus control away from the
DSP.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–21
Theory of Operation
DSP RESET. At power up, the DSP is held in reset until the power and PLL has
stabilized. The RESET input is a Schmitt trigger. When (DSPRST) is asserted
(low), the DSP is initialized and placed into the reset state. The DSPRST signal
is widespread throughout the Digital Audio board.
Mode/(IRO) Lines. After the DSP leaves the reset state, the mode setting input
pins are switched to interrupt request inputs (IRQA, IRQB, and NMI). IRQA and
IRQB can be programmed to be level sensitive or negative edge triggered. NMI
(non-maskable interrupt) is negative edge triggered and triggering occurs at a
voltage level.
Analog PLL Pins. The DSP PLL has dedicated power and ground pins. These pins
are connected to the common +5 V supply and the common digital ground for
the DSP chip. The PLL output clock, CKOUT is a 50% duty cycle clock that is
synchronized to the internal processor clock when the PLL is enabled and
locked. The CKOUT polarity control pin (CKP) is strapped to ground through
R7 to make the CKOUT polarity the same as the EXTAL DSPCLK signal. The
PLL initialization input, PINIT, is pulled up to +5 V through R6 to permanently
enable the PLL. During hardware reset, the high value of the PINIT pin causes
the internal clocks to be derived from the PLL VCO output. After hardware
reset, the state of the PINIT pin is ignored. When the PLL is locked to the proper
phase and frequency of the EXTAL input clock, the PLOCK signal is asserted
and the PLL Locked LED, DS1, will be on. This is a reliable indication of lock
only after the hardware reset is exited.
Host Interface Buffers
DSP RAM
3–22
The CPU and the DSP communicate through the host interface. Two buffers
between the CPU and the DSP isolate the two devices from each other when they
are not communicating. Data is passed both ways by U99, a bidirectional octal
buffer. Control signals and addresses from the CPU are buffered by U100. The
control signals and the addresses are separately enabled in U100. The control
signals are permanently enabled, but the address bits are not enabled through
U100 until the CPU places addresses on the address inputs pins and issues the
(SBIT) signal. That same signal also enables the data buffer, U99, to pass data in
the direction selected by the HR/(W) control bit from U100.
The DSP RAM, a SIMM device, U98, provides the memory storage space
needed for holding the processed digital data. Read and write control signals
from the DSP control the direction of data flow. The RAM is enabled by the
(RAM CE) signal from address decoder U5. The RAM chip is a 32 bit device,
but only 24 data bits are used. The remaining bits are pulled up to +5 V through
a pull-up resistor pack, R223.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Address Decoder
DSP Clock
Jitter Interrupt
The DSP Address Decoder, U5, is a PAL device. It looks at nine selected DSP
address lines and three of the Data and Address bus control pins, (DPS), (DDS),
and X/Y, and decodes them to produce chip enable control signals: (RAM_CE),
(SID_CE), (STX_CE), (PHASE_CE), (ENCJIT_CE), and (COUNT_CE). DSP
RAM address lines RA15 and RA16 are also decoded here.
A crystal clock circuit, Y1, supplies a 12.288 MHz OSC signal to the timing
generator PAL circuit that produces the DSPCLK signal. That clock signal is
multiplied by the DSP to provide an internal DSP clock of 39.74 MHz.
There is a interrupt to the DSP that is used when jittering the digital output
signal. This interrupt comes at a constant rate to add jitter to the digital output
signal for testing the jitter immunity of a device under test.
Synchronous Serial Interface (SSI) (diagram 2)
Interfacing the serial DSP port on the rear panel to the DSP SSI is done by U59,
the SSI control PAL. The audio sample bits are generated directly at the DSP,
and the control PAL outputs the digital signals with the surrounding bits that are
required for digital signal formats. The control PAL selects whether the clocks
are derived from the generator or the external port. When receiving or sending
digital data through the DSP port, the clock to the SSI shift register is supplied
by the external device.
Sample Transmitter (diagram 3)
The Sample Transmitter formats data from the Main and Reference receivers into
a form that can be applied to the DSP.
Sample Transmitter
A simplified block diagram of the Sample Transmitter was shown previously in
Figure 3–4. The formatted serial data is received from the Format PAL. That data
is then arranged into eight-bit data bytes to be sent to the DSP. A block of nine
bytes is sent to the DSP. The first byte defines the channel source of the data; the
remaining eight bytes are 32 bits of left data followed by 32 bits of right data. A
Start bit, TIDENT, goes high at the first byte, then low for the remaining bytes of
the data block. The data is clocked into the DSP by the TCLK signal.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–23
Theory of Operation
Phase Offset and Jitter Generator (diagram 4)
Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A3 Digital Audio circuit board for the
following discussion.
Jitter DAC
The Jitter DAC, U103, converts a jitter data byte into an analog signal for
insertion into the Phase-Locked Loop. The effect of the insertion produces a high
speed phase modulation of the digital signal that carries the digitized audio
information.
Phase Shift PAL
The phase of the digital signal is another parameter of the digital signal that may
also be adjusted by the user. A PAL, U104, supplies the data and clocks to the
generator encoder PAL, U108. When a phase shift is added, U104 adjust the
amount of phase shift that is applied to the digital signal. This is a fixed phase
shift as opposed to the rapid shifting that is applied to jitter the signal.
Phase-Locked Loop
The phase-locked loop is composed of a phase comparator, loop filter, integrating amplifier, and a voltage-controlled oscillator. The output of the oscillator,
U64, is converted to a TTL signal by the circuit formed by Q12 and Q13, and
applied back to the Clock 0 input of the phase shift PAL, U104.
Generator (diagram 5)
A simplified block diagram of the Digital Audio Generator was shown
previously in Figure 3–5. Refer to that illustration and to schematic diagram 5 of
the A3 circuit board for the following generator circuit description.
Encoder PAL
3–24
The Encoder PAL, U108, generates the digital audio word and the VUCP
(validity, user, channel status, and parity) bits that make the AES format signal.
The AES formatted signal is used directly to drive the optical output circuit, but
additional processing of the signal is needed to drive the XLR and Unbalanced
output connectors. The Left and Right frames are interlaced in the serial digital
stream. When jitter is applied, the Encoder PAL outputs the jitter signal data to
the Jitter DAC, U104 (diagram 4), to add the programmed amount of shifting to
the signal to produce the jitter effect.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Programmable Gain
Digital signal gain is controlled using a programmable current source to a
differential amplifier circuit formed by Q7 and Q8. The programmable current
source DAC, U107, receives 10-bit wide word that is the digital value of the
output current needed for the gain wanted. The converted signal is the current
source for the differential amplifier. The output of the amplifier if fed through a
20 MHz low-pass filter to operational amplifier U72. This filter provides a
smooth transition (15 ns rise and fall time) that reduces a possible EMI source
and preconditions the signal for better transmission characteristics through an
audio cable. The signal for the Unbalanced output connector is taken from the
output of U72, prior to the cable simulation filter.
Cable Simulation Filter
The cable simulator filter is a switchable low-pass filter that produces an effect
simulating distortion of the signal that is inherent in cable transmission. It is a
simple RC roll-off filter. When the filter is not in use, it is bypassed around the
filter by U71, a solid-state switch.
Unity Gain Output
Amplifier
The switched output of U71 is applied to a unity-gain amplifier, U106. This
amplifier buffers the signal that is AC-coupled to the front-panel XLR connector
through A2, the XLR board. A second output of the amplifier is the LOOPBK
signal, a selectable input source to the digital circuitry. This loop-back path is
used to directly apply the digital generator signal to the input of the digital audio
board for testing purposes.
Digital Receiver Input (diagram 6)
A simplified block diagram of the Digital Audio Receiver was previously shown
in Figure 3–7. Refer to that illustration and to schematic diagram 6 of the A3
circuit board for the following digital receiver circuit description.
Input
A solid-state FET switch, U109, is switched to select the source of the digital
audio signal. The input signals are applied to the AGC circuit to provide about a
5 V peak-to-peak signal at the output of U111 (TP3) for any of the selected
inputs. With AGC and auto equalization, the AM700 is able to lock on to a wide
dynamic range of input signals that may be applied from external sources.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–25
Theory of Operation
Frequency Offset (diagram 7)
The circuitry on this diagram allows tuning of the sample rate frequency. There
are two synthesizers in series to produce a wide range of frequencies with fine
resolution. The first synthesizer, U82, receives a clock frequency of approximately 8 to 12 MHz (12.228 MHz for a sample rate of 48 kHz). The synthesizer
devices have a built in phase comparator. A loop filter and following amplifier,
U39B, smooths the output of the synthesizer and drives the tuning varactor of
the oscillator, U78. The oscillator output is fed back to the phase comparator of
the first synthesizer and to an inverting amplifier, Q4. This amplifier converts the
ECL level of the oscillator to a level of approximately 1.5 V p-p to drive the
second synthesizer, U82.
The second synthesizer circuit is similar to the first with a loop filter and
amplifier that drives a varactor in the second oscillator, U79. That oscillator
output is fed to a current-to-ttl converter, Q14 and Q15, which produces
complementary OFFSET and (OFFSET) output signals used for interface clock
generation.
A/D, Frequency/Phase Counter, and Power Distribution (diagram 8)
The circuitry on this diagram covers several unrelated areas of the Digital Audio
board. The A/D Converter, U137, is used to provide the values of equalization
level and the AGC gain level back to the Serial Control PAL. From there, these
values are read back to the DSP for use in the various measurements that require
them for making calculations, one of those being the peak-to-peak amplitude of
the input signal, for example.
Frequency/Phase
Counters
These programmable counters, U139 and U140, are usually programmed to
count the number of master clocks during a given interval. They may be used to
provide a number for measuring the absolute frequency of the master clocks or
the relative frequency difference between a reference and the master clock. These
PALs also generate the SLOW CLOCK signal and the (DSPRST) signal.
Power Distribution
Several voltage regulators are shown in this diagram. They are the on-board
regulators for the +12 V, –12 V, +5 V, –5 V, and –8 V sources. The input power
for these regulators is obtained from the +15 V and –15 V sources which are also
supplied to the Digital Audio board.
A +5 V reference source is developed by U138. This reference is used to produce
two difference reference levels to the A/D converter, U124, that is part of the Eye
Sampler circuit, shown in diagram 11.
3–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
The decoupling capacitors associated with the +5 V power to the various devices
on the Digital Audio board are also shown in this diagram. The +5 V power to
this board is fused by F3, a 2 A fuse. All of the input power lines are provided
with additional decoupling circuits (LC filters) near the power supply connector,
J30.
Decoders (diagram 9)
The Decoder circuitry contain the Main and Reference Decoders, the AES
Reference Generator, and the Timing Generator.
The Main and Reference Decoders accept the serial data streams and decode the
preambles to output the clock signals used to clock the serial data through the
Sample Transmitter. The left and right data samples are both on the serial data
line to the DSP. The word clock is a square-wave signal that is high for left
channel data and low for right channel data. The data is separated later by the
DSP.
The Reference Generator receives timing signals and produces an output that is
encoded as a valid AES Reference signal. The + and – AES REF OUT signals
are available at the rear panel AES REF connectors.
A separate Timing Generator circuit is a PAL that accepts various inputs
including the ACQ clock, a TTL-level clock signal, and generates various timing
signal to other portions of the Digital Audio board.
Serial Control (diagram 10)
Control signals throughout the Digital Audio board are developed in the Serial
Control circuitry. The DSP writes control data to the Serial ID PAL. This PAL
outputs a stream of serial data that defines the control states to be set. This data
loaded into a chain of serial in/parallel out registers that hold the control data bits
between updates. The last carry out of the register is applied to the Serial Status
registers which provide read back path. Also applied to these Serial Status
registers is the status outputs of both the Main and the Reference Decoders. The
status of the decoders then may be read back for input to the DSP through the
Serial ID PAL.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–27
Theory of Operation
Eye Sampler (diagram 11)
The circuitry of the Eye Sampler is an equivalent time sampler used in the
generation of the eye pattern and measurement of the jitter waveform. Either the
incoming Eye Source or the phase error signal is selected for application to an
A/D converter. The 8-bit parallel output of the A/D converter is applied to the
Eye Sampler PAL where the equivalent time samples are chosen as 1 of 27 input
samples. The samples are taken at 127 different phases of the input data to
provide an envelope of samples that describe the incoming waveform when
reconstructed. The outputs of the Eye Sampler are applied to the data formatter
PAL (diagram 3) for formatting before being sent to the DSP by the Sample
Transmitter.
A phase-lock loop (PLL) circuit generates the clock signal for the Eye Sampler.
The INMCK signal (Input Master Clock) at 256 times the sample rate is applied
to the phase comparator of the PLL. The PLL track the slow rate changes of the
master clock. The faster changes that occur in the master clock (derived from the
applied audio signal) is jitter. The control voltage to the VCO is filtered by an
active low-pass filter circuit and buffered by a operational amplifier for
application to the A/D converter when measuring jitter. With a low-jitter
waveform, the amplifier gain may be switched from unity to X8 gain to increase
the jitter amplitude for better digitization.
Auto Equalization (diagram 12)
The Auto Equalization circuitry provides a controllable amount of peaking to the
leading edge (or top) of the digital square-wave signal. Rolled off signals are
peaked to produce a flatter top signal while peaked signals are rolled off to
produce a flatter top signal.
The input signal is applied to a low-pass filter circuit to remove the high
frequency components. This removes any noise glitches from the signal and
provides a uniform rolled off signal for processing. There are two variable gain
stages used in the circuitry. The first is part of an AGC circuit to maintain a
controlled signal amplitude. The second variable gain stage provides the gain
versus frequency characteristics that are used to flatten the digital square-wave
signals. The peaking amplifier adds its output to the signal based on the amount
of roll-off or peaking of the input signal. If the input signal is a very good flat
signal, no added roll-off or peaking is added by the variable gain stage.
3–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Rear Panel Board (A4)
PUSH
Figure 3–8: Digital audio connectors
The Rear Panel board seen in Figure 3–8 is schematically shown in a single
diagram (A4, diagram 1). All the digital audio rear panel connectors interface to
a single 32 pin connector and cable to the Digital Audio board.
AES REF Connectors
The rear panel board provides the interconnections for the various methods of
connecting digital signals in and out of the AM700. These are: OPTICAL IN and
OPTICAL OUT, AES REF IN and AES REF OUT, UNBAL AES IN and
UNBAL AES REF OUT, and the DSP I/O port connector.
The TOSLINK optical connectors contain transducers to convert light to a
TTL-level electrical signal and electrical to light for the in and out connectors
respectively. The AES REF IN and OUT are standard XLR connectors, fed
through isolation transformers. For the UNBAL AES REF IN and OUT, the
connectors are BNC. All the input and output lines are filtered to reduce EMI
effects on the signal lines.
DSP PORT
The user may connect a compatible digital microphone or other compatible
digital signal source directly to the DSP for processing through the DSP Port
connector (pinout shown in Figure 3–9). When the AM700 is receiving data, the
external device supplies the Bit Clock, Frame Clock, and Receive Data. When
sending data, the AM700 supplies Transmit Data that is synchronized with Bit
and Frame Clocks of the external device. Rate 0, Rate 1, Rate 2, Flag 0, and Flag
1 are reserved for future use. The external device may be powered by the + and
–12 V sources provided from the DSP Port connector. These sources are current
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–29
Theory of Operation
limited to about 150 mA. Digital devices requiring more power than available
from these sources may be powered by an external power source.
The DSP port timing diagram is shown in Figure 3–9. The external device
determines the sampling rate. The sampling rate to the AM700 must be no
greater than 48 kHz, and the data must be 16-bit. Bit and Frame Clocks must
always be “clean,” with no extra transitions, while the AM700 is in DSP mode.
For this reason, the AM700 should be set to AES mode when switching the
sample rate of any external device attached to the DSP port. The maximum input
voltage for the DSP port is –0.5 V to +5.5 V. For good noise immunity, the rise
and fall time of the transitions should be less than 100 ns.
NOTE. The DSP generator must also be selected to permit the DSP to acquire
input from the DSP port.
DSP Port
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
15 14 13 12 11 10
1
9
DB-15 FEMALE CONNECTOR
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
Pin 8
Bit Clock
Receive Data
Transmit Data
Rate 2
Rate 1
Rate 0
+12V
–12V
Pin 9
Pin 10
Pin 11
Pin 12
Pin 13
Pin 14
Pin 15
Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
Chassis Ground
Frame Sync
Flag 1
Flag 0
Chassis Ground
Figure 3–9: Digital signal processor port connector
NOTE. In order to meet radiated EMI regulations, the cable used to connect to
the DSP port must be well shielded, and the connector housing must be
conductive. The cable shield must be clamped by the housing where the cable
enters the connector.
3–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Bit Clock
Frame Sync
Receive Data
MSB, SF1
LSB, SF1
MSB, SF2
LSB, SF2
MSB, SF1
LSB, SF1
MSB, SF2
LSB, SF2
Transmit Data
NOTE: All Data is sampled on the FALLING edge of Bit Clock.
Receive Data and Frame Setup
Time Before Falling Bit Clock Edge = 25 ns
Receive Data and Frame Sync Hold
Time After Falling Bit Clock Edge = 40 ns
Signal Level –0.5 V to +5.5 V
Rise and Fall Time < 100 ns
Max Sample Rate = 48 KHz
Data Bits = 16
Figure 3–10: DSP port timing diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–31
Theory of Operation
Analog Generator Board (A5)
A simplified block diagram of the analog generators is shown in Figure 3–11.
The following block diagram description explains the blocks from a functional
point of view. The schematic diagram description is given later.
Block Diagram
Description of the Analog
Audio Generators
There are two analog generators: High Resolution and High Bandwidth. The
simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 3–11. An expanded block diagram
of the DSP section of the generator is shown in Figure 3–12. Each generator has
two channels of output. The High Resolution generator output channels are
independent and can output completely different signals on either channel. The
High Bandwidth Generator outputs the same signal on both channels.
Portions of the analog generator circuitry are floating and require a floating
power supply to provide the operating voltages. Floating the generator helps
break ground loops in a system composed of the generator, a device under test,
and the analyzer. Prior to the flat panel display version of the AM700, the
floating power supply was located on the generator board. With the flat panel
display circuitry installed, the floating power supply is on the power supply
board. Data and control signals between the floating and nonfloating portions of
the circuitry are passed through opto-isolators.
DAC and Filtering Circuits. The high resolution data is 8 X oversampled before
being applied to the right and left DAC for Ch A and Ch B analog signal
conversion. The high bandwidth data passes through a sync and delay circuit to
properly align the data for conversion. The DAC current output signal is
converted to an analog voltage signal and filtered by the appropriate filter circuit.
The high resolution signal path also contains a Low Distortion Mode filter that is
selectable for use when lower signal distortion is needed from the analog
generator.
Output Amplifiers. The output amplifiers have a positive and a negative amplifier
section to produce the differential audio output signal. Each channel amplifier
has an overload detector that senses an overload condition. If an overload occurs,
and OVLD signal automatically switches in additional attenuation to protect the
output amplifiers. The OVLD signal is also applied back to the DSP section for
processing. The outputs of the amplifiers are protected by a clamp circuit that
prevents an external voltage condition from damaging the output amplifiers.
3–32
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
+22 V
From
Power
Supply
+22 V
–22 V
+15 V
–15 V
+5 V
Floating
Power
Supply
–22 V
9
+5 V
Serial
Control
Hi Res
Opto-Iso.
Opto-Iso.
U9,U10
To
CPU
Host Bus
To Generator Floating Circuits
(The floating power supply in on the analog generator board in the
CRT display instruments. It is on the power supply board in the flat-panel
display instruments)
Hi Res
8X
Oversampling
Hi BW
Clocks
Clocks
12.228 MHz
1
Sync and
Delay
Opto-Iso.
U20,U21
Std
BClk
Opto-Iso.
U94
Frame
12.228 MHz
DSP
Section
2
4
5
Right and Left Digital Audio Data
Floating
Ground
Referenced
Ground
ONCE
Port
2
3
OVLD From
Output
Amplifiers
Hi BW
Hi Res
Right & Left
20-bit/18-bit
DAC
(Development)
Low Distortion On/Off
Hi Res
Low-Pass
2 Filter
Hi BW
Ch A
Output
Ampl.
Hi Res
Ch B
Channel A
and Channel B
Gain/
Attenuator
Output
Selector
Ch A
Ch B
6
To Output
Data Selector
Ch B
To Front Panel
Ch A +
Output Z
Selector and
Post Attenuator
Output
Clamp
Ch A –
Ch A
8
OVLD
Ch B
To Acquisition
Ch B+
Ch B
OVLD
2
Ch A –
Ch B
Ch A
OVLD
Output
Ampl.
Opto-Iso.
7
Ch A +
Ch A
To DSP
Ch B
Ch A
HiRes
Low Distortion
Mode Filter
Hi BW
Low-Pass
2 Filter
Hi Res/Hi BW
Hi BW
Ch A
Ch B–
Output
Clamp
Output Z
Selector and
Post Attenuator
Ch B+
Ch B–
Figure 3–11: Analog generator simplified block diagram
Post Attenuator and Output Z Selector. The output impedance at this point is 5 W
per side for a 10 W output source impedance. A post amplification attenuator
providing 42 dB of attenuation is switched in when low amplitude signals are
generated. This attenuator reduces the level of noise associated with the output
amplifier so that the signal to noise ratio remains high at low output amplitudes.
Direct application of the generator signals to the Acquisition board is taken from
the circuitry at this low impedance point.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–33
Theory of Operation
In the flat panel display version of the AM700, two small relay boards are used
to completely isolate the internal generator signal from the cable to the Acquisition board when it is not being sent to the acquisition. This reduces the generator-to-acquisition crosstalk to –140 dB or below. Earlier versions of the AM700
used a relay T-switch on the Acquisition board to shut off the signal when it was
not needed.
The other output impedance choices of either 150 W or 600 W are switched into
the output path as selected by the user. Half of the output impedance minus the
fixed 5 W per side is added to produce the total. For example, for a total of
150 W output impedance, 70 W additional impedance is added to each side.
3–34
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Digital Signal Processor (Generator) (diagram 1)
Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
CERAM
A(0 –15)
Address
Decoder
PAL
Address
Control
RAM
U5
D(0 – 23)
12.288 MHz
U6
U2
Data
CEPO
BCLK
OVLD
2
SCK
Disable
Address
Output
Overload
Opto–
Isolators
U94
BCLK
Reset
and
SSI
Clock
Reset
Select
SCK
DSP
PAL
J15
DSPreset
Clock
and
Data Isolators
U20,U21
U7
Reset_Gen
RST
SSI
To DACs
U4
CEPO
Once
Serial Control
Output and ID
PAL
U87
J4
Clock
and
Data Isolators
U9,U10
Serial
Control
Register
Host
Port
J17
Control
Latches
Decimal Point is
Power ON Indicator
CONTROLS:
Gain
Bandpass Filter
High Res/High BW Mode
Source Impedance
To Controls
Control
Latches
Figure 3–12: Analog generator DSP section block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–35
Theory of Operation
DSP
The generator DSP, U4, develops the digital data that represents the audio test
signal to output from the front panel Analog Generator XLR connectors. It is
programmed by the host CPU via the host interface. The data is clocked out
serially to the generator DACs through the SSI (synchronous serial interface) of
the DSP.
Reset and SSI Clock Pal
The Reset and SSI Clock Pal, U7, allows the output data to be clocked either
directly from the DSP or from a divided version of the 12.288 MHz clock
frequency. These two types of operation are the High Resolution mode and the
High Bandwidth mode. The SCK DISABLE signal controls switching between
the states as shown in Figure 3–13. The resulting waveforms of the clocks and
data stream for the two modes is shown in Figure 3–14. The High Resolution
mode sample rate is 48 kbits per second, and the High Bandwidth mode sample
rate is 192 kbits per second.
Address Decoder
RAM
3–36
There are two chip enables and some memory addressing bits decoded by U5,
the Address Decoder. The chip enable signals are used to enable the Serial
Control Pal and the RAM, U2. The addressing bits (RA15, RA16, and RA17)
are applied to the RAM to control the upper three bits of the RAM addresses.
The RAM, U2, holds the programming for the test signals. The data is loaded
from the CPU through the DSP. Read and write control is provided from the
DSP RD and WR outputs. The chip enable signal (CERAM) is developed from
the Address Decoder, U5.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
High Resolution
SCK Disable
Reset
and
SSI
Clock
BCLK
SCK_DISABLE = Low
To DAC Opto–Isolators
PAL
SCK
To DSP
U7
High Resolution
Waveforms:
SCK
BCLK
High Bandwidth
SCK Disable
SCK_DISABLE = High
Reset
and
SSI
Clock
BCLK
To DAC Opto–Isolators
PAL
SCK
From DSP
U7
High Bandwidth
Waveforms:
SCK
BCLK
Figure 3–13: S-Clock disable used for DSP mode control
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–37
Theory of Operation
High Resolution mode
SSI Clock
Frame
BCLK
STD
Channel A Data
Channel B Data
Channel A Data
Channel B Data
High Bandwidth mode
SSI Clock
Frame
BCLK
STD
Figure 3–14: SSI clock, frame, B clock, and serial data waveform for High Res and High BW modes
Control and I/O (diagram 2)
Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Serial Control PAL
The Serial Control PAL, U87, develops the controlling signals as a stream of
control bits. The control bits are loaded into the Serial Control Register and
latched to the outputs of the register for application to the various devices under
control of the DSP. The serial data stream is buffered by U8 and isolated by U9.
The clocking signal to the Serial Control Register is also isolated, but by U10.
Whenever any control bit changes, the entire register is reloaded.
7-Segment LED. The Serial Control PAL also develops the segment-drive signals
to DS2. This device is available as a diagnostic tool.
3–38
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Host Port
Serial Control Register
Communication between the CPU and DSP is done through the host port, J17. A
bidirectional buffer, U86, isolates the CPU and DSP busses from each other and
controls the direction of data transfer.
The Serial Control Register receives control bits in a serial data stream from the
Serial Control PAL. The register is composed of six, 8-bit serial input shift
registers, for a total of 48 control signal outputs. These bits are used to control
the switching for the Tunable Bandpass Filter, the A Channel and B Channel
Gain/Attenuator selections, the generator output impedance choices, and also to
provide control signals to other devices on the Analog Generator circuit board.
DACs and Current to Voltage Converters (diagram 3)
Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Data and Clock Isolators
The clocks and serial data from the Generator DSP are buffered by U24 to
provide drive the the Clock and Data Isolators, U20 and U21. These isolators
maintain the floating capability of the Analog Generator.
Oversampling Filter
In High Resolution mode, this oversampling filter has interleaved left/right
16-bit serial data at 48 kilosamples/second applied. The filter deinterleaves the
data into left and right 20-bit serial data outputs at 384 kilosamples/second. The
data bits are clocked into the left and right DACs simultaneously by the bit clock
signal, BCKO, at 12.288 MHz. When the complete frame has been received, the
word clock signal, WCKO, tells the DACs to latch the word data and convert.
Data Shifter
In High Bandwidth mode, the interleaved serial data is received at 192 kilosamples/second. There are two paths for the data, a left data path through a 24-bit
data shifter, and an undelayed right data path through U96B. The data shifter is
formed by three, 8-bit serial-in, parallel-out, registers. The eighth bit of each is
the only output used so the left channel data is delayed by 24 bit clocks from the
right channel data to deinterleave the left and right data to the DACs.
Data Selectors
DACs
The Data Selectors, U39 on the left channel and U38 on the right channel, are
driven to select data and clocks for the High Resolution mode or the High
Bandwidth mode of generator operation.
Left and Right DACs are serially loaded with a 20-bit word by the bit clock
signal. At the word clock, the data is converted to a current output that represents
the value of the data word.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–39
Theory of Operation
Current to Voltage
Converters
The current output of the DACs is converted to a voltage level by the Current to
Voltage (I-to-E) converter circuits, U19B on the left channel, and U13B on the
right channel. The components on the minus inputs of the I-to-E converters filter
conversion glitches from the DACs. The output voltage of these devices is
applied to the DAC Low-Pass Filter circuitry for smoothing.
DAC Low-Pass Filters (diagram 4)
Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Filter Paths
The low-pass filter for the A and B DACs (left and right) have two filter paths: a
20 kHz low-pass filter path and a 80 kHz low-pass filter path. These two paths
are in the circuit all the time. The path selection is made at the input to the
Gain/Attenuator circuitry (diagram 6).
20 kHz Low Pass Filter
The 20 kHz low-pass filter is used for the High Resolution mode generators. The
generator output is up to 20 kHz. For high resolution signals, the filter is a
5-pole, linear-phase filter circuit. This means that the active devices serve to
preserve the phase of the signal through the filter to 20 kHz. Output from the
Low Pass Filter is applied to the Tunable Bandpass Filters (diagram 5).
80 kHz Low Pass Filter
Filtering for the High Bandwidth signal, which goes up to 80 kHz, is done by a
hybrid, 11-pole elliptical filter. This filter introduces some DC offset, so the
output is AC coupled to the next stage to eliminate any DC components from the
filtered signal. Output from the 80 kHz low-pass filters is applied directly to the
data selector in the Gain/Attenuator circuitry (diagram 6).
Tunable Bandpass Filters (diagram 5)
Refer to schematic diagram 5 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Filter Paths
3–40
There are two paths for the left and right High Resolution generator signals
relative to the Tunable Bandpass Filters. These are the bypass path and the path
through the tunable filters. The choice is user selectable in the generator
Advanced Analog Controls and is called “Low Distortion” mode when the
bandpass filter is inserted. Either high resolution generator signal or both may be
routed through the tunable filters.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Tunable Bandpass Filter
The Tunable Bandpass Filter is designed to attenuate the second and third
harmonic distortion products from the DACs to improve the already low
distortion characteristics of the high resolution generator signals. Filters are
tunable in two bands for improved noise characteristics. The bands of filter
operation are from 20 Hz to 750 Hz and from 750 Hz to 10 kHz.
The filters are constant-Q filters with a Q of 2.7. A constant-Q filter maintains a
bandwidth that is a constant percentage of the center frequency of the filter.
Second harmonics of the fundamental frequency are attenuated by 10 or more
dB. Any third harmonic products are attenuated by 15 dB or more to attain the
lower distortion output signal. Filter tuning tracks the generator fundamental
frequency. When operating in Low Distortion mode, the filter components add
slightly to the noise floor so that small amplitude output signals will become
noise limited sooner than operating in the bypassed mode.
A Channel and B Channel Gain/Attenuators (Generator Output) (diagram 6)
Refer to schematic diagram 6 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Relay Control Latches
Data Selector
A and B Channel Step
Attenuators
Control signals for setting the state of the A and B Channel step attenuators, and
the gain of the A and B Channel Amplifiers comes from the Serial Control
Register (diagram 2). Those control signals used to drive relays are latched into
two 8-bit registers, U25 and U75. The control signals used to set the attenuators
are applied directly to those devices.
The selection between High Resolution data or High Bandwidth data is made by
data selector U100 in the A Channel and U43 in the B Channel. The data
selectors require a high output impedance to reduce distortion, so the outputs are
buffered by U27B and U28B before being applied to the stepped attenuators. The
buffer outputs are AC coupled to the stepped attenuators to eliminate any DC
components that may have been introduced by various offsets in the preceding
stages.
The attenuation selectors are U26 the A Channel and U31 in the B Channel.
Attenuation settings are in 6 dB steps from 0 (no attenuation of the input signal)
to 36 dB. Control signals for switching are applied from the serial control
register (diagram 2). An additional control signal is applied through the logic
circuitry on the A2 input of the data selectors. That is the overload indication
signal, OVLD. When an overload condition on an output amplifier occurs, the
stepped attenuator for the overload channel is switched to immediately add
16 dB of attenuation to the input signal.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–41
Theory of Operation
A and B Channel Buffers
A Channel and B Channel signals from the stepped attenuators are applied to
buffer amplifiers U27A (A Channel) and 28A (B Channel) to isolate the stepped
attenuator stage from the output amplifiers and provide three gain ranges. The
gain of these amplifiers is separately controlled by more 1-of-8 data selectors in
the inverting input of the amplifiers (U29 in A Channel and U30 in B Channel).
The input resistance and feedback resistance is selectable to provide unity,
+6 dB, or +12 dB of gain for the amplifier in each channel.
A and B Output Amplifiers and Output Z Selectors (diagrams 7 and 8)
Refer to schematic diagram 7 and schematic diagram 8 of the A5 analog
generator circuit board for the following circuit description.
A and B Output Amplifiers
The A and B Channel output amplifiers are identical in circuitry and operation.
The single-ended channel signal is applied to the inverting input of the buffer
amplifiers in the A and B Output Amplifiers (U49A and U55A respectively)
circuitry. This inversion in the operational amplifier makes the overall amplifier
be noninverting. The feedback signal is applied to the noninverting input of the
input buffer amplifiers. A selectable feedback resistance is used to provide two
overall gain settings for the output amplifier: unity and +6 dB. Each of the
output amplifiers has a complementary-symmetry circuit arrangement to form a
push-pull amplifier stage.
The differential output signal from the analog generator is produced by applying
the output of noninverting half of the output amplifiers to a second, almost
identical, unity-gain inverting amplifier whose output is the differential signal to
the output of the noninverting half of the amplifier.
In the flat panel display version of the AM700, two small relay boards are used
to completely isolate the internal generator signal from the cable to the Acquisition board when it is not being sent to the acquisition. This reduces the generator-to-acquisition crosstalk to –140 dB or below. Earlier versions of the AM700
used a relay T-switch on the Acquisition board to shut off the signal when it was
not needed.
Overload Protection. If the output of either half of any output amplifier becomes
overloaded, the voltage across the resistor in the output transistor of the amplifier
increases to a level that turns on the LED of the Overload Indicator opto-isolator.
The output of an active opto-isolator triggers a one-shot multivibrator. An
overload indication will usually occur at the peak of the signal for a short
duration of time.
The one-shot is used to lengthen the output pulse to permit time for the overload
condition to be sensed by the processor. There are two outputs from the one-shot.
One sets an Enable flag that is sensed by the processor. When the flag is set, a
warning indication is displayed to warn the user that an overload condition exist.
3–42
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
The second output is the Overload signal that is applied to the attenuator setting
selector of the overloaded channel. This immediately adds a factor of 16
attenuation to protect the output amplifiers in that channel from damage.
Output Impedance
Selectors
The output impedance selection for the audio analog generator is done with
solid-state relays using control signal from the serial control register (diagram 2).
One-half of the total output impedance is in each side of the differential output.
The straight-through path of the impedance selectors produces an output
impedance of 10 W with 5 W in each side. The other choices are 600 W and
150 W. The resistance values that make up the 600 W and 150 W source
impedances are selected to account for the 10 W in each side that is not able to be
switched out of the output path. Either the 10 W or the 42 dB attenuator remains
in the generator output path to protect it from a short circuit on the output.
Power and Floating Power Supply (diagram 9)
Refer to schematic diagram 9 of the A5 analog generator circuit board for the
following circuit description.
Power Distribution
The incoming power to the A5 audio generator board is applied through J16. The
fusing and decoupling circuitry for the various supplies to the board are shown in
this diagram.
Floating Power Supplies
In LCD color flat panel display instruments, these supplies are located on the
Power Supply board (A11), and the Generator board components for the floating
supply, if present, will not be in use.
The floating power supply provides the isolated voltages to power the audio
generator. This isolation permits the generator outputs to float with respect to
chassis ground. A +22 V supply line provides power to the inputs of three
switching power supplies, U81 (+15 V), U82 (+5 V), and U83 (–15 V). On the
output of the switchers, the filter circuitry is referenced to the analog ground of
the floating audio generator circuitry. To provide the –15 V output, the circuitry
on the output of U83 is arranged in a buck-boost configuration that outputs
negative voltage. The switching waveform is shown in Figure 3–15. The –15 V
switching supply circuit provides approximately 150 mA to the load. The
remaining load current, about 200 mA, is provided from the –22 V source
through R359.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–43
Theory of Operation
[50 kHz
+22 V
A Gnd
–16 V
Figure 3–15: Switching waveform for –15 V floating power supply
Main/CPU Board (A6)
In the host CPU (simplified block diagram shown in Figure 3–16) there are two
RS-232 ports, generator interface port, keyboard interface port, GPIB interface,
free running counter, Host Interface, board registers, bus interface and memories
for data and program storage.
CPU and DSP Bus Interface (diagram 1)
Refer to schematic diagram 1 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
CPU
3–44
The CPU, U64, has a 32 bit data bus and a 32 bit address bus. The address bus
lines to the majority of the devices on the bus are buffered by four octal bus
buffers, U80 through U83. The address bus to the front panel processor shared
RAM is buffered by bidirectional data buffers on diagram 7. The disk drive
addresses are also obtained from these address buffers. Both the data bus and the
address bus are also connected to the DSP board for communication between the
CPU and the DSP.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Memery
Controller
IRQ
To DSP DMA
and
Host Interface
CPU and DSP
Bus Interface
3
NVRAM
Flash EPROM
EPROM
1
DRAM
and
Diagnostic
Display
Bus Arbitration
and
Interrupt
Encoder
Board
Registers
and
Timer 6
5
3
4
System Clock
and Resets,
Counter and
Address
Decoder
Option
Board
2
A8
25
Interrupt
Request
Board
Register
Bits
Bus
Arbitration
Control
Signals
RS232
Serial
Interface
GPIB
I/O Processor
7
4–Wire Interface
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Latch Control Signal
To Front Panel Board
VRAM DAC
and
Floppy Drive
Interface
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
10
11
Video ASIC
and
VRAM
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
To RS232
Connectors
To Keyboard
Connector
To GPIB
Port
Connector
8
RGB & SYNC
To LCD Driver
To VGA Monitor
To Internal Monitor (CRT)
RGB & SYNC
9
To Floppy Disk Drive
Figure 3–16: Simplified block diagram of the A6 CPU board
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–45
Theory of Operation
Interrupt Control
Interrupts to the CPU are multiplexed with the reset levels by U65. The three
interrupt lines provide an indication of an interrupt condition. The states of the
interrupt signals provide an encoding of the interrupt level as seen in Table 3–1.
While the RST040L line to U65 is low, the interrupt lines are connected to all
low inputs. At power up, after the power on reset is removed, all the interrupts
are enabled. As the system operates, various interrupt masks are set to prevent
higher priority activities of the CPU from being interrupted until they are
finished. The sources of interrupts are discussed in the description of U51, the
Interrupt Encoder, shown in schematic diagram 5.
When an interrupt is recognized, the CPU vectors to the appropriate address for
the interrupt level that occurred and processes the interrupt handling routine
found at that address.
Table 3–1: Interrupt level encoding
Requested
interrupt level
Control line status
IPL2
IPL1
IPL0
Interrupt mask level
required for recognition
0
High
High
High
N/A
1
High
High
Low
0
2
High
Low
High
0-1
3
High
Low
Low
0-2
4
Low
High
High
0-3
5
Low
High
Low
0-4
6
Low
Low
High
0-5
7
Low
Low
Low
0-7
CPU Board Memory Map
The system memory mapping of the CPU board is shown in Table A-2 of
Appendix A.
CPU/DSP Host Interface
The Host Interface (HI) provides the communication path between the CPU and
the DSP. The interface handles the following functions:
3–46
H
Permits the CPU to transfer data to and from the DSP (there is no DMA
access through the Host Interface).
H
Provides the path for the CPU to bootstrap the DSP.
H
Allows the DSP to interrupt the CPU using the Host Interrupt pin.
H
Enables the CPU to interrupt the DSP by setting the appropriate bits in the
Interface Control Status register.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
System Clock and Resets, Counter, and Address Decoder (diagram 2)
Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
System Clock
Three clock drivers, U47, U49, and U135, generate the various 25 MHz clocks
used throughout the CPU. These clock drivers are synchronized by the output of
Y2, a 12 MHz oscillator.
Reset
The power supply reset signal (PWRDY) is ANDed with the +5 V voltage, and
the RST line from U20 by AND-gate U59A. When any of those lines is low, the
CPU is reset. The output of U59A is applied to a clock driver, U47, to obtain
added time on the actual reset to the CPU to make sure a reset is completed
before the reset is released from the CPU. Assertion of the reset is the highest
priority interrupt to the CPU.
The power on reset is used to prevent the CPU from random activity while the
power is coming up to the correcting operating level. A manual reset caused by
pressing the reset button may be used to reinitialize the CPU to recover from a
failure. A manual reset is may be used in troubleshooting the AM700, and is not
a normal operating control. A reset aborts any processing in progress when it is
recognized. That processing is not recoverable.
When the reset is removed from the CPU, instructions are fetched from
predetermined vectors to begin the reinitialization of the CPU. After these initial
instructions are fetched, the program begins execution. If an access fault or
address error occurs during this reset processing sequence, a double bus fault is
generated, and the CPU halts operation.
Bus Halt Indicator
Host CPU Reset
Functional Description
If the host CPU (MC68040) indicates that a double bus fault condition has
occurred, LED (DS9) will light up. Hardware reset is required to restart the host
CPU.
There are five input sources that can assert the RESET pin of MC68040 and
DSP96002 and resetting its interface circuitry. They are the following:
H
PowerUp Reset Controller
H
Hardware Reset Dip Switch S6 SW3
H
Host Processor Instruction Reset CMD
H
Power Supply Ready Input
H
Manual System Reset Button
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–47
Theory of Operation
Circuit blocks affected by the power up reset or manual reset are:
Manual System Reset
Counter
Address Decoder
3–48
H
DRAM error detection outputs are masked during and after the reset is
deasserted,
H
DRAM parity is set to even during and after the reset is deasserted, NVRAM
is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
FEPROM is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
All interrupt signals (level 7 – level 1) are masked during and after the reset
is deasserted, DSP96002 is in reset state during and after the reset is
deasserted,
H
MC68040 is in reset state during the time reset is active low, Broad Program
Register(BPR) is reset during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
Time-Out status bit is masked during and after the reset is deasserted. Circuit
blocks affected by the Host CPU software reset are: DRAM error detection
outputs are masked during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
DRAM parity is set to even during and after the reset is deasserted,
.NVRAM is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
FEPROM is write protected during and after the reset is deasserted,
H
All interrupt signals (level 7 – level 1) are masked during and after the reset
is deasserted. The DSP (96002) is in reset state during and after the reset is
deasserted and the Broad Program Register (BPR) is reset during and after
the reset is deasserted.
Pressing the reset button resets both processors and their peripherals.
There is a free running 32-bit counter resident in the host CPU bus. It is a read
only counter. The wrap around time is approx. 19.4 min. The address to the
counter is $50000000.
Four address lines, QADS24 through QADS27, are applied to U79, a 4-to-16
line decoder/demultiplexor, for decoding. Twelve outputs are used as chip selects
and read or write enables. The remaining four outputs are not used. Those same
address lines plus QADS28 through QADS31 are applied to U128 for decoding
into additional chip selects and control signals.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Memory Controller, EPROM, FEPROM, and NVRAM (diagram 3)
Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
EPROM
The EPROM is a 32-bit wide device, and the maximum memory allowed on
board is 1 Mbyte. This memory is where the system boot-up code is loaded. It is
read only memory, and data transfer type can be byte, word, or long word. The
EPROM Address space for the possible memory sizes is shown in Table A-4 in
Appendix A.
NVRAM
The NVRAM consists of a 32-bit wide static memory divided into two banks.
Each bank consists of 512 Kbytes of memory. The maximum memory residing
on board is 1 Mbyte. The memory interface allows either normal mode or burst
mode access. The data transfer type can be byte, word, or long word.
The power to the NVRAM is backed up by the on-board battery, so memory
content is protected against power failure and saved during power off. The
memory interface monitors the battery supply voltage. In the event the battery
voltage falls below the specified value for safe backup, a NMI interrupt in
generated to interrupt the CPU.
After power up or any CPU reset, the NVRAM devices are write protected. Bit 0
of the Board Program Register must be set to a zero before storing data to
NVRAM. If not, a write to these locations will not be stored. Table A-5 in
Appendix A gives the NVRAM address mapping access by the CPU.
Flash EPROM (FEPROM)
There are two SIMM (single-inline memory module) sockets on the CPU board
for Flash EPROM. The maximum memory permitted is 16 Mbytes. Data transfer
type for read access to the FEPROM can be byte, word, or long word. The
FEPROM memory is write protected. Memory mapping of the Flash EPROM
accessed by the CPU is given in Table A-6 of Appendix A. The amount of flash
memory available is identified by as shown in Table A-7 of Appendix A.
Writes to Flash EPROM. When the Flash EPROM is written to, it is set up for
long word writes only. The steps that occur for a write (during programming of
the FEPROM only) are the following:
BPR bit 1 is set to 0
The FEPROM is ready to program when BPR bit 13 becomes set to 1.
If these bits are not set correctly, a write to the FEPROM will have no effect.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–49
Theory of Operation
Battery Backup
The +5 V source to the NVRAM is monitored by U57. A backup battery is used
to maintain the stored memory of the NVRAM when the AM700 is powered off.
That battery is monitored for a low voltage condition so that a low battery
warning may be issued. When the battery is low, the NVBF interrupt is applied
to the Interrupt Encoder. That is a level 7 interrupt, and while the instrument is
running, it is masked to permit the CPU to maintain normal operation. At power
up, all the interrupt levels are enabled, so a low-battery interrupt will be seen and
the low-battery warning issued. The back-up battery must be replaced to prevent
loss of stored information in the NVRAM during power off.
A replacement battery may be installed using the pins on the CPU board placed
there for that purpose. After the replacement battery is installed, the lead to the
on board battery must be immediately cut to prevent it from drawing current
from the new battery.
DRAM and Diagnostic Display (diagram 4)
Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Dynamic RAM Controller
Board Status Register
The Dynamic RAM Controller (DRC), U33, provides most of the logic for
controlling the DRAM devices. The DRC requires initialization before it can
function normally. The DRC must be programmed during the first write cycle
that the CPU performs after reset.
An Error Detection Circuit detects parity error during every read access by the
host CPU. If an error is detected, the transfer error acknowledgement signal
(TEA) goes active and terminates a bus cycle, and the CPU may enter access
error exception. Both a DRAM parity check error and an illegal access will cause
TEA to be active. If any one of the BSR bits (bit 0 – bit 3) is asserted low, it
indicates a parity check error is detected. If illegal access occurred, BSR bit 16
will be asserted low.
After reset, BPR8 and BPR13 both are active low (‘0’).
BPR7 sets even parity or odd parity. After reset, even parity is set.
Table A-8 in Appendix A lists the address mapping accessed by the host CPU.
Table A-9 in Appendix A list the DMA mapping accessed by the DSP.
Diagnostic Displays
3–50
The diagnostic displays are used to troubleshoot CPU kernel problems when the
AM700 fails to boot. The segments of the diagnostic LED are turned on to
indicate the failed area as indicated in Table 3–2.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Table 3–2: Diagnostic LED Definitions
LED Display Register
Watchdog Timer
LED
Description
0
reserved
1
reserved
2
on : Flash EPROM (bank 0) not found
3
on : Flash EPROM (bank 1) not found
4
on : Flash EPROM (bank 2) not found
5
on : DRAM not found
6
on : battery supply failure
7
on : hardware reset active
This register is a write only octal latch which can be programmed to turn on or
off the diagnostic 7-segment LED on the CPU board.
A monitor chip, a DS1232, is used monitor software execution on the host bus.
The monitor chip has an interval timer that forces the time-out signal to active
state if the strobe input is not driven low prior to time-out. The watchdog timer
is set to operate on time-out settings of approximately 600 ms. If the watchdog
timer is allowed to time-out, then the TEA signal is driven to active state which
signals the CPU that a bus error has occurred.
Bus Arbitration and Interrupt Encoder (diagram 5)
Refer to schematic diagram 5 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Interrupt Encoder
All levels of interrupts are applied to the Interrupt Encoder, U51. When an
interrupt occurs, U51 determines the level of interrupt and encodes the interrupt
signals to the CPU (IPL0 – IPL2) appropriately. The source of the interrupts and
their level is shown in Table A-12 of Appendix A.
Board Registers and Timer (diagram 6)
Refer to schematic diagram 6 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Board Status Register
(BSR)
The Board Status Register (BSR) is one of the two hardware registers used to
indicate hardware status. It is a 32-bit read-only register composed of U85, U87,
U90, and U126. The register outputs are on the CPU data bus and can only be
read by the CPU. Bit assignments for the register are given in Table A-13 in
Appendix A.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–51
Theory of Operation
Board Program Register
(BPR)
Board Code Register
Real Time Clock
This Register is composed of four 8-bit registers, U86, U88, U92, and U125. The
register bit states indicate various board status and control various board
operations on the HOST CPU side. Its contents can be written and read. A bit
mapping of the registers with signal names and descriptions of bit values is given
in Table A-14 in Appendix A.
This register, U78, holds the switch settings of dip switch S2.
The DS1286 device is a real time clock is used to keep track of the ‘real time’
and time-related activities. It comes with 50 bytes of user NVRAM. It contains
an embedded lithium cell that can maintain data and real time for over ten years
in the absence of Vcc. Refer to the manufacturer’s data book for detailed
information on this device.
Timer Registers and Addresses. Table A-15 of Appendix A lists the cross
references of the Timer Registers and their addresses.
I/0 Processor (diagram 7)
Refer to schematic diagram 7 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Front Panel Processor
The Front Panel Processor, U110, handles all of the front panel controls, and
through the Floppy Disk Controller, U105 (diagram 9), the data transfers to and
from the floppy disk drive. Two clock signals are applied to the Front Panel
Processor: the serial port clock, 3.6864 MHz, and the processor clock,
16.667 MHz. The processor clock must have a 4 V swing and a 50% duty cycle.
A flip-flop, U121A, divides the 33.3333 MHz output of Y7 by two and buffers
the signal. The output of the flip-flop has a nearly 50% duty cycle as needed by
the processor.
Front Panel Processor
RAM
The Front Panel RAM, U108 and U109, store the operating instructions for the
I/0 Processor. These instructions are downloaded from the CPU at power up and
whenever a new front-panel description is needed. Access to this shared memory
is handled through a Bus Request/Bus Grant routine.
CPU to Front Panel
Interface Buffers
3–52
The bus interface between the 16-bit Front Panel Processor data bus and the
32-bit CPU data bus is handled by buffers U94, U95 ,U96, and U97. Data is
transferred between the two busses in 16-bit words. The two sets of buffers are
enabled to select which 16-bits of the CPU long word are selected for transfer.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Front Panel PAL
Controlling signals for the operation of the Front Panel logic are produced by
U106, a PAL (programmable array logic) device.
Video ASIC and VRAM (diagram 8)
Refer to schematic diagram 8 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Video RAM
The Video RAM is composed of four, 512 × 512, 8-bit memory devices, U117,
U118, U119, and U120. Each memory has a 2 Mbit capacity, and the total
memory provides for two pages of display. The CPU writes new information to
one page of display while the other is being processed by the video ASIC
(application specific integrated circuit), U103. The CPU reads or writes to the
Video RAM through four, 8-bit bus buffers, U111, U112, U113, and U114. There
are two modes of writing to the memory. One mode takes 20 writes to transfer
enough data to display one line on the CRT, the other mode is a flash write used
to rapidly clear the display. The Video RAM is partitioned in eight bit planes,
and the bits of the display data from the CPU are stored interleaved across the
eight bit planes.
Video ASIC
The Video ASIC, U103, processes the display data written to the Video RAM by
the CPU. When the Video ASIC is reading data from the Video RAM, it gets the
interleaved bits sequentially from each of the eight bit planes. The Video ASIC
reformats the data to deinterleave the bits, and places the bits in a long, 64-bit
FIFO (first in, first out) data pipeline. Pixel data bytes are then taken out of the
FIFO in parallel and applied to the Video RAM/DAC, U37 and U15 (diagram 9),
for conversion to analog display signals in the correct order for the raster display.
Horizontal and Vertical Sync signals and Blanking are also produced by the
Video ASIC.
Troubleshooting Hint
If a repeating bad pattern appears in the display, one of the Video RAM devices
or one of the bus buffers to the CPU data bus may be defective. Missing pixels in
the display may also be the result of a defective memory or buffer. A totally
wrong display may be the result of a Video ASIC failure.
The data bits for a pixel to the Video RAM are interleaved across the eight bit
planes of the memory, so the data bytes that are being written to memory have no
correlation with the data bytes being sent to the Video DAC/RAM.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–53
Theory of Operation
VRAMDAC and Floppy Drive Interface (diagram 9)
Refer to schematic diagram 9 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
Video RAM/DAC
There are two identical Video RAM/DAC devices, U37 and U15. One, U37,
produces the monochrome drive to the internal display monitor. The second,
U15, provides RGB output to drive an external VGA monitor. Pixel data bytes
from the Video ASIC are converted to analog at the IOR, IOG, and IOB outputs
of the Video RAM/DAC. For CRT display systems, the Red and Blue outputs of
U37 are terminated, and only the Green output is used to drive the monochrome
display. That signal is sent to the Display Monitor board along with the
Horizontal and Vertical Sync signals through connector J2. Test points (TP13,
TP14, and TP15) are provided for checking these signals. In U15, all three color
outputs plus the Horizontal and Vertical Sync signals are connected through EMI
filters to the rear-panel VGA connector, J3. A single test point (TP16) is
provided for checking the Green drive signal.
The Video RAM/DAC provides the RGB and sync signals to the LDC Driver for
AM700 Audio Measurement Sets that have the LCD color flat panel display
system.
CRT Display Brightness. The brightness of the internal display monitor and the
external display monitor are controlled separately through the current references
to the Video RAM/DAC devices. A digital to analog converter, U28, get
brightness information from the CPU data bus. One output of U28 provides drive
to the reference current source of U37 through U4A, and the other output
provides drive to the reference current source of U15 through U4B. The internal
display monitor brightness is adjustable from the front panel of the AM700. A
suitable level is set for the external VGA monitor output, and the controls of the
external monitor may be used to set it for the desired viewing brightness.
LCD Display Brightness. When the LCD flat panel display is installed, the
brightness is a function of the backlight intensity. The display brightness is
adjustable from the front panel control as is the CRT brightness, but the
brightness level signal line is applied to the backlight inverter power control
circuit on the LCD driver board. The control circuit has a brightness level
adjustment that sets the extinguish level (no visible display) of the LCD display.
Floppy Drive Controller
3–54
The interface between the I/O processor, U110 (diagram 7), and the floppy drive
is provided by U105, a single-chip controller. The controller handles the data
transfers to and from a floppy disk using DMA after requesting access to
memory from the I/O Processor. This allows the I/O Processor to continue its
other tasks without further interruption for the data transfer.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
RS232C Interface (diagram 10)
Refer to schematic diagram 10 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
General Description
Two dual universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (DUART) are used in this
design. UARTA (U29) is used for the RS232 serial ports. UARTB (U39) channel
A is setup for interfacing with the Audio Generator and channel B is used as
keyboard interface.
The DUARTs themselves consist of eight major sections: internal control logic,
timing logic, interrupt control logic, a bidirectional 8-bit data bus buffer, two
independent communication channels, a 6-bit parallel input port, and a 8-bit
parallel output port.
The operation of the DUARTs are programmed by writing control words into the
appropriate registers. Operational feedback is provided by the status registers
which are then read by the CPU.
Keyboard Interface. UART port B of U39 is configured as an interface for an AT
type keyboard. XT type keyboard protocols are not supported. The protocol for
serial data transmission is an 11-bit data stream composed of 1 start bit, 8 data
bits, 1 odd parity bit, and 1 stop bit. When troubleshooting the keyboard
interface, activity on the keyboard may be checked by observing the keyboard
serial line at TP5 with an oscilloscope to check the data stream.
Keyboard Interface Register Setup. The register setup for interfacing with the
keyboard is as follows:
H
Clock-Select Register B
Both receiver-clock and transmitter-clock selects External Clock Inputs.
H
Output Port Register (OPR)
Bits OP1, OP4, and OP6 are setup as general purpose outputs. A description
of the port signals is given in Table A-19.
GPIB Controller and Host Interface (diagram 11)
Refer to schematic diagram 11 of the A6 CPU board for the following discussion.
General Purpose Interface
Bus (GPIB) Controller
The GPIB interface provides a standard interface for communication between
instruments and remote control of the AM700. Table A-20 provides the address
information to the GPIB controller. Refer to the TMS9914A GPIB Controller
Data Book for detailed information on the controller device.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–55
Theory of Operation
DSP Board (A7)
In the DSP board circuitry, there are local registers, an analog interface port, a
DMA interface, and fast static memories that reside in the processor’s port A and
port B buses. A simplified block diagram is shown in Figure 3–17.
The DSP (digital signal processor) accepts digital data (the digitized analog
signal inputs) from either the Digital or the Analog input boards through sample
transmitter/receiver ASICs. Communication with the Main/CPU is through a
DMA ASIC. The digitized audio signal is serialized and converted to analog
signals for driving the front panel headphone circuit. Control circuitry on the
DSP circuit board provides signals to set up the acquisition gain, bandwidth,
filters, etc., on the Analog Acquisition board.
The DSP has port A and port B memories to handle the processed data and
commands. Instructions to the DSP are written to the Port B memory by the
CPU. The DSP then runs the programmed instructions from the Port B memory.
LADR[0 – 31]
DA(0 – 31)
BA[0 – 31]
Port A Memory
4
ADRA
(0 – 31)
Port B
Memory
5
BD[0 – 31]
DSP
Board Registers
Bus Arbitrator
7
Digital Data
Audio Serializer
8
RX ASIC
Analog Data
CPU
DMA ASIC
RX ASIC
Sample
Receiver
RSTH
DSP/CPU
Interface
ASIC
6
3
ANI(0 – 3)
AN0[0 – 3]
Serializer
Front Panel
Sound
Analog
Acquisition
Analog Port
Control
Bus Buffer
and
Connectors
Reset
and
Clocks
7
2
RST40
1
Figure 3–17: DSP board simplified block diagram
3–56
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
The DSP clock generator has 33.333 MHz applied as the reference frequency.
The clock generator develops the various clock signals used throughout the DSP
board.
Bus Buffers and Connectors (diagram 1)
The bus buffers handle the 32 bit data and address busses between the DSP and
the main CPU.
Reset and Clocks (diagram 2)
Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
System Reset
DSP Reset Functional
Description
The System Reset logic circuitry has inputs of CPU RST, RSTON, RST, and
input from the Master Reset switch S1, to develop the DSPRST signal to the
DSP. A power-on monitor, U17, holds the RST signal low until the +5 V has
stabilized. This hold the DSP in the reset condition until all the circuitry is ready
to operate correctly. The Master Reset switch, S1, may be pressed to cause the
DSP circuitry to be reset. Pressing the reset button, resets the DSP and its
peripherals. The host CPU and its related circuitry are not affected by this reset.
There are five input sources that can assert the RESET pin of DSP and reset its
interface circuitry. They are as follows:
H
ONCE Interface reset (not used),
H
Board Program Register BPR (bit 5),
H
Power-Up Reset Controller,
H
DSP Reset button,
H
Port B host port reset.
The DSP is placed in the reset state upon initial application of power and will
remain in this state until the CPU deasserts the reset pin of the DSP by writing a
‘1’ to bit 5 of the Board Program Register. Upon leaving the reset state, the
processor bootstraps through Port B, the Host Interface.
Clock Generator
The DSP clock generator, U19, has 33.333 MHz from a divide-by-two circuit
applied as the reference frequency. The clock generator develops the various
clock signals used throughout the DSP board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–57
Theory of Operation
Sample Receivers (diagram 3)
Refer to schematic diagram 3 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
There are two sample receivers, U10 and U11. One handles the analog samples
and the other handles the digital signal. These sample receivers are identical to
the sample transmitters. A single control bit, TX/RX, defines the operating mode
of the ASICs. In the sample receivers, this bit is wired low. The sample receivers
accept 8-bit data from the acquisition system and formats it into 32-bit long
words for application to the DSP. Each sample receiver handles two channels of
input data. Output data is written to the shared RAM on Port A of the DSP. The
DSP handles the signal processing and transfer of the processed data to the CPU
for display in the running application.
A Memory (diagram 4)
Refer to schematic diagram 4 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
The local memory residing on the Port A bus is organized in one bank of 128K ×
32 of fast static memory. It can be expanded to 256K × 32. This memory is
shared between the DSP and the sample receivers for transfer of the incoming
data to the DSP for processing. The processed data is then transferred to the CPU
through the host interface for display in the running application. Reads and
writes to this memory is controlled by the bus arbitration control PAL, U55
(shown on diagram 7).
B Memory (diagram 5)
Refer to schematic diagram 5 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
The local memory residing on the Port B bus is organized in one bank of 128K ×
32 of fast static memory. It can be expanded to 256K × 32. Reads and writes to
the B Port RAM are controlled by the B Port Memory Controller, U32. This
memory is shared between the DSP and the CPU and is used for data transfers
between the two through the DSP/CPU interface ASIC, U15 (shown on
diagram 6).
DSP/CPU Interface ASIC (diagram 6)
Refer to schematic diagram 6 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
The ASIC consists of the three functional blocks shown in Figure 3–18. They are
the following: DMA interface, DSP Host Port interface, and local memory
controller. There is a built-in 32-bit Address Holding Register (AHR) in the
ASIC to set up various base addresses of the controlled functional blocks. The
default value (after power up/during reset is active) is $010560CC. The AHR is a
write-once/read-many register. It allows one write after reset.
3–58
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
The primary purposes of the host port bus interface is to allow the DSP to access
the main memory (DRAM) resident on the CPU bus. Two types of access can be
performed by the DSP processor: DMA access and Host Interface access. The
interface circuitry is implemented on Port B of the DSP processor. A simplified
block diagram of the functions is shown in Figure 3–18.
DSP BG
DSP BB
DSP Port B
Bus Arbitration Block
Bus
Ready
DSP R/W
DSP TS
DSP HEN
Host Interface Logic
Block
Addresss CPU
Decoder
Hi Ready
TS
Figure 3–18: DSP/CPU host port interface
Board Registers, Bus Arbitrator and Audio Serializer (diagram 7)
Refer to schematic diagram 7 of the A7 DSP board for the following discussion.
DMA Process Reset
Register (PRR)
Register Definition
This is an address trigger register. It resets the ASIC internal hardware interface
and sets up for the next DMA transfer. The PRR is accessed at the beginning of
each DMA transfer. Its default address is 5xxxxxxx (hex).
Both the DSP Status Register and the DSP Program Register reside in Port A.
Their functional definitions are described as follows.
Status Register (SR). This is one of the two hardware register implemented to
indicate various hardware status on the DSP side. This read-only register, U52
and U53, can only be read by the DSP. The register addresses are shown in
Table A-25.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–59
Theory of Operation
Program Register (DPR). The program register, U54 and U62, indicates various
board status and control various board operations on the DSP side. Its contents
can be written and read. It must be initialized by writing FFFFFFFF (hex) to the
DPR after power-up or after a system reset has been active high. The register bits
are defined in Table A-26.
Serializer
The function of the audio serializer, U49, is to provide two 16-bin serial data
streams to drive the DAC that resides on the front-panel board. It is dual 16-bit
parallel to serial converter. There is a 32-bit data register that can be accessed by
the DSP to read (for diagnostic purposes only) or write the channel DACs. The
upper 16 bits [bits(31 .. 16)] of data drive the right channel DAC. The lower
16 bits [bits(15 .. 0)] of data drive the left channel DAC.
To read back the data stored in the register by the DSP, SMOD1 and SMOD0
must be set to 1 prior to a read access by the DSP.
Bus Timer
Version Number Pal
This circuitry times the access to Port A and outputs the AFAULT IN flags as a 0
if an access fault is detected.
This register, U56, decodes the inputs to provide the hardware level version
number. This PAL also outputs a level trigger (IRQC) to the interrupt register.
The possible conditions that initiate the IRQC interrupt are shown in Table 3–3.
Digital Signal Processor (diagram 8)
DSP Interrupts Inputs
Functional Description
The Interrupt Inputs and their respective sources are given in Table 3–3.
Table 3–3: Interrupt inputs and sources
3–60
Interrupt input
Type of interrupt
Interrupt source
IRQA
edge
Speaker Signal Interrupt
IRQB
edge
DMA Trigger
IRQC
level
Port A Bus Error Interrupt
level
Port B Bus Error Interrupt
level
Sample Receiver 0 Interrupt
level
Sample Receiver 1 Interrupt
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Front Panel Board (A9)
The Front Panel board has the user interface buttons and touch screen circuitry.
Control Register, Knobs, Beeper, and Resistive Touch Panel (diagram 1)
Diagram 1 shows the control register, the knob control circuitry, the beeper, and
the resistive touch panel.
Control Register
The control register is formed by a series of shift registers that hold a total of 128
bits. These bits are loaded from the front-panel processor through U11A, The
serial data, clock, and latch signals are all generated by the front-panel processor.
When bit value changes are made by the front panel processor, the entire 128 bits
are reloaded serially into the register string. The register string holds the control
and readout bits of the touch panel, the large and small rotary knobs, the panel
LED indicators, and all the front-panel buttons.
A change in state of the bits from the initial state caused by a front-panel control
change (knob, touch panel, button press, etc.) is determined when the 128 bits
are read back to the front panel processor through U11B. To increase throughput,
the new data bits are loaded into the registers as the stored data bits are read out.
The location of specific bits in the serial stream is fixed by the clock and latch
signals generated by the front-panel processor. Not all 128 bits are used in the
data stream. Unused bits are “don’t care” and ignored by the front panel
processor.
Front Panel Knobs
The three rotating control knobs are continuous rotation, 2-bit rotary encoders.
Their position and rotation information is grey-scale encoded. The A and B
outputs of the encoders are square waves that are 90° phase shifted from each
other. In the clockwise direction of rotation, the A output positive transitions
leads the B output positive transitions. For counterclockwise rotation, the B
output leads the A output.
An internal circuit in the PALs counts the number of transitions to determine the
amount of rotation of the knobs, and the relative phase relationship between the
A and B outputs indicates the direction of rotation. The Rotary Encoder PALs
decode the information from the knobs into an 8-bit parallel data word. That data
is applied to the parallel inputs of the serial shift registers in the PALs to become
part of the 128 bit serial data stream.
Beeper
The 2.2 kHz beeper is controlled by a signal from the front panel processor. That
signal, TOUT1, is turned on for a short length of time to indicate a touch (a short
click) or a longer time to produce a warning alarm.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–61
Theory of Operation
Touch Panel
The resistive touch panel provides much of the interface between the user and the
applications. Front panel buttons are used to select applications and make
numerical entries, but the menus that control much of the operation are accessed
through the touch panel. The X and Y-axis coordinates of a touch on the panel
provide specific voltage level outputs from multiplexer U29. Those voltage are
digitized by A/D Converter U17. The 8-bit data word is applied to the parallel
input pins of registers U14 and U15 to form part of the 128-bit serial data
stream.
Headphone Amplifier and Speaker (diagram 2)
The Speaker is not enabled for the current version of firmware for the AM700.
Audio signal monitoring is available using the headphone jack of the front panel.
While monitoring the incoming audio signal, all measurements are suspended.
Left and right channel serial digital data is converted to left and right channel
analog signals by a dual 16-bit D/A converter, U19. The analog audio is
amplified by the Left and Right Channel amplifiers, U25A and U25B respectively. A further amplifier stage on both channels provides the volume control
function for the stereo headphone output signal. Voltage followers on each
channel isolate the headphone amplifiers from the external headphones. The
voltage followers allow a wide range of headphone impedance to be tolerated.
Front-Panel LED Indicators (diagram 3)
There are four banks of LED indicators associated with the front panel. The
indicators are behind the front panel labels and are turned to indicate an active
front-panel button selection. Serial data to define the state of the LEDs is loaded
into a series four of 8-bit registers, U33 – U36. The output bits of registers U34 U36 are applied to line drivers U43 – U45 to drive the LEDs that are arranged in
pairs. Only two, single LEDs are connected to U33, so a line driver is not used
on its outputs. During power-on, the registers are reset. This reset turns on all the
front-panel LEDs so that is a good point to check that all the LEDs are functional.
Front-Panel Push Buttons (diagram 4)
Each of the front-panel buttons is connected to one input of a bank of six,
parallel/serial in – serial output shift registers, U37 through U42. The parallel
inputs of the shift registers are normally high through pull-up resistors to +5 V.
When a button is pressed, the associated input is pulled low. Periodically, at a
rate fast enough to catch a button press, the data is latched (all the registers in the
128 bit shift register are latched at the same time). The entire serial data stream is
then clocked through the registers to the Data Out port on the last register in the
3–62
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
string, U40. The data stream is applied to U11B (diagram 1) where it is read
back to the CPU board. The front-panel processor determines the buttons that
were pressed and initiates the appropriate action.
Picture Monitor Assembly (A10)
A simplified block diagram of the video monitor is shown in Figure 3–19. Refer
to the A10 schematic diagram for CRT display versions of the AM700.
High Voltage
Dynamic Focus
Focus
Horizontal
Deflection
H Sync
Horiz Phase
Horiz Hold
Width
Video Amplifier
Video Out
Video In
White Level
Black Level
Vertical Deflection
V Sync
+16.5V
+55V –110V
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Vert Centering
Vert Linearity
Vert Hold
Vert Size
+12V
and
+5V
Supply
Trace Rotation
+5V
+12V
Figure 3–19: Picture monitor simplified block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–63
Theory of Operation
Video Amplifier
+12 V and +5 V Supply
Vertical Deflection
The Video Amplifier amplifies the incoming video signal to levels necessary to
drive the crt. A cathode follower input circuit formed by Q1 and its associated
biasing circuit provides impedance matching and current drive to the output
video amplifier. In the output video amplifier (a cascode circuit), the video signal
is inverted by Q2, a common emitter circuit. Its output current directly drives a
common base amplifier, Q3, whose output drives the crt cathode. As the input
video signal is increasing in amplitude, the inverted video signal drives the
cathode negative with respect to its +50 V reference level thereby causing the
beam current to increase.
The incoming +16.5 V is applied to a 3-terminal regulator, U2, where it is
converted to +12 V. A tap on the +12 V source supplies a +5 V Zener diode
voltage regulator composed of VR1 and R1 to supply the +5 V source.
The vertical deflection circuit provides the drive current to the vertical deflection
yoke. A free-running oscillator circuit, U3, produce a ramp signal, and an
amplified vertical deflection signal. The basic frequency of the oscillator is set to
60 Hz by the adjustment of R45, the Vert Hold potentiometer. The length of the
ramp signal, and consequently the vertical synchronization, is set by the V Sync
signal.
When the V Sync is received, the vertical ramp is terminated, and a new one
begins. The RAMP OUT, pin 1, signal is applied to the AMP IN, pin 10, for
amplification to drive the vertical deflection yoke. The output of U3 at pin 10 is
inverted from the original ramp. The ramp retrace level is amplified to produce
large amplitude pulses for retrace of the beam. The ramp between pulses is
nearly flat, and the constant level voltage produces a ramp of current through the
vertical deflection yoke. The vertical height of the display is set by the adjustment of R42, the Vert Size potentiometer.
A portion of the RAMP OUT signal from pin 1 is fed back through a shaping
circuit to the RAMP GEN input on pin 12. The shape of the ramp fed back is
adjustable by R48, the Vert Lin potentiometer, to set the vertical linearity of the
raster. Vertical position is set with R57 which adjust the DC level on the vertical
deflection yoke.
Blanking Amplifier. Blanking between vertical sweeps is produce by the blanking
amplifier, Q6. In the interval between ramps, the level of the vertical deflection
signal from U3, pin 4, rapidly rises toward +30 V to retrace the beam back to the
vertical starting point. That rise is seen by Q6 via C41, and the transistor quickly
saturates. The negative pulse at the collector of Q6 is AC coupled via C42 to the
control grid of the crt to cutoff the beam current between vertical deflection
ramps. In the output of the blanking amplifier, R64, the BLACK LEVEL
adjustment, sets the black level of beam current between blanking pulses.
3–64
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Spot Eliminator. An additional circuit formed by CR11, CR12, C44, and R66,
produces an extra bias to the control grid to positively cut off beam current
during turn on and turn off of the AM700. These pulses at turn on and turn off
are transitory as the power supplies turn on and off. As the +55 V and –110 V
voltage supplies come up, the voltage at the junction of C44 and R66 spikes
negative to bias on CR12 and add a negative biasing pulse to the control grid. At
the voltages stabilize, CR12 become reversed biased, and the extra circuitry is
switched out of the control grid circuit. At turn off, the junction of C44 and R66
is setting at +55 V. Diode CR11 becomes biased on as the +55 V supply falls,
and this negative pulse also biases on CR12 to pass the extra biasing pulse to the
control grid.
Horizontal Deflection
The horizontal deflection circuit provides the drive current to the deflection
yoke. A PLL (phase-locked loop) circuit, U1, produces the horizontal deflection
signal. The frequency of the loop is synchronized to the incoming H Sync signal
after setting the correct frequency with the Horiz Hold control, R20. Further
amplification of the signal is done by Q4 and Q5 to provide the necessary levels
to drive the horizontal deflection yoke. The other side of the horizontal deflection yoke is AC referenced to ground through L3 (a saturable reactor), L4 (the
horizontal WIDTH control), and C17. Diode CR9 catches negative overshoots of
the horizontal deflection signal.
A circuit from the output of Q5 to the SAW IN input of U1, pin 4, provides
feedback to the PLL circuit. The Horiz Phase control, R15, in the feedback path,
is adjustable to fine position the active picture area within the raster scanned
width.
+20 V Boost Supply. A circuit composed of CR2, CR3, C18, C19, C20, R31, and
a winding (pin7 to pin3) of T2 (in the high voltage supply) boosts the +12 V
source to +20 V to supply the collector voltage for Q4. At the collector of Q5,
the horizontal retrace pulses have a amplitude of approximately 320 V. The
nearly constant voltage level between the retrace pulses produces a ramp of
current to the horizontal deflection yoke.
High Voltage
The high voltage supply provides the crt anode voltage, the focus voltage, and
the +55 V and –110 V sources. Drive to T2, the high voltage transformer, is
provided through a set of taps on the multitap primary winding.
The crt anode voltage and the –110 V supply are taken from separate secondary
windings in the transformer. A diode internal to the transformer module rectifies
the high voltage for the crt. That voltage is also referenced to ground internally
in the transformer module. The –110 V winding is rectified by CR7 and
capacitively filtered by C24.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–65
Theory of Operation
Focus Voltage and Dynamic Focus. The output of the focus voltage winding of T2
is rectified by CR6 and filtered by an RC π filter composed of C26, C27, and
R33. The main focus voltage of about +600 V is set by FOCUS pot R36 via a
DC restorer circuit composed of C28, CR8, and R38. Dynamic focusing, to
optimize edge focusing of the crt, is applied from a series resonant LC circuit
formed by L5 and C23 off the +55 V winding of T2. The dynamic focusing
waveform approximates a negative-going parabola between the positive pulses of
the winding output voltage. That waveform is AC coupled through C25 to the
focus voltage. The dynamic focusing waveform is shaped by the adjustment of
L5 to produce the best edge focus in conjunction with the setting of the FOCUS
pot for best overall focus.
Trace Rotation
The Trace Rotation circuit drives a separate deflection coil on the neck of the crt.
That winding produces a magnetic field that permits adjustment to horizontally
level the raster. Differential deflection voltage is produced by the circuit formed
by U5A, U5B, and U4. A voltage reference of +6 V is provided by U4, a
precision voltage divider. That reference is applied to the non-inverting input of
U5A. On U5B, the adjustable voltage from the Trace Rot potentiometer, R67, is
applied to the non-inverting input of U5B. When the amplifiers are balanced, no
current flows through the trace rotation coil.
When the Trace Rot pot is adjusted to unbalance the two amplifiers, the output of
U5B at pin 2, is driven to return the balance to that amplifier. That change is
coupled through R70 to the inverting input of U5A to produce an equal change
in the opposite direction at pin 10, thereby producing a current through the trace
rotation coil. Reversing the position R67 causes current in the opposite direction
in the trace rotation coil. The overall adjustment range for trace rotation is
approximately ±3.4_.
3–66
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Board (A11)
A block diagram of the power supply is shown in Figure 3–20. Refer to the
illustration for the following functional block description of the power supply
circuitry.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Line
Voltage
Switch
Input
Power
Rectifier
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
+5V
+5V Ret
+Vp
–Vp
Inverter
Switching
Circuit
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
–14.4V
Housekeeping
+14.4V
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Power
Switch
Driver
+15V
–15V
15V
Regulators
Î
15V Ret
Primary
Current
Sensing
Floating
Supplies
(LCD
Flat Panel
Display)
Current Sense
SD
+16.5V
–16.5V
+16.5V Ret
+22V
–16.5V
–22V
+16.5V
Housekeeping
Supply
Pulse Width
Modulator
+22V
–22V
Output
Rectifiers
+15V
–15V
+5V
–22V
+22V
OVSD
SD
/Undervolts
PS Fail LED
Overcurrent
Alarm
Logic
+22VI
+5VI
–22VI +16.5VI
/Overvolts
/Undervolts
/Power Fail
Overtemp LED
+15VI
–15VI
Alarm Sensing
Line Sense
Power Off
+14.4V
+12V
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Fan
Drive
Î
Fan+
Fan Ret
t _ T1 T2
Figure 3–20: Power supply block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–67
Theory of Operation
Power Supply Functional
Block Description
The power supply is an pre-regulator inverter switching supply composed of a
primary rectifier, a housekeeping supply, the inverter switching circuit, output
rectifiers, 15 V regulators, an alarm sensing circuitry that monitors for overvoltage, overcurrent, and over temperature conditions, and the alarm logic circuitry
that shuts down the inverter switching circuitry in the event of a problem. Use
diagrams 1 and 2 for assembly A11 to follow the descriptions of the block
circuitry.
Input Power Rectifier. The Input Power Rectifier receives the mains AC voltage
and rectifies it to provide the drive power to the inverter switching circuitry. A
line voltage switch sets the supply to operate on a nominal voltage of either
115 VAC or 230 VAC. On 230 V operation, the primary rectifier acts as a
full-wave bridge rectifier; for 115 V operation, the primary rectifier is configured
as a full-wave voltage doubler.
The primary bridge rectifier is protected by the mains line fuse and surge
suppressors. A mains line filter at the input of the power supply reduces
conducted and radiated EMI from and to the AM700. Additional components in
the rectifier output provide line filtering and common-mode noise rejection for
further reduction of conducted electromagnetic interference. Input surge current
and overvoltage protection components are included in the input rectifier circuit
to prevent major component damage in the event that incorrect line voltage is
applied to the AC input.
Housekeeping Power Supply. A second power supply provides the housekeeping
(or keep-alive) power source. This supply provides power to the logic circuitry
that controls the power supply STBY/ON logic circuitry. It is supplied via a
transformer that is wired with the power line switch to provide the correct
voltage to the primary for either line voltage. The rectifiers for the + and –14.5 V
housekeeping supply are full-wave with capacitive filtering of the rectified
voltages. The filtered voltages are regulated by 3-terminal regulators. Both sides
of the transformer secondary are fused with self-healing fusing devices. One of
the sensing signals (LINE SENSE) to the power supply logic circuitry is
developed from the secondary of the housekeeping supply transformer.
Inverter Switching Circuit. This circuitry comprises the Pulse Width Modulator,
the Power Switching Transistor Drivers, and the Inverter Switching FET that
drive the power transformer.
Output Rectifiers. Secondary outputs of the power transformer are full-wave
rectified and filtered to provide +5 V, +16.5 V, –16.5 V, +22 V, and –22 V. The
+16.5 V and –16.5 V are further regulated to produce the +15 V and –15 V
supplies to the AM700. The source voltage for the Fan Drive circuit is also
provided by the +16.5 V supply.
3–68
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
±15 V Regulators. The + and –15 V regulators are similar in operation. Each
regulator is a combined operational amplifier and FET current pass element with
a feedback loop to the operational amplifier from the output voltage.
Alarm Sensing. The Alarm Sensing circuitry looks at the various supply voltages
to check for undervoltage, overvoltage, overcurrent, and power fail conditions.
The status of these conditions are the signals fed to the Alarm Logic circuitry.
Alarm Logic. Each of the Alarm Sensing outputs is monitored by the Alarm Logic
circuitry. That circuitry also monitors the temperature sense signals. Depending
on the state of the sense signals, the Alarm Logic circuitry can issue a shutdown
signal (SD) to the Pulse Width Modulator to stop the power supply from
operating. The Alarm Logic circuitry also drives the Over Temp LED and PS
Fail LED front-panel indicators as feedback to the user of the existing problem.
Fan Drive. A separate Fan Drive circuit provides a temperature related drive
voltage to the Fan. As the temperature rises, the fan is driven faster to compensate for the rise. The temperature sensing element for the voltage control is
mounted on the 5 V power supply heat sink.
Floating Power Supply. In CRT display instruments, these supplies are located on
the Generator board (A5). In LCD flat panel display instruments, the floating
supplies are part of the power supply board.
The floating power supply provides the isolated voltages to power the analog
audio generator. This isolation permits the generator outputs to float with respect
to chassis ground. The +22 V and –22 V outputs of the power supply power a set
of 3-terminal regulators that provide the +15 V, +5 V, and –15 V to the Generator
board. Those voltages, along with the +22 V and –22 V voltages and the floating
return line are connected to the Generator board through J12 on the power supply
board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–69
Theory of Operation
Input, Inverter, and Regulators (diagram 1)
The following circuit descriptions follow the schematic diagrams and indicate
the circuit components of the circuitry. Refer to schematic diagram 1 of the A11
power supply board for the following description.
Input Power
The AC mains voltage is applied to the preregulator power rectifier through a
Line Filter (FL1), Fuse F1, and the Master Power Switch (S1) on the rear panel
of the instrument. A bleeder resistor, R3, is placed across the input filter to
discharge the filter capacitors when AC power is removed. The inrush of turn-on
current is controlled by surge suppressor RT1. MOV RV1 and RV2 reduce noise
spikes and help protect the input circuitry from a major overload in the event that
an incorrect mains voltage is applied when the power supply is set to operate on
115 Vac. A spark gap device, E1, also acts to protect the circuitry that follows it
by firing and causing the input fuse to open in the event of a major overvoltage.
As a warning, neon indicator DS1 blinks when the primary power is up.
Common-mode EMI filtering of the rectified voltage is provided by L3, C10,
C11, C12, C13, and C14. Resistors R7 and R8 provide damping for the
inductance of L3.
115 V/230 V Input
Switching
The Line Selector switch, S2, converts the power supply from a bridge rectifier
for 230 V operation to full-wave doubler for 115 V operation. When the Line
Selector is set for 230 VAC operation, diode bridge CR1 is a conventional bridge
rectifier. For 115 VAC operation, the top two diodes of CR1 and filter capacitors
C7 and C8 act as a full-wave voltage doubling circuit. The rectified voltage is
applied across both C7 and C8 on alternate half cycles of the input voltage. The
output voltage is then taken across them in series so the output voltage is the
sum of the voltages across each capacitor. The output voltage for either 115 V or
230 V operation is approximately 300 VDC. Bleeder resistor R5, across the filter
capacitors, drains the capacitor charge when power is removed.
The switching action of S2 also switches the primary winding of T1 to produce
the same voltage output from the secondary winding for either line voltage
position to the housekeeping supply. For 115 V operation, the two primary
windings are in parallel, and for 230 V operation the two windings are in series.
Jumper J2 is for testing purposes only. Troubleshooting should be attempted only
by an experienced service person. Jumper J2 may be pulled to disconnect the
input rectifier from the switching power supply. This permits a service person to
determine if the input rectifier and regulator circuitry are functioning correctly
without the load.
Pulse-Width Modulator
and Control Circuits
3–70
PWM U1 is a pulse-width modulated, current-mode controller that drives the
preregulator stage. The preregulator is controlled by the output of the +5 V
supply. This makes +5 V the regulated output; the other voltages (–16.5 V,
+16.5 V, –22 V, and +22 V) are set by the turns ratio of T5. The PWM uses the
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
+5 V output voltage and information about the current in L4 to control pulsewidth modulation of the preregulator. On pins 8 and 9 of U1, C20 and R12 set
the frequency of operation at approximately 100 kHz. Pin 2 of U1 is a +5 V,
±5 mV voltage reference.
The +5 V output of the supply is divided to 2.5 V by R21 and R22 and applied
to the error amplifier that is internal to U1 at pin 6 (– pin). Pin 5, the + pin of the
error amplifier, is the reference voltage for the error amplifier. The regulating
point for the +5 V output is set by R14, a variable potentiometer that adjusts the
reference voltage on pin 5. Compensation and feedback for the error amplifier is
provided by C23.
Comp Out, pin 7, is also used for regulation sensing. That level is compared by
U48 with a divided down Vref. The Comp Out level on the inverting input of
U48 is normally higher than the input on the non-inverting input, so RDETECT
will be low during normal operation. When the PWM reaches its drive limit, the
output state of U48 switches to high. That high biases on CR32 to pass the
RDETECT signal to the Power Supply Supervisor, U9. That device then issues a
POWER FAIL signal to the CPU so that writing to the NVRAM is halted before
the power supply goes out of regulation.
The current information of L4 from the Current Sensing circuit is applied as a
trapezoidal-type waveform to U1 at pin 4. Transistor Q1 adds a small portion of
the timing ramp on pin 8 to the current signal at pin 4 to improve noise
immunity and to set the PWM correctly for current-mode operation. Both these
signals, the +5 V feedback at pin 6 and the current signal with the added ramp at
pin 4, must be present for U1 to work properly.
A shutdown signal, OVSD OR’ed with SD and applied to pin 16 of U1, is used
to turn off the Pulse-Width Modulator. The SD signal is developed by the
Shutdown Gate, U18B, in the Alarm Logic circuitry. The SD signal is high when
the power STBY/ON switch is in STBY and for a number of irregular conditions
of the power supply (overvoltage, over temperature, or overcurrent).
The OVSD (overvoltage shutdown) signal is developed by VR2, Q11, and
U15B. The OVSD signal is low through inverter U16B unless the +5 V becomes
high enough to fire Q11 (about 6 V) and remove the low from the OVSD signal
line. The two signals are diode-OR’ed to provide the shutdown signal to U1.
When neither the OVSD nor the SD signal is high, the shutdown inhibit is
removed from U1 to permit the PWM to begin operation. If either signal is high,
the associated diode (CR12 or CR13) conducts to bias on CR14. This pulls pin
16 of U1 high to inhibit it from running, shutting down the power supply.
Jumper J3 is for testing purposes only. It may be pulled to eliminate the SD
signal for testing of the PWM during troubleshooting, but this also eliminates all
the shutdown control by the control logic circuitry except for the overvoltage
shutdown. Troubleshooting should be attempted only by an experienced service
person.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–71
Theory of Operation
By design, the voltage level required to shut off the PWM is low compared to
the high logic level from the Shutdown gate. A diode clamping circuit formed by
R24 and CR14 prevents the SD level from exceeding the forward bias drop of
the diode, about 0.6 V. Capacitor C25 bypasses fast transients from the SD input.
Power Switch Driver
The pulse-width modulated outputs of PWM U1 are at pins 11 and 14. The
output pulses are buffered by the high-current FET driver device, U6, whose
output pins 12 and 13 drive the primary of T2. The secondaries of transformer
T2 drive the gates of the pulse-width modulated switching FET, Q2 and Q3.
The leading edges of the pulses from U1, pins 11 and 14, are also used to trigger
comparator U4A. The comparator output clocks U5A, a D-type flip-flop
configured as a toggling circuit that changes state with clock. This circuit is used
to derive the 50% duty cycle pulses which are also buffered by U6. These
outputs drive the primary of T3 which, in turn, drives the gates of inverter
switching FET Q6 and Q7.
Preregulator
The preregulator consists of T2, Q2, Q3, L4, CR23, C31, and C32. Parallel FET
transistors, Q2 and Q3 are driven alternately, each at a 50 kHz rate. The gates of
Q2 and Q3 are driven by the Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM), U1, through FET
driver U6 and pulse transformer T2.
Current Sensing
Transformer T4 and transistors Q4 and Q5 form a current sense circuit that
functions to sense the current in the step-down inductor L4. This circuit provides
a scaled-down replica of the switching FET current to pin 4 of PWM U1.
Inverter
The inverter consists of T5, Q6, and Q7. FET transistors Q6 and Q7 are also
driven alternately, each at 50 kHz, and provide a 50 kHz switching rate to the
primary of T5. They are not pulse-width modulated, but driven at a 50% duty
cycle, through pulse transformer T3. Drive to the pulse transformers, T2 and T3,
is supplied by U6, a high-current FET driver device. The inverter is driven in a
one-half bridge configuration. Capacitors C31 and C32 divide the full voltage at
L4 by 1/2, and the voltage across each capacitor is alternately applied to the
primary winding of transformer T5 through the switching action of Q6 and Q7.
This configuration produces a self-correcting circuit action that equalizes the
positive and negative voltage swings seen by the primary of T5 and keeps it out
of saturation.
Output Rectifiers and
Filtering
3–72
The approximately 180 V, square-wave voltage across the primary winding of
switching transformer T5 is stepped down in two center-tapped secondaries to
provide drive to the +5 V, ±16.5 V, and ±22 V rectifier and filter circuits. The
16.5 V secondary voltage supplies the +15 V Series-Pass Regulator.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Each of the secondary output voltages is full-wave rectified and filtered using
choke input filter sections. The +5 V output uses two L-sections; the others use a
single L-section filter.
±15 V Regulators
The + and –15 V regulator pass elements, Q8 and Q9, are complementary, with
Q8 being a P-channel FET and Q9 an N-channel FET. In the +15 V regulator,U8A is referenced to the +5 V developed by U5. Operational amplifier U8B
is referenced to ground. In both, the feedback signal from the output voltage is
still applied to the non-inverting input of the amplifiers. With reduced loading of
the supply, an increasing voltage (more positive on the +15 V or more negative
on the –15 V) decreases the conduction of the pass elements thereby reducing the
voltage. With more loading, the output voltage would tend to decrease and the
operational amplifier output will cause the pass elements to increase conduction
to counter the decreasing output voltage.
This complete linear regulator circuit, operational amplifier U8A and series-pass
element Q8, may be viewed as an operational amplifier circuit with R45 acting
as the feedback resistor and R46 as RIN. The closed loop gain of the circuit is
then set by the ratio of the resistor values. Operational amplifier U8A has its
non-inverting input pin supplied via the feedback resistor from the output of the
series-pass element (the regulated +15 V). A 5 V reference voltage developed by
U7, a band-gap reference device, is applied to the inverting input of U8A, pin 2.
The output level of U8A then follows the feedback voltage and is non-inverted at
this point.
The inversion occurs in the series-pass element, a P-channel FET. With reduced
loading of the supply, an increasing voltage from U8A decreases the conduction
of the pass element, Q8, thereby reducing the output voltage. With more loading,
the output voltage would tend to decrease, and the operational amplifier output
also decreases. This increases conduction in the series-pass element to counter
the decreasing output voltage by suppling more current to the load.
From pin 1 of U8A there is a frequency response limiting feedback circuit
formed by C49 and R47 back to the inverting input of the operational amplifier,
pin 2.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–73
Theory of Operation
Alarm Circuitry and Fan Drive (diagram 2)
This circuitry includes the out-of-limit sensing components, the shutdown logic
circuitry, and fan speed control components. Refer to schematic diagram 2 of the
A11 power supply board for the following circuit description.
Alarm Sensing
LED Indicators. LED indicators (DS2 through DS8 and DS13) are placed on the
input voltage side of the Power Supply Supervisor, U9. These indicators provide
a quick visual check to see if the expected input voltages to U9 are present if
troubleshooting of the power supply ever becomes necessary.
Power Supply Supervisor. The Power Supply Supervisor, U9, monitors the +5 V,
+15 V, and –15 V power supply voltages and the LINE SENSE input. If any of
the voltages do not meet the expected level (over or under), the Power Supply
Supervisor outputs the appropriate alarm signal (/OVERVOLTS, /PWR FAIL,
and /UNDERVOLTS). Each of the positive voltages is monitored on a separate
input. A resistive voltage divider sets the input voltage at 2.5 volts. The –15 V
supply is monitored at pin 14 of U9.
The LS input of U9, pin 5, monitors the LINE SENSE signal from the housekeeping supply. That line also has diode-OR’ed signals from the Shutdown
Logic Gate input and the PWM regulation detector. Any of those signals going
low causes the Power Supply Supervisor to output the /PWR FAIL signal to the
main instrument to warn it that power failure is imminent.
The supervisor also develops a voltage reference from pin 3. That voltage is used
for the reference voltage in the overcurrent comparators and the power reset
comparator.
The width of the valid range (tolerance) of input voltages is set by the voltage on
pin 1 (LTH) to be 8%.
Power Reset Comparator. When the power supply is going down, it is important
that the memory devices in the AM700 are not written with random data as the
voltage decreases. There are two signals generated from the Alarm Sensing
circuitry to aid in producing an orderly shutdown of the processor and memory
devices.
These two signals are /PWR FAIL, a warning that the power supply is going
down, and /PWR RESET, a signal that prevents further writing as the voltage
continues falling to the off state. The /PWR FAIL signal is developed by the
Power Supply Supervisor, U16, immediately as the power is turned off. The
/PWR RESET signal is developed by comparator U20B as the voltage decreases
to the point that an /UNDERVOLTS signal is generated by the Power Supply
Supervisor. The time delay between the two events permits the processor to
shutdown while the voltage level is still high enough to permit proper operation.
3–74
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
When the voltage is coming up, it is also important that the memory devices in
the instrument are not written to randomly. The Power Reset Comparator has an
RC timing circuit on its non-inverting input that prevents the /PWR RESET
from going high for a period of time after the undervoltage condition is removed
(see Figure 3–15). The delay permits the power supply voltage to stabilize before
the processor is permitted to start operating.
Overcurrent Sensing
Each of the voltage outputs has a current sensing resistor of low ohmic value to
provide overcurrent information to the Alarm Sensing circuitry. In the +5 V
regulator, that resistor is R39. The total current to the +5 V load passes through
R39. The +5 VI (current sense) level is compared to the +5 V (output) level by
the +5 V overcurrent comparator, U11A, in the Alarm Sensing circuit. The other
supplies have similar sensing resistors in their load current paths. The current
sense voltage of each supply is compared against its output voltage to the load
by individual comparators in the Alarm Sensing circuit. A marked difference
between the two levels causes the associated comparator output to switch low to
indicate an overcurrent condition.
Overcurrent Sense Comparators. Individual comparators for each of the power
supply outputs monitor both the output voltage to the load and the voltage
developed across a current sense resistor in each load path. If the difference
between the two levels increases beyond design levels, the associated comparator
switches states from a normal high to low. The low forward biases a diode in the
OR’ed output line of the comparators to pass the overcurrent condition signal to
the Alarm Logic circuit to cause the power supply to shutdown.
All the comparator circuits are the same with the exception of the +5 V
comparator. The exceptions to that circuit will be discussed after the general
description for the remaining comparators. The +22 V circuit is used as the
example. In that circuit, U12B is the comparator. On the + (non-inverting) input,
a voltage divider circuit formed by R93 and R96, has a divide ratio that produces
approximately 8.32 V at pin 9 between the +22 V output and the –14.4 V
housekeeping supply. (Notice that in the negative voltage supplies, the +14.4 V
housekeeping supply is the reference.)
On the – (inverting) input, a voltage divider formed by R94 and R95 has a divide
ratio that produces approximately 8.07 V at pin 10 between the +22 VI current
sense voltage and the –14.4 V housekeeping supply. If the current in the +22 V
load increases to the point that the +22 VI level rises to the point that the voltage
on pin 10 exceeds the voltage on pin 9 of U12B, the comparator changes states,
and the output on pin 7 goes to ground level. That ground level signal forward
biases CR38 and pulls the common diode-OR’ed anode line to ground. That line
is connected to the Overcurrent Comparator U17A.
In the +5 VI comparator, the voltage swing across the current sense resistor is
very small. To improve the sensitivity of the comparator, VR1 holds a voltage
drop of 5.6 V across a divider formed by R78 and R80. In the anode circuit of
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–75
Theory of Operation
VR1, resistor R79 provides the necessary drop to keep VR1 properly biased
within its current limits. The result this circuit arrangement produces is that
while the voltage divider sets the proper level on pin 5 of the comparator, any
change in the +5 VI current sense level is transferred fully to the comparator; the
junction of R78 and R80 follows the full voltage change because that is what the
voltage drop across R79 is doing. Another difference is that the + input of U11A
is connected to the +5 V supply through a single resistor rather than a voltage
divider circuit as in the other overcurrent sense comparators.
Alarm Logic
The temperature sensing elements also provide input to the Over Temp Indicator
Comparator, U10B, the Over Temp LED comparator, U10A, and the Over Temp
Shutdown Comparator, U17B. The over temperature indicator circuit provides an
advance warning that the temperature is too high, in advance of an actual over
temperature shutdown.
Over Temperature Comparators. Resistors R118, R117, and R116 set up slightly
different references to the comparators with the same reference applied to both
U10A and U10B. When the voltage at the common inputs to the comparators
drops to about 5.4 V, the output pin of comparators U10A and U10B will drop
and DS10, the internal over temp LED, is turned on. That low is inverted by
U28E and applied to the Over Temp LED signal line. That signal is read by the
CPU and an over temperature warning message will be displayed. The user will
then have a visual indication that an over temperature condition exists. The
output of U13B is the /OVERTEMP signal that provides the CPU with an over
temperature warning that causes a warning message to be shown in the display.
If the temperature continues to rise, the comparator input voltage continues to
decrease. At about 4.4 V, the power supply temperature is high enough that a
shutdown is necessary. At that point the output of U17B goes low and sends the
over temperature alarm to U18A in the shutdown logic circuitry. Negative-logic
NOR gate U18A (any low in gives a high out) also has the /OVERVOLTS signal
from the Power Monitor, U9, as an input.
Shutdown Logic. A high output from U18A due to either an over voltage
condition or an excessive over temperature condition fires SCR Q13 and applies
a low to the shutdown gate U18B and the PS FAIL LED gate U18C. Once fired,
the SCR latches the circuit in the shutdown state until the power supply is
completely turned off to remove the housekeeping supply voltages.
The Shutdown Logic gate, U18B, has an input from U18A that is the combined
over voltage and over temperature shutdown signal; an input from U17A that is
the over current shutdown signal, combined from all the over current sensing
circuits; and an input from U16D from the front panel STBY/ON switch. Any of
these inputs going low generates a high SD (shutdown) signal to the Pulse-Width
Modulator to turn off the switching signals to the Inverter FET.
3–76
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Over Voltage Indicator. If an over voltage condition exists, the /OVERVOLTS
signal from U9 is applied to both U18A as input to the shutdown logic circuit
and to an over voltage indicator circuit. The /OVERVOLTS signal is inverted by
U16A to fire SCR Q12. When that device fires, the over voltage indicator LED,
DS10 turns on to assist in troubleshooting an error condition in event of a power
supply over voltage problem. The SCR ensures that the indicator will remain on
until the power supply is completely turned off to remove the +14.4 housekeeping supply voltage.
Overcurrent Comparator. The over current comparator, U17A, is referenced at
2.5 V from U9, pin 3. That reference is applied to the inverting input of U17A.
Under normal conditions, the outputs from the overcurrent sensing comparators
will not be active and VR3 will be conducting through CR43 and R133 to the
+14.4 supply. This will hold the noninverting input of U17A at 6.2 V and the
output of U17A will be high. The /OVERCURRENT signal is therefore high,
and the overcurrent LED will be off. Both the PS FAIL LED gate, U18C, and
Shutdown gate, U18B, will have a high signal on the over current input pins.
The over current signal input to U17A is formed by combining the outputs of the
individual power supply over current comparators. When an over current
condition on any power supply is detected, the common anode side of diodes
CR35 through CR38 or CR46 is pulled low, but the + input of U17A remains
higher than the – input until the voltage on C81 falls enough to cause the voltage
at the junction of CR43 and VR3 to fall below the reference input voltage on the
– input of U17A. The delay provided by the time constant of C81-R132 prevents
an over current condition from being generated by the current inrush when the
power supply first turns on.
The output of comparator U17A then goes down to ground level, and the over
current indicator, DS12, turns on. That low from U17A also causes a shutdown
(SD) to be generated from U18B to turn off the PWM, U1, and a high output
from U18C, the PS FAIL LED gate. The high from U18C biases on Q14 to
cause the PS FAIL LED signal to switch high.
When the PWM shuts down, the over current signal from the individual power
supplies will be removed, but the shut down signal must not be removed from
the PWM for a short period of time. This is done by the time it takes C81 to
change it charge state through R133.
While C81 changes charge level rapidly through R132 for an over current
condition, that path is not connected when the power supply shuts down and the
over current condition goes away. Through R133, the voltage across C81 rises
more slowly to a level that causes the comparator to again switch its output high.
That delay is how long the PWM remains off before it tries to restart. The
difference between the two times (run to off) is about 1:5 and the over current
indicator LED, DS12, will blink.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–77
Theory of Operation
Fan Drive
The variable-speed fan is powered from a thermally controlled +16 to +28 V
supply. A graph of the fan drive voltage versus the temperature is shown in
Figure . Temperature sensing is done by RT2, a thermistor mounted on the 5 V
heat sink. There are provisions for two additional temperature sensing elements
in the main instrument, one of which is connected to the Main CPU heat sink.
Thermistor RT2 has a negative temperature coefficient, so as the temperature
rises, the voltage at the junction of R97 and RT2 decreases. When the temperature gets high enough that the voltage biases on CR39, the input to U14A begins
to follow the temperature changes. The three temperature sense inputs are
diode-OR’ed at the non-inverting input of U14A, a voltage follower operational
amplifier. The highest sensed temperature controls the input to U14A by biasing
off the diodes that have a higher voltage on their cathodes.
The output of U14A is summed with the voltage feedback from the output of the
fan power supply. The feedback signal varies the output switching signal from
U15, a Pulse-Width Modulator. Without the temperature feedback through R101,
the feedback through R102 sets the output voltage to minimum, at about
+16.5 V. The added temperature feedback modifies that provided from the fan
drive circuit to vary the duty cycle of the drive signals to Q10 in proportion to
the temperature. The output of U14A decreases as the temperature increases, so
the feedback voltage at pin 2 of U15 decreases. This makes the Pulse-Width
Modulator output turn Q10 on for longer periods of time to increase the drive
voltage to the fan.
The Fan Drive circuit, composed of Q10, L10, CR42, and C75, is a boosted
power supply to produce the variable drive voltage to the fan. The pulse width
modulator and Q24 are powered from the +16.5 V supply, but the boosted
voltage to the fan can be up to 28 VDC. When Q10 conducts, energy is stored in
the magnetic field of L10. As Q10 shuts down, the energy must be returned to
the circuit. The voltage on the anode of CR42 increases due to the inductive rise
and the diode is biased on.
The energy is rapidly transferred to C75 and CR42 becomes reverse biased to
remove the inductor from the circuit. Until the next pulse of energy from L10,
the stored charge of C75 supplies the drive voltage to the fan. The Pulse-Width
Modulator and feedback circuit controls the fan drive voltage within a range of
+16 to +28 VDC. If Q10 remains off, the voltage on C75 will reduce to below
the +16.5 V supply and CR42 will again become forward biased through L10, so
the minimum output drive voltage to the fan is approximately +16 VDC.
Jumper J4 is a servicing jumper. When it is removed, the ground reference to the
feedback input is removed, and the PWM shuts off. The fan drive then reduces to
minimum. Jumper J4 is for testing purposes only. It may be pulled to eliminate
the feedback signals from the input of U15. Troubleshooting should be attempted
only by an experienced service person.
3–78
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
STBY/ON Switch Circuit
The front-panel STBY/ON switch controls the POWER OFF logic signal to the
shutdown circuitry. The master power ON/OFF switch to the power supply is
located on the rear panel of the instrument. When the front-panel STBY/ON
switch is in the ON position, the POWER OFF signal line is pulled low. This
low is inverted by U16D and applied to the Shutdown Logic Gate, U18B, to
allow the PWM to start operating if no other shutdown condition exists.
With the STBY/ON switch is in the STBY position, the POWER OFF control
line is pulled high by R120 back to the +14.4 V supply. This high is inverted by
U16D, and U18B applies a SD signal to the PWM that prevents it from
outputting drive signals to the inverter switching FET.
Also, with the POWER OFF control line high, diode CR45 is forward biased by
the high POWER OFF signal. This removes the /UV LED signal as a control
signal from the PS FAIL LED gate so the PS FAIL LED signal does not go high
with the STBY/ON switch in the STBY position.
Power Supply Failure Warning. A second output developed from U18D is the
/POFF signal. A low /POFF signal forward biases CR31 in the LINE SENSE
input signal line to the Power Supply Supervisor, U9, to pull the line sense input
(pin 5) of that device low. The Power Supply Supervisor then outputs the /PWR
FAIL signal to the main instrument to provide immediate warning that the power
supply is going down. Another input to this same signal line is the RDETECT
signal through CR32 from the PWM, U1. This signal detects when the PWM is
out of regulation and also causes the Power Supply Supervisor to issue the power
failure imminent signal to the main instrument. This warning to the main
instrument also occurs when the master power ON/OFF switch is turned off.
Disk Drive Assembly (A12)
The disk drive of the AM700 is a purchased assembly. It is interfaced to the
AM700 by the Front Panel Processor, U110, and a dedicated floppy disk
controller device, U105, located on diagram 9 of the A6 MAIN/CPU Board.
When reading and writing data to a floppy disk, the floppy disk controller
handles the transfer using DMA after requesting memory access from the Front
Panel Controller. A schematic diagram is not provided for the disk drive
assembly.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–79
Theory of Operation
LCD Driver Board (A13)
The LCD Driver board (block diagram shown in Figure 3–21) digitizes the
analog RGB output signals from the video display circuit into the correct digital
drive signals for the LCD display. The pixel format of the display is standard
VGA: 640 (H) × 480 (V). Signals output to the display are the following: 4-bits
each of R,G,B (red, green, and blue), vertical sync, horizontal sync, sampling
clock, enable signal, and two +5 V supply voltages. The horizontal display start
is delayed to meet the required timing for the LCD display. Both the horizontal
and vertical sync signals are negative sync.
Color A/D Converters
Each analog signal (R, G, and B) is processed identically. The three signals are
applied to separate analog-to-digital converters (U9 Red, U10 Green, and U11
Blue). An operational amplifier associated with each ADC provides for color
gain and offset control. The analog signal is sampled by the ADC at the 25 MHz
delayed clock rate. The four bits just below the MSB (most-significant bit) of the
8-bit ADC are used for the digital data to the LCD, effectively providing a gain
of two for the color signals.
Digital Color Data Latches
The digital data bits are clocked through two 8-bit latches, with the green and
blue data using all 8-bits of latch U13. The four bits of the red data are clocked
through latch U12. The remaining four bits of latch U12 and PAL U1 are used to
process the horizontal and vertical sync signals to provide delayed sync signals.
These signals are synchronized with the digital color information. Data is
clocked through the latches by a delayed 25 MHz clock signal.
LCD Brightness Control
The brightness control signal from the CPU board (derived from the setting of
the front-panel brightness control) is applied to the backlight inverter power
control circuit. A two-stage amplifier circuit (U4A and U4B) sets the intensity of
the LCD display by controlling the backlight inverter output voltage to the
backlight lamps. The second stage of the amplifier also provides a gain
adjustment (BRT R24) to set the level that turns off the backlight (no display). A
diode network on the output of the second stage shapes the slope of the BRT
control to be more exponential. The +13 VLCD power source is obtained from
the +15 V supply through two diode drops and some additional LC filtering.
3–80
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Theory of Operation
Clock
Delay
U8
25 MHz Clock
HSYNC
VSYNC
DLYD25MCLK
DLYDHSYNC
PAL
HSYNC
DLYDHSYNC
VSYNC
+5V
V Ref
U3
+1.235V
U1
Latch
Gain
Adjust
DLYD25MCLK
R0
R1
R2
R3
U5
Feedback
R00
R01
R02
R03
Red
ADC
U12
DLYD25MCLK
DLYD25MCLK
Offset
Red
+5LCD To
NBH LCD
ENAB
NBV
U9
DLYD25MCLK
Gain
Adjust
U6
Green
ADC
G0
G1
G2
G3
Latch
G00
G01
G02
G03
Feedback
Offset
Green
DLYD25MCLK
U10
Gain
Adjust
U7
Blue
ADC
B0
B1
B2
B3
U13
Feedback
DLYD25MCLK
Offset
Blue
B00
B01
B02
B03
U11
DLYD25MCLK
+15V
Inverter
Power
Supply
+13VLCD
LCD Backlight
Brightness
Control U4
Power to
LCD Backlight
Inverter
Figure 3–21: LCD driver board block diagram
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
3–81
Theory of Operation
LCD Flat Panel Display (A14)
The flat-panel display is a thin-film transistor device. Drive signals to the display
are the 12-bit data (4 bits per color), four timing signals, and the +5 VDC supply
voltage for the transistor array.
LCD Backlight
Backlighting for the LCD display is provided by two cold cathode florescent
tubes. The two tubes, one at the top and one at the bottom, are arranged to
provide edge lighting to the LDC display. The lamps require a kickoff voltage of
800 to 900 VRMS to turn on. They draw about 4 mA and have a power consumption of approximately 1.6 W. Tube life is approximately 10,000 hours, and the
end of life (time for a replacement) is defined as the point when the maximum
brightness reduces to 50% of the original value or when the kickoff voltage
(voltage needed to turn on the lamps) exceeds a maximum of 900 VRMS at 0° C.
Replacement backlight tube sets can be ordered from Tektronix. See the
replaceable electrical parts list section for the part number and ordering
information.
LCD Backlight Inverters
The backlight inverters are small switching supplies that provides the high
voltage level AC required to power the two LCD display back lights. One
version of display has both inverters on a single circuit board; a newer version
uses two separate circuit boards for the two inverters. The maximum voltage
output from an inverter is approximately 800 to 900 VRMS at a typical frequency
of 35 kHz. Backlight brightness is controlled by a control circuit on the LCD
driver board. The control circuit uses the brightness control level from the CPU
(derived from the front panel brightness control) to adjust the brightness of the
backlight tubes. The backlight extinguish level is set by an adjustment in the
backlight inverter control circuit (BRT R25) to turn off at about the 8 to 10%
brightness setting.
3–82
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
These functional checks are used to validate that the AM700 Audio Measurement Set is operating normally. They do not check each of the performance
requirement given in the Specification section of this manual.
As part of these procedures you will run the diagnostics procedures to ensure
those portions of the instrument tested by the diagnostics routines are performing
correctly.
Test Equipment Required
The test equipment needed to perform the verification procedures is listed in
Table 4–1. Use the test equipment shown or an equivalent to do the verification.
If the example test equipment is not available, check the Minimum Specification
column to determine if you can use another piece of test equipment. If you use
other test equipment, the controls and connectors for that equipment may be
different from those called out for the example test equipment. Refer to the
appropriate operator’s manuals for operation of the test equipment.
Table 4–1: Required test equipment
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Equipment required
Minimum specification
Precision Audio Analyzer
Purpose
Example
Precision audio signal measurements and signal generation for
verification procedures
ShibaSoku AM51A Audio
Analyzer
NOTE: The Tegam SG5010 1
may be used as a signal source
for functional checks.
Sine-wave Generator
Frequency Accuracy:
±0.01%; level flatness: (20 Hz to
80 kHz): ≤0.05 dB; level accuracy (20 Hz to 80 kHz): ≤ 0.02 dB;
residual distortion: 0.0010%
(–100 dB)
Distortion Analyzer
Balanced input, THD residual
typically 0.002%, 22 Hz to
80 kHz bandpass
Check generator signal distortion
Frequency Counter
Accuracy and resolution to 8
decimal places, or used with an
external reference (WWV, Loran
C, or GPS) that will improve the
accuracy to 8 decimal places.
20 Hz to 80 kHz range.
Check generator frequency
accuracy
Tegam DC503A1 or equivalent
RMS Meter
Accuracy 1%, resolution 5 digits;
balanced input
Check generator amplitude
accuracy and flatness
Fluke 8506A or 8505A–09
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
ShibaSoku AM51A Audio
Analyzer.
Tegam AA5001A1 or AA501A1
4–1
Performance Verification
Table 4–1: Required test equipment (cont.)
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Equipment required
Minimum specification
Purpose
Example
Digital Audio Measurement
Set
Tektronix AM700
Provide digital audio test signals
and measure digital audio test
signals
Tektronix AM700 Audio Measurement Set
Personal Computer
PC-DOS or MS-DOS 3.0 or
higher, 386, 3.5 inch disk drive.
Serial RS-232 port.
Provide for remote control of the
AM700.
Serial printer with RS–232C
interconnection cable
24-pin dot matrix with RS-232C
serial interface
Check RS–232C operation serial
printer output
Epson LQ series serial printer or
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet with
serial input.
Check GPIB remote operation
Guru II+ Tektronix product
number S3FG100
GPIB controller with standard GPIB cable
Interconnection audio cables
for test equipment.
XLR to XLR
Signal interconnection
Supplied with test equipment
Impedance Transformer
110 W to 75 W impedance
matching
Match AES ref out to 75 W
system
Canare 110 W to 75 W matching
transformer. Part number BCJ–
XJ–TRA
Interconnection Cables
See Figure 4–1
Connect AM700 inputs and
outputs to various test equipment.
Customer fabricated. See Figure
4–1 for diagram.
Audio Cables (2)
Standard XLR female to XLR
male
Signal Interconnection
Customer provided
Attenuator
10X 75 W BNC
Signal attenuation for digital
signal connection to oscilloscope
Tektronix part number
011-0061-00
Termination
Feed through 75 W BNC
Signal termination for digital
signal connection to oscilloscope
Tektronix part number
011-0103-02
Termination
75 W BNC, 0.025%
Signal termination
Tektronix part number
011-0102-01
Signal interconnection
Tektronix part number
103-0030-00
BNC T connector
1
A Tegam TM500 or TM5000 power supply is required to power the plug-in module.
Fabricated Test Cables
Several of the test cables to make the connections from the XLR connectors of
the AM700 to the different connectors of various test equipment are fabricated
specifically the AM700 verification and adjustment procedures. If the verification procedures you want to perform call for one of these cables, you must
fabricate it or a similar cable to make the connections. Figure provides a guide
for use in making the special connector cables.
4–2
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Banana plug to phone plug ground
1/4I Phone plug. Connect
to sleeve only.
Banana plug, black
Banana plug to XLR pin 1 +
2
1
XLR Female.
Connect to pin 1.
3
Banana plug, red
Common mode cable
XLR Female
2
XLR Male
1
1
3
2
3
Wire used is about 1 ft., insulated
XLR to BNC cable
XLR Female
2
1
3
BNC
BNC shield
Center conductor
Use a BNC coaxial cable. Cut off one end and connect to the XLR female.
3-way XLR cable
1
2
3
XLR Male
1
Cable used is shielded
twisted pair. The shield
connects to pin 1 and
the XLR shell on all
connectors.
2
1
3
XLR Female
2
3
Figure 4–1: Interconnection cables
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–3
Performance Verification
Triple Banana to XLR cable
Dual-banana plug
XLR Female
internal connections
Red +
+ 2
1
3
–
Black –
Shield
Banana plug, black
Dual BNC to Dual XLR cable
XLR Female
1
2
3
BNC Female
Cable used is insulated coax.
1
2
3
XLR Male
Dual BNC to 110 W XLR female
BNC Female
Cable used is insulated coax.
1
3
2
XLR Female
110W
Figure 4–1: Interconnection cables (cont.)
4–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Verify Power Supply Operation
Check the power supply at the appropriate line voltage setting for its normal use.
Check 115 V Power
Supply Operation
1. Check that the Line Selector switch is set for 115 V operation.
2. Connect a 115 V power source.
3. Set the rear panel supply push button on/off switch S1 to the on position.
4. Press the Stby/On switch to turn on the AM700 (Green Indicator seen in
switch).
5. Check that the instrument powers up normally and that the fan is exhausting
air.
Check 230 V Power
Supply Operation
1. Check that the Line Selector switch is set for 230 V operation.
2. Connect a 220 V power source.
3. Set the rear panel supply push button on/off switch S1 to the on position.
4. Press the Stby/On switch to turn on the AM700 (Green Indicator seen in
switch).
5. Check that the instrument powers up normally and that the fan is exhausting
air.
If the power supply does not come up normally, refer the AM700 to a qualified
service person for corrective maintenance. A troubleshooting and checkout
procedure for the power supply is given in the Maintenance section of this
manual. If the fan is not exhausting air, do not continue to operate the AM700
until it has been repaired.
Power On Diagnostics
1. On power on, press and hold in the Limits button.
2. Release the Limits button after the AM700 beeps twice. The AM700 will
now run a suite of diagnostic tests before it loads an application.
3. Check that the power-on diagnostics pass as the tests run.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–5
Performance Verification
Analog Generator Checks
Initial checks list actual button presses and screen touches (soft keys) in detail to
assist you in becoming familiar with the user interface operation of the AM700.
As you progress through this procedure, some assumptions about your familiarity are made to reduce the instructions. As an example you may see the
instruction to “make sure the generator is in High Bandwidth mode” where it is
assumed that you know how to do that without explicit instructions.
Analog Generator High
Resolution and
High Bandwidth
Mode Operation
1. If the AM700 is not on, turn it on and wait until it initializes with the FFT
application running. If already on, skip to step 2.
2. Press the Configure button and touch the Input Selection soft key to display
the Input Configuration control panel as shown in Figure 4–2.
Figure 4–2: Input configuration control panel
NOTE. Ch 1 and Ch 2 are measurement channels of the AM700. Any of the input
channels of the AM700 may be connected to either or both measurement
channels using the Input Selection controls.
4–6
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
3. Select the generator as the acquisition input source for CH A and CH B
(normal default is FP A and FP B) by touching the double arrow symbol
next to the generator choice.
This control toggles the generator selection between the two available
choices: connection to the front panel XLR connectors or direct connection
from the A and B analog generators. Press the Clear Menu button.
4. Press the Control button in the Generator section of the control panel (see
Figure 4–3) to display the generator selection screen as shown in Figure 4–4.
Figure 4–3: Audio generator controls
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–7
Performance Verification
Amplitude and frequency
knob assignment icons
Figure 4–4: Generator control display
5. Check that the analog generator is set to High Resolution, Ch A is set to
Sine, Ch B is set to Follow A, and both generator outputs are enabled as
shown in Figure 4–4. Also check that the control knobs for setting the
generator frequency and amplitude are assigned to the analog generator.
6. Touch the Waveform Control icon on the left side of the screen to display the
Waveform Control screen as shown in Figure 4–5.
7. Set the Analog A generator (Ch A) to output a frequency of 1 kHz by
touching the Frequency edit box to highlight it. Enter a 1 on the numerical
key pad and then kHz in the units keys for 1 kHz.
8. Touch the Amplitude edit box to highlight it. Enter a 0 on the numerical key
pad followed by dBu in the units keys for an amplitude of 0.0 dBu.
4–8
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Figure 4–5: Waveform control display
9. Press the On button in the Generator controls section (see Figure 4–3) to turn
on the generator. The On label is backlighted when the generator output is
on. Press Clear Menu to return to the FFT Analyzer display.
10. Touch the second view window icon is the upper left hand corner of the
screen (see Figure 4–6) to turn on both FFT display windows.
Figure 4–6: View window icons
11. Check the FFT display to see that the generator is producing a signal from
the Analog A and the Analog B outputs and check that the noise floor is
–100 dB or lower. Push and hold the Rescale button on the front panel to
rescale the FFT display to fill the view window. (A quick press and release
of the Rescale button rescales the active view only. Holding down the
Rescale button rescales all the view windows.)
12. In the Generator controls section of the front panel (see Figure 4–3), press
the Control button.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–9
Performance Verification
13. In the Generator Control menu (see Figure 4–4), select the High Bandwidth
generator mode. The Analog B generator is automatically set to Follow A.
14. Touch the Waveform Control icon (on the left side of the screen), and set the
generator for a frequency of 10 kHz at an amplitude of 0.0 dBu. Press the
Clear Menu button.
15. Check the FFT display to see that the generator is producing a signal on
Ch 1 and Ch 2, and check that the noise floor is –100 dB or lower.
Analog Generator Outputs
1. In the Generator controls section, press the Control button to display the
generator selection menu as shown in Figure 4–4.
2. Set the analog generator to High Resolution.
3. Touch the Waveform Control icon to display the waveform controls menu
shown in Figure 4–5. Make sure Analog A is the selected generator. Select
Analog A if it is not the selected generator.
4. Touch the Amplitude readout box, and press the Units button in the key pad
area to change from dBu to V. Each press of the Units button steps to the
next available units choice; step as needed to get the units set to V.
5. Set the Analog A generator for a sine wave output at a voltage of 3.5 V and a
frequency of a 120 Hz.
6. Set Analog B to Sine by touching the Waveform edit box (now reading
“Follow A”) and turning the large control knob until Sine has the box around
it. Make the selection either by touching Sine or pressing the Enter key in
the key pad area.
7. Make Analog B the selected generator and set Ch B for same initial settings
of frequency and voltage so the Analog A and Analog B generators have the
same signal output. Reselect Analog A as the controlled generator.
8. Connect the Analog A output of the generator to the input of the external
RMS meter. Use the dual banana to XLR connector to connect to the RMS
meter + and – connectors. Use the single banana connector to connect to the
RMS meter ground connection. The adapter cable wiring is shown in
Figure 4–7.
4–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Dual-banana plug
Red +
XLR Female
internal connections
+ 2
1
3
–
Black –
Shield
Banana plug, black
Figure 4–7: Cable for generator output level check
9. Set the external RMS meter as follows:
Measure mode to LEVEL
Measurement units to voltage (V)
Input impedance 200 kW or greater
10. Check that the Level reading is 3.5 V ±1.0% (3.465 V to 3.535 V).
11. Set the generator voltage to the settings given in Table 4–2 and check the
Level reading for ±1.0% accuracy at each generator setting.
Table 4–2: Generator test voltages at 120 Hz
Generator voltage setting
RMS meter reading (Ch A)
RMS meter reading (Ch B)
24.5 V
16 V
8V
4V
2V
1V
0.5 V
0.25 V
0.125 V
62.5 mV
12. Disconnect the Analog A generator and connect the Analog B generator
output to the input of the RMS meter.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–11
Performance Verification
13. Repeat the checks of step 10 and step 11 for the Analog B generator. To
change the frequency and amplitude of the Analog B generator, press the
Control button in the Generator front-panel control section. Touch the
Waveform Controls icon; then Touch the Analog B soft key. The Amplitude
and Frequency edit boxes will now control the Analog B generator output.
Analog Generator Check
These checks verify the functionality of the analog generator at a low, a mid, and
a high frequency at each attenuator step.
1. Make the analog generator initial settings.
a. Set Units to volts to match the digital voltage meter.
b. Voltage settings
2.000 V rms
c. Initial Frequency setting
120 Hz
d. Make sure the generator is still in High Res Mode.
e. Set the signal to sine wave.
f.
Set the Ch B generator to Sine (not Follow A) so Ch A and Ch B are
checked independently.
g. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls icon and set the output impedance
to 10 W (see Figure 4–8). Set the output impedance by touching the
Output Impedance edit box to display a popup menu of the choice. Turn
the main control knob to select 10 W and touch the edit box again or
press the Enter key in the key pad to make the selection.
2. Check the RMS voltage with the RMS meter at 120 Hz. These are the
reference values. RMS amplitude accuracies at other frequencies are
measured with respect to those measured at 120 Hz.
The specification for amplitude accuracy at 120 Hz with signal amplitudes
from +13.9 dBu to –16.1 dBu is ±0.1 dB (typically within ±0.05 dB). From
less than –16.1 dBu to –34.1 dBu it is ±0.15 dB (typically within ±0.1 dB).
For signal input amplitudes less that –34.1 dBu down to –52.1 dBu, the
amplitude accuracy is ±0.25 dB
3. Disconnect the test cable from the Analog A generator output and connect
the BNC to XLR female adapter cable between the Analog A output and the
frequency counter. The cable wiring is shown in Figure 4–9.
4–12
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Figure 4–8: Advanced analog controls display
XLR Female
+ 2
1
3
BNC
BNC shield
Center conductor
Use a BNC coaxial cable. Cut off one end and connect to the XLR female.
Figure 4–9: Generator frequency check cable
4. Set the generator frequency to 10 kHz and check the AM700 generator
frequency accuracy is within ±0.01% (9999 to 10001) using the frequency
counter.
5. Disconnect the frequency counter and reconnect the RMS meter test cable to
the Analog A generator output.
6. Set the frequency and amplitude to the values shown in Table 4–3 and check
the amplitude accuracy with the RMS meter. Ch A and Ch B (Analog A and
Analog B) amplitude reading should be within ±0.3 dB (≈3%) of each other.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–13
Performance Verification
The measured RMS voltage should be within 0.1 dB (≈1%) of the generator
setting at 120 Hz (the reference frequency). The measured RMS voltage at
10 Hz and 1 kHz should be within ±0.1 dB (≈1%) of the measured RMS
voltage at 120 Hz. At 20 kHz, the measured RMS should be within +0.1 to
–0.2 dB (≈+1% to –2%) of the measured RMS voltage at 120 Hz.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–3: High resolution generator checks
Voltage
Channel
24.5 V
Ch A Voltage
120 Hz (reference
frequency)
10 Hz
1 kHz
20 kHz
Ch B Voltage
8V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
4V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
2V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
1V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
0.5 V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
0.25 V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
125 mV
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
62.5 mV
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
Check Low
Distortion Mode
1. In the Generator Controls, set the generator to High Resolution Mode if not
already in that mode.
2. Use the Frequency and Amplitude edit boxes in the Waveform Control
screen to set the Ch A and Ch B frequency to 1 kHz at 3.5 V.
3. Set the external distortion analyzer measurement bandwidth to Audio or
22 kHz. Check the THD + N using the external distortion analyzer. (It should
be about 0.005%.)
4. Press the Control button in the generator section if the Generator Control
panel is not still displayed.
4–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
5. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls icon to display the screen shown
previously in Figure 4–8.
6. Select High Resolution Distortion Reduction mode for Channel A and
Channel B. The selection indicator box is checked when selected.
7. Check that the Channel A and Channel B THD + N reduces to approximately 0.0025%.
8. Turn off Low Distortion Mode for Ch A and Ch B.
Check High Bandwidth
Generator
1. Press the Generator Control button.
2. Touch the High Bandwidth box under Generator selection (see Figure 4–4 on
page 4–8.
3. Touch Waveform Control.
4. Select the Analog A generator for edit if not already selected. Set Analog A
to Sine, Frequency to 1 kHz (you will see 0.996 kHz), and Amplitude to
3.5 V. Make sure that the Analog A Generator output is on.
5. Check the RMS amplitude at 1 kHz with the RMS meter.
6. Check the THD + N at 1 kHz for a reading of 0.01% or less using the
distortion analyzer.
7. Set the generator frequency to 9 kHz.
8. Check the frequency accuracy is within 0.01% (8999.1 to 9000.9) with the
frequency counter.
9. Set the frequency and amplitude to the values shown in Table 4–4 and check
the amplitude accuracy with the external RMS meter. At 117.1 Hz (this is as
close to 120 Hz as the setting resolution of the high bandwidth generator
permits), the measured values should not differ by more than approximately
1.5% (approximately 0.15 dB) from the set value at signal input levels from
+13.9 dBu down to –34.1 dBu. At input signal levels from less than
–34.1 dBu to –52.1 dBu, the amplitude accuracy at 120 Hz should be within
±0.25 dB (approximately ±2.5%).
At 11.719 Hz and 20 kHz, the measured amplitude values should not deviate
from the 117.1 Hz measured values by more than +1%. At 80 kHz the
measured amplitude values should not deviate from the 117.1 Hz measured
values by more than +5% to –10% (typically this will be near –5%). At
70 kHz, the typical amplitude accuracy is near –3%.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–15
Performance Verification
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–4: High bandwidth generator checks
Voltage
Channel
24 V
Ch A Voltage
117.1 Hz (reference
frequency)
11.719 Hz
20 kHz
Do not check 80 kHz at
24 volts.
Ch B Voltage
8V
80 kHz
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
4V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
2V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
1V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
0.5 V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
0.25 V
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
125 mV
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
62.5 mV
Ch A Voltage
Ch B Voltage
10. Repeat step 9 for Analog B if you want. For a simplified test you can check
the Analog B output at 80 kHz only. This works because the output amplifier
for Analog B is independently checked to 20 kHz in the High Resolution
generator check procedure.
Check Generator Noise
Floor
NOTE. The generator noise floor is difficult to measure accurately under most
conditions. The following method is an approximate measurement method.
1. Set the generator to High Resolution Mode if not already selected.
2. Check that the generator source resistance is set for 10 W.
3. Set the generator output amplitude to 0.0 Volts.
4. Measure the residual noise floor using a 400 Hz to 22 kHz measurement
bandwidth or A weighting.
4–16
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
5. Check that the RMS level is equal to or less than –115 dBu (or –115 dBm
without a 600 W load).
6. Set the generator to High BW mode. Make sure the output amplitude is still
at 0.0 Volts.
7. Check that the RMS level is equal to or less than –95 dBu (or –95 dBm
without a 600 W load.
Check Analog Generator
Output Impedance
1. Press the Analyzer Application button. It takes about 20 seconds for the
Analyzer mode to be loaded and calibrated.
2. If not connected, connect the front panel Analog Out A and B XLR
connectors to the Analog In A and B XLR connectors.
3. Touch the RT icon soft key to display the real-time measurements, if not
already selected.
NOTE. Ch 1 and Ch 2 are measurement channels of the AM700. Any of the input
channels of the AM700 may be connected to either or both measurement
channels using the Input Selection controls.
4. Touch the Ch 1 Level soft key. A box appears around the reading in the
display.
5. Press the mV/kHz button in the keypad (see Figure 4–10) to change the units
to mV and press Enter.
Figure 4–10: Keypad entry buttons
6. Press Ch 2 Level soft key. A box appears around the reading in the display.
If the Ch 2 readings are not displayed, push the Menu button, and touch Ch 2
in the Enables menu to enable the Ch 2 measurements. Press Clear Menu.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–17
Performance Verification
7. Press the mV/kHz button in the keypad to change the units to mV and press
Enter.
8. Press the Configure button.
9. Touch the Input Selection soft key.
10. Make sure the input selection for Ch A and Ch B are set to FP A and FP B,
not Gen A and Gen B.
11. Set the Impedance for FP A and FP B to 600 W by touching the Impedance
edit box and turning the control knob to scroll through the impedance
choices until 600 W is displayed in the edit box. (This test assumes that the
input resistors are within tolerance.)
12. Press the Clear Menu button.
13. Press the Control button in the Generator controls. Check that the generator
is set to High Resolution mode.
14. Touch Waveform Control and make sure both Analog A and Analog B
generators are set to 1 kHz.
15. Set the Amplitude of both analog generators to 1.015 V.
16. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls soft key.
17. Touch Output Impedance soft key.
18. Ensure that the generator source impedance is set to 10 W. Press the Clear
Menu button.
19. Touch the generator status icon.
20. Touch A:Sine Level. Press and release the Units button until the units change
to V. Turn the main control knob to set generator amplitude for a RT level
readout of approximately 1 V.
21. Press the Control button in the Generator section of the front panel.
22. Touch Advanced Analog Controls soft key and set the output impedance to
150 W. Press the Enter button.
23. Press the Clear Menu button.
24. Check to see that the Level reading dropped to approximately 800 mV
(816.8 mV) (within a few percent).
25. Press the Control button in the Generator controls.
4–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
26. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls soft key.
27. Touch the Output Impedance soft key.
28. Select 600 W and press the Enter button.
29. Press Clear Menu button.
30. Check to see that the Level reading dropped to approximately 500 mV
(509.9 mV) (within a few percent).
Check Follow Mode
1. Set the B analog generator to follow mode.
2. Set the A analog generator to 5 V at 8 kHz.
3. Check the B generator output for 5 V at 8 kHz
Check Generator Float
1. Press the Control button in the generator section.
2. Touch Waveform Control and set the generator output to 0.0 Volt.
3. Touch the Advanced Analog Controls icon.
4. Check that the Output Common is set to ground. (Touching the Output
Common selection area toggles between Ground and Floating.)
5. Connect the ohmmeter ground to the AM700 chassis ground through the
special banana plug to phone plug adapter cable shown in Figure 4–11.
Banana plug, black
1/4I Phone plug. Connect
to sleeve only.
2
1
XLR Female.
Connect to pin 1.
3
Banana plug, red
Figure 4–11: Impedance check adapter cables
6. Connect the ohmmeter + lead to the XLR output through the banana plug to
XLR female adapter cable shown in Figure 4–11. It is only necessary to
check one output; ground and float are the same for both.
7. Use an ohmmeter to check that pin 1 of the XLR output is approximately
0 W to 10 W to ground (typically less than 5 W).
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–19
Performance Verification
8. Set the generator output to Floating.
NOTE. There is a difference in the floating impedance between the CRT version
instrument and the flat panel display instrument.
9. Flat panel display version: Check that pin 1 of the XLR output is approximately 825 W to ground.
10. CRT display version:
a. Turn the power off.
b. Check that pin 1 of the XLR output is approximately 1 kW to ground.
11. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700.
12. Turn the power back on.
Check Audio Analyzer Operation
These checks verify the operation of the Audio Analyzer attenuator and gain
stages using 120 Hz (the reference frequency) plus a low, a medium, and a high
frequency. This is done in both the High Res mode and the High BW mode.
Check High Res Mode
1. If not already in Audio Analyzer mode, push the Analyzer button in the
Applications grouping of buttons (see Figure 4–12).
Figure 4–12: Applications buttons
2. Press the Configure button, and then touch the Input Selection soft key in the
screen display.
3. Set the generator to analyzer connection to internal (Gen A and Gen B) and
select the High Res A/D Converter as shown in Figure 4–13.
4–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Figure 4–13: Input Configuration control panel
4. Press the Clear Menu button.
5. Press the Control button in the Generator section of the front panel.
6. Set the A analog generator to High Res mode, with a sine-wave signal output
as shown in Figure 4–4 on page 4–8.
7. Set the B analog generator to Follow A mode. Touch the Waveform Control
soft key and set Analog A Frequency to 1.00 kHz and Amplitude to 3.50 V.
Press the Clear Menu button.
8. Turn on the RT display window and turn off the other display windows as
shown in Figure 4–14.
9. Set the Level Units to Volts to match the generator units for amplitude
settings.
10. Press the Menu button, and touch the Input soft key to display the Input
Configuration menu.
11. In the Input Configuration menu, set the input ranges to manual for Ch A
and Ch B by deselecting the Auto range in the Input Configuration control
panel (shown in Figure 4–13). (The check mark is removed from the ✓ Auto
choice, and the manual Range edit fields are not grayed out.)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–21
Performance Verification
Figure 4–14: Audio Analyzer graphical display with real time (RT) view visible
12. Touch the number area in the Range edit field of Ch A, press the Units
button in the keypad (see Figure 4–15), and press the V/Hz button to select
V as the units for the input range.
Figure 4–15: Keypad entry buttons
13. Use the key pad to set the input range to 3.88 V.
14. Repeat step 12 and step 13 for Ch B.
4–22
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
15. Press the Menu button, touch Enables, and enable the THD measurement.
Channel 1 and Channel 2 must also both be enabled. Deselect any of the
other enables that may be selected. Press Clear Menu.
16. Check the frequency measurement and THD + N at 3.5 V and 1 kHz for both
Ch A and Ch B in the RT display window. The THD + N reading should be
approximately 0.005%.
17. Set the frequency and amplitude to the values shown in Table 4–5 and check
the amplitude reading in the RT display window.
For inputs greater than 1 mV (–57.8dBu) to10mV (–37.8dBu) the accuracy
with respect to 120 Hz should be within ±1 dB. From greater than 10 mV
(–37.8 dBu) to 1.946 V (_8 dBu), the accuracy with respect to 120 Hz is
±0.1 dB, typically ±0.05 dB from 50 Hz to 10 kHz. For input amplitudes
greater that 1.946 V (+8 dBu) to less than 64 V (+36 dBu) for input
frequency below 20 kHz and to less than 16 V (+26 dBu) for input frequencies from 20 to 80 kHz, the amplitude accuracy with respect to 120 Hz is
±0.15 dB (typically ±0.05 dB from 50 Hz to 10 kHz).
Manually change the Analyzer input range as you change the generator
amplitude at 1 kHz or 120 Hz to verify manual ranging. Otherwise, leave Auto
Range on. The easiest way to manually change the range is to push the Menu
button to display the Analyzer menus. Then touch Input under the Main Menu
pop-up. This puts Input Range controls on the right hand side of the display as
shown in Figure 4–16. If you touch the ✓ Auto graphic, the check mark
disappears, and the max full-scale value of the selected range appears.
For either Ch A or Ch B, if you touch the range value (for example 8.00 dBu), if
becomes highlighted, and the main control knob will then change it in 6 dB
steps. The units can be changed to Volts by pushing the Units button in the key
pad area.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–23
Performance Verification
Figure 4–16: Audio Analyzer main menu with input range and input select
submenus
Table 4–5: High resolution analyzer checks
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Range
Voltage applied
Manual Range
At 120 Hz (reference
122.75 V (+44 dBu)
(24.5 V)
61.52 (+38 dBu)
(24.5 V)
30.83 V (+32 dBu)
(24.5 V)
15.45 V (+26 dBu)
15. V
7.74 V (+20 dBu)
7.5 V
3.88 V (+14 dBu)
3.75 V
1.95 V (+8 dBu)
1.875 V
974.95 mV (+2 dBu)
0.9375 V
488.54 mV (–4 dBu)
0.469 V
244.62 mV (–10 dBu)
0.234 V
123.02 mV (–16 dBu)
117 mV
61.51 mV (–22 dBu)
58 mV
4–24
CH 1 amplitude reading
CH 2 amplitude reading
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–5: High resolution analyzer checks (cont.)
Range
Voltage applied
Auto Range (CH A and CH B)
At 10 Hz
CH 1 amplitude reading
CH 2 amplitude reading
24 V
14.8 V
7.4 V
3.7 V
1.8 V
0.9 V
0.45 V
0.225 V
110 mV
55 mV
Auto Range (CH A and CH B)
At 1 kHz
24 V
14.8 V
7.4 V
3.7 V
1.8 V
0.9 V
0.45 V
0.225 V
110 mV
55 mV
Auto Range (CH A and CH B)
At 20 kHz
24
14.8 V
7.4 V
3.7 V
1.8 V
0.9 V
0.45 V
0.225 V
110 mV
55 mV
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–25
Performance Verification
Check High BW Mode
1. Press the Menu button and touch Input Selection soft key.
2. If not already done, in the Input Configuration control panel, set the
generator to analyzer connection to internal. Set the Ch 1 and Ch 2 analyzer
inputs to High BW mode by touching the Analog HBW Inputs soft key.
3. Set the CH A and CH B input ranges to manual (Auto unchecked).
4. Set the analog generator to High BW mode (this automatically sets the B
generator to follow mode).
5. Check the frequency measurement and THD + N at 3.5 V and 1 kHz for both
CH 1 and CH 2 in the RT display window. THD + N should be less than or
equal to 0.003%, typically less than or equal to 0.0015%.
6. Set the frequency and amplitude to the values shown in Table 4–6 and check
the amplitude reading in the RT display window. Manually change the
analyzer input range as you change the generator voltages until you are
satisfied that the manual ranging works. You can select Auto Range at any
time to finish the checks. The amplitude measurement accuracy with respect
to 120 Hz is are defined in the Specification section.
NOTE. Keep in mind that the analog generator you are using may have some
high frequency rolloff (verified earlier in this procedure for the AM700 generator). This step checks the analyzer functionality and is not a check of its
specified measurement accuracy to determine if readjustment is required. The
specified accuracy for 80 kHz is ±1 dB or ≈ 10% relative to the 120 Hz level
measurement.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–6: High bandwidth analyzer checks
Voltage
Channel
24 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
15.2 V
120 Hz (reference
frequency) (117.19 Hz)
11.719 Hz
20 kHz
80 kHz (79.993 kHz)
Do not check 80 kHz at
24 volts. The AM700
generator is specified to
a maximum of 19.45 V
at 80 kHz.
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
7.6 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
3.8 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
4–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–6: High bandwidth analyzer checks (cont.)
Voltage
Channel
1.9 V
Ch 1 Level
120 Hz (reference
frequency) (117.19 Hz)
11.719 Hz
20 kHz
80 kHz (79.993 kHz)
Ch 2 Level
0.95 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
0.475 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
0.238 V
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
120 mV
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
60 mV
Ch 1 Level
Ch 2 Level
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–27
Performance Verification
Check FFT Analyzer Operation
This operational check of the FFT Analyzer checks:
Check FFT Analyzer
H
Averaging
H
Noise Floor
H
High Resolution BW (20 kHz)
H
High BW (80 kHz)
1. Select the FFT Analyzer if it is not already selected.
2. Set the High Resolution generator for 5 kHz at –50 dBu.
3. In the Input Configuration menu, select the generator as the acquisition input
source for CH A and CH B (normal default is FP A and FP B) by touching
the double arrow symbol next to the generator choice.
4. Set the Input Select to High Resolution Analog Inputs.
5. Set Average on.
6. Touch the Menu soft key; then touch the Windows soft key. Select the Kaiser
Bessel FFT window.
7. Check that the display is as shown in Figure 4–17. If you push, or have
already pushed, Rescale, the –50 dBu amplitude will be set to the top of the
FFT display screen and the bottom of the trace will be set to the bottom of
the FFT display screen.
4–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Figure 4–17: FFT Analyzer Window menu display
8. Check that the noise floor is below –120 dBu.
Check Harmonic Content
1. Set the High Resolution generator to an amplitude of 0 dBu and a frequency
of 1 kHz.
2. Looking at the generator output with the High Resolution FFT, check to see
that any harmonics of the fundamental are –85 dB or lower relative to the
fundamental. The third harmonic may be worse than the second harmonic,
but it is typically –90 dBu or lower relative to the fundamental.
3. Press the Control button in the Generator controls area of the front panel.
Touch the Advanced Analog Controls soft key.
4. Turn on the High Resolution Distortion Reduction mode of the generator and
observe that the distortion products and the noise floor diminish.
5. Turn off the High Resolution Distortion Reduction mode.
Check Acquisition Noise
Floor
1. Disconnect the generator from the inputs to the measurement channels.
2. Set the input impedance for 600 W.
3. Check that the noise floor of the FFT display is always below –120 dBu and
mostly below –130 dBu.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–29
Performance Verification
Check Autorange
Function
1. Press the FFT Application button (if the FFT Analyzer is not already
operating).
2. Connect the A and B Analog generator outputs to the Ch A and Ch B input
connectors.
3. Press the Configure button.
a. Touch the Input Selection soft key.
b. Touch the source “toggle” icon soft key to select FP A and FP B.
4. Set the Ch A and Ch B Input ranges to Auto. Press Clear Menu
5. Press the Control button in the Generator controls.
a. Press the Ch A Waveform soft key.
b. Select the Multitone signal and press the Enter button. Multitone signals
are used for this test because they are the most difficult for the autorange
circuitry to process.
c. Set the generator output amplitude to 0 dBu.
d. Press the Clear Menu button.
6. Touch the Generator icon soft key (at the top of the display area).
This displays the Generator status view window.
NOTE. The 0 dBu amplitude of the multitone signal applies to the RMS sum of
the tones, not to the individual tone amplitudes.
7. Using the Amplitude knob, slowly increase the generator output amplitude
(seen in the Generator status view window) until the auto range detects an
over-range condition (the word “clip” should appear momentarily in the top
right section of the display). This should occur at about + 2 dBu and again
between +7.9 and +8.1 dBu.
8. Decrease the amplitude from +8.1. The auto range should down range
between +7.1 to +7.3 dBu. Auto ranging is accompanied by the sound of
relays clicking inside the AM700.
9. Check to see that the auto range does not “hunt” for an acceptable range
when auto ranging occurs.
4–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Check Analog Acquisition
Noise Floor
1. Press the Menu button.
a. Touch the Analog HRes Inputs soft key (if the FFT Analyzer is not
presently in High Resolution mode).
2. Press the Configure button.
a. Touch the Input Selection soft key.
b. Touch the source “toggle” icon soft key to select Gen A and Gen B.
c. Press the Clear Menu button.
3. Press and hold the Average button.
a. Touch the Processing soft key.
b. Select Hold Maximum and press the Processing soft key to enter your
selection.
c. Press the Average button to activate Hold Maximum (Averaging).
d. Press the Rescale button.
4. Touch the View 2 icon soft key to display the second view.
a. Touch the view 2 screen area to change active window to view 2.
5. Press and hold the Average button.
a. Touch the Processing soft key.
b. Select Hold Maximum and touch the Processing soft key.
c. Press the Average button to turn on averaging in view 2.
d. Press the Clear Menu button.
e. Press the Rescale button.
6. Check the generator output amplitude to ensure that it is still at +7.1 dBu
from the previous procedure. Set the generator output amplitude for
+7.1 dBu if it is not.
7. Check to see that the average noise floor is –90 dBu or lower. The noise
floor is limited by the generator.
8. Check that there are no harmonics or noise spurs greater than –80 dBu.
9. Turn the generator off and press the Average button to clear the Hold
Maximum trace. Then, press the Average button again to start a new Hold
Maximum trace.
10. Observe that the Hold Maximum noise floor is below –120 dBu.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–31
Performance Verification
11. Press the Average button to turn off Hold Maximum in the active view.
12. Touch the view 1 screen area and and press the Average button. Observe that
the noise floor with no averaging is less than –130 dBu.
Input Impedance Verification
These checks verify the input impedances of the Audio Analyzer on channel A
and channel B.
Set Up the Generator
1. Set the external generator to output a 1 kHz sine wave, and set the generator
output to 0.775 V.
2. Set the source resistance of the generator to 600 W.
Set Up the AM700
Audio Analyzer
1. If not already in the Audio Analyzer application, start the Audio Analyzer
application.
2. Make sure that the input configuration is using High Resolution mode.
3. Set the AM700 input configuration for Front panel A and B.
4. Set the input range for channels A and B to +2 dBu (0.95 V).
5. Set the Input Impedance for channels A and B to 200 kW.
Verify Ch B and Ch B
Input Impedance
1. Connect the output of the external generator to the Channel A input of the
AM700.
2. The input should read approximately 0 dBu.
3. On the AM700, set the Input Impedance to 600 W.
4. Check to see that the measured level has dropped to approximately –6 dBu.
5. On the AM700, set the Input Impedance to 150 W.
6. Check to see that the measured level has dropped to approximately –14 dBu.
7. Verify Channel B is the same manner as Channel A.
4–32
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Verify CRT Display Operation
AM700 Setup
Check Display Focus
1. Press Analyzer. When the Analyzer application has loaded, select all four
graph view windows for display. Do not select the RT view window.
1. Check the focus in the center of the screen.
2. Check the focus at the corners of the screen.
The focus should not be objectionable in any area of the screen.
Check Size, Linearity,
Trace Rotation, and
Centering
1. Check that the display width in the center is approximately 5 inches
(12.8 cm).
2. Check that the display height in the center is approximately 3.75 inches
(9.52 cm).
3. Check that the view windows for the four views are the same size vertically.
4. Check that the display is vertically centered with approximately the same
spacing at the top and bottom of the viewing area.
5. Check that the display is horizontally centered with approximately the same
spacing at the left and right sides of the viewing area.
6. Check that the display is aligned so the four graph view windows are
approximately square and the horizontal border lines of the view windows
are parallel to the top and bottom of the AM700 bezel.
a. Straight edges should be relatively straight with minimal bowing.
b. Boxes should have relatively square corners.
Check Display Intensity
Control
1. Press and hold in the Display button.
2. Check that the display brightness is set for 70% (this is the power on default
brightness level setting).
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–33
Performance Verification
3. Rotate the large control knob counterclockwise to decrease the display
intensity to 0%.
4. Check that the display is completely dimmed.
5. Release the Display button then press and hold it in again.
6. Check that the display brightness is now set for 90%.
7. Rotate the large control knob clockwise to increase the brightness to 100%,
then release the Display button.
8. Select the FFT Analyzer.
9. As the FFT Analyzer application is loading, check the application name
display for even illumination and for phosphor burns.
10. Check that there are no retrace lines visible.
11. Return the display brightness level to 70%.
NOTE. Minor deviations of the display from exact alignment do not affect the
accuracy of the measurements. Readjustment of the display monitor should not
be attempted for any minor deviations. They should be noted for the next regular
scheduled alignment. Major deviation from alignment indicates a display
monitor problem and should be referred to a qualified repair facility for
corrective action.
4–34
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Verify Flat Panel Display Operation
1. Press FFT. When the FFT application has loaded, touch View Setup, select
the Spectrogram display, and then touch the Accept Changes soft key.
2. Check that there are no streaks or color smears of red, green, or blue.
3. In the UTILITIES front panel selections, press the Configure button.
4. Verify that the Configuration options: display has no streaks or color
smears. If there are any color streaks or smears, the ADC gain for the
associated color may need adjustment.
5. In the UTILITIES front panel selections press and hold in the Display
button.
6. Use the large control knob to set the Adjust brightness: level to 10%.
7. Check that the backlight for the LCD display just turns off (no visible
display at 10% brightness). If there is a visible display or if the display is
dimmed at too high a percentage of brightness, the internal BRT level may
need adjustment.
NOTE. The backlight display brightness decreases slowly with use. At an average
of four hours of use per day, the display brightness decreases to about 50% of
the original brightness after 3.5 years or about 5000 hours of total use time. If
the brightness level become too dim, it is time for a backlight replacement.
8. Release the Display button, and then press it again to return to the default
brightness level.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–35
Performance Verification
Verify Digital Generator
These checks are done using one AM700 Audio Measurement Set (the test
AM700) as a signal source or measurement instrument for the AM700 being
tested (the DUT).
Clock Rate Range
and Accuracy
1. Turn power on both AM700 Audio Measurement Sets.
2. After FFT application is initialized, make the following choices for both
measurement sets:
a. Press the Configure button.
b. In the Configure menu, touch the State Saving soft key.
c. Touch the Factory Default soft key and select Factory Defaults.
3. Set the DUT and the test AM700 as follows:
Press
Touch
Press
Touch
Set
Touch
Set
Digital button
Eye Diagram icon
Menu button
Digital Audio soft key
Sample Rate = 48 kHz
Interface Timing soft key
Mode = From Audio
4. Connect the DUT Digital Out to the test AM700 Digital In.
5. Check that the test AM700 Main Sample Freq. = 47999.76 to 48000.24 Hz.
6. Check that the test AM700 Peak to Peak Jitter reading is 0.05 UIp-p or less.
7. Set the DUT: Interface Timing as follows:
Mode = Variable
Var Freq = 30 kHz to 52 kHz
8. Check that the test AM700 eye diagram stabilizes, and the Main Sample
frequency follows the variable frequency of the DUT as it is changed in
step 7.
9. Check that the test AM700 has a Peak to Peak Jitter reading of 0.08 UIp-p or
less when the DUT Var Freq = 52 kHz.
10. Set the DUT as follows:
Touch
Set
Jitter Generation soft key
Long Cable Simulation = ON
11. Check that the test AM700 Main Channel Equalization reads 5 or 6 dB.
4–36
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
12. Set DUT as follows:
Set
Long Cable Simulation = OFF
13. Connect the DUT to the test AM700 as follows:
DUT Digital Out signal to the test AM700 Digital In connector
DUT AES REF OUT to the test AM700 AES REF IN connector
14. Touch the Interface Timing soft key, and then touch the Clock Phase Offset
soft key. Press the Units button until the units are set to UI.
15. Set the DUT Clock Phase Offset to: –1, +1, –64, and +63.5. Check that the
test AM700 Phase Diff. reads the same as the DUT. (Note that –64 yields
+64.)
Check Main Output
Residual Jitter
1. Connect the DUT the the test AM700 as follows:
DUT Digital Out to the test AM700 Digital in
Test AM700 AES REF OUT to DUT AES REF IN
2. Set the DUT as follows:
Touch
Select
Interface Timing soft key
Mode = From Ref
3. Set the test AM700 as follows:
Mode = From Audio
4. Check that the test AM700 has a Peak to Peak Jitter reading of 0.08 UIp-p
or less. If reading is >0.09, check again with the test AM700 sample rate
at 44.1 kHz.
Ref Output Residual Jitter
1. Connect DUT AES REF OUT to the test AM700 Digital In.
Set DUT: Mode = From Audio
2. Check that the test AM700 Peak to Peak Jitter reading is 0.03 UIp-p or less.
3. Set DUT:
Mode = Variable
Var Freq = 52 kHz
4. Check that the test AM700 Peak to Peak Jitter reading is 0.08 UIp-p or less.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–37
Performance Verification
Check High Frequency
Jitter Tolerance
1. Connect the test equipment as follows:
DUT Digital Out to the test AM700 Digital In.
DUT BNC OUT to DUT BNC IN.
Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT AES REF IN.
2. Set DUT:
Input = RP BNC; Mode = From Ref.
3. Set the test AM700:
Press
Select
Touch
Set
Press
Set
Jitter Generation soft key
Generate Jitter Sine soft key
Jitter Ampl
Jitter Ampl = 0.12 UIp-p
Jitter Freq
Jitter Freq = 30 kHz
4. Increase the test AM700 Jitter Ampl in steps of 0.01 UI until the test AM700
Eye Diagram looses lock. Check that Jitter Ampl is at least 0.17 UI.
(spec is 0.12, typical is 0.3 UI).
Static Phase Difference
1. Connect DUT Digital Out to a dual channel oscilloscope through the special
adapter cable shown in Figure 4–18.
Dual BNC to 110 W XLR female
BNC Male
Cable used is insulated coaxial cable
1
3
2
XLR Female
110W
Figure 4–18: Dual BNC to 110 W XLR adapter cable
2. Connect the AES REF OUT of the DUT to the CH 3 (or trigger input)
through a 110 W impedance transformer; a 10X, 75 W attenuator; and 75 W
BNC feed through termination.
3. Press Interface Timing soft key.
Set
Set
4–38
Mode = From Audio
Clock Phase Offset to 0.00 UI (Unit Interval)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
4. Setup the oscilloscope to view the signal. Typical settings are as follows:
Time/Div
Volts/Div
Trigger
Trigger Source
Trigger Level
CH 1 and CH 2
50 ns/div
1 V/div
Normal
CH 3 (trigger input)
Auto
On
5. Check on the oscilloscope, that the time from REF zero crossing to Main
zero crossing is less than 50 ns.
Output Level
1. Connect DUT Digital Out to a differential oscilloscope inputs using the
110 W XLR to dual BNC adapter cable shown in Figure 4–18.
2. Set the oscilloscope controls for ADD, INVERT ON, and set CH 1 and CH 2
OFF.
3. Set DUT:
Touch
Set
Interface Amplitude soft key
XLR Output for the following:
0.01 Vp-p
0.1 Vp-p
1 Vp-p
5 Vp-p
8 Vp-p
10 Vp-p
4. At each setting, check that the oscilloscope reads the same (±10 mV ±5%).
5. Disconnect the Digital Out signal from the oscilloscope.
6. Connect DUT Unbalanced Out to the oscilloscope input using a 75 W BNC
coaxial cable and a 75 W feed through termination. On the oscilloscope, turn
off ADD and INVERT.
7. Set the DUT as follows:
Touch
Set
Interface Amplitude soft key
BNC Output for the following:
0.02 Vp-p
0.2 Vp-p
1 Vp-p
2 Vp-p
8. For each voltage setting in step 7, check that the oscilloscope reads the same
(±2 mV ±2%).
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–39
Performance Verification
9. Connect DUT AES REF OUT to the differential oscilloscope inputs using
the 110 W XLR-to-dual-BNC adapter.
10. Check for 4.9 to 5.9 Vp-p.
Phase Jitter Generation
1. Connect the DUT as follows:
AES REF OUT XLR connector to the oscilloscope CH 3 trigger input
using 110 W to 75 W impedance matching transformer.
2. Connect DUT Unbalanced Out BNC to the oscilloscope CH 1 input using a
75 W coaxial cable and a 75 W feed through termination.
3. Set the DUT controls as follows:
Touch
Select
Touch
Select
Set
Set
Press
Interface Timing soft key
Mode = From Audio
Jitter Generation
Generate Jittered Sine
Jitter Ampl = 0.5 UIp-p
Jitter Freq. = 1 kHz
Generator On button to Off
4. Set scope with delay or mag for 20 ns/div and measure width of jitter using
delta-delay or cursors. It should be 81 ns ±8 ns. (73 to 89 ns).
5. Set DUT Jitter Freq = 10 kHz
6. Check for a jitter width of 81 ns ± 8 ns. (73 to 89 ns).
7. Set DUT Jitter Freq = 20 kHz
8. Check for a jitter width of 81 ns ± 8 ns. (73 to 89 ns)
9. Set DUT Jitter Freq = 30 kHz
10. Check for a jitter width of 81 ns ± 16 ns. (65 to 97 ns)
11. Set DUT Jitter Freq = 50 kHz
12. Check for a jitter width of 81 ns ± 16 ns. (65 to 97 ns)
13. Set DUT Jitter Ampl = 0.09 UIpp, Jitter Freq = 1 kHz
14. Check for a jitter width of 14.6 ns ± 1.5 ns. (13.1 to 16.1 ns)
4–40
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Digital Receiver
The following check verify the operation of the Digital Receiver hardware.
Receiver Interface
Parameter Measurements
1. Connect the DUT as follows:
Digital Out to Digital In
UNBALANCE OUT to UNBALANCE IN
2. Set DUT controls as follows:
Press
Touch
Press
Touch
Select
Press
Touch
Select
Digital button
Icon Eye Diagram soft key
Configure button
Input Selection soft key
FP XLR, Clear Menu button
Menu button
Interface Ampl soft key
XLR Output = 0.15 Vp-p
3. Check that the Main Channel Level follows the XLR Output as shown in
Table 4–7.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–7: Main output and XLR output test
Main channel level measurement
XLR output V
Minimum V
Maximum V
0.15
0.102
0.207
0.50
0.400
0.610
2.00
1.67
2.33
5.00
4.22
5.78
7.25
6.14
8.37
8.00
6.77
8.50
4. Select DUT Rear Panel BNC Connector as follows:
Press
Touch
Select
Press
Set
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Configure button
Input Selection soft key
RP BNC
Clear Menu
BNC Output = 0.03 Vp-p
4–41
Performance Verification
5. Check the Main Channel Level as indicated in Table 4–8.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–8: BNC output and main output test
Main channel level
Check Clock Rate
BNC output
Min
Max
0.03
0.013
0.052
0.10
0.072
0.132
0.50
0.412
0.592
1.00
0.837
1.17
2.00
1.69
2.32
1. Set DUT controls as follows:
Press
Set
Press
Set
Digital Audio soft key
Sample Rate = 48 kHz
Interface Timing soft key
Mode = From Audio
2. Check that Main Sample Freq is 47999.760 to 48000.240 Hz.
3. Set the DUT as follows:
Mode = Variable
Var Freq = 30 kHz
4. Check that eye diagram stabilizes.
5. Set the DUT as follows:
Var Freq = 52 kHz
6. Check the that eye diagram stabilizes.
Check Static Phase
Difference
1. Set the DUT as follows:
a. Press the Configure button, touch the Input Selection soft key, and select
the AES Gen.
b. Touch the Eye Diagram icon, press the Menu button, touch the Digital
Audio soft key, and make the following selection:
Sample Rate = 48 kHz
c. Touch the Interface Timing soft key and make the following selection:
Mode = From Audio
4–42
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
d. Set the Clock Phase Offset to the following values:
0, 0.5 UI, –0.5 UI, 63.5 UI, and –64 UI
2. Check that the Phase Diff. on the test AM700 reads the same as the values in
step 1, part d ±1 UI.
NOTE. 64 UI = –64 UI just as 180° = –180°)
Check Phase Jitter (Jitter
spectrum flatness)
1. Connect the test AM700 as follows:
Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT Digital In
2. Set the AM700 as follows:
Touch
Touch
Set
Set
Jitter Generation soft key
Generate Jittered Sine soft key
Jitter Ampl = 10 UI
Jitter Freq = 50 Hz
3. Setup controls for DUT as follows:
Press
Touch
Select
Press
Touch
Touch
Select
Select
Press
Touch
Select
Press and hold
Set
Release
Press
Configure button
Input Selection soft key
FP XLR
Clear Menu button
Icon Jitter Spectrum
Eye/Jitter Detection soft key
120 Hz
Gain = x1
Configure button
Input Selection soft key
FP XLR
Average button
Avg. Count = 8
Average button
Average button on
4. Zoom in and use the cursor to measure the spectrum at the generated
frequency (47 Hz).
a. Check for a reading in the range from 18 to 22 dBUI.
b. Repeat the measurements as indicated in Table 4–9.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–43
Performance Verification
Table 4–9: Phase Jitter 1
Test AM700: Jitter freq =
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Jitter ampl = 10 UI
Test AM00
50 Hz
200 Hz
1 kHz
D
1x, 120 Hz
18 – 22
18 – 22
19 – 21
U
1x, 1200 Hz
18 – 22
18 – 22
19 – 21
T
8x, 1200 Hz
18 – 22
18 – 22
N/A
c. Set the test AM700 Jitter Amplitude = 0.32 UI, and use the cursor to
measure as indicated in Table 4–10.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 4–10: Phase Jitter 2
Test AM700
Test AM700: Jitter freq. =
Jitter ampl =0.32 UI
50 Hz
200 Hz
1 kHz
10 kHz
30 kHz
50 kHz
1 x, 120 Hz
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
–11 to –9
–12 to –8
N/A
N/A
1x, 1200 Hz
N/A
N/A
–11 to –9
–12 to –8
N/A
N/A
8x, 120 Hz
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
–11 to –9
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
8x, 1200 Hz
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
–11 to –9
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
–12 to –8
Check Jitter Spectrum
Noise Floor
1. Connect the test AM700 as follows:
Test AM700 AES REF OUT to DUT Digital In.
2. Calibrate the DUT as follows:
Press:
Touch
Touch
Touch
Touch
Configure button
System Setup soft key
Calibrate soft key
Calibrate Now soft key
Accept Changes soft key
3. Set the DUT as follows:
LF Rej = 120 Hz
Jitter Gain = x8
Avg. = 8
4. Zoom in and use the cursor to measure the spectrum at 50 Hz.
5. Check that the reading is below –40 dBUI.
6. Scroll through spectrum up to 1 kHz.
7. Check that any spurs found are below –40 dBUI.
4–44
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
8. Press the Rescale button and check that any other spurs found are below
–40 dBUI.
Check Peak-to-Peak Jitter
Measurement Accuracy
1. Connect the test AM700 as follows:
Test AM700 Digital Out to DUT Digital In (XLR)
2. Set the DUT controls as follows:
Press
Touch
Press
Touch
Select
Select
Digital button
icon Eye Diagram soft key
Menu button
Eye/Jitter Detection soft key
LF Rejection = 120 Hz
Jitter Gain = x1
3. Do a calibration of the DUT as follows:
Press
Touch
Touch
Touch
Touch
Configure button
System Setup soft key
Calibrate soft key
Calibrate Now soft key
Accept Changes soft key
4. Set the test AM700 controls as follows:
Press
Select
Set
Press
Jitter Generation soft key
Generate Jitter Sine
Jitter Ampl = 0 UIpp
GENERATOR On button
5. Record the peak-to-peak jitter from the DUT. This is “120 Hz residual”
(0.03–0.05 UI). The specification is 120 Hz residual: 0.03 – 0.045 UI (p-p
jitter).
6. Set the DUT LF Rejection to 1200 Hz, “1200 Hz residual” The specification
is 1200 Hz residual: 0.03 – 0.045 UI (p-p jitter).
NOTE. If the residual peak-to-peak jitter exceeds 0.05 UI, change the sample
frequency on the test AM700 to 44.1 kHz as follows: press the Menu button,
touch the Digital Audio soft key, touch the Sample Rate soft key; rotate the large
knob to select 44.1 kHz, and press enter to make the change. Reset the sample
rate to 48 kHz when you are done with the checks.
7. Set the Test AM jitter amplitudes and frequencies and DUT LF Rejection as
indicated in Table 4–11, and check that the Jitter measurement is within the
measurement accuracy range shown. Record the measurements in the table.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–45
Performance Verification
a. Do the checks for 120 Hz LF Rej at a jitter amplitude of 0.2 UI first
from 500 Hz to 30 kHz; then make the 1200 Hz Lf Rej check at 30 kHz
(1200 Hz LF Rej is only checked at 30 kHz).
b. Set the jitter amplitude to 0.65 UI and make the 1200 Hz LF Rej check;
then switch the LF Rej to 120 Hz to make the check from 30 kHz down
to 500 Hz jitter frequency.
Table 4–11: Test AM700 jitter measurement accuracy
Test settings
Measurement
accuracy range
Test AM jitter frequency
500 Hz
2 kHz
5 kHz
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
Not checked
30 kHz
Test AM Jitter Ampl = 0.2 UI
DUT
LF Rej: 120 Hz
0.17 UI to 0.32 UI
LF Rej 1200 Hz
0.17 UI to 0.32 UI
Test AM Jitter Ampl = 0.65 UI
DUT
LF Rej = 120 Hz
0.6 UI to 0.7 UI
LF Rej = 1200 Hz
0.6 UI to 0.7 UI
Check Eye Diagram
Residual Jitter
1. Set the DUT as follows:
a. Touch the Eye Diagram soft key (Icon).
Press
Touch
Select
Configure
Input Selection
FP XLR
b. Touch the Digital Audio soft key.
Set
Sample rate = 48 kHz
c. Touch the Interface Timing soft key.
Set
Set
Mode = From Audio
Offset = 0
d. Touch the Eye/Jitter Detection soft key.
Select
120 Hz
2. Connect the DUT as follows:
DUT AES REF OUT to DUT Digital In
3. Check that the peak-to-peak jitter is 0.03 UIp-p max.
4–46
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
NOTE. If the residual peak-to-peak jitter exceeds 0.05 UI, change the sample
frequency on the test AM700 to 44.1 kHz as follows: press the Menu button,
touch the Digital Audio soft key, touch the Sample Rate soft key; rotate the large
knob to select 44.1 kHz, and press enter to make the change. Remake the check.
of step 3. Reset the sample rate to 48 kHz when you are done with the checks.
Check Input and Output
Impedance
Check the Digital Out and AES REF Out as follows:
1. Set the DUT as follows:
a. Touch Interface Ampl soft key.
Set
XLR Output = 5.00 Vp-p
2. Connect the AES REF OUT to the differential oscilloscope input using an
unterminated dual BNC to dual XLR cable adapter (shown in Figure 4–19).
XLR Female
2
1
3
BNC Female
Cable used is insulated coax.
1
2
3
XLR Male
Figure 4–19: Dual BNC to dual XLR cable adapter
3. Record the open-circuit output level as measured from the oscilloscope.
Ignore the overshoot caused by the cable, and measure at the center of tilt (if
tilt is present in the signal display).
4. Connect a precision 110 W resistor between pin 2 and pin 3 of the open end
of the dual XLR adapter cable or use the 110 W XLR to BNC cable adapter
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–47
Performance Verification
shown in Figure 4–20 to make the connection from the XLR connector to the
oscilloscope inputs.
5. Measure the terminated-output level using the oscilloscope.
6. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to open-circuit level.
7. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.45 to 0.55.
BNC Female
Cable used is insulated coax.
1
XLR Female
2
3
110W
Figure 4–20: Dual BNC to 110 XLR female adapter cable
8. Measure the terminated-output level.
9. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to open-circuit level.
10. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.45 to 0.55.
11. Connect the front panel Digital Out signal to the differential oscilloscope
input using a non-terminating adapter.
12. Repeat step 3 through step 10 for the Digital Out signal.
Check the Digital In and AES REF In impedance as follows:
1. Record the terminated Digital Out signal level measured by the oscilloscope.
2. Remove the precision termination and connect the free end of adapter to the
Digital In connector.
3. Measure the signal level with the oscilloscope.
4. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to the precision-terminated
level.
5. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.95 to 1.05.
6. Repeat the check for the AES REF In connector.
4–48
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Check the UNBALANCE OUT AND IN impedance as follows:
1. Connect the UNBALANCE OUT connector to the oscilloscope with 48 inch
or shorter 75 W cable.
2. Record the open circuit output level as measured with the oscilloscope.
3. Terminate the cable at the oscilloscope using BNC tee connector and
0.025%, 75 W termination.
4. Record the terminated output level.
5. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to open-circuit level.
6. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.48 to 0.52.
7. Remove the precision termination and connect the open end of the tee to the
UNBALANCED IN connector with a 75 W cable.
8. Calculate the ratio of the input-terminated level to the precision-terminated
level.
9. Check that this ratio is in the range of 0.98 to 1.02.
Check the OPTICAL IN and OPTICAL OUT as follows:
1. Set the DUT for as follows:
a. Touch the Icon Eye Diagram soft key.
b. Set the Eye/Jitter Detection to 120 Hz.
c. Press the Configure button.
d. Touch the Input Selection soft key.
e. Select RP Optical.
f.
Press the Clear Menu button.
2. Connect a 1-meter plastic optical fiber cable from the OPTICAL OUT
connector to the OPTICAL IN connector.
3. Check for normal eye with 0.08 UIp-p or less jitter with a Main Channel
Level in the range of 2 V to 3 Vp-p.
NOTE. If the residual peak-to-peak jitter exceeds 0.08 UI, change the sample
frequency on the test AM700 to 44.1 kHz as follows: press the Menu button,
touch the Digital Audio soft key, touch the Sample Rate soft key; rotate the large
knob to select 44.1 kHz, and press enter to make the change. Remake the check
of step 3. Reset the sample rate to 48 kHz when you are done with the checks.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–49
Performance Verification
Check the DSP Port
The following procedure checks that the DSP port functions to provide direct
input and output of digital signals to and from the DSP.
DSP Port Test
1. Connect a DSP PORT test cable on the rear panel from the test AM700 to
DUT.
2. On a PC, use Edit to make a file called dport.on" which contains the
following command line to switch the DSP to the transmit mode:
scpi INT: SOUR:DSP:TMODE on
NOTE. This has to be an ASCII text file, so use EDIT instead of a word processor
that may add formatting or control characters. You can also use a Windows tool
such as Note Pad to write this file. There is no front panel control to make this
switch.
3. Save the file to a 3.5 inch floppy disk labeled “dtest” and remove it from the
PC disk drive.
4. Insert the 3.5 inch floppy disk labeled “dtest” into the the test AM700.
5. Setup the the test AM700 using the following procedure:
a. Press the Storage button, and touch the left Drive soft key to switch to
dos. (This should display the files in the floppy disk.)
b. If not already done, touch the right Drive soft key to select nvram.
c. Touch function/ (on the right side); then touch Change Directory.
d. In the DOS directory list, touch the dport.on file name.
e. Press the Copy soft key, then OK. Wait for about 1 second, and then
press the Clear Menu button.
f.
Press the GENERATOR Control button, touch the AES soft key in the
menu, and then press the Clear Menu button.
g. Press the Function button, and select the dport.on function name.
h. Touch the Run Function soft key, and wait for 1 sec.
i.
4–50
Select the FFT application.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
6. Set the AM700 (DUT) under test as follows:
a. Press the GENERATOR/Control button, touch the DSP soft key, and
then touch the Waveform Control soft key. Make the following
selections:
Select
Digital SF 1
Sine
Frequency = 1 kHz
Amplitude = 0 dBu
Select
Digital SF 2
Sine
Frequency = 5 kHz
Amplitude = 0 dBu
b. Press the Clear Menu button.
c. In the GENERATOR control panel, press the Generator On button.
d. Press the FFT button, and then press the Configure button.
e. Touch the System Setup soft key, and then touch the Conversion
Standards soft key. Make the following selection:
Digital Audio Sampling Rate = Interface Clock
f.
Touch the Accept Changes soft key.
7. Set the the test AM700 as follows:
a. Press
Touch
Touch
GENERATOR/Control button
DSP soft key
Waveform Control soft key
b. Select
Digital SF 1
Sine
Frequency = 10 kHz
Amplitude =0 dBu
c. Select
Digital SF 2
Sine
Frequency = 15 kHz
Amplitude = 0 dBu
d. Press
Clear Menu button
e. Press
GENERATOR On button
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–51
Performance Verification
f.
Press the FFT button, and then the Configure button. Touch the System
Setup soft key; then touch the Input Selection soft key. Make the
following selections:
Channel 1 = DSP A
Channel 2 = DSP B
g. Press the Clear Menu button, and then the Configure button. Touch the
System Setup soft key, and then the Conversion Standards soft key.
Make the following selection:
Digital Audio Sampling Rate = Interface Clock
h. Touch the Accept Changes soft key.
i.
Turn on Channel 2 on the test AM700 (press icon Channel 2).
8. Set the DUT as follows:
a. Press the Configure button, and then touch the Input Selection soft key.
Make the following selections:
Channel 1 = DSP A
Channel 2 = DSP B
b. Press the Clear Menu button.
c. Turn on Channel 2 on the DUT (press icon Channel 2).
d. Check that the DUT FFT shows the following displays:
Channel 1 displays 10 kHz signal
Channel 2 displays 15 kHz signal
e. Check that the test AM700 FFT shows the following displays:
Channel 1 displays 1 kHz signal
Channel 2 displays 5 kHz signal
4–52
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Check Digital Interface Tester (DIT) Functionality
1. Reset the AM700 setting to Factory Default as follows:
a. Press the Configure button.
b. Touch the State Saving soft key, and then touch Factory Defaults.
2. Press Configure button.
a. Press the Input Selection soft key.
b. Press the source “toggle” icon soft key to select AES Gen for DigMain
SF1 and SF2.
c. Press Clear Menu button.
3. Press MENU button.
a. Press Digital Main Inputs soft key to select DigMain SF1 &SF2
acquisition inputs.
b. Press Clear Menu button.
4. Press ON button in the Generator control panel.
a. Press the Rescale button.
b. Check to see that the FFT shows a sine wave being generated.
5. Press the Digital Application button.
a. When the Digital Application starts, check to see that the bit activity
display is active on bits 4 through 27 and 30 through 31.
b. Touch the 1/0 icon soft key.
c. Check to see that the Channel Status Data is displayed.
d. Press the eye height icon soft key.
e. Check to see that the eye height diagram is displayed on the screen.
f.
Press jitter spectrum icon soft key.
g. Check to see that the jitter spectrum is displayed.
h. Press the Menu button.
i.
Touch the Jitter Generation soft key.
j.
Touch the Generate Sine soft key.
k. Touch the Eye/Jitter Detection soft key.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–53
Performance Verification
l.
Touch the Jitter Gain soft key to select X8 gain.
m. Press the Average button.
n. Press the Rescale button.
o. Check to see that the largest spike in the jitter spectrum is lower
than –45 dBUI.
Check Disk Drive and File Transfer Operation
This procedure checks that the disks drive functions for file transfers.
1. Insert a blank MS DOS formatted, 1.44 Meg disk in the AM700 disk drive.
2. Press the Storage button on the front panel to display the Storage Manager
control screen shown in Figure 4–21.
Figure 4–21: Storage manager control screen
4–54
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
3. Touch Drive on the right side of the Storage Manager screen to select the
nvram:.directory.
4. On the right side of the Storage Manager screen select the function directory.
This done by first touching the directory name to shift the knob focus to that
side. Once the focus is shifted, you can use the large knob to make further
selections by scrolling through the list.
5. With the function/directory highlighted, touch the Change Directory soft key
to go into that directory. You will then see a list of files if any are stored
there.
6. Touch a file name in the function files display area to make sure the knob
focus is on the right side, and use the large control knob to select a file to be
transferred to the disk.
7. Touch Drive on the left side of the Storage Manager to select dos: A list of
the directories and files at the top level of the disk directory will be
displayed.
8. Touch Copy to copy the file from nvram:/function to dos.
9. Check that the name of the file you copied appears in the dos: directory.
10. Touch the file name in the dos: directory file list.
11. Touch the Delete soft key. You will get a notifier asking if you really want to
delete the selected file. Touch OK to delete the file. Check that the file is
deleted from the dos: directory.
Alternate Disk Drive
Verification V1.02
Firmware
A more intensive check of the disk drive can be done using the low level
diagnostics function when the AM700 has V1.02 or above firmware installed.
Use the following procedure to perform the disk drive stress test.
1. Turn the AM700 off.
2. Hold in the Menu button and turn the AM700 back on.
3. When the AM700 beeps twice, the low-level diagnostic start up mode has
been recognized. Release the Menu button.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–55
Performance Verification
The AM700 then resets and displays the AM700 STARTUP MENU choices
shown in Figure 4–22.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- AM700 STARTUP MENU --Key
Selection
__________________________________
H
R
D
U
...
...
...
...
Diagnostics -HELP- Menu
Instrument -RUN MODES- Menu
Low Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu
-UTILITIES- Menu
F ... -FIRMWARE- Date Codes
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 4–22: AM700 startup menu
4. In this menu, select “D” (Low Level Diagnostics Menu) and press select to
access the Low Level Diagnostics menu shown in Figure 4–23.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- LOW LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS--Select a diagnostic to execute from the list below:
Key
Selection
__________________________________
A ... CPU Diagnostic
B ... Digital Audio Diagnostic
C ... Display Diagnostic
D ... DSP Diagnostic
E ... Generator Diagnostics
F ... Floppy Diagnostic
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 4–23: Low level diagnostics menu V1.02 firmware
5. Select F “Floppy Diagnostic” and press the Select button to display the
Floppy Diagnostic choices shown in Figure 4–24.
4–56
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
--- FLOPPY DIAGNOSTIC --Configure CUSTOM RUN MODE parameters and the test
sequence as desired.
Key
Selection
____________________________________
S ... -Sequence- Type
(CUSTOM)
1 ... Advance Mode
(MANUAL)
2 ... Result Display Mode (SHOW ALL)
3 ... Result Logging Mode (DISABLED)
B____________________________________
... -BUILD- New Test Sequence
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
____________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 4–24: Low level diagnostic OVERALL RUN MODE menu
6. Select “B” Build a New Test Sequence and press the Select button to display
the floppy drive test choices available in the diagnostic as shown in
Figure 4–25.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- Floppy Diagnostic --Build a new CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE by selecting test from
those listed. (Tests prefaced with "UI:" require USER
INTERACTION)
Key
Selects/Unselects
__________________________________
A ... UI: Disk Status Query
B ... UI: Disk Format
C ... UI: Drive Stress Test
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
+ ... Select All - ... Un-Sel All
! ... Done Selecting
__________________________________
Selection(s): *** NONE ***
Figure 4–25: Build CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE menu for disk drive test
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–57
Performance Verification
7. Select “C” Drive Stress Test and press the Select button.
8. After you have made the test selections you want in the custom list,
highlight the ! (Done Selecting) and press Select. This returns to the next
higher level menu where the choice to run the tests in the custom list you
have just made becomes available.
9. Select “R” Run Test Sequence and press the Select button to begin the drive
stress test. You have to insert a MS DOS formatted 1.4 Meg diskette into the
AM700 disk drive to do this test.
The drive stress test take some time to do as it writes to the 80 tracks and verifies
the test. The track being written is indicated in the display. When the testing is
complete, the test results are displayed. A passing test result is shown in
Figure 4–26.
Floppy Diagnostic
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Drive Stress Test
Track Write ĆĆĆĆ
0
errors ĆĆĆĆĆĆ
0 - Pass
Track Read ĆĆĆĆĆ
0
errors ĆĆĆĆĆĆ
0 - Pass
Track Seek ĆĆĆĆĆ
0
errors ĆĆĆĆĆĆ
0 - Pass
Data Verify ĆĆĆ
0
errors ĆĆĆĆĆĆ
0 - Pass
======================================================
==>> CURRENT TEST SEQUENCE COMPLETED <<==
==>> Press any key to Continue <<==
-
Figure 4–26: Floppy diagnostic drive stress test results
4–58
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
Check Headphones, GPIB, and Hardcopy
These final checks verify the head phone audio output and volume control, the
operation of the GPIB interface for remote control, and the hard copy function to
print to an external printer.
DUT Under Test Setup
Check Headphone
Function
In the Input Configuration menu select GEN A and GEN B input sources and
press the Generator On button to turn both generators on.
1. Press the Control button in the Generator control panel area.
a. Touch the Knobs icon soft key for Ch A to attach the generator knobs to
controlling the A channel of the generator.
b. Press the Clear Menu button.
2. Press and hold the ON button in Sound controls.
a. Touch the Listen to: soft key to select the Analog input signal.
b. Turn the Volume (knob) fully counterclockwise.
c. Press the ON button in the Sound controls.
3. Adjust the Amplitude knob for maximum generator output.
4. Listen to the head phones and adjust Volume.
5. Check to see that there is sound on both channels.
6. Adjust the Frequency knob and listen for the frequency to change.
7. Press the ON button in Sound to turn the listen mode off.
8. Press the Clear Menu button.
Check GPIB Remote
Control Operation
1. Turn off the AM700.
2. Connect the GPIB port to an appropriate GPIB controller.
3. Configure the GPIB controller to talk to the AM700 at address 1 (this is the
default address selection for the AM700).
4. Power on the AM700.
5. Press the Configure button on the front panel and touch the System Setup
choice.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–59
Performance Verification
6. Configure the GPIB address for address 1 and the GPIB mode for Talk/
Listen as shown in Figure 4–27, if it is not already setup that way.
7. Touch Accept Changes to apply the change and exit back to the application.
8. From the GPIB controller, send the *ID? command to check for proper
configuration. If the AM700 responds with its identification, the GPIB
interface is operational.
9. Send several more commands and change applications to exercise the
interface enough to confirm operation.
Figure 4–27: GPIB setup in the communications configuration screen
Check Hardcopy
Operation
1. Connect a Epson or Epson-compatible 24-pin serial printer to COM 1 and a
PostScript compatible laser printer to COM 2.
2. Configure the AM700 Serial 1 and Serial 2 ports as needed for the connected
printer. This includes the baud rate, stop bits, parity, and flow control
(CTS/RTS and XON/XOFF) (see Figure 4–27).
3. Configure the Copy Format for an Epson (24-pin) printer and set the Copy
Destination to the Serial Port 1 (the one that has the Epson printer connected
to it).
4. Press Accept Changes to clear the menu (this activates the changes you have
just made).
4–60
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Performance Verification
5. Press and release the Copy front panel button to send a hard copy to the
printer.
6. Press and Hold the Copy front panel button to display the Copy Configuration menu (see Figure 4–28).
Figure 4–28: Copy configuration menu
7. Configure the Copy Format to PostScript Image and the Copy Style to Gray
Scale.
8. Configure the Copy Destination for Serial Port 2 for the laser printer.
9. Touch the Accept Changes soft key to make the selections and clear the
menu.
10. Press and release the Copy front panel button to send a hard copy to the laser
printer.
NOTE. You may make further checks such as printing to a color printer or
sending a file to disk and printing from the disk file, to more fully exercise the
hard copy function.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
4–61
Performance Verification
4–62
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
The procedures in this section are designed to adjust the circuitry of the AM700
Audio Measurement Set to return it to specified accuracy.
Test Equipment Required
The test equipment needed to perform the adjustment procedures is listed in
Table 5–1. Use the test equipment shown or an equivalent to do the adjustments.
If the example test equipment is not available, check the Minimum Specification
column to determine if you can use another piece of test equipment. If you use
other test equipment, the controls and connectors for that equipment may be
different from those called out for the example test equipment. Refer to the
appropriate operator’s manuals for operation of the test equipment.
Table 5–1: Equipment required list
Equipment
Minimum specification
Purpose
Example
Analog oscilloscope
Dual Channel, 50 W input
termination, 300 MHz BW,
external triggering
Viewing video signals
Tektronix 2465
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Digital audio signal
measurement set
Digital audio signal source and
digital audio signal analyzer
Provide digital audio signals to
the AM700 being adjusted.
Tektronix AM700 (Test AM)
Digitizing oscilloscope
Make voltage and frequency
adjustments
Tektronix TDS540
Digital multimeter
Make voltage adjustments
Tektronix Digital Multimeter
DM25101
RMS meter
Accuracy 1%, resolution 5
digits; balanced input
Making generator output adjustments
Hewlett-Packard HP3458A
or Fluke 8506A or 8505A–09
Precision Audio Analyzer
Frequency Accuracy:
±0.01%; level flatness: (20 Hz
to 80 kHz): ≤ 0.05 dB; level
accuracy (20 Hz to 80 kHz):
≤ 0.02 dB; residual distortion:
0.0010% (–100 dB)
Provide precision audio signals
and make precision audio
measurements.
ShibaSoku AM51A Audio
Analyzer
Photometer
Visible light level up to 300 fl.
Adjust brightness level of the
CRT display.
Adjustment tool
Flat-tip screwdriver, 3/16 inch
tip.
Adjust variable adjustment
controls
Interconnection cable
XLR female to dual-banana
Signal interconnection
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Tektronix J17 Lumacolor meter
with Tektronix J1803 Luminance
Head
Customer fabricated
5–1
Adjustment Procedures
Table 5–1: Equipment required list (cont.)
Equipment
Minimum specification
Purpose
Example
Interconnection cable
Coaxial cable, 50 W, 42 inches,
BNC connectors
Signal interconnection
Tektronix part number
012–0057–01
Adapter connector
Female BNC to hook clip
connectors.
Signal interconnection: acquisition board test points to audio
analyzer inputs
Tektronix part number
013–0076–00
WWV Receiver or precision
frequency standard
Accuracy 1 × 10–12
Provides accurate frequency
reference for the digital
frequency counter
HP105B Quartz Frequency
Standard
Digital frequency counter
Accuracy and resolution to 8
Adjust sample clock frequency
decimal places, or used with an
external reference (WWV, Loran
C, or GPS) that will improve the
accuracy to 8 decimal places.
20 Hz to 20 MHz range.
Rubidium oscillator frequency
standard
Tektronix DC50101
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Test probes and meter cables
for test equipment
Supplied with test equipment
Extender cable set
Tektronix fabricated extender
cables
Universal Load Unit
For troubleshooting and adjustments with the circuit boards
removed from the AM700
Tektronix part numbers not
available as of this printing
Provide power supply load for
factory service adjustment and
repairs
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Monitor Test Fixture
Tektronix fabricated fixture
Provides mounting attachments
for aligning the CRT display
monitor out of the instrument
Not available to customers
VGA Distribution Amplifier
VGA signal splitter with at least
two VGA outputs
VGA signal source for CRT
monitor alignment
Communications Specialties
Inc., Quadsplit VGA Distribution
Amplifier
Video source interconnection
cable
VGA connector to J2 connector
Connects the VGA video output
from the PC to J2 on the CRT
display module
Tektronix part number not
available as of this printing
Test Jumper
Jumper wire with square pin
connectors, 0.1 in spacing
Connects power supply temperature sense pins for CRT alignment procedure
Customer supplied
Tektronix test program
Provides test patterns for CRT
alignment
Tektronix part number not
available as of this printing
Provides alignment points for
CRT alignment patterns
Tektronix part number not
available as of this printing
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AM700 crt_test program
CRT Test Graticules
Computer
IBM Compatible
Computer–486DX 33 MHz
Run test programs
Adhesive
Clear RTV silicone compound
For attaching CRT geometry
alignment magnets
5–2
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Table 5–1: Equipment required list (cont.)
Equipment
Minimum specification
Purpose
Example
Set of geometry correction
magnets
Tektronix adjustment magnets
Geometry alignment for the
CRT monitor
Blue (strongest); Tektronix part
number 119–1616–00
Green; Tektronix part number
119–1863–00
Red; Tektronix part number
119–1615–00
Yellow; Tektronix part number
119–4341–00
1
A Tegam TM500 or TM5000 power supply is required to power the plug-in module.
Table 5–2: AM700 adjustments
Board name
Circuit board
Analog Acquisition board
A1A1
Circuit no.
CHA Input & A1A4 & A1A5 Attenuator Boards
A Compensation
C335
CHB Input & A1A2 & A1A3 Attenuator Boards
B Compensation
C333
Frequency Adjust
R340
A MSB
R252
B MSB
R245
Digital Audio Board
A3
Generator PLL Freq Adjustment
L1
Frequency Offset Frequency Adjustment
L5
Frequency Offset Frequency Adjustment
L7
Eye Sampler Frequency Adjustment
L16
Generator Level
R483
Generator Board
A5
A DAC Gain (Left)
R24
B DAC Gain (Right)
R18
Display Monitor
A10A1
Focus
R36
White Level
R4
Black Level
R64
Vertical Position
R57
Vertical Hold
R45
Vertical Linearity
R48
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–3
Adjustment Procedures
Table 5–2: AM700 adjustments (cont.)
Board name
Circuit board
Circuit no.
Vertical Size
R45
Horizontal Hold
R20
Horizontal Phase (centering)
R15
Trace Rotation
R67
Power Supply
A11
+5 V Adjust
R14
LCD Driver Board
A13
Red Offset (omitted)
R37
Green Offset (omitted)
R39
Blue Offset (omitted)
R41
Red Gain
F6
Green Gain
R7
Blue Gain
R9
BRT
R24
Preparation for Adjustment
1. Turn off the AM700 using the rear power power switch. Disconnect the
power cord from the AC mains connector, and remove the cabinet from the
AM700. See the Remove and Replacement Procedures in the Maintenance
section for cabinet removal instructions.
2. For the LCD flat panel display versions of the AM700, it may be necessary
to remove two shield from the Analog Acquisition board to make measurements. Do this while the power is off.
CAUTION. Dangerous voltages exist in the power supply. Observe the proper
safety precautions when servicing the power supply. Read the Servicing Safety
Summary for general safety precautions.
3. Reconnect the power cord to the AC mains.
5–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Power Supply Verification
The power supply adjustment is not accessible when the supply is installed in the
AM700. The power supply is adjusted either using a load unit (in manufacturing)
or during servicing using the correct extender cables. It is not a normal customer
adjustment. Under normal conditions, the power supply should not require
adjustment. The verification procedure determines if there is a problem with the
power supply that requires servicing.
Test Equipment Required
Verification Procedure
The following test equipment is needed to verify and adjust the power supply:
H
Test oscilloscope with 1X probe
H
Digital voltmeter
1. Turn on the AM700 and wait for the initialization to finish.
2. Use an oscilloscope with a 1X probe to check the power supply voltages and
ripple as shown in Table 5–3.
a. Input Coupling
Trigger
Volts/Div
AC
Auto
50 mV
Table 5–3: Power supply voltages and ripple tolerances
Voltage
Tolerance
Range
Max Load
Ripple (mV)
Noise (mV)
+5 V
0 to +2%
5.0 to 5.1 V
20 A
50
100
+15 V
2%
14.70 to 15.3 V
3A
20
100
–15 V
2%
–15.3 to 14.7 V
2A
20
100
–16.5 V
5%
–17.33 to –15.68 V
2A
50
100
b. Check the +5 V on the main CPU board at J33 pin 1. Pin 2 is ground.
c. Check the +15 V on the main CPU board at J33 pin 3. Pin 4 is ground.
d. Check the –15 V on the main CPU board at J33 pin 5. Pin 4 is ground.
The –16.5 V source is not accessible with the instrument assembled.
If any of the supplies are out of tolerance, the power supply may have a problem
and should be replaced. See the Remove and Replacement Procedures in the
Maintenance section to remove the power supply from the AM700. You can also
contact your nearest Tektronix representative to arrange for your AM700 to be
returned to Tektronix Factory Service for repair.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–5
Adjustment Procedures
Factory Service
Adjustment
This procedure is provided for factory service to check for proper operation to
determine if repairs or adjustment are needed.
Test Equipment Required
The following test equipment is needed to verify and adjust the power supply:
H
Test oscilloscope with 1X probe
H
Digital voltmeter
H
Universal load unit
1. Remove the power supply from the AM700 and connect it to the power load
unit.
2. Connect the plus (+) lead of the DVM to TP25, +5 V, and connect the
ground (–) lead to TP4 (analog ground) (see Figure 5–1).
J10
J6
J5
J11
CR26
Q7 Q6
J9
+5 V Adjust
J8
A GND
Q3 Q2
J7
FL1
+5 V
Figure 5–1: Power supply +5 V test points and adjustment locations
CAUTION. Make sure the Line Selector switch is set to the correct operating
voltage range before applying power to the supply. The power supply can be
damaged if operated with the incorrect voltage range.
3. Slowly increase the voltage to the power supply to the nominal mains supply
level (115 Vrms on low range or 230 Vrms on high range) to determine if the
power supply is operating normally.
5–6
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
4. Do the power supply verification procedure using the oscilloscope to check
for proper power supply operation.
5. Adjust R15 (+5 V adjust) for 5.05 V on the DVM.
6. Vary the input voltage from 90 Vrms to 132 Vrms on low range or 180 Vrms
to 253 Vrms on high range to verify normal power supply operation over the
specified input voltage range.
Acquisition Board Adjustment
A pair of shields over portions of the acquisition board circuitry may have to be
removed to make the necessary measurements.
Test Equipment Required
The following test equipment is needed to make the adjustment to the acquisition
board:
H
Precision audio analyzer with XLR interconnection cables
H
Alignment tool
H
Male to male BNC coaxial cable, 50 W, 42 inches long
H
BNC to hook clip adapter
Test Assembly
1. Connect one generator output of the precision audio analyzer to the Ch A
XLR input of the AM700.
Adjust the High
Bandwidth A/D MSB for
Channels A and B
1. Set the generator output of the precision audio analyzer for a 20 kHz sine
wave at an amplitude of 15 V. See Figure 5–2 for the test point and
adjustment locations.
2. Set the AM700 input configuration for Front Panel Channel A and
Channel B.
3. Set the input configuration for the High Bandwidth acquisition channel.
4. If not already in the FFT application, start the FFT application and select
View 1 for display.
5. Set the AM700 for 15 averages for each of the two channels.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–7
Adjustment Procedures
A MSB
B MSB
Freq. Adj
Sample CLK
D GND
A GND
SAMPLE CLK
Ch A Out
A GND
Ch B Out
A GND
A Comp
B Comp
Figure 5–2: Acquisition board test points and adjustment locations
5–8
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
6. Press Rescale in the System Control front panel selections.
7. While observing the FFT, adjust R252 until the null point is reached for the
second and third harmonics.
8. Move the test signal from the Channel A input to the Channel B input and
select View 2 for display.
9. Press Rescale in the System Control front panel selections.
10. While observing the FFT, adjust R245 until the null point is reached for the
second and third harmonics.
Adjust the Attenuator
Compensation for
Channels A and B
1. Set up AM700 as follows:
a. Press the Configure button.
b. Touch the Input Selection soft key.
c. Use the source “toggle” icon to set the AM700 input source for FP A
and B.
d. Set the input attenuation for Ch A and Ch B to +14 dBu (3.88 V).
e. Connect the output of the audio analyzer to the Channel A XLR analog
input of the AM700.
f.
Using 50 W coaxial cable and a BNC to hook clip adapter, connect
INPUT A of the audio analyzer to TP8 (Ch A OUT) and TP9 (AGND)
of the AM700 analog acquisition board.
2. Set up the precision audio analyzer as follows:
a. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 1 kHz sine wave at
an amplitude of 1 V.
b. Set the audio analyzer input mode to A UNBAL and the input termination to A 600 W OUT.
3. On the audio analyzer, press the MEAS key, and then the RELATIVE
LEVEL key to set the reference to 0.00 dB.
4. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 80 kHz sine wave at an
amplitude of 1V.
5. Adjust compensation capacitor C335 so that the relative level on the audio
analyzer reads 0.08 dB ±0.01 dB.
6. Connect the output of the audio analyzer to the Channel B input of the
AM700.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–9
Adjustment Procedures
7. Using 50 W coaxial cable, connect the INPUT A of the audio analyzer to
TP4 (CHB OUT) and TP10 (AGND) of the AM700 analog acquisition
board.
8. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 1 kHz sine wave at an
amplitude of 1 V.
9. On the audio analyzer, press the RELATIVE LEVEL key to set the reference
to 0.00 dB.
10. Set the generator output of the audio analyzer for a 80 kHz sine wave at an
amplitude of 1 V.
11. Adjust compensation capacitor C333 so that the relative level on the audio
analyzer reads 0.08 dB ±0.01 dB.
Sample Clock Adjustment
1. Using the 50 W coaxial cable and a BNC to hook clip adapter, connect input
B of the digital frequency counter to TP23 (DGND) and TP57 (SAMPLE
CLK) of the AM700.
2. Connect the WWV reference to input A of the digital frequency counter.
3. Adjust R340 (Sample Clock Adj) until the sample clock frequency readout
bounces between 12.28801 MHz and 12.28802 MHz.
NOTE. The WWV reference is used as an external clock to the digital frequency
counter to adjust the sample clock frequency.
5–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Display Monitor Adjustment (for CRT display monitor)
The following adjustment steps are used to align the CRT display. These
adjustments include those needed for factory service alignment after repairs to
the display monitor module and a shorter procedure for alignment of the installed
display monitor.
Use the procedures in the Remove and Replacement Procedures in the Maintenance section beginning on page 6–73 to remove the display monitor assembly
for repair and reinstallation. Use the long adjustment procedure after the repaired
display monitor is reinstalled, especially for a replacement of the CRT or
deflection yoke.
For a normally operating installed display monitor assembly, perform the
verification procedure of the CRT display (Verify CRT Display Operation on
page 4–33) to determine the extent of adjustment needed, if any. Use the shorter
adjustment procedure on page 5–18 to make minor adjustments to the CRT after
a verification check indicates the need for adjustment. Make only those
adjustment needed to align the display monitor assembly.
Test Equipment Required
4. The following tools are required during the CRT display adjustment for a
complete CRT alignment after changing the CRT, the deflection yoke, or the
display monitor circuit board.
H
Video source interconnection cable
H
VGA Distribution amplifier.
H
Photometer
H
CRT test graticule
H
Geometry correction magnets
Blue
Green
Red
Yellow
119–1616–00 (strongest)
119–1863–00
119–1615–00
119–4341–00
H
Clear RTV silicone adhesive (for magnet attachment)
H
0.1 inch spacing shorting jumper
H
Test oscilloscope
H
Small flat head screw driver for adjustments
H
3.5 inch diskette with the Tektronix CRT test pattern file.
H
Personal computer with 3.5 inch floppy disk drive.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–11
Adjustment Procedures
Preparation to Align
The following procedure requires removal of the instrument cabinet and some of
the circuit board assemblies to remove and replace the CRT display monitor
assembly. The procedure assumes that a part of the CRT display monitor
assembly is being replaced for a factory service repair. Refer to the Remove and
Replacement Procedures in the Maintenance section of this manual and the
exploded views given in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts section to assist you
if necessary.
When replacing the entire CRT display monitor assembly with a prealigned
exchange assembly, make only those adjustments needed to satisfy the requirement of the verification procedure referred to in the preceding paragraphs.
1. Remove the CPU, the DSP, the Digital audio board, and the power supply
shield
a. Disconnect the flexible floppy disk drive cable on from J42 on the CPU
board by lifting the side latches on the housing first (see Figure 5–3).
Lift the connector release bar from its ends to loosen the cable.
Press the release bar down to lock the cable to the connector.
Figure 5–3: Disk drive flexible circuit board connector operation
NOTE. Do not pull on the cable to force it out of the connector. This will weaken
the connection.
b. Remove the three circuit board mounting screws around the fan and
flexible cable connector and the rear panel screws holding the CPU
board. Note: there is one screw in the rear panel that is different from
other screws; it has a built-in (captive) washer. Use the correct screw at
this location when reassembling the CPU board.
c. Disconnect all the cables attached to CPU, DSP, and Digital Audio
circuit boards that come from the other circuit boards.
d. Pull the CPU and DSP assembly forward gently about 1/4 inch. The
boards should come out as a single assembled unit. Set them aside on an
5–12
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
ESD free table or work station so they will be safe from ESD (electrostatic discharge) damage.
CAUTION. The back-up battery on the CPU needs to be protected from being
accidentally shorted.
e. Remove the two screws from Digital Audio board, and then lift the
circuit board gently away from the plastic posts. Put this board on an
ESD free table to protect it from damage until it is ready to be reinstalled.
f.
Turn on Procedure
After a Repair
Remove all the screws holding the power supply shield, (that is the large
shield between the Digital audio board and the power supply board). The
front of the shield is pushed into the groove in the front casting. Use a
flat head screwdriver to aid in loosening the shield from the groove. Lift
the shield out and put it aside.
After replacing the CRT, the deflection yoke, or the display monitor circuit
board, use the following procedure to start up the display monitor for alignment.
1. Insert a shorting jumper on pins 9 and 10 of J5 of the power supply. (This
jumper enables the power supply to operate without the normal cable
attached to this connector.)
2. Leave the power supply cables on J7 and J9 (power to Acquisition and
Generator boards) on the power supply connected. (This provides enough
loading for proper regulation of the power supply.)
3. Disconnect the trace rotation coil on the display monitor circuit board at J7.
4. Apply power to the AM700 and verify that the fan blows air out of chassis.
Yoke Alignment
The following procedure for yoke alignment should be required only if the CRT
or deflection yoke has been changed in a repair.
CAUTION. High voltages are present on the display monitor circuit board and
around the CRT. Use extreme caution not to contact the high voltage anode lead,
the high voltage transformer, or the anode connection to the CRT while the
power is applied to the AM700.
1. Install the test graticule on the front of the CRT.
2. Check that a free-running raster is present on the display.
3. Adjust the raster size to fill the display area (Width L4, Vert. Size R43)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–13
Adjustment Procedures
4. Center the display using the beam centering rings.
NOTE. The centering rings cause some distortion to the display. Adjust the
centering rings for the least amount of distortion and the best centering.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 until the full screen display is correctly centered.
6. Loosen the yoke retaining screw and rotate the deflection yoke so that the
raster is parallel to the bottom of the front chassis casting.
7. Tighten the screw on the retaining ring, making sure the yoke is all the way
up against the CRT.
8. Adjust R64 (BLACK) until the raster just disappears from screen.
9. Fine adjustment of the CRT geometry may require several correction
magnets. Use of the magnets for adjustment is given in the Factory Service
Geometry Fine Adjustment procedure on page 5–17.
Check and Adjust
Free-running Display
1. Adjust horizontal and vertical scan rates.
a. Connect the CH1 oscilloscope probe to TP1 (horizontal retrace). See
Figure 5–4 for test point and adjustment locations.
b. Adjust R20 (H HOLD) for 31.469 kHz at TP1–31.78 ms. Within the
range of 31.68 kHz to 31.88 kHz is acceptable.
c. Connect the CH1 oscilloscope probe to TP2 (vertical retrace).
d. Adjust R45 (V HOLD) for 55 Hz at TP2–18.2 ms. Within the range of
18.1 ms to 18.3 ms is acceptable.
5–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Horiz
Width
Focus
Horiz Phase
White Level
Black Level
Horiz
Retrace
Vert
Retrace
Vert Pos
Trace
Rotation
VGA
Input
Horiz Hold
Vert Hold
Vert Size
Vert Lin
Figure 5–4: CRT display monitor board adjustment locations
Adjust the CRT Display
with a Test Pattern VGA
Signal Applied
Adjust the size and linearity of the CRT display using the following procedure.
1. Connect a video source cable to J2 on monitor board and install the test CRT
graticule.
2. Connect the other end of the video source cable to the VGA output connector
of the VGA signal distribution amplifier.
3. Connect the VGA output of the PC to the input of the VGA distribution
amplifier, and connect one output of the distribution amplifier to the VGA
display monitor.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–15
Adjustment Procedures
4. Insert the Monitor adjustment disk to in the PC, and run the program to
display cross hatch pattern.
5. Make the display monitor size and linearity adjustments.
a. Adjust L4 (HORIZ WIDTH) so that the width of the test pattern is as
wide as the test graticule.
b. Adjust R43 (V SIZE) so that the height of the test pattern is as tall as the
test graticule.
c. Adjust R57 (V CENTER) to center the test pattern vertically in the test
graticule.
d. Adjust R15 (H PHASE) to center the test pattern horizontally in the test
graticule.
e. Adjust R48 (V LIN), if needed, so that the squares of the test pattern are
all the same size and that the circle is round not squashed.
NOTE. Magnets are added to yoke assembly at the factory to square up the
corners of the display. The magnets are secured with RTV silicone adhesive and
should not require replacement or relocation under normal operation. In the
event that a new CRT is installed, some adjustment to the magnets may be
required for the best adjustment of the corners.
f.
Interaction between these adjustments requires a recheck of part a
through part e for best size and linearity.
g. Remove the test graticule.
6. Adjust black and white levels
a. Adjust R64 (BLACK), if needed, until the retrace lines just disappear
(second box on upper left just turns invisible).
b. Display the full-white test pattern.
c. Adjust R4 (WHITE), if needed, for 95 to 105 fl at 70% brightness with
the touch screen removed.
d. Check for approximately 190 to 260 fl at 100% brightness.
7. Adjust focus
a. Display the full screen of the “small e” test pattern.
b. Adjust R36 (FOCUS) if needed, for the best focus possible in the center
of the screen.
5–16
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
c. Adjust L5 (Dynamic Focus) for best possible focus at the corners of the
display.
d. Recheck the white level adjustment.
8. Adjust trace rotation
a. Install the crt test graticule.
b. Display the crosshatch test pattern.
c. Connect the trace rotation coil from the yoke to J7 on the display
monitor circuit board.
d. Adjust R67 (TRACE ROT) as needed, to square the test pattern with the
test graticule.
Factory Service Geometry
Fine Adjustment
The following procedure requires the placement and positioning of the geometry
adjustment magnets around the crt yoke and instrument chassis.
1. Display the crosshatch test pattern.
WARNING. The CRT anode voltage is a potential shock hazard. Use extreme care
when working near the anode connection and any of the high voltage leads to
the anode.
2. Position the correction magnets on the yoke coil and on the CRT along the
front edge and middle section for the best linearity.
Some trial and error positioning and placement of the magnets may be
necessary until the absolute errors are less than 1.5% or 0.075 inch horizontally and 0.06 inch vertically. Because the placement and rotation of the
magnets in combination pulls or diverts the electron beam in a manner that is
not entirely predictable, noting the effect produced by the different strength
of magnet used or location and polarity of the magnet may help reaching the
best combination for good overall linearity.
Magnets specified to use are listed in Table 5–1 at the beginning of the
procedure.
3. Use clear silicone adhesive to hold magnets permanently, It may take
30 minutes to few hours depending on the type of silicone adhesive being
used.
4. This completes the alignment of the CRT display assembly. Turn off power
and disconnect any equipment connected to monitor board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–17
Adjustment Procedures
CRT Display Adjustment
The following procedure is used to make the CRT alignment adjustments on an
installed display monitor. It is used to compensate for the minor changes that can
affect the CRT adjustments over time.
1. Perform the verification procedure of the CRT display (Verify CRT Display
Operation on page 4–33) to determine the extend of adjustment needed.
Make only the adjustments needed as indicated from the verification
procedure.
2. It may be necessary to remove the disk drive assembly if the adjustments
located beneath it have to be accessed. Remove the disk drive assembly.
Leave it off until after the CRT adjustments are checked for centering,
height, width, and linearity.
3. Make the following display monitor adjustments as determined in step 1.
a. Adjust L4 (WIDTH) so that the width of the Analyzer display at the
center is 5.04 inches (12.80 cm).
b. Adjust R43 (V SIZE) so that the height of the Analyzer display at the
center is 3.78 inches (9.60 cm).
c. Adjust R57 (V CENTER) to center the display vertically in the between
the top and bottom edges of the CRT opening in the bezel.
d. Adjust R15 (H PHASE) to center the display horizontally between the
left and right edges of the CRT opening in the bezel.
e. Adjust R48 (V LIN), if needed, so that the two top view window squares
and the two bottom view window squares are the same size vertically.
f.
Interaction between these adjustments requires a recheck of part a
through part e for best size and linearity.
g. Adjust R36 (FOCUS) if needed, for the best focus possible in the center
of the screen.
h. Adjust R67 (TRACE ROT) as needed, to make the top and bottom edges
of the display parallel to the top and bottom edges of the CRT opening in
the bezel.
4. Turn off the power to the AM700 and reinstall the disk drive assembly if it
was removed.
5. Restore power to the AM700 and select the Analyzer application.
6. Examine the top, bottom, and sides of the display to determine if there is
excessive bowing or wowing of the edges.
5–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
NOTE. Magnets added to yoke assembly and around the CRT at the factory are
used to square up the corners of the display. The magnets are secured with
silicone adhesive and should not require replacement or relocation under normal
operation. Some careful repositioning of the magnets around the front edge of
the CRT may be required for the best adjustment of the corners of the display.
7. If the edges are not flat, observe where geometry adjustment magnets, if any,
are installed on the AM700 chassis around the face of the CRT.
8. Remove any magnet nearest an area that bowing or wowing is excessive. Try
placing a new magnet in the same location with different strength, rotation or
position to improve the geometry.
Some trial and error positioning and placement of the magnets is necessary
to reduce the absolute geometry error (variations in straightness of the sides
and corners of the display) to less than 1.5% or 0.075 inch (1.9 mm)
horizontally and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) vertically. Because the placement and
rotation of the magnets in combination pulls or diverts the electron beam in a
manner that is not entirely predictable, noting the effect produced by the
different strength of magnet used or location and polarity of the magnet may
help reaching the best combination for good overall geometry.
Magnets specified to use are listed in Table 5–1 at the beginning of this
section.
9. Use clear RTV silicone adhesive to hold magnets permanently. It may take
30 minutes to few hours to set depending on the type of silicone adhesive
being used.
10. This completes the alignment of the replacement display monitor assembly.
Turn off the power and reinstall the equipment cabinet. See the Cover
Removal and Replacement procedure beginning on page 6–55 in the
Maintenance section of this manual for the cover replacement steps.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–19
Adjustment Procedures
LCD Driver Board Adjustment (for LCD flat panel display)
The following adjustment steps set up the offset and gain for the red, green, and
blue analog to digital converters; and adjust the brightness level of the LCD
panel backlighting.
Test Equipment Needed
Preparation for the LCD
Driver Adjustments
The following test equipment is needed:
H
Test oscilloscope with probes
H
Adjustment tool
1. On the LCD Driver board, set the Offset potentiometers, R37, R39 and R41,
to fully clockwise (CW). (Note: these adjustment may be absent from your
circuit board.)
2. Center the settings all the Gain potentiometers (R6, R7 and R9).
3. Center the BRT potentiometer (R24).
4. Disconnect the cable from J8 (VGA cable).
5. Turn on the AM700. The AM700 initializes and starts the FFT application.
Adjust ADC Gain
1. Set the test oscilloscope
Vert Mode
CH 1 Volts/Div
CH 1 Input Coupling
A Sec/Div
A Trig Mode
A Trig Source
Slope
Vertical Position
CH 1 On
1V
DC
400 ns
Auto Lvl
CH 1
+ (plus)
Trace on center horizontal graticule
2. Touch View Setup in the FFT application.
3. Touch Spectrogram in the View Types choices.
4. Touch Accept Changes
5. Connect the oscilloscope probe tip to the MSB of the Red ADC at TP6. See
Figure 5–5 for test point and adjustment locations.
6. Adjust the Red Gain potentiometer, R6, until the trace goes high with pulse
trains.
7. Back off the adjustment of R6 to the point the trace stays at a constant low
level. (Voltage at TP2 will be ≈ +1.4 V).
5–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
8. Move the oscilloscope probe tip to the MSB of the Green ADC at TP7.
B Offset
TP4
P4
C1
TP1
TP1
CR10
CR11
C30
C26
L3
CR12
R18
R23
R28
C11
TP4
P5
C31
B Gain
J8
R50
TP7
C21
C32
CR6
CR7
C18
U1
TP6
TP7
R16
R21
R26
TP2
R Offset
R Gain
R29
U5
R1
G Gain
C15
R37
R6
C2
R46
TP2
R36
R30
R13
U9
G Offset
R31
C3
U12
C13
U3
R49
R39
U6
U13
U8
C10
R7
C33
P3
C8
TP3
R38
R32
R14
TP3
C14
U10
L2
P2
C20
R44
C28
R47
R17
R22
R27
CR8
CR9
TP5
TP5
C17
C4
TP8
C9
TP10
TP8
C12
TP10
C16
U7
R24
CR2
CR4
R33
C7
R45
CR5
R8
C22
C5
R43
R20
R51
R40
R34
R15
C6
P1
R48
TP9
U4
R19
R42
R25
CR3
R35
C19
TP9
R3
R12
U11
C24
R52
BRT
CR13
C25
R41
R2
R9
CR1
R11
R10
R5
R4
L1
TP6
F2
C27
C29
C23
F1
F3
Figure 5–5: LCD display driver test points and adjustment locations
9. Repeat the adjustments of step 6 and step 7 using the Green Gain potentiometer, R7. (Voltage at TP3 will be ≈ +1.4 V.)
10. Move the oscilloscope probe tip to the MSB of the Blue ADC at TP8.
11. Repeat the adjustments of step 6 and step 7 using the Blue Gain potentiometer, R9. (Voltage at TP4 will be ≈ +1.4 V.)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–21
Adjustment Procedures
Fine Adjustment of the
ADC Gain
Verify the Gain and Offset
Adjustments
1. Observe the Spectrogram display. There should be no streaks or color smears
in the Spectrogram color legend. If there are any streaks or color smears,
adjust the associated color offset potentiometer slightly (R6 for Red, R7 for
Green, and R8 for Blue) to eliminate them.
1. In the UTILITIES front panel selections, press the Configure button.
2. Verify that the Configuration options: display has no streaks or color smears.
If any are present repeat the Fine Adjustment of the ADC Gain procedure.
3. Press the Clear Menu button to remove the Configuration options: display.
Adjust Brightness
1. In the UTILITIES front panel selections press and hold in the Display
button.
2. Use the large control knob to set the Adjust brightness: level to 10%.
3. Adjust the BRT potentiometer, R24, so the backlight for the LCD display
just turns off (no visible display). (The voltage at TP1 BRIGHTNESS will
be approximately 3.5 V).
4. This completes the adjustments of the LCD Driver board.
5–22
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Analog Generator Board Adjustment
These adjustment steps set the DAC gain for the correct level of output signal for
Channel A and Channel B of the analog generator.
Test Equipment Required
Set up Test Equipment
and the AM700
The following test equipment is needed:
H
Precision digital multimeter or RMS meter
H
XLR to banana connector adaptor cables
H
Adjustment tool
1. Set up the precision digital multimeter.
a. Set the AC frequency band of the digital multimeter for 20 Hz for the
lowest expected frequency and 10 kHz for the highest expected
frequency.
b. Set the digital multimeter for ACV auto ranging.
c. Set the Terminals switch on the front panel to Front.
d. Using the XLR-to-banana interconnection cable, connect the banana
connector to the front terminals of the precision multimeter: HI-to-HI,
LOW-to-LOW, and GND-to-GUARD.
e. Set the Guard switch on the front panel to OPEN.
f.
Connect the female XLR connector to Ch A OUT of the AM700 to the
input of the precision multimeter.
2. Set up AM700 Analog Generators
a. In the Generator Control Panel, press the Control button. This displays
the Generator Control menu screen.
b. Check that the Analog Generator is set for High Resolution mode. If not,
touch the High Resolution soft key to select it.
c. Set the CH A Waveform for Sine if it is not. Do this by touching the
Waveform soft key to display a pop-up list of available generator signals.
Use the large control knob to highlight Sine, then touch the pop-up list
or press Enter, in the keypad area, to select that choice.
NOTE. Both channels A and B must be set for sine. Channel B must not be set for
follow A.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–23
Adjustment Procedures
d. Set the CH B Waveform for Sine as well. Touch the CH B Waveform
soft key and use the large control knob to highlight Sine, the touch the
pop-up list as before to accept that choice. (Do not use Follow A. This
will make the B generator signal the same as generator A, but it will not
fully exercise the B generator signal generation path.)
e. Check that both Ch A and Ch B are enabled (a check mark in both
Enabled soft keys). If not, enable them.
f.
Touch the Waveform Control soft key (located on the left side of the
screen) to display the Waveform menu choices.
g. Select Generator A by touching the Analog A soft key.
h. Touch the Frequency soft key to select that parameter for editing. Use
the keypad to enter 1000 Hz (or 1 kHz). Press enter or touch the
Frequency soft key to accept this value.
i.
Touch the Amplitude soft key to select that parameter for editing. Use
the key pad units keys to select V (volts) as the unit for the amplitude.
j.
Set the Amplitude to 1.0 V using the key pad, the touch the Amplitude
soft key or press enter to accept this value.
k. Select Generator B by touching the Analog B soft key and repeats parts
h through j to set Generator B for a 1 kHz, 1 V sine-wave signal.
l.
Press the Control button to turn off the Generator Control Menu screen
display.
m. In the Generator Control panel, press the ON button to turn the
generators on.
5–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
3. Adjust the A DAC GAIN, R24, of the Analog Generator for an amplitude of
1.000V ± 0.0001V. See Figure 5–6 for the adjustment locations.
4. Move the XLR connector from Ch A OUT to Ch B OUT.
5. Adjust the B DAC GAIN, R18, of the Analog Generator for an amplitude of
1.000V ± 0.0001V.
6. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700.
B DAC Gain
(Right)
B DAC Gain
(Right)
Figure 5–6: Generator board adjustment locations
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–25
Adjustment Procedures
Digital Audio Board Adjustments
The following adjustments set the control voltage of the phase-lock-loop circuits
and sets the digital generator amplitude.
Test Equipment Required
Mechanical Setup
The following test equipment is needed:
H
Digital voltmeter
H
Test oscilloscope
H
BNC cable, 75 W
H
BNC termination, 75 W
H
Alignment tool
H
Extender cables for Digital Audio circuit board
H
Insulated work surface
1. The PLL adjustments can be checked with the Digital Audio board installed.
Test points pins are accessible from the side of the instrument with the
cabinet removed. Adjustment of the PLL frequency control coils would not
normally be required unless a repair affecting the frequency determining
components of the oscillators is made.
CAUTION. The following Digital Audio Board adjustment procedure should only
be done by a qualified service person working in an approved anti-static work
station. Adjustments require the removal of the Digital Audio board from the
instrument, and operation with extender cables installed to make the signal and
power interconnections to the AM700.
2. With the Digital Audio board removed from the AM700, place the board on
an insulated surface and connect it to the AM700 using extender cables. The
remove and replace instructions are provided in the Maintenance section of
this manual.
5–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Set up the AM700
1. Press the Digital front panel button and power on the AM700 to start it with
the Digital application running.
2. Press the Configure button.
3. Touch the Save State soft key.
4. Touch the Set Factory Defaults soft key.
5. Verify that you want to restore the factory defaults.
6. Press Configure again. Touch the Input Select soft key.
7. Set the Input for AES generator.
8. Press Clear Menu.
9. Select the Eye Diagram icon.
10. Press the Menu button.
11. Touch the Interface Timing softkey.
12. Set the Clock Frequency Offset to 10 ppm.
Adjusting the
Phase-Locked Loops
1. Set the DVM to measure DC voltage.
2. Connect the + lead of the DVM to pin 4 of J33. Connect the – lead to pin 1
or pin 10 of J33 (ground) (see Figure 5–7). Check for a voltage of 7 V
to 8 V.
9
7
5
3
1
10
8
6
4
2
J33
Digital Audio board A3
Figure 5–7: Pin arrangement for J33, the PLL voltage test points
3. Adjust L5, Frequency control for U78 in the Frequency Offset circuit, for a
voltage of 7 to 8 V. See Figure 5–8 for the adjustment locations.
4. Connect the + lead of the DVM to pin 5 of J33. Check for a voltage of 7 V
to 8 V.
5. Adjust L7, Frequency control for U79 in the Frequency Offset circuit, for a
voltage of 7 V to 8 V.
6. Connect the + lead of the DVM to pin 2. Check for a voltage of 7 V to 8 V.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–27
Adjustment Procedures
7. Adjust L1, Frequency control for U64 in the Generator PLL circuit, for a
voltage of 7 V to 8 V.
8. Connect the + lead of the DVM to pin 6 of J33. Check for a voltage of 7 V
to 8 V.
9. Adjust L16, Frequency control for U123 in the Eye Sampler circuit, for a
voltage of 7 V to 8 V.
10. Turn off the power to the AM700, disconnect the power cord from the AC
source, and disconnect the test leads and extender cables from the Digital
Audio board.
5–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
Freq Offset
Freq Adj
Freq Offset
Freq Adj
Eye Sampler
Freq Adj
PLL Test
J33
GEN PLL
Adj Freq
Gen Level
Figure 5–8: Digital audio board test points and adjustment locations
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–29
Adjustment Procedures
Adjusting the Digital
Generator Level
1. Connect the AES Unbalanced Out signal to Ch 1 input of the test oscilloscope through a 75 W BNC coaxial cable and a 75 W BNC termination.
2. Set the oscilloscope for 0.2 V/div to view a 1 V p-p square wave signal and
auto trigger on the input signal.
3. Adjust R483, Generator Level, for a 1 V p-p square wave (5 div ±0.25 div).
4. Disconnect the test equipment from the AM700.
This completes the internal adjustment procedure of the AM700. Reinstall all
boards and install the cabinet.
User Calibration
After the AM700 is completely assembled, do the following user calibration
steps.
Calibrate the Touch
Screen
1. Power on the AM700, if it is not already on, and run the FFT application
(the default startup application).
2. After the AM700 has booted and the FFT application is running, press the
OTHER front panel button, in the applications selection.
3. Using the large knob on front panel, highlight PanelCal Touch Panel
Calibration.
4. To start application, press the Enter key pad button, and follow the instructions on the AM700 monitor.
5. After you finish the touch screen calibration procedure, the screen displays
the paint screen. You can touch the screen at various points and the screen
will highlight where touched. You can use this screen to check any suspected
inoperative locations on the touch screen.
6. When the calibration has been completed, select the FFT application by
pressing the FFT application front panel button.
Analog Calibration
1. If the AM700 is on and warmed up you may do this procedure now;
otherwise turn on the AM700 and permit it to warm-up for 15 to 20 minutes.
2. Select either FFT or Audio Analyzer to do the analog calibration.
3. Press the Configure front panel button after the application is loaded.
4. Touch the System Setup soft key and select Calibrate.
5. Touch the Calibrate Now soft key.
5–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Adjustment Procedures
6. After the calibration has finished, press Clear Menu. Then, select Digital as
the application to load.
Digital Calibration
1. With the Digital Application running, press the Configure front panel button
and again touch the System Setup soft key.
2. Select Calibrate and touch the Calibrate Now soft key.
3. After the calibration has finished, press Clear Menu.
This completes the adjustment procedure for the AM700.
Functional Check
You can perform the functional checks in the Verification Procedure to verify the
operation of the instrument.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5–31
Adjustment Procedures
5–32
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintenance
This section discusses the various options available for servicing the Tektronix
AM700 Audio Measurement Set. It also contains instructions for preventive
maintenance, general troubleshooting, and corrective maintenance. If the
instrument does not function properly, troubleshooting and corrective measures
should be taken immediately to circumvent additional problems.
Service Options
A number of servicing options are available. These servicing options should be
investigated as to which will be the most time efficient and cost effective. The
instrument may be returned to Tektronix for repair and/or recalibration. Certain
modules are available on an exchange basis. If an exchange module for a module
needing repair is available, repairs can be made at the customer’s repair facility.
See the Board Exchange Program section beginning on page 6–49 for information on the exchange program. Repair of the modules in the AM700 can require a
highly skilled technician with the proper test equipment. Component level
servicing by the customer is not recommended while the instrument is under
warranty.
Tektronix maintains service centers around the world to provide quick turnaround repair and recalibration services. When this service is used, the instrument should be tagged and repackaged according to the following instructions.
Repackaging
If the instrument is to be shipped to a Tektronix Service Center for service or
repair, attach a tag to the instrument showing:
1. Owner (with complete address) and the name of the person at your firm that
can be contacted.
2. Instrument serial number and a description of the service required.
Repackage the instrument in the original manner to provide adequate protection.
If the original packaging is not available or is unfit for use, repackage the
instrument as follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton whose inside dimensions are at least
six inches greater than the dimensions of the instrument to allow room for
cushioning. The shipping carton should have a test strength of at least
275 pounds.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–1
Maintainence
2. Surround the instrument with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish.
3. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing dunnage or urethane
foam between the carton and the instrument. Allow three inches on all sides
for cushioning.
4. Seal the carton with shipping tape or an industrial stapler.
Static-Sensitive Components
This instrument contains electrical components that are susceptible to damage
from static discharge. Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unprotected environments. Table 6–1 shows the relative static discharge susceptibility
of various semiconductor classes.
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Table 6–1: Static susceptibility
Relative Susceptibility Levels1
Voltage
MOS and CMOS
100 – 500 V
ECL
200 – 500 V
Schottky Signal Diodes
250 V
Schottky TTL
500 V
HF Bipolar Transistors
400 – 600 V
JFETs
600 – 800 V
Linear microcircuits
400 – 1,000 V (est.)
Low-Power Schottky TTL
900 V
TTL
1,200 V
1
Voltage equivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100 pF capacitor through a
100 W resistance).
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage:
6–2
H
Minimize handling of static-sensitive components.
H
Transport and store static-sensitive components or assemblies in their
original containers, on a metal rail, or on conductive foam. Label any
package that contains static-sensitive components or assemblies.
H
Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a wrist grounding
strap while handling these components. Servicing static-sensitive assemblies
or components should be done only at a static-free work station by qualified
personnel.
H
Nothing capable of generating or holding a static charge should be allowed
on the work station surface.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintainence
H
Keep the component leads shorted together whenever possible.
H
Pick up the components by the body, never by the leads.
H
Do not slide the components over any surface.
H
Avoid handling components in areas that have a floor or work surface
covering capable of generating a static charge.
H
Use a soldering iron that is connected to earth ground.
NOTE. A 2% RMA flux content solder is recommended for making repairs in this
instrument. Cleaning of rosin residue is not recommended. Most cleaning
solvents tend to reactivate the rosin and spread it under components where it
may cause corrosion under humid conditions. The rosin residue, if left alone,
does not exhibit these corrosive properties.
H
Use only special antistatic, suction, or wick-type desoldering tools.
CAUTION. Any repair procedures should be performed only by qualified service
personnel. Performing these procedures incorrectly could damage the instrument. Refer all repair and replacement procedures to a qualified service
technician.
AC Mains Voltage Selection Procedure
Figure 6–1: Rear panel Fuse, Power connector, On/Off Switch and Line Selector
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–3
Maintainence
The voltage range selection switch and fuse holder are located in the lower left
corner of the AM700 rear panel (see Figure 6–1). The AM700 is shipped from
the factory set for the operating voltage of the destination nation (115 VAC or
230 VAC). If the setting is not correct, it must be changed before connecting the
power cord to the power source.
1. Turn off the rear-panel power switch and disconnect the power cord from the
mains supply.
2. Set the voltage range selection switch (located on the rear panel of the
AM700) to the correct position for operation.
Instruments are shipped with the power cord most appropriate for the country of
destination. Available power-cord option information is given in Table 1–1 in the
Specifications section on page 1–3. Contact your Tektronix representative or
local Tektronix field office for additional power-cord information.
CAUTION. When changing the line voltage selector switch you must also change
the fuse to provide proper protection for the operating voltage in use.
The mains fuse provides protection in the event of a major failure of the
AM700 power supply. Two sizes of fuses are specified, one for 115 V
operation and the other for 230 V operation. See the Fuse specification in the
Specification section for the correct fuse rating to use for each voltage range.
3. Replace the fuse with the correct one, as indicated on the rear panel, for the
new mains voltage selection.
CAUTION. Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product.
Use only a power cord that is in good condition with a proper safety ground
connector.
4. Replace the power cord with the correct one for use with the local mains
outlets.
5. Turn on the rear power switch, then the front power switch to operate the
AM700.
6–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintainence
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of cleaning, visual inspection, performance
checking, and, if needed, readjustment. The preventive maintenance schedule
established for the instrument should be based on the environment in which it is
operated and the amount of use. Under average conditions, scheduled preventive
maintenance should be performed every 2000 hours of operation.
Tools Required
H
Clean, non-abrasive cloth.
H
Non-abrasive liquid glass cleaner.
H
Isopropyl alcohol.
H
Static-free vacuum cleaner with small brush attachment.
CAUTION. Cleaning and general care of the AM700 should be performed only
when the instrument is powered off and the power cord removed from electrical
mains.
Cleaning
The instrument should be cleaned often enough to prevent dust or dirt from
accumulating. Dirt acts as a thermal insulating blanket that prevents effective
heat dissipation, and can provide high-resistance electrical leakage paths between
conductors or components in a humid environment.
Exterior. Clean the dust from the outside of the instrument by wiping with a soft
cloth or small brush. A brush is especially useful to remove dust from around the
selector buttons, knobs, and connectors. Hardened dirt may be removed with a
cloth dampened in water that contains a mild detergent. Abrasive cleaners should
not be used.
Touch Screen. Clean the touch screen with a soft, lint-free cloth dampened in
denatured alcohol.
Interior. Clean the interior of the instrument by loosening the accumulated dust
with a dry, soft brush. Once the dirt is loosened remove it with low-pressure air
(high-velocity air can damage some parts). Hardened dirt or grease may be
removed with a cotton-tipped applicator dampened with a solution of mild
detergent and water. Abrasive cleaners should not be used. If the circuit board
assemblies must be removed for cleaning, follow the instructions for removal/replacement under the heading of Corrective Maintenance.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–5
Maintainence
After cleaning, allow the interior to thoroughly dry before applying power to the
instrument.
CAUTION. Do not allow water to get inside any enclosed assembly or component.
Do not clean any plastic materials with organic cleaning solvents, such as
benzene, toluene, xylene, acetone, or similar compounds, because they may
damage the plastic.
Visual Inspection
Determining the Software
Version
After cleaning, carefully check the instrument for defective connections,
damaged parts, and improperly seated transistors or integrated circuits. The
remedy for most visible defects is obvious; however, if heat-damaged parts are
discovered, extensive repairs requiring a board exchange may be necessary to
restore the equipment to normal operation.
Operation of this instrument is dependent on the software, which is loaded in
Flash EPROM. It is possible that an instrument may contain older software and
therefore not be performing up to the level expected. It may save considerable
time and troubleshooting effort to determine which software version the
instrument contains. The User Manual that was shipped with the instrument
contains the software version level when the instrument was first delivered.
However, it is possible that the instrument was upgraded, or possibly a particular
instrument was missed for a field upgrade and therefore does not perform up to
expectation. Prior to servicing it is wise to determine that the instrument has
software that matches the level specified at the front of the User Manual.
Finding the Version Number. The version number and release date for the software
contained in the instrument’s Flash EPROM is displayed on the CRT every time
a new application is started.
Updating Operating Firmware. Firmware upgrades to the operating system of the
AM700 may be made from time to time. To update the firmware loaded in the
instrument, see the instructions later in this section of the manual or the
instructions that are provided with the upgrade materials.
Performance Checks and
Readjustments
6–6
Instrument performance should be checked after each 2000 hours of operation, or
every 12 months. This will help to ensure maximum performance and assist in
locating defects that may not be apparent during regular operation. The
Verification and Adjustment Procedures are included in this manual.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintainence
Major Assembly
Interconnection
Signals and power supply voltages are passed through the instrument by a
system of interconnecting cables. The connector holders and cables are keyed to
prevent incorrect installation in most cases. A triangular key symbol is used to
identify pin 1 on the circuit board to assist in aligning the correct pins on the
mating connector.
Corrective Maintenance
The following procedure is designed to assist in isolating problems, which in
turn expedites repairs and minimizes down time.
1. Ensure that the malfunction exists in the instrument. This is done by making
sure that the instrument is operating as intended by Tektronix (see the
Operating Instructions) and by checking that all connected signal sources are
actually providing a signal. Use the generator to analyzer internal routing
capability of the AM700 to verify that the AM700 is operating correctly.
2. Determine the nature of the problem. Attempt to make the determination of
whether the instrument is out of calibration or if there has been a component
failure. Once the type of failure has been determined, proceed on to identify
the functional area most likely at fault.
3. Visually inspect the suspect assembly for obvious defects. Check for broken
or loose components, improperly seated components or cable connections,
overheated or burned components, chafed insulation, and other visible
defects. Reseat any obvious loose components or connectors and replace or
repair defective cables. Overheated components indicate a serious problem.
A defective assembly requiring repairs should be repaired using the Board
Exchange Program (if the assembly is available in the exchange program).
4. Repair to some defective assemblies is supported by a board exchange
procedure. Component-level repairs should not be attempted by the user as
damage to an assembly by a non-Tektronix service person will void the
warranty. The result is full board cost for repairs instead of the more
economical board exchange. The circuit board assemblies are assigned
assembly numbers for identification in the instrument and for ordering
replacement assemblies. Removal and replacement procedures for the
assemblies are found later in this section of the service manual. Refer to
Board Exchange Program on page 6–49 for information of the exchange
program.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–7
Maintainence
NVRAM State Clearing
In the event that the AM700 should ever go into continuous reset mode or
lockup, it may be caused by an invalid instrument state that is stored in
NVRAM. If this is the case, the problem is cleared by removing the stored states
from NVRAM; restoring factory defaults does not clear the problem. To clear the
NVRAM, use the following procedure to enter the diagnostics mode and run the
utility provided for this task.
NOTE. Clearing the NVRAM also deletes all user-saved files. If you have control
of the AM700 enough to use the memory manager, you may transfer those user
files to DOS for later restoration to the AM700. This may not be possible if the
AM700 is constantly resetting.
1. Turn off the AM700.
2. Press the MENU front-panel button and hold it in while turning on the
power to the AM700. Continue holding in the MENU button until the
AM700 beeps twice. You may release the MENU button after the beeps. The
AM700 then starts up in the low-level diagnostics mode with the following
menu displayed:
--- AM700 STARTUP MENU --Key
Selection
--------------------------------H ... Diagnostics -HELP- Menu
R ... Instrument -RUN MODES- Menu
D ... Low Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu
U ... -UTILITIES- Menu
F ... -FIRMWARE- Date Codes
-------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
-------------------------------------Input your selection:
3. Use the large knob to select U, then press the Select front-panel button to
enter the choice. This brings up the Utilities Menu. There is a difference
between the menus for V1.0/V1.01 firmware and V1.2 firmware. The first
Utilities menu shown is for V1.2 firmware. It has more choices than the
V1.0/V1.01 firmware Utilities menu, shown second.
6–8
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintainence
--- UTILITIES MENU --Key
Selection
--------------------------------------E ... - ERROR LOG - utilities
N ...
- NVRAM -
utilities
I ...
- Change Display -
F ...
Reprogram
INTENSITY
- Flash EEPROMS -
D ... Calibrate - LCD DISPLAY -------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
-------------------------------------Input your selection:
--- UTILITIES MENU --Key
Selection
--------------------------------------E ... - ZERO - System NVRAM
F ...
Reprogram
- Flash EEPROMS -
I ... - Change Display - INTENSITY
-------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
-------------------------------------Input your selection:
4. Use the large control knob to select N (Z for V1.0 and V.01 firmware), then
press the Select front-panel button to enter your selection. This brings up the
NVRAM Utility.
--- NVRAM UTILITIES MENU --Key
Selection
--------------------------------------C ... - CLEAR - System NVRAM
-------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
-------------------------------------Input your selection:
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–9
Maintainence
5. Use the large control knob to select C, then press the Select front-panel
button to enter your selection. This brings up the CLEAR SYSTEM
NVRAM Utility.
CLEAR SYSTEM NVRAM UTILITY
=========================
### WARNING -- Zeroing system NVRAM will destroy: ###
--- All user files: setups, functions,
GPIB addr, COMM port settings, etc
--- Instrument saved state settings
--- Instrument console info
--- Diagnostics Error log
--- Custom Diagnostic sequences
After NVRAM has
the Diagnostics
re-initialized.
factory default
run.
been cleared, the instrument will be reset to
Startup Menu, and Diagnostics NVRAM will be
The instrument's NVRAM will be reset to its
configuration when the instrument itself is
### Press - MENU BUTTON - to zero NVRAM, any other to abort ###
6. After the NVRAM is zeroed, you may use the menu choices and Select
button to back out of the menu and select an application to start from the
Instrument – RUN MODES – Menu (a choice in the AM700 STARTUP
MENU) or you may turn the AM700 off and back on again to restart the
applications.
6–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Maintainence
Power Supply
Status Indicators
The voltages produced by the main power supply are monitored by LED
indicators as shown in Figure 6–2 or Figure 6–3. During normal operation all the
green LED indicators should be on. Error conditions (over temperature, over
voltage, under voltage, and over current) are indicated by red LED indicators.
These indicators may be seen through the ventilation holes in the side of the
power supply housing when the cover of the AM700 is removed. When only the
rear power switch is on, the AM700 is in standby mode; and only the +14.4 and
–14.4 green indicators are on (these are the housekeeping supplies). The red UV
(undervolts) LED is also on in the standby state.
Green LED normal voltage indicators
Red LED error indication
DS7
DS4
DS3
DS8
DS5
DS2
DS6
DS13
+22
+16.5
+15
+14.4
+5
-14.4
-15
-22
DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12
OT
OV
UV
OI
Figure 6–2: Power supply status indicators for the CRT display power supply
Green LED normal voltage indicators
Red LED error indication
DS4
DS3
DS8
DS5
DS2
DS6
DS9 DS10 DS11 DS12
+16.5
+15
+14.4
+5
-14.4
-15
OT
OV
UV
OI
Figure 6–3: Power supply status indicators for the flat panel display power supply
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–11
Maintainence
6–12
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Diagnostics in the AM700 are divided into two sets, low level and high level.
The distinction between the two types is based upon the operating system; those
diagnostics that run before the instrument’s operating system is booted are
referred to as low level; those that run as applications executed by the operating
system are referred to as high level. The instrument pauses noticeably when the
operating system is booting, so messages are displayed indicating when this boot
is occurring to aid the user in differentiating between high- and low-level
diagnostics.
Grouping of diagnostics within the two sets is by circuit board. Within a circuit
board diagnostic are one or more tests; associated with each test is a main
pass/fail result and, where applicable, one or more sub-results. The purpose of
this format is to present all the information used within a test to determine its
ultimate pass/fail status. There is another diagnostic tests grouping, the Overall
Run mode. The three choices are: Power Up mode, Auto Reset mode, and
User-Interactive mode. These are discussed later in this section in Selecting an
Overall Run Mode.
Starting at firmware version 1.02, the normal powerup skips all diagnostics for a
quick start up of operation. Diagnostics can be configured to run automatically
during a normal instrument powerup, or you can access the diagnostics to run at
power on. All the low-level and high-level diagnostics can be forced to run at
power up by holding in the Limits button while turning on the power. Certain
power-up modes can be selected by pressing and holding certain front-panel
buttons during power up (referred to as ‘backdoor boot modes’). For example,
holding the Menu button in while turning on the power causes the AM700 to
enter the low-level diagnostic interface. Another example is that holding one of
the application buttons in while turning on the power starts up the selected
application.
Interactive diagnostics provide the service person choices to control the tests that
run and the manner in which they run. In the user interactive mode, any or all
tests within a group of tests can be selected for execution. From the front panel,
choices are made in the displayed menu by highlighting the choice with the
control knob and then pressing the Select button to actually make a change to the
highlighted selection. The diagnostic menu choices will not respond to presses to
the touch screen.
Diagnostics displays can be routed to one of the instrument serial ports for
viewing on a terminal. This is useful if a malfunction does not permit the testing
progress and results to be displayed on the AM700 CRT. A special setting of the
boot switch is used to route the diagnostic test displays to the serial ports.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–13
Diagnostics
NOTE. Diagnostics can also be controlled and executed remotely through the
serial port. This method is most useful if the display system is inoperative or in a
service environment for programmed troubleshooting of the AM700.
During execution, diagnostics give positive feedback of progress, indicating
results as they are gathered. During power-up execution, these results are
presented in minimal fashion; a test which passes shows only its main result,
whereas one that fails also shows the sub-results that caused the failure. During
looping and user-interactive modes, results display options are available to either
show only the main test results or all the test results.
To facilitate quick appraisal of diagnostics results, the information is presented in
a uniform format. Each line consist of fields arranged under a heading shown at
the top of the instrument/terminal screen. The heading line looks something like
the following:
Test____measmt____unit____min_____max____result".
A brief description of the content of each field follows:
Field
Description
Test
In a main result, the name of the test. In a sub-result, noted by an
indentation from the associated main result, a description of what was
evaluated to determine the main result.
measmt
A measured value, presented in integer, hexadecimal, or engineering
scientific notation. If a value is not appropriate, the field is filled with
one of the following:
-"
no value
<"
underrange indicator
>"
overrange indicator
unit
Where appropriate, a description of the units of the measured value;
otherwise, filler chars.
min
The minimum acceptable value for a passing result.
max
The maximum acceptable value for a passing result
result
In general, –Pass– or *FAIL*. can also be one of:
ĆĆNAĆĆ
not applicable
*??*not tested
6–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Because a rigidly formatted output excludes much useful information, any main
or sub-result line can have associated with it one or more lines of indented
commentary. Whereas sub-result lines are indented one level of indentation from
their associated main results, comments will be indented two levels from their
associated main results, whether they are actually associated with the main result
or the sub-result.
Accessing the Diagnostics Menus
Figure 6–4: Entering the user-interface diagnostics
An overview of the AM700 Diagnostics Menus is shown in Figure 6–5. As
previously mentioned, there are two ways to access the Low Level diagnostics
menu. With the AM700 running, the diagnostic menu is displayed through the
Other Applications menus. Press the Other front-panel button to display the
application selection menu shown in Figure 6–4. Use the large control knob to
highlight the Diagnostics application; then, touch the Run Application soft key.
The diagnostic operation begins with the High Level Diagnostic Interface Main
Menu shown in Figure 6–6. In this menu, use large control knob to highlight the
“R” (Instrument Run Modes menu) and press the Select button.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–15
Diagnostics
Entry to high
level diagnostics
menu from other
Diagnostics
High level diagnostic
interface main menu
Backdoor entry to high
level diagnostics menu
Instrument
run modes
High level
diagnostics
Powerup
AutoReset
Quick Start
Analog acq
diags (HL)
Low level menu
Reset to low level
diagnostics mode
Low level diagnostics
AM700 start up menu
Backdoor entry to low
level diagnostics menu
Instrument
run modes
Diagnostics
help menu
Instrument
powerup
modes list
Diagnostic
front panel
buttons
Normal
AutoReset
Quick Start
High level menu
To low level
diagnostics
Firmware
date codes
Change
diagnostic
intensity
Utilities
Zero NVRAM
Reprogram
flash EEPROMs
Reset to high level
diagnostics mode
Figure 6–5: AM700 diagnostics menus overview
6–16
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
From low level diagnostics
AM700 start up menu
Low level diagnostics
CPU Diagnostics
(LL)
Display diagnostics
(LL)
DSP Diagnostics
(LL)
Overall run mode
Power up
Auto reset
Overall run mode
Power up
Auto reset
Overall run mode
Power up
Auto reset
Custom
Custom
Custom
Sequence
Advance mode
Result display mode
Build a sequence
Run the sequence
Sequence
Advance mode
Result display mode
Build a sequence
Run the sequence
Sequence
Advance mode
Result display mode
Build a sequence
Run the sequence
CPU Diagnostic
test list
Display Diagnostic
test list
DSP Diagnostic
test list
Figure 6–5: AM700 diagnostic menus overview (cont.)
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–17
Diagnostics
High Level Diagnostic Interface
--- MAIN MENU --Key
Selection
__________________________________
R ... Instrument -RUN MODESD ... High Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–6: High level diagnostics main menu
In the Instrument Run Modes menu (shown in Figure 6–7 for V1.02 firmware
and in Figure 6–8 for V1.0/V1.01 firmware) highlight the “L” (Low Level
Menu) and press the Select button again.
High Level Diagnostic Interface
--- INSTRUMENT RUN MODES --NOTE: Modes marked (R) will RESET the instrument.
Key
Selection
__________________________________________________________
D ... -DIAGNOSICS- ....... (R) run powerup diagnostics
A ... -AUTORESET- ........ (R) run all diagnostics
Q ... -QUICK START- ...... (R) skip all diagnostics
L ... -LOW LEVEL MENU- ... (R) run Low Level Diags Infc
--------------------------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
--------------------------------------------------------Input your selection:
Figure 6–7: Instrument run modes in V1.02 firmware
6–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
High Level Diagnostic Interface
--- INSTRUMENT RUN MODES --NOTE: Modes marked (R) will RESET the instrument.
Key
Selection
__________________________________________________________
N ... -NORMAL- ........... (R) run powerup diagnostics
A ... -AUTORESET- ........ (R) run all diagnostics
Q ... -QUICK START- ...... (R) skip all diagnostics
L ... -LOW LEVEL MENU- ... (R) run Low Level Diags Infc
--------------------------------------------------------= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
--------------------------------------------------------Input your selection:
Figure 6–8: Instrument run modes in V1.0/V1.01 firmware
The AM700 then resets and displays the AM700 STARTUP MENU choices
shown in Figure 6–9.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- AM700 STARTUP MENU --Key
Selection
__________________________________
H
R
D
U
...
...
...
...
Diagnostics -HELP- Menu
Instrument -RUN MODES- Menu
Low Level -DIAGNOSTICS- Menu
-UTILITIES- Menu
F ... -FIRMWARE- Date Codes
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–9: AM700 startup menu
The second method of accessing the Low Level diagnostics menu starts with the
power off. This method is referred to as the “backdoor boot modes.” Press and
hold the Menu button while turning on the power. After the AM700 beeps twice
to acknowledge the startup mode, release the Menu button. The AM700 then
initializes directly into the Low Level diagnostics mode as shown in Figure 6–9.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–19
Diagnostics
In this menu, select “D” (Low Level Diagnostics Menu) and press select to
access the Low Level Diagnostics menu shown in Figure 6–10 (V1.02) or
Figure 6–11 (V1.00/1.01).
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
The Low Level Diagnostics menu changed between V1.0/V1.01 firmware and
V1.02 firmware. The V1.02 firmware menu adds more diagnostic choices shown
in the menu in Figure 6–10. The V1.0/V1.01 Low Level Diagnostic menu
choices are shown following the V1.02 menu in Figure 6–11.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- LOW LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS--Select a diagnostic to execute from the list below:
Key
Selection
__________________________________
A ... CPU Diagnostic
B ... Digital Audio Diagnostic
C ... Display Diagnostic
D ... DSP Diagnostic
E ... Generator Diagnostics
F ... Floppy Diagnostic
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–10: Low level diagnostics menu V1.02 firmware
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- LOW LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS--Select a diagnostic to execute from the list below:
Key
Selection
__________________________________
A ... CPU Diagnostic (LL)
B ... Display Diagnostic (LL)
C ... DSP Diagnostic (LL)
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–11: Low level diagnostics menu for V1.0/V1.01 firmware
6–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
The low-level diagnostics consists of sets of tests that check the CPU (central
processing unit), the Display system, and the DSP (digital signal processor)
circuitry. The tests made in each of the circuits are shown in Tables 6–2, 6–3,
and 6–4. These tests are all run at power-on in V1.0/V1.01 firmware unless they
are intentionally bypassed by the user. They are skipped in V1.02 firmware
unless they are specifically selected by the user. Additionally, diagnostics tests
for the Digital Audio board, the Generator board, and the Floppy disk controller
are provided in V1.02 firmware. The tests shown in the tables are the main test
heading only. Each of the tests has additional subtest that are used by servicing
to further narrow the suspected failure error if a diagnostic failure occurs during
testing.
Usually, this power up running of diagnostics will be the only use of diagnostics
for the user. A service person can use the diagnostics to assist in determining if a
board or board set is faulty before doing a board swap to effect repairs to the
AM700. The normal use of the diagnostic tests is for factory testing prior to
shipment to the customer and repair testing of the boards returned in the board
exchange program.
Table 6–2: CPU diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Board Program Reg
–Pass–
Board Status Reg
–Pass–
Spurious Interrupts
–Pass–
Bus Error Detect
–Pass–
Dynamic RAM
–Pass–
Parity Detect
NA
Can’t test parity on 32-bit DRAM
NVRAM (read only)
Flash EEPROM
–Pass–
Real Time Clock
–Pass–
RTC Interrupt
–Pass–
FP Ct’l ID Reg
–Pass–
FP RAM: CPU side
–Pass–
GPIB Controller
–Pass–
GPIB Interrupt
–Pass–
Serial Interrupt
–Pass–
Timer Interrupt
–Pass–
DUART 1 (serial)
–Pass–
DUART 2 (kybd)
–Pass–
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–21
Diagnostics
Table 6–3: Display diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Video ASIC
–Pass–
Video RAM
–Pass–
Video Interrupt
–Pass–
Int’l Brite DAC
–Pass–
Ext’l Brite DAC
–Pass–
Int’l RAM DAC
–Pass–
Ext’l RAM DAC
–Pass–
Table 6–4: DSP diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
DSP Addr Hold Reg -
–Pass–
DSP Host Interface
–Pass–
DSP Host Interrupt
–Pass–
DSP Internal RAM
–Pass–
Table 6–5: Digital audio diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Host Interface
–Pass–
HW Version
–Pass–
Internal Ram
–Pass–
External Ram
–Pass–
Table 6–6: Generator diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Host Interface
–Pass–
HW Version
–Pass–
Internal Ram
–Pass–
External Ram
–Pass–
6–22
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
The tests for the floppy drive require user interaction. A 3 1/2 inch diskette must
be inserted to perform the testing done. As the Table 6–7 indicates, a formatted
disk can be queried to check its status. The status query returns the number of
heads, the number of tracks, the sectors per track, the bytes per track, the number
of sectors, and the bytes per sector for the disk. You can also format a diskette
for MS DOS 1.44 Mbytes and perform a disk stress test to check for read and
write errors to the diskette.
Table 6–7: Floppy diagnostic (LL)
Test
measmt
unit
min
max
result
Disk Status Query
–Pass–
Disk Format
–Pass–
Disk Stress Test
–Pass–
Selecting an Overall Run Mode
After you select one of the diagnostics to execute, you get a further choice of
how you want to run it. The choices are shown in Figure 6–12 as P, A, or C,
(power up, auto reset, or custom mode respectively). The menu for each of the
diagnostics: CPU, Generator, Digital Audio, Display, DSP, and Floppy Disk are
all the same at this point. The diagnostic selected determines which is to be
interactively run.
Power Up mode runs the power-up diagnostics as at normal power on with an
abbreviated go/no-go test of the circuitry.
Auto Reset Mode runs all the power up diagnostic tests plus any “AutoReset”
tests available for the given diagnostic. No additional auto reset test are available
as of this printing.
The Custom choice permits you to select a single diagnostic test or build a
selected set of diagnostic tests to run. This mode allows access to any or all of
the available diagnostic tests and any User-Interactive diagnostic tests.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–23
Diagnostics
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- LOW LEVEL DIAGNOSTICS--Select an OVERALL RUN MODE from the list below:
Key
Selection
__________________________________
P ... -POWER-UP- Mode
A ... -AUTO-RESET- Mode
C ... -CUSTOM- Mode
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–12: Low level diagnostic OVERALL RUN MODE menu
Custom Run Mode
Choices
The Custom Run Mode menu shown in Figure 6–13 or Figure 6–14 permits
configuration of the diagnostic testing sequence. You can select the Power Up,
the Auto Reset, or a Custom run mode.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- CPU Diagnostic (LL) --Configure CUSTOM RUN MODE parameters as desired,
build/edit sequence,
then select RUN" to begin execution
Key
Selection
__________________________________
S ... -SEQUENCE- Type
(CUSTOM)
1 ... Advance Mode
(MANUAL)
2 ... Result Display Mode (SHOW ALL)
3 ... Result Logging Mode (DISABLED)
B ... -BUILD- New Test Sequence
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–13: Custom run mode menu V1.02 firmware
6–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- CPU Diagnostic (LL) --Configure CUSTOM RUN MODE parameters as desired,
build/edit sequence,
then select RUN" to begin execution
Key
Selection
__________________________________
S ... -SEQUENCE- Type
(CUSTOM)
1 ... Advance Mode
(MANUAL)
2 ... Result Display Mode (SHOW ALL)
B ... -BUILD- New Test Sequence
R ... -RUN- Test Sequence
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
__________________________________
Input your selection:
Figure 6–14: Custom run mode menu V1.0/V1.01 firmware
You can select how the diagnostic advances to the next test as Automatically,
Advance on Pass, Advance on Fail, or Manually. You can select how the results
are displayed from the choices of Show All, Show Main Results, or Show
Minimum Required Results. In V1.02 firmware, how the results are logged is
also selectable from a choice of Log the Main Results, Log all the Test Results,
Log the Minimum Required Results, and Disable Results Logging. To build a
custom testing sequence, select B (Build) to display the entire list of diagnostics
for the selected board. In Figure 6–15, Display Diagnostics was the selected set
of tests.
NOTE. After you finish making the selections for a test sequence to perform and
make the choice of Done Selecting, the display returns to the next higher
selection window. Two new lines are added to the choices: E . . . Edit Test
Sequence and R. . . Run Test Sequence.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–25
Diagnostics
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
--- Display Diagnostic (LL) --Build a new CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE by selecting test from
those listed.
Key
Selects/Unselects
__________________________________
A ... Video ASIC
B ... Video RAM
C ... Video Interrupt
D ... Int'l Brite DAC
E ... Ext'l Brite DAC
F ... Int'l RAM DAC
G ... Ext'l RAM DAC
__________________________________
= ... Reprint
@ ... Abort Menu
+ ... Select All - ... Un-Sel All
! ... Done Selecting
__________________________________
Selection(s): *** NONE ***
Figure 6–15: Build CUSTOM TEST SEQUENCE menu for display
When the menu first appears, there are no selections made as indicated in the
figure. To add a test to the list, rotate the large control knob to highlight the
choice, then press the Select button. The selected choices are indicated by
opening and closing angle brackets around the key letter and shown in the
selections list. You can select all the choices in the list by highlighting the + and
selecting it. All the choices can be unselected by highlighting the – and selecting
it.
After you have made the test selections you want in the custom list, highlight
the ! and press Select. This also returns to the next higher level menu where the
choice to run the tests in the custom list you have just made is available. When
you run the tests, all the selected major test headings and the test results are
shown along with the sub-test that run as part of the diagnostics.
NOTE. The Custom selections are not remembered when exiting the Custom Run
Mode menu and returning. You will have to remake any custom selections you
previously made if you want to build the same testing sequence again.
6–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Using a Keyboard to Run Diagnostics
The AM700 supports the use of AT-type keyboard as an input device for making
any inputs normally accepted from the front panel keypad. For diagnostics, the
keyboard is used together with exporting the diagnostic output messages to an
external terminal. This permits the diagnostic tests to be run and the results
viewed either when there has been a major failure of the AM700 display system
or in the production area of manufacturing for automated testing prior to
shipment of the product.
Diagnostic Keystrokes
In the diagnostic menus that are displayed, the controlling keys are given in the
column labeled “Key.” Other controlling keys are the =, used to reprint the
screen, and the @ key, used to abort the menu and return to the next higher level
in the menu tree. Another is the ! key, used in the Custom Run Mode menu to
report that the editing is done. When the AM700 display is operational, menu
selections are made by rotating the large control knob to highlight the choice to
make, then pressing the Select button to actually make the choice. The control
knob rotates through the menu choices in either direction. Some Front Panel
buttons can be used to make the selections directly as shown in Figure 6–16.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
DIAGNOSTIC FRONT PANEL BUTTON USES
==================================
Some Front Panel buttons may be used in place of moving the
hilight cursor and pressing the <Select> button. Below are
some common diagnostic menu selections and their Front Panel
button equivalents.
Key
FR-PNL BUTTON
__________________________________
SPC (Pause) ........... Freeze
RET (Continue) ........ Enter
'@' (Abort) ........... Clear Menu
'=' (Reprint) ......... Menu
'+' (Select All) ...... Units
'-' (Un-Sel All) ...... CLR
'!' (Done Selecting)... Enter
'0' -- '9' ............ "0" thru "9"
-#- Press Any Key to Continue -#-
Figure 6–16: Front panel diagnostic selection buttons
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–27
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Help Menu
One of the menu choices in the AM700 START UP MENU is the diagnostic help
menu. The help menu has two choices: List special instrument power up modes
and list diagnostic front panel button uses. Figure 6–16 lists the front panel
buttons that can be used directly to make menu selections. These keystrokes are
in lieu of highlighting the menu choice and pressing the Select button when one
of the listed key choices is available in a menu.
Backdoor Boot Modes
The other choice in the diagnostic help menu provides a list of the special power
up modes that are accessible through pressing and holding certain of the front
panel buttons at power on. These are referred to as the “backdoor boot modes.”
The choices are shown in Figure 6–17 or Figure 6–18 depending on the firmware
version in your AM700.
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
SPECIAL INSTRUMENT POWER-UP MODES
==================================
These modes are accessed by powering up the instrument with
the indicated button(s) held in. The instrument will beep
twice and recognize the mode about 5 seconds after power-up,
after which the buttons must be released. The Boot Switches
MUST be set to default (all closed) to access these modes.
POWER-UP MODES
BUTTON(S) TO HOLD IN
------------------------------------------DIAGNOSTIC HELP .......... 1 & 2 & 3
SET DISPLAY INTENSITY .... Display
LOW LEVEL DIAGS INFC ..... Menu
HIGH LEVEL DIAGS INFC .... Menu & Rescale
LOW LEVEL LOOP ........... Freeze
RUN DIAGNOSTICS .......... Limits
QUICK START FFT .......... FFT
QUICK START ANALYZER ..... Analyzer
QUICK START DIGITAL ...... Digital
QUICK START MONITOR ...... Monitor
UPDATE FIRMWARE .......... Configure and Storage
-#- Press Any Key to Continue -#-
Figure 6–17: Special power up boot modes for V1.02 firmware
6–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Low Level Diagnostic Interface
SPECIAL INSTRUMENT POWER-UP MODES
==================================
These modes are accessed by powering up the instrument with
the indicated button(s) held in. The instrument will beep
twice and recognize the mode about 5 seconds after power-up,
after which the buttons must be released. The Boot Switches
MUST be set to default (all closed) to access these modes.
POWER-UP MODES
BUTTON(S) TO HOLD IN
------------------------------------------DIAGNOSTIC HELP .......... 1 & 2 & 3
SET DISPLAY INTENSITY .... Display
POWERUP DIAGNOSTICS ...... Limits
LOW LEVEL DIAGS INFC ..... Menu
LOW LEVEL DIAGS LOOP ..... Freeze
HIGH LEVEL DIAGS INFC .... Menu & Rescale
QUICK START FFT .......... FFT
QUICK START ANALYZER ..... Analyzer
QUICK START DIGITAL ...... Digital
QUICK START MONITOR ...... Monitor
UPDATE FIRMWARE .......... Configure and Storage
-#- Press Any Key to Continue -#-
Figure 6–18: Special power up boot modes for V1.0/V1.01 firmware
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–29
Diagnostics
Viewing Diagnostics on a Remote Terminal
To view the diagnostics results on an external terminal, section 3 of switch S2 on
the CPU board, must be in the open position. This routes the diagnostic output to
the serial ports. A terminal or PC with terminal emulation must be connected to
either COM1 (serial port 0) or COM2 (serial port 1), and the baud rate of the
AM700 must be set to match that of the terminal (see Table 6–8).
Baud Rate Selection
The baud rate selection as controlled by AM700 Boot Code is determined by the
setting of a pair of jumpers, J11 and J13, located on the CPU board. The jumper
settings are shown in Table 6–8. Serial ports are configured for 8-bits data, with
no parity, 1 stop bit, and Xon/Xoff flow control when transmitting (control_S to
stop, control_Q to continue).
Both ports will be initialized to run at the selected baud rate.
Table 6–8: Baud rate setting for diagnostic output to the serial ports
RATE
J11
J13
38400 (factory setting)
off
off
9600
off
ON
1200
ON
off
19200 (default baud rate)
ON
ON
BOOT UP Diagnostics
The following information is a description of the Power-up Diagnostics and is
provided to aid in troubleshooting a power-up diagnostic failure. Boot steps
signal their starting by writing the indicated signal value to the Diagnostic LED
display.
NOTE. Switch segment 2 of switch S3 on the CPU board must be in the UP
(OPEN) position to see these values on the Diagnostic LED display.
Signal values are:
All LED segments on for step 0, just after CPU reset instruction.
“1” through “F” for steps 1–15.
“0” through “.F” for steps 16–31 (currently ends at 19).
6–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Exception errors occurring during step 1 (Address space probe) will:
Display an error message sequence on the Diagnostic LED display,decoded
as follows:
An “E” will precede the exception number (0–255).
A “P” will precede the Probe step number (see Table 6–9).
Numbers are shown as a sequence of decimal digits, separated by
decimal points (to allow detecting repetition of digits), most significant
digit to least significant.
For example, a bus error (exception 2) occurring during probe step 15
would display the following sequence:
E", 2", P", 1", .", 5".
If the error is considered critical:
Jump to the startup code (warm reboot).
Otherwise:
Continue testing
Exception errors occurring during steps 2 through 16 will:
Display an error message sequence on the Diagnostic LED display, 2 times
through.
The error message is decoded as follows:
An “E” precedes the exception number (0–255).
A dash/minus sign precedes the boot step number.
Numbers are shown as a sequence of decimal digits, separated by
decimal points (to allow detecting repetition of digits), most significant
digit to least significant.
For example, a divide by zero error (exception 5) occurring during boot
step 15 would display the following sequence twice through.
E", 5", Ć", 1", .", 5"
Jump to the startup code (warm reboot).
Exception errors occurring after step 16 will:
Display an error message on the instrument screen (or to the serial port).
Wait for user acknowledgement.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–31
Diagnostics
Do a warm, quick reboot (skips RAM and ROM tests).
Bus Probe Table
Table 6–9: Bus probe checks
Probe Step
Probe Address
Data to Write
Access Size
Access Type
Critical Error?
0xffffffff
32-bit
write
Yes
32-bit
read
Yes
0x12000000
32-bit
read
Yes
0x14000000
32-bilt
read
Yes
0x04000000
32-bit
read
No
32-bit
write
No
32-bit
read
No
32-bit
write
No
32-bit
read
No
16-bit
write
No
16-bit
read
No
8-bit
write
No
8-bit
read
No
8-bit
write
Yes
8-bit
read
Yes
8-bit
write
No
8-bit
read
No
8-bit
write
No
8-bit
read
No
Board Program Register:
1
0x13000000
2
0x13000000
Board Status Register
3
Boot Switches
4
NVRAM
5
Video RAM
6
0x0c000000
7
0x0c000000
0x00000000
Video ASIC
8
0x0c800000
9
0x0c800000
0x00000000
Front Panel Shared RAM:
10
0x0e000000
11
0x0e000000
0x0000
Front Panel Control Register:
12
0x0e800000
13
0x0e800000
0x00
DUART 1 (RS-232 infc):
14
0x10000000
15
0x10000000
0x00
DUART 2 (keyboard infc):
16
0x11000000
17
0x11000000
0x00
GPIB Infc:
18
0x15000000
19
0x15000000
6–32
0x00
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Table 6–9: Bus probe checks (cont.)
Probe Step
Probe Address
Data to Write
Access Size
Access Type
Critical Error?
20
0x17000030
0x00
8-bit
write
No
21
0x17000030
8-bit
read
No
32-bit
write
No
Real Time Clock:
DSP-CPU Infc ASIC (Address Holding Register)
22
0x19000000
0x010560cc
23
0x19000000
32-bit
read
No
0x1a000000
32-bit
read
No
32-bit
read
No
32-bit
write
No
32-bit
read
No
32-bit Counter
24
Flash EEPROM Base Address:
25
0x20000000
96k Host Infc:
26
0x60000000
27
0x60000000
Diagnostic Displays
0x00000000
The diagnostic displays are used to troubleshoot CPU kernel problems when the
AM700 fails to boot. The segments of the diagnostic LED are turned on to
indicate the failed area as indicated in Table 6–10.
NOTE. Switch segment 2 of switch S3 on the CPU board must be in the DOWN
(Closed) position to see these values on the Diagnostic LED display.
Table 6–10: Diagnostic LED definitions
LED Display Register
LED
Description
0
reserved
1
reserved
2
on : Flash EPROM (bank 0) not found
3
on : Flash EPROM (bank 1) not found
4
on : Flash EPROM (bank 2) not found
5
on : DRAM not found
6
on : battery supply failure
7
on : hardware reset active
This register is a write only octal latch which can be programmed to turn on or
off the diagnostic 7-segment LED on the CPU board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–33
Diagnostics
BOOT Steps
The following is a description of the boot diagnostic steps that are performed at
power up. In normal operation, these steps happen very rapidly, and the step
numbers will not be in the LED long enough to determine the boot step that is
occurring. If the boot steps hang so that a number is visible, that number
indicates the boot step that hung the processor. That information may be used to
provide information on what steps and hardware correctly passed and where to
start looking for a problem.
NOTE. The numbers are 1–9, A–F, and then repeat 1–3, for the boot steps.
1. Reset the CPU.
a. Use the CPU reset instruction to reset the microprocessor and all
hardware resettable from the CPU’s reset line.
b. Flash ALL diagnostic LED segments on and off-twice.
c. Set the CPU status register to 0x2700, to run in Supervisor mode with
all interrupts masked (except NMI’s).
d. Write 0x00000000 to the Main CPU’s vector base register
e. Read the initial stack pointer value from address 0 and set the CPU stack
pointer (sp) and frame pointer (a6) registers to this value
f.
The DRAM is not set up until later, so the initial stack pointer is set to a
non-existent DTACK’d location 1K above the Diagnostic LED register.
The exception stack frames can be “safely” written there until the
DRAM is tested.
g. Supervisor mode is always running, so the USP register is available to
pass the boot step number to the “core” exception handler.
h. Later, when enough DRAM is verified, the stack is moved to the
DRAM, and the Access Error vector is redirected to a more informative
handler (see step 8).
i.
Write 0 to the CPU Cache Control Register (cacr) to disable the cache.
j.
Invalidate the cache entries and flush all ATC entries.
k. Probe the CPU address space for bus errors.
i.
Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
ii. Write “1” on the diagnostic LED display.
iii. Step through the Bus Probe table (see Table 6–9) and probe for
access errors.
6–34
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
l.
If any “critical” errors occur, jump back to the startup code.
2. Read the DRAM size bits from the Board Status Register (BSR).
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “2” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Read the DRAM size bits from the Board Status Register.
3. Initialize the DRAM controller.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “3” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. If DRAM status bits indicate 16 Meg is present:
Write 0 to address 0x42b20980 to initialize the DRAM Controller for
16 MW.
Else (assume 8 Meg present):
Write 0 to address 0x40b20980 to initialize the DRAM Controller for
8 MW.
d. Test for presence of the DRAM.
Do a 32-bit read at address 0x30000100.
Write back the inverse of what was read.
Precharge the bus by writing what was read to the diagnostic LED
address, 0x18000000, and waiting a while.
Do another 32-bit read at address 0x30000100.
If the same data as the first read is returned, no DRAM was found.
Flash “3” on the diagnostic LED display –several– times.
Jump back to the startup code.
Since a location that may not yet have been written is being read, there
can be a parity induced access error (exception 2) here if the Board
Program Register fails to mask parity exceptions. There may also be a
bus error induced access error from the reads or writes to DRAM. It will
be necessary to physically probe the hardware to determine the actual
cause.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–35
Diagnostics
4. Read boot diagnostic status from the DRAM.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “4” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Read the boot diagnostics status from DRAM.
Since a location that may not yet have been written is being read, we
could get a parity induced access error (exception 2) here if the Board
Program Register fails to mask parity exceptions. There may also be a
bus error induced access error on the read. It will be necessary to
physically probe the hardware to determine the actual cause.
5. Test the DRAM data bus.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “5” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. For each of the 32 data lines, 0–31:
Write a test pattern with just that line HIGH to 0x30000100:
0x00000001, 00000002, 00000004, 00000008, 00000010,
0x00000020, 00000040, 00000080, 00000100, 00000200,
0x00000400, 00000800, 00001000, 00002000, 00004000,
0x00008000, 00010000, 00020000, 00040000, 00080000,
0x00100000, 00200000, 00400000, 00800000, 01000000,
0x02000000, 04000000, 08000000, 10000000, 20000000,
0x40000000, 80000000
Write the inverse pattern to the diagnostic LED register, to precharge the
data bus with the opposite of what expect to read back.
Verify that we read back the test pattern from 0x30000100.
d. If that pattern test passes, do the test again using a pattern with just the
data line under test LOW:
0xfffffffe, fffffffd, fffffffb, fffffff7, ffffffef,
0xffffffdf, ffffffbf, ffffff7f, fffffeff, fffffdff,
0xfffffbff, fffff7ff, ffffefff, ffffdfff, ffffbfff,
0xffff7fff, fffeffff, fffdffff, fffbffff, fff7ffff,
0xffefffff, ffdfffff, ffbfffff, ff7fffff, feffffff,
0xfdffffff, fbffffff, f7ffffff, efffffff, dfffffff,
0xbfffffff, 7fffffff
e. If either test fails, indicate the bad line (d0–d31) by showing a “d” and
then the hex char “0”–”.F” (0–31) on the diagnostic LED display.
6–36
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
f.
If any bad data lines were found, jump back to the startup code.
If there is an access error on this step, it will likely be caused by a write
access; it is also possible to get parity induced access errors here, if the
Board Program Register fails to mask them.
6. Test the DRAM address bus.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “6” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Copy all BootInfo info from start of DRAM to a region that should not
get corrupted if the Address Bus is working, for later restoration.
The storage region is from 0x30000204 to 0x300003fc.
This will work as long as the BootInfo structure is less than or equal to
504 bytes in length.
d. Zero each DRAM location whose address has one address line high and
the others low, or one address line low and the others high:
0x30000004, 30000008, 30000010, 30000020, 30000040, 30000080,
0x30000100, 30000200, 30000400, 30000800, 30001000, 30002000,
0x30004000, 30008000, 30010000, 30020000, 30040000, 30080000,
0x30100000, 30200000, 30400000 (stop here if 8 Meg)
( 0x30800000 if 16Meg ), (0x31000000 if 32 Meg)
0x3XXffff8, 3XXffff4, 3XXfffec, 3XXfffdc, 3XXfffbc, 3XXfff7c
0x3XXffefc, 3XXffdfc, 3XXffbfc, 3XXff7fc, 3XXfeffc, 3XXfdffc,
0x3XXfbffc, 3XXf7ffc, 3XXefffc, 3XXdfffc, 3XXbfffc, 3XX7fffc
If 8 Meg:
XX is 07
0x306ffffc, 305ffffc, 303ffffc.
If 16 Meg:
XX is 0f
0x300efffc, 30dffffc, 30bffffc, 307ffffc.
If 32 Meg:
XX is 1f
0x31effffc, 31dffffc, 31bffffc, 317ffffc, 30fffffc.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–37
Diagnostics
e. Write 0xFFFFFFFF to the first and last DRAM location.
0x30000000 is first
0x3XXffffc is last, where:
XX is 07 if 8 Meg
XX is 0f if 16 Meg
XX is 1f if 32 Meg
f.
Check each of the zeroed locations for non-zero content. A non-zero
content indicates a misdirected write.
g. Indicate bad address lines by showing “A” and then the hex char
“0”–”F” (0–31) on the diagnostic LED display.
h. After all lines have been tested, if any of address A2 through A20 failed,
jump back to the startup code.
i.
Otherwise, restore BootInfo and continue testing.
7. If not skipping, test the boot RAM, the malloc pool RAM, and the
“FLASH COPY” RAM.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “7” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Copy the first two long words of DRAM into registers.
NOTE. Parity error detection must be disabled during the previous Copy, because
locations which may not have been written yet are being read.
d. Enable Parity Error Exceptions via the Board Program Register (BPR)
(unless a 32-bit DRAM is being used).
e. Using registers only:
Write each long word’s address into its own location.
Read back and verify each, aborting test if error occurs.
Write the inverse of each long word’s address into its own location.
Read back and verify each, aborting test if error occurs.
f.
Disable Parity Error Exceptions through the BPR (unless a 32-bit
DRAM is being used).
g. If an error occurred during read back, flash “7” on the Diagnostic LED
display –several– times and jump to the startup code.
h. Otherwise, restore the first two long words in the DRAM and continue
testing.
6–38
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
8. Move stack and frame pointers to the DRAM.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “8” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Set registers SP and a6 to the BOOT STACK PTR in DRAM
(0x3015fffc if DL’d code; else 0x301fffc).
9. If not skipping, test Boot ROM CRC.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “9” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Calculate a 32-bit CRC for all but the last long word of Boot ROM and
compare the value to the last word.
d. If CRC’s don’t match, flash 9 on the Diagnostic LED display several
times.
10. Copy data segment from ROM to DRAM.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “A” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Call the C startup routine to do the copy.
11. Upgrade the exception handler.
a. Encode the 8-bit boot step number into the USP LSByte.
b. Write “B” on the diagnostic LED display.
c. Write 11 to step code (in Boot RAM).
d. Copy the reset vectors from the ROM table to the RAM and one set of
the rest of the RAM vectors.
e. Change the VBR (Vector Base Register) to use the RAM vector table for
use with the “dumb” exception handler.
12. Initialize linkage to external libraries.
a. Write “C” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 12 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Call the application-specific initialization routine.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–39
Diagnostics
13. Boot according to application-specific modes.
a. Write “D” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 13 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. If BootInfo–>flashStat says to try starting upgraded code from flash:
If the upgraded code starts up, it will do boot steps 14 through 19. If it
fails to startup because the flash was bad, it will signal by flashing the
step code (“D”) twice on the diagnostic LED display.
If it fails to startup because the target DRAM is bad, it will signal by
flashing the step code (“D”) several times on the diagnostic LED display.
If upgraded code from the flash is not used, continue booting from Boot
ROM; call DctlStart(), to do boot steps 14 through 19.
14. Determine Boot mode.
a. Write “E” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 14 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. If starting in “cold” or “warm” start mode:
Read the boot switch settings.
Try to match setting to a boot mode in the application-supplied
Boot table, or use default mode.
d. If starting in “hot” start mode, try to find given boot mode in the
application-supplied boot table. If not found, use the default mode.
15. Determine Boot function and I/O mode.
a. Write “F” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 15 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Based on the boot mode found in step 14 part c, scan the applicationsupplied boot table for the appropriate boot function and I/O mode. If no
match is found, use defaults.
6–40
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
16. Set I/O mode and initialize the I/O interface hardware.
a. Write “.0” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 16 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Set the Dio Infc to use the appropriate I/O mode.
d. Call the Dio Infc initialization function to setup the I/O hardware.
17. Initialize the smart exception handler.
a. Write “.1” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 17 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Switch exception vector handling from the dumb handler to the smart
one.
d. Set handler modes to generate long exception reports and terminate.
18. Do application-specific hardware initialization.
a. Write “.2” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 18 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Call an application hardware initialization routine, which will:
Disable bus error reporting.
Write the default value (0x010560cc) to the DSP ASIC. Address
Holding Register, so it can’t be accidently changed.
Setup the Video ASIC for the AM configuration.
If using serial I/O, clear the instrument screen memory.
Restore bus error reporting.
19. Do an application-specific boot.
a. Write “.3” on the diagnostic LED display.
b. Write 19 to step code (in Boot RAM).
c. Call the boot function found in step 15.
Digital Audio Board Semiautomated Testing
This information describes a set of tests used to perform a semiautomated test of
the digital audio board. These test, shown in Table 6–11, are done at the factory
or customer service using an AM700 work station with the proper test equipment
and test programs to run the checks on the AM700.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–41
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing
Test name
Test description
Test Group 0
Check power supplies (three terminal regulator outputs) and adjust 12.288 MHz crystal
oscillator Y1.
Test Group 1
These are low level tests, mostly read and write tests of all writeable registers.
1.1 host_com
Downloads tap 6.56k.
Requires functioning dsp kernel and host
port
Dsp kernel includes: +5 V through fuse F3
DSPCLK 3.072 MHz from U115 pin 19
U115 pin 13 12.288 MHz from Y1
(DSPRST) J2 pin 11 high from U140 pin 18
U140 pin 27, pin 42, and 43 or’ed resets all high
U5 Address Decoder pal, U98 SIMM
Most of the resistors and capacitors
Host port includes: U99, U100, U144. Host cable
1.2 board_id
Reads board ID from pal U117. Board ID may change with future board versions.
1.4 bbang_rw
Writes then reads the trigger bit in U117
1.5 flags_rw
Reads the flag bits which are pulled low if XLR and rear panel cables are plugged in.
Prompts operator to remove and attach cables.
1.6 stx_rw
Writes then reads all r/w registers in the sample transmitter U101 with several bit
patterns.
1.7 stx_eye_pattern
Puts eye sampler U130 in test mode to generate a fixed data pattern which is connected
serially to Sample Transmitter U101.
The DSP board receives the data, and it is checked for the correct pattern.
1.8 pshift_r/w
Writes then reads the phase shift register in U104 with several bit patterns.
1.9 counter_rw
Writes then reads the two bit control register in Counter U139 and U140 with a few bit
patterns.
1.10 serial_chain
Shifts a 32 bit pattern through the serial control/status chain and checks that the pattern
doesn’t change. Requires U117 for control. U95, U96, U97, U142, U141, U93, and U94
form the chain.
1.11 dsp_channel
Sends a sequence of bit patterns from the 56k dsp, through the sample transmitter, out
the sample cable to the DSP board. Checks that received bits are same as sent bits.
Sample transmitter U101 is put into dsp mode by STX/DSP line from U141 pin 2.
1.12 led_w
Writes an dynamic pattern to the LED display. Requires U116, R299, DS2.
6–42
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 2
Generator adjustments and functional checks.
2.1 adj_synth_1
Locks pll 1 to 12.288 MHz. Operator adjusts L5 to give correct vco control voltage. Pll 1
consists of programmable synthesizer U81, error amplifier U39B, resonant tank CR16/L5,
and oscillator IC U78.
This is the first pll of the frequency offset
circuit.
OFFSET_IN is 12.288 MHz from Y1, through U115 pin 5 and U114 pin 36.
Serial control lines OFFSET_SEL0 and OFFSET_SEL1 (U96 pins 7 and 6) – must both
be low to route this clock through U114 and U115.
2.2 adj_synth_2
This is the second pll of the frequency
offset circuit
Pll 2 locks to pll 1, so pll 1 should be verified first with test 2.1. Adjust L7 to give correct
vco control voltage. Pll 2 consists of programmable synthesizer U82, error amp U39A,
resonant tank CR18/L7, oscillator IC U79.
Buffer Q4 amplifies the signal from pll 1.
2.3 freq_offset_response
This test alternately programs plls 1 and 2 to generate 8.192 MHz and 12.288 MHz.
(These are master clock frequencies for 32 and 48 kHz sample rates.) The operator
observes the changing vco control voltages on an oscilloscope to check for expected
settling time of a few ms. Settling time depends on the R’s and C’s around U39A and
U39B.
If pll 1 is out of spec, pll 2 can appear to be bad until pll 1 is fixed.
The plls are programmed serially through U117.
2.4 freq_offset_unlock_flag
This test checks that the out-of-lock flags for pll 1 and pll 2 are operational. Pll’s 1 and 2
are programmed for 48 kHz, allowed to settle, and the unlock flag cleared. The unlock
flag then is checked to verify initial lock. The pll’s are re-programmed for 32 kHz, which
causes them to momentarily loose lock. The unlock flag is read to verify that the out of
lock condition was latched, and then cleared and re-read to verify that lock has been
re-established.
The flags, LD0 and LD1, originate at U81 pin11 and U82 pin 11. They are latched in U102
where the two are combined into one output, SYNTH_UNLOCK, which the 56k reads
serially through U94 pin 4. SYNTH_UNLOCK from U102 pin16 is cleared under software
control by ER_CLEAR from U96 pin15.
2.5 freq_offset_range
This test checks that the VCOs in pll’s 1
and 2 can be tuned to the minimum and
maximum required frequencies.
The default clock (12.288 MHz) drives pll 1, which is programmed to generate 6.39 MHz.
Pll 2 is programmed to multiply the output of pll 1 by one, so it generates 6.39 MHz also.
This is the lowest frequency that the VCO’s are expected to generate, and corresponds to
a sample rate of 25 ks/s. The out-of-lock flags are checked to see that the plls are locked.
The test is then repeated with pll 1 programmed for 14.87 MHz, which is the highest
frequency the VCO’s must generate, and corresponds to a sample rate of 58 ks/s.
The frequency of pll 1 VCO is set by CR16 and L5. Coil L5 was adjusted in step 2.1. The
capacitance of CR16 depends on the output voltage of U39B. At 25 ks/s, U39 pin 7
should measure about –1 to 0 volts. At 58 ks/s, U39 pin 7 should measure about 9 to
10 volts. Pll 2 VCO is identical and its frequency is set by CR18, L7, and the output of
U39A.
Note that the minus supply for dual op-amp U39 comes from a resistive divider and is
about –3 volts.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–43
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 2
Generator adjustments and functional checks.
2.6 adj_gen_pll
The generator pll consists of a phase comparator contained in U105, error amp U21B,
integrator U21A, resonant tank Cr9/L1 and oscillator IC U64. Jitter dac U103 changes the
lock phase by injecting an analog offset into the error amp input. Phase-shift PAL U104
changes the lock phase by putting a programmable digital phase shift in the feedback
loop divider.
This is the pll that does jitter generation
and phase shift of the generator output.
This test locks the pll to 12.288 MHz. The
operator adjusts L5 to give correct vco
control voltage.
U105 (pcomp) output signals at pins 25 and 26 should be narrow pulses (less than 20 ns)
with a 1.3 ms period. Pin 17, “slow”, should be low, saturating Q18.
U105 (pcomp) input signals PHMCK, PHWCK should be square waves at 12.288 MHz
and 48 kHz, respectively. PHCBL should be a narrow pulse (barely visible on a scope)
with a 40 msec period.
The output of U103, the jitter dac, should be dc at mid-scale, not contributing to any
offset.
U104 (pshift) pin 13 should be a legal ttl clock signal at the VCO frequency (12.288 MHz
if this test passes). Pins 14 and 15 are outputs of U104 and should be pulses at the
frequency of pin 13 divided by 256 and 16, respectively.
2.7 gen_pll_response
U105 pin 17, “slow”, should be low, saturating Q18.
This test slowly toggles the frequency of
Other components which affect the settling time include the error integrator capacitor,
the input clocks to the generator pll
C28, varactor CR9, and all of the resistors which affect the analog loop gain (all those
between 32kHz and 48kHz sample rates.
around U21A and U21B).
The operator checks the vco control voltage
at the output of U21 to see that the loop
re-locks at 48 kHz within 8 msec.
2.8 gen_pll_unlock_flag
This test checks operation of the unlock flag for the generator pll. It first checks that the
flag indicates lock at 48 kHz. Then it switches the generator frequency to 32 kHz and
back to 48 kHz. The (latched) flag is then checked for unlock. The command to clear the
flag is then sent, and the flag is checked for re-lock.
The signal being tested (PH_UNLOCK) comes from U105 (pcomp) pin 6. Whenever
U105 thinks it’s unlocked, it sets pin 6 high. The high level persists until pin 16
(ER_CLEAR) is brought high momentarily to clear it.
PH_UNLOCK is read serially by the 56k through U94.3. ER_CLEAR comes from U96.15.
2.9 gen_pll_range
This test checks the locking frequency range of the generator pll. It locks the pll to 25 kHz
first, then to 58 kHz. The PH_UNLOCK flag is read in each case to verify locking.
The lock range depends on the correct setting of L1 in step 2.6, and on the characteristics of varactor CR9. The voltage at the output of error integrator U211 needs to be able
to swing from around –9 to +9 volts. “Slow” should be off (Q18 saturated).
6–44
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 2
Generator adjustments and functional checks.
2.10 adj_gen_lvl
This test sets the generator for normal operation while the operator adjusts R483, GEN
LEVEL for 1 Vpp output into 75 ohms.
R483 sets the reference level on gain dac U107. This sets the current in the Q7/Q8
switch and thus the voltage swing on R246. The ttl AES_OUT signal from U108 pins 36
and 39 steers the current through either Q7 or Q8. The signal on R246 is then amplified
by U72 and scaled by R150 and R461. It is sent as UNBAL_OUT to the rear panel board,
where it is further scaled by fixed resistors.
2.11 cable_simulator
This test switches on the cable simulator so the operator can check for rise time of 100
ns to 200 ns at TP18.
The cable simulator consists of R152, R156, C42, C34. It is switched into the circuit by
U71 when pin 6, RED_BW_SEL is low. RED_BW_SEL is controlled by the 56k through
the serial control output, U141 pin 3.
2.12 phase_shift_range
This test exercises the phase shifter part of the generator pll. While the operator watches
to see that phase shift is actually occurring, the test checks that the pll stays locked as
the phase is shifted.
Most of the functionality for this test is contained in U104. When the 56k writes a phase
shift value to U104, it signals U105 through pll_setl (U104) to put the loop into “slow”
mode by switching off Q18 and Q19. The new phase value is then applied to the counters
internal to U104 and the loop “slowly” shifts to the new phase. Since the step in phase is
kept small, the loop stays locked. When the loop settles at the new phase value, it
returns to non-slow mode.
Test group 3
Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver.
3.1 adc_zero
This checks operation of the slow adc U137 by programming it to measure one of its
grounded inputs, and checking that the returned value is within 5mV of ground.
U137 gets its reference from U138. It requires a continuous clock which it gets through
CLK1536 from U115 pin 14. It communicates serially with the 56k through three control
lines, (ADC), SCCLK, and SCTD which come from U117 pins 26, 14, and 31, respectively.
3.2 input_level_cal
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and varies the generator output
level to check that the input level measurement is within range.
The input level is determined by measuring the control voltage in the agc loop. U109
selects the LOOPBK input which is buffered by U75, amplified by variable-gain amp
U110A, and amplified more by U111. The output of U11 is peak-detected by CR22 and
CR23, and the resulting dc level is balanced against the –12 V supply by divider R259
and R260. If the peak value exceeds about +2.5 V, integrator U112’s output moves
downward reducing the gain of U110A. In this way, the voltage at U112 output represents
the gain needed to keep the peak of the agc’d signal at 2.5 V. This voltage is measured
by the slow adc.
Input selector U109 is controlled by four outputs from the serial control chain.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–45
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 3
Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver.
3.3 input_level_linearity
This test checks the accuracy of the input level measurement circuit described in 3.2
above for all external inputs, and at several amplitude levels.
Same description as 3.2 above. These considerations apply to 3.2, too: Since the
measurement involves a peak detector, this test is sensitive to overshoot on the signal
being measured. This test is also sensitive to square-wave symmetry of the signal. Since
all inputs are ac-coupled, an a-symmetry in time (duty factor other than 50%) will cause
the peak value of the waveform to change.
3.4 agc_response
This test connects the generator internally to the receiver and steps the generator level
back and forth between two levels as the operator observes the acg loop’s transient
response.
This time constant is determined by all the gain setting parts in the agc loop: R259,
R260, R268, R257, and C161.
3.5 opto_level
This test measures the receiver signal level from the optical input by measuring the agc
control voltage. The operator connects the optical output to the optical input.
The optical input to the agc loop is selected by U109 under control of the OPTO_EN
signal from the serial control chain. The agc loop operates as described in
input_level_cal, 3.2, above. OPTO_IN is the signal from the optical receiver on the rear
panel board. The optical receiver’s ttl output is either high or low depending on whether
the light level crosses a threshold. This means that this test should always measure the
same amplitude regardless of source intensity or cable length, as long as the light level
crosses the receiver threshold.
On the generator side, the rear panel optical transmitter is driven by the OPTO_OUT
signal from U108 pin 39.
3.6 adj_ej_pll
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver so the operator can adjust the
center frequency of the eye sampler pll. The pll consists of programmable synthesizer
U122, phase error amp U113A and B, resonant tank CR24/L16, and oscillator IC U123.
The oscillator’s 12.288 MHz ecl level output is fed back to U122 pin 4.
The pll locks to the INMCK input at U122 pin 1. This is 12.288 MHz ttl from the main
decoder, U86 pin 19. U86 pin 9 requires an AES signal, which comes from U129 pin 3.
U129 selects EYE_SOURCE, U129 pin 2, which comes from TP3.
6–46
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 3
Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver.
3.7 eq_level_test
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks static operation of
the equalizer with the generator’s cable simulator off and then on.
The equalizer’s input is the agc’d input signal from TP3. If the input signal resembles a
square wave with a flat top, then the equalizer does nothing to it and it is reproduced at
TP19 with an amplitude of about 4 Vp-p. If the input signal, TP3, is rolled off in the way
the cable simulator does, then the equalizer applies peaking to keep the output (TP1)
square.
The amount of equalization applied is represented by the voltage EQ_LEVEL from U3A
pin 1, which is read by the slow adc U137. The only other input to the equalizer is GAIN
from TP1. If the input signal level is below minimum spec, then this level rises enough to
cause VR1 to conduct, which then disables the equalizer by pulling U132B pin 5 above
approximately 2 V. This is to prevent large noise at the equalizer output when there is no
input.
3.8 eq_response
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks dynamic operation
of the equalizer by continuously toggling the generator’s cable simulator off and on.
EQ_LEVEL, U3A pin 1, is monitored at J33 pin 8 for correct transient response.
See test 3.7 above for a description of static operation of the equalizer. The dynamic time
constants are set by any of the gain-setting resistors in the control loop, and by C211 and
C11 on U3A and U3B.
3.9 main_lock
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks the locking
operation of the main decoder U86. It checks for lock, then pulses MAIN_RELOCK to
force U86 out of lock. It then waits 0.5 sec to check that the receiver has re-locked. If it
hasn’t, it pulses MAIN_RELOCK again. The cycle repeats up to 3 times. The test fails
after the 3rd unsuccessful try.
U86 pin 9 should be an AES signal. Lock status is encoded in the state of U86 pins 4, 5,
and 6 which go to the DSP through the serial control chain. MAIN_RELOCK and
ER_CLEAR come from the serial control chain.
3.10 jitter_dc_test
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks operation of the
receiver phase counter U139 and U140. Phase of the main input is measured with
respect to the phase of the reference input. The generator phase is set to 0, +5 UI, and
–5 UI with respect to the reference generator. The test checks that the same value is
measured by the receiver phase counter.
Inputs to the counter in U139 and U140 are INMCK, INCBL, REFMCK, and REFCBL.
They come directly from the main and reference decoders. Each decoder must be
operating normally to generate these signals. They should AES signal inputs,* _RELOCK
signals should be low. *MCK is 12.288 MHz ttl clock signal, *_CBL is a pulse with a
40 msec period.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–47
Diagnostics
Table 6–11: Digital audio circuit board testing (cont.)
Test name
Test description
Test group 3
Receiver tests, Generator tests which require the receiver.
3.11 ej_path_test
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks that a fixed level of
generated jitter is detected by the receiver’s eye/jitter loop. A large jitter level is checked
with jitter gain set to 1, and a smaller level is checked with jitter gain set to 8. The
operator measures the detected jitter at U124 pin 9.
This test checks operation of the low-pass filter, U126A/B and U127A/B, the switched
gain amplifier, U128B and U125, and the signal selector, U129.
It also exercises the jitter generator part of the generator pll, U103 and inductors L14/19.
3.11.1 js_lf_test
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and applies a self-calibrated
amplitude of low frequency jitter. The operator adjusts the center frequency of the
eye/jitter loop to set the varactor operating point for correct loop gain.
Test group 4
Reference input tests.
4.1 ref_lock
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks the locking
operation of the reference decoder, U87. It checks for lock, then pulses REF_RELOCK to
force U87 out of lock. It then waits 0.5 sec to check that the receiver has re-locked. If it
hasn’t, it pulses REF_RELOCK again. The cycle repeats up to three times. The test fails
after the third unsuccessful try.
U87 pins 9 and10 should be an AES signal. Lock status is encoded in the state of U87
pins 4, 5, and 6 which go to the 56k through the serial control chain. REF_RELOCK and
ER_CLEAR come from the serial control chain.
Test group 5
System data path tests.
5.1 cs_checksums
This test internally connects the generator to the receiver and checks the data path all the
way to the DSP board by looking for the correct channel status checksum in the acquired
data record.
Test 1.7, stx_eye_pattern, has already checked operation of the data path from U102 to
the DSP board which is connected to J12. This test exercises the AES data path into
U102 for the first time. Inputs to U102 for the main aes path begin with “IN” on the
schematic. Inputs to U102 for the reference aes data path begin with “REF”. Each path
has bit clock (BCK), word clock (WCK), and data (DATA) signals. Bit clocks should be
3.072 MHz, word clocks should be 48 kHz, data should show some activity synchronized
to word clock.
Like test 1.7, this test is easily disturbed by ethernet conditions.
6–48
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Board Exchange Program
For service, parts, module exchange, returns, or technical support, customers
with 1-800 dialing access can call Tektronix Customer Service between 8:00 AM
and 5:00 PM Pacific Time (west coast, USA), Monday through Friday at the
following telephone number:
1-800-TEK-WIDE
Customer Service personnel will direct your inquiry to the proper support group.
Customers without 1-800 dialing access should contact their local Tektronix
sales subsidiary or distributor for details on servicing the AM700.
Exchange Procedure
If you call for an AM700 circuit board exchange or purchase, you must supply
the serial number of the AM700, the firmware version, the installed options, and
the complete part number of the module to make sure the correct replacement is
supplied. If the circuit board you need is in stock, it will usually be sent to you
the same or next working day.
After you receive an exchange replacement module (a module that you obtained
as an exchange part, not a new module purchase), the faulty module must be
returned immediately to Tektronix using prepaid common-carrier freight. Use the
packaging material from the replacement module and the furnished shipping
label to prepare the faulty module for shipment. Ship the faulty module to:
Tektronix Inc.
Measurement Business Division
Module Exchange Center M/S 78-593
PO Box 500
Beaverton, Oregon 97077-0500
Tektronix charges a standard fee for each out-of-warranty module exchange. This
fee will be quoted when you request the exchange module. If the faulty module
is not received at the above address within 30 days of your request of an
operating exchange module, the full catalog price of the module will be invoiced.
NOTE. Do not attempt repair to the circuit boards during the warranty period.
Your module is not eligible for exchange for any of the following reasons:
1. The module is damaged during repair attempts by personnel other than
Tektronix representatives.
2. The module is damaged through improper use or connection to incompatible
equipment.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–49
Board Exchange Program
3. The module has been modified by the customer.
4. The module has been custom modified to the customer’s specification by
Tektronix.
5. The module requested in not in the module exchange program.
In any of these cases, you will have to order a new replacement module at the
full catalog price. Call your local Tektronix field office for further information.
Locating Exchange Information
The following paragraphs are intended to assist in ordering the exact circuit
board replacement. Note that this information is important whether you are
ordering a circuit board from the Module Exchange Center or as a new replacement part from Tektronix.
Circuit Board Assemblies
All of the circuit boards are designated as assemblies (modules). Each assembly
has an alphanumeric designation (A1, A2, etc.). These assembles are listed in the
Replaceable Electrical Parts list of this manual for quick reference to the
replaceable modules. They are also listed in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts
list with the mechanical parts that can be ordered for replacement in the AM700.
Figure 6–19 shows the locations of the circuit board assemblies for the CRT
display version of the AM700 Audio Measurement Set and Figure 6–20 shows
the locations of the circuit board assemblies for the color flat panel display
version.
Assembly Name. This is the name of the circuit board assembly (module). Its
name is usually related to the function of the assembly in the instrument.
Assembly Number. This is the module identifying number used to find the
Tektronix part number in the Replaceable Electrical Parts list.
Tektronix Part Number. The nine-digit Tektronix part number is found in the
Replaceable Electrical Parts list of this manual. The first seven digits make up
the general part number. They are often the same for several members of the
same instrument family. The last two digits of the part number often varies
between members of the same family to denote various types or because the
circuit board contains factory-modified circuitry. Be sure that it is for the serial
number of your instrument. See the Replaceable Electrical Parts list Serial
Number/Assembly Effective/Discontinued column for the range in which your
instrument serial number falls in cases of multiple assembly number listings.
6–50
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Board Exchange Program
A7 DSP board
A6 Main/CPU
board
A12 Disk Drive
A4 Rear Panel board
A10 Picture
Monitor board
A3 Digital
Audio board
A5 Generator
board
A11 Power
Supply board
A1 Analog
Acquisition board
A9 Front
Panel board
A2 XLR Connector
board
Figure 6–19: Circuit board assemblies for CRT display version
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–51
Board Exchange Program
A13 LCD
Display
Driver board
A7 DSP board
A6 Main/CPU
board
A12 Disk Drive
A14 Flat Panel
Display
assembly
A4 Rear
Panel board
A3 Digital
Audio board
A5 Generator
board
A11 Power
Supply board
A9 Front
Panel board
A2 XLR Connector
board
A1 Analog
Acquisition board
Figure 6–20: Circuit board assemblies for flat panel color display
6–52
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Board Exchange Program
Having the correct assembly name, number, and Tektronix part number
information plus the instrument type, installed options, serial number, and
software version number (if known) ensures that you will receive the correct
replacement module for your instrument.
Tektronix Service Offerings
Tektronix maintains a service organization that can provide a number of services
to assist in maintaining the instrument’s operation at its specified levels. They
range from complete repair and adjustment, at a convenient location, to
supplying replacement parts. In addition, there are training programs that are
available for service technicians.
NOTE. When considering which service offerings best suit the current need,
remember that Tektronix provides a limited parts and service warranty for all its
products. No customer repairs should be attempted during the warranty period
for this instrument.
Service Training
Tektronix provides service training in a number of programs. In addition to
classes held at our Beaverton Oregon campus, special classes at convenient
locations can be arranged. To find out more about service training programs
contact your local Tektronix field office or representative. US customers can call
our service organization directly using 1 (800) TEK WIDE [835-9433]; ask for
“Service Training.” The 800 number is a 24-hour service, but service training
specialists are only available between 8 AM and 4 PM Pacific coast time.
Field Service Centers
Tektronix maintains service centers world wide. These centers provide repair and
calibration services for Tektronix instruments. They can be contacted through
your Tektronix field office or representative. In addition, US and Canadian
customers can call 1 (800) TEK WIDE [835-9433] for assistance in contacting
their nearest service center. Not all service centers are equipped to repair or
calibrate all of our instruments; be ready to give the operator the instrument type
and operating options when calling for assistance.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–53
Board Exchange Program
6–54
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
This section provides a tool list and instructions required to remove modules
within the instrument. All module and board removal procedures assume that the
instrument cover has been removed. All work should be done at an approved
work bench for static-damage prevention.
Tools Required
Posidrive screwdriver, 2X
Crosstip screwdriver, P1
Torx screwdriver, T-15 and T-10
Flat-bit screwdriver, 3/32-inch (filed down for a blunter point and narrower tip)
Nut driver, 1/4-inch and 5/16-inch
Hex wrench, 1/16-inch (for knob removal only)
Needle-nose pliers
Cover Removal and Replacement
Instrument Cover
Removal
1. Install the protective front panel cover on the instrument.
2. Turn off the Power switch on the rear panel and disconnect the AC Mains
power cable.
3. Set the instrument so that the protective front panel cover is sitting on your
work surface.
NOTE. If you do not have the protective front panel cover you may set the
instrument on a cushioned surface. The surface should be stable so that the
instrument does not tip over.
4. On the rear of the instrument you will find a black “foot” in each of the four
corners, remove the screws that secure the feet with a 2X Posidrive
screwdriver.
5. Pull the instrument cover up and off of the instrument.
Instrument Cover
Replacement
1. Install the protective front panel cover on the instrument.
2. Check that all cables are lying as flat against the instrument as possible.
3. Set the instrument so that the protective front panel cover is sitting on your
work surface.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–55
Removal and Replacement Procedures
CAUTION. In step 4, when the instrument cover is replaced it can cause damage
to both cables and components. To avoid damaging parts, replace the cover
slowly and without force, making sure all cables and components are cleared as
the cover is lowered into place. Keep the cover evenly aligned with the chassis as
it goes on.
4. Start the cover evenly on all sides of the rear panel. Slide the instrument
cover onto the measurement set; as you do so, be careful that the cover does
not catch on any cables or components. Check on all sides as the cover is
sliding into place taking special precautions with the ribbon cables along the
right side of the AM700.
5. Replace the four feet on the rear of the instrument.
Assembly Removal/Replacement Procedures
The following removal/replacement procedures assume the power has been
disconnected and the instrument cover has been removed. (Refer to the Cover
Removal instructions on page 6–55.) Removal of some assemblies also requires
the removal of one or more other assemblies to gain access for removal.
Major Assembly
Interconnection
Signals and power supply voltages are passed through the instrument with a
system of interconnecting cables. A triangular key symbol is used to identify
pin 1 on the circuit board and the connector housing to assist in aligning the
connector with correct pins. Figure 6–21 shows the location of pin 1 (and the
triangular marking) on the connector housing of the clamping interconnections
used in the AM700. Release the holding catches by pressing each outward, as
shown in Figure 6–21.
Pin 1 indicator
Figure 6–21: Multiple-pin connectors
6–56
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
The catches are also extracting levers, and they disengage the connector from the
pins in the connector housing. To reconnect, align the connector with the pins in
the housing and press firmly to seat the connector. The catches should snap into
place when the connector is fully inserted. Press the catches together to ensure
that they are completely engaged over the top of the connector.
Power cables are heavier gauge ribbon cable and use large in-line square-pin
connectors to handle the current required to power the assemblies.
Major Modules (Circuit
Board Assemblies)
Figure 6–22 shows the locations of the major modules in the CRT display
measurement set. The LCD flat panel display measurement set modules are very
similar, and are shown in Figure 6–23.
A6 Main/CPU
A7 DSP
A4 Rear panel
A10 Monitor
A12 Disk drive
A3 Digital audio
A11 Power supply
A9 Front panel
A5 Audio
generator
A1 Analog acquisition
A2 XLR Connector
Figure 6–22: Major module locations for the CRT display
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–57
Removal and Replacement Procedures
A13 LCD
Display Driver
A6 Main/CPU
A7 DSP
A4 Rear panel
A12 Disk drive
A3 Digital audio
A11 Power supply
A14 Flat panel
display assembly
A5 Audio
generator
A1 Analog acquisition
A9 Front panel
A2 XLR Connector
Figure 6–23: Major module locations for the LCD flat panel display
Analog Acquisition (A1)
Removal/Replacement
6–58
1. Place the AM700 top down.
2. On the Audio Generator board, disconnect the power cable at J16 and the
ribbon cable at J17 so that the Analog Acquisition board may be removed.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
J13
Analog Audio Generator
J17
J14
J16
J1
XLR
Connector
J29
Analog Acquisition
Hybrid
retaining
clip
J2
J27
J10
J30
J25
Trigger Input
Connector
J28
J26
J11
Remove this
standoff post
Figure 6–24: Bottom view showing the connections to the Analog Acquisition board
3. Disconnect all cables connected to the Analog Acquisition board.
CABLE CONNECTIONS:
Analog Audio Generator to Analog Acquisition
J13 to J29
J14 to J30
Analog Acquisition to XLR Connector
J1 CHB (the shorter cable)
J2 CHA (the longer cable)
Analog Acquisition to Trigger Input Connector
J28 (a white cable)
Power and Signal Interconnections
J25 Power cable connector
J27 Ribbon cable connector near rear of board
J26 Ribbon cable connector near front of board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–59
Removal and Replacement Procedures
4. Remove one screw and the five standoffs securing the board. (Note: The
CRT display instruments have six screws and no standoffs holding the board
in place.)
5. Remove the screw from the metal standoff post holding the hybrid retaining
clip. Remove the metal standoff post using a 5/16-inch nutdriver and remove
the plastic screws and shoulder washer from the metal standoff post near
TP28. Do not remove the standoff post.
6. Lift the Analog Acquisition board away from the chassis.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Analog Acquisition board.
7. Position the Analog Acquisition board to align the screw holes in the board
with the threaded holes on the chassis.
8. Reinstall the T15 Torx retaining screws and the metal standoff post for the
hybrids.
9. Reinstall the hybrid retaining clip and screw.
10. Reinstall the plastic screw and shoulder washer. Do not substitute a metal
screw for the plastic one.
11. Reconnect the cables to the Analog Acquisition board disconnected in step 3.
12. Reconnect the cables to the Audio Generator board disconnected in step 2.
XLR Connector (A2)
Removal/Replacement
1. Place the AM700 top down.
2. Remove the Analog Acquisition board (A1) to provide clearance to remove
and replace the XLR board. (See the Analog Acquisition board removal/replacement procedure.)
3. Disconnect the grey ribbon cable from the XLR board.
4. To release the XLR connectors from their housings on the front panel, insert
a filed down 3/32-inch flat-bit screwdriver into the small slot in the center of
each XLR connector. Press and turn counterclockwise (less than 1/4 turn
required). See Figure 6–25.
6–60
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Slot
PUSH
Figure 6–25: XLR connectors
5. Gently pull the XLR board away from the front panel to extract the
connectors from the connector housings.
6. Disconnect the Analog Audio Generator interconnection cables to the XLR
connector board at J8 CH B and J9 CH A.
Reverse the procedure to install the XLR Connector board.
CAUTION. When reinstalling the XLR Connector board do not allow the wires to
the STBY/ON switch to be captured between the XLR connectors and the XLR
connector housings.
7. Reconnect the XLR to Analog Audio Generator connectors.
XLR Board to Analog Audio Generator Board
J9 B OUT to J8
J8 A OUT to J9
8. Reposition the XLR board with the connectors through the XLR connector
housings.
9. Reengage the XLR connector locks by inserting the screwdriver in the slot
on the lock and rotating it clockwise (less than 1/4 turn is sufficient). Press
on the back of the connector you are locking to permit the lock to engage
easily.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–61
Removal and Replacement Procedures
J8
J9
Analog Audio Generator
J1
J7
XLR
Connector
J8
Analog Acquisition
J2
J9
J10
J11
Figure 6–26: Bottom view showing the XLR connector board cable connections
Hint: Move the rear of the XLR board up and down slightly and visually verify
that the connector being locked does not move. (It is locked to the connector
housing when it no longer moves with the circuit board.)
10. Reconnect the XLR to Digital Audio board connector.
XLR Board to Digital Audio Board
J7 (Grey ribbon cable)
11. Reinstall the Analog Acquisition board. (See the Analog Acquisition board
removal/replacement instructions.)
12. Reconnect the XLR to Analog Acquisition board connectors.
XLR Board to Analog Acquisition Board
J11 B IN to J1 CHB
J10 A IN to J2 CHA
6–62
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Digital Audio (A3)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the DSP (A7) and CPU (A6) boards.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the Digital Audio board.
CONNECTORS:
J31 Ribbon cable connector at right side near rear of board
J30 Power connector at right side of board
J32 Ribbon cable connector at right side near front of board
J27 Ribbon cable connector at left side near rear of board
J29 Ribbon cable connector at left side of board
J27
J29
J32
J30
J31
Figure 6–27: Digital audio board connector locations
3. Two screws located near the rear panel hold the board down. Remove the
screws.
4. Slide the board approximately 1/8-inch towards the front of the instrument,
and lift it up and over the plastic latches.
Reverse the procedure to install the board.
5. Position the Digital Audio board to align the holes in the board with the
plastic board latches.
6. Lower the board to the bottom of the latches and slide the board back toward
the rear of the AM700 to catch the board in the slots on the bottom of the
plastic board latches.
7. Reinstall the two hold down screws in the rear of the circuit board.
8. Reconnect the connectors that were disconnected in step 2.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–63
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Rear Panel (A4)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the four T15 Torx screws the hold the rear panel assembly to the
main chassis.
2. Pull the rear panel assembly out of the recess far enough to disconnect the
ribbon cable from the rear panel connector, J2, and extract the assembly.
3. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Rear Panel assembly.
Analog Audio
Generator Board (A5)
Removal/Replacement
1. Place the AM700 top down.
2. Disconnect all cables connected to the Analog Audio Generator board. The
cable locations are shown in Figure 6–28.
CABLE CONNECTIONS:
Analog Acquisition to Analog Audio Generator
J30 to J14
J29 to J13
Analog Audio Generator to XLR Connector
J8 to J9
J9 to J8
Analog Audio Generator to CPU board
J17 to J53
Analog Audio Generator to Power Supply
J16 to J7
The LCD Display version of the AM700 has a additional interconnection
cable from the floating power supply (now in the power supply module) to
the Analog Generator board. Disconnect the floating power supply cable
connector.
3. Remove the eight screws securing the board with a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
6–64
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
J30
J9
J27
Analog Acquisition
J8
XLR
Connector
J29
J16
J14
J17
Analog Audio Generator
J9
J8
J13
Figure 6–28: Bottom view showing the Analog Audio Generator cabling
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Audio Generator Board.
4. Position the Audio Generator board and replace the screws that hold the
board to the chassis.
5. Reconnect the cables disconnected in step 2.
LCD Display Driver (A13)
Removal/Replacement
(Flat Panel Display
Version)
1. Disconnect the five multiconductor cables from the LCD flat panel display
assembly at the front of the LCD Display Driver board at P1 (two connectors
on P1), P2, P3, and P5. The connector locations are shown in Figure 6–29.
2. Disconnect the multiconductor ribbon cable from the CPU board to the LCD
Display Driver board at J8.
3. Disconnect the single conductor BRT IN cable at P4.
4. Remove the two screws holding the LCD Display Driver board to the CPU
board.
5. Lift the LCD Display Driver board straight up to disengage the 120 pin
interboard connector (J23) between the LCD Display Driver board and the
CPU board.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–65
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the LCD Display Driver board.
6. Position the LCD Display Driver board carefully over the standoffs for the
retaining screws.
7. Align the pins of the interboard connector between the LCD Display Driver
and the CPU board.
8. Carefully push the LCD Display Driver down to fully engage the connector
pins.
9. Reinstall the two screws that hold the LCD Display Driver board to the
standoffs on the CPU board.
10. Reconnect the cable from the CPU board to the LCD Display Driver board at
J8.
11. Reconnect the single conductor BRT IN connector at P4.
12. Reconnect the five connectors of the multiconductor cables from the LCD
flat panel display assembly at P1 (two connectors on P1), P2, P3, and P5.
J8
J23
P4
P5
P1
P2
P3
Figure 6–29: LCD Display Driver board with connector locations
Main/CPU (A6)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the DSP (A7) board (see the DSP removal procedure).
2. Remove the LCD Display Driver (A13) board (see the LCD Display Driver
removal procedure).
3. Disconnect all cables connected to the CPU board. See Figure 6–30 for the
cable connector locations.
6–66
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
CABLE CONNECTORS:
J42 Disk drive flexible circuit board cable (see Figure 6–36 on page 6–72)
J8 Ribbon cable connector at rear of board
J48 Small ribbon cable connector at front of board
J50 Large ribbon cable connector at front of board
J53 Ribbon cable connector at right rear of board
J31 and J33 Power connectors at right side of board
Release bar
Remove these screws.
J42
J8
J48
J50
J33
J31
J53
Figure 6–30: CPU board retaining screws and disk drive cable release
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–67
Removal and Replacement Procedures
4. A total of eight screws need to be removed. Five screws are found on the
rear panel; see Figure 6–31. The remaining three screws are on the board in
close proximity to the fan.
CPU Screws
Figure 6–31: Rear panel screws holding the CPU board in place
5. Slide the board approximately 1/8-inch towards the front of the instrument
so that it clears the six plastic latches. Lift the board off of the instrument.
Reverse the procedure to install the board.
6. Align the CPU board latch holes with the plastic latches and lower the board
to align it with the slots in the top of the latches.
7. Slide the board back about 1/4-inch to catch the circuit board in the slots of
the plastic latches.
NOTE. The disk drive interconnection cable is easy to capture underneath the
CPU when reinstalling the board. Make sure it is positioned above the board
edge so that it may be reconnected when the CPU board is in place.
8. Reconnect the connectors disconnected in step 3. It is easier to leave the hold
down screws out until the cable are all connected to ease board placement.
This holds the cables in position and prevents them from interfering with
board alignment with the screw holes.
9. Reinstall the CPU board hold down screws in the board and rear panel of the
AM700.
6–68
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
DSP (A7)
Removal/Replacement
1. Place the AM700 bottom down.
2. Disconnect the ribbon cable (at J1) from the DSP board.
3. Remove the seven screws securing the board with a T-15 Torx screwdriver.
See Figure 6–32 for screw locations.
J300
J1
Figure 6–32: Retaining screw locations for DSP (A7) circuit board
4. Lift the DSP board away from the the CPU board to disconnect the
interboard connector, J300, from J36 on the CPU board.
Reverse the procedure to install the DSP board.
Front Panel (A9)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the two screws holding front-panel trim ring to the instrument using
a crosstip, P1 tip, screwdriver.
CAUTION. Use care not to damage the door to the disk drive when removing the
trim ring. Make sure the disk drive door is not caught in the slot in the trim ring
for the disk drive as you remove the trim ring.
2. Pull the bottom of the ring out away from the face of the instrument. Then
lift it slightly to clear the top of the chassis casting and remove the ring from
the instrument.
3. Push out on the top of the Front Panel assembly to release it from the chassis
casting.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–69
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 6–33: Trim ring and front panel removal
4. Pull the Front Panel assembly out far enough to disconnect the ribbon cable
connector, J1, on the bottom of the assembly; the flexible circuit board
connector (to the touch screen), J4, on the left side of the circuit board
(looking from the front); and the headphone cable, at J6. See Figure 6–34 for
connector locations on the circuit board.
NOTE. If the cabinet is removed, disconnecting the ribbon cable to the front
panel from the CPU board at J50 permits easier removal of the Front Panel
assembly.
J4
J6
J1
Figure 6–34: Front panel board connector locations
6–70
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Front Panel assembly.
5. Position the Front Panel assembly in the front-panel casting and reconnect
the touch screen connector at J4 on the Front Panel board, the Front Panel
ribbon cable connector to J50 on the CPU board, and the headphone cable
connector at J6.
6. After reinstalling the Front Panel assembly into the front-panel casting,
reinstall the XLR bezel. Do this by tipping the XLR bezel up to slip it over
the PUSH release levers on the XLR connectors. Then rotate the XLR bezel
downward to snap it gently into place with the top edge grips under the edge
of the Front Panel.
7. Place the top of trim ring over the top of the front-panel casting, align it with
the disk drive housing, and press the trim ring into place so that it snaps into
place on the top of the front-panel casting. Install the two crosstip P1 screws
that hold it on to the front-panel casting.
NOTE. Make sure the gasket around the Touch Screen is not captured beneath the
edges of the display area opening in the trim ring. Use a blunt plastic tool to
gently push back any area of the gasket that may be caught under the edges of
the front-panel trim ring (see Figure 6–35).
Figure 6–35: Touch screen gasket precaution areas when Installing the trim ring
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–71
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Disk Drive (A12)
Removal/Replacement
1. Release the disk drive flexible circuit board connector on the CPU board.
See Figure 6–36 for the connector operation.
NOTE. Do not pull on the cable to force it out of the connector. This will weaken
the connection.
Lift the connector release bar from its ends to loosen the cable.
Press the release bar down to lock the cable to the connector.
Figure 6–36: Disk drive flexible circuit board connector operation
2. Remove the T15 Torx screws holding the disk drive mounting bracket to the
chassis.
3. Slide the disk drive and mounting bracket toward the rear of the AM700 to
clear the front of the disk drive from the front panel casting.
4. When the disk drive is clear separate it from the AM700.
5. Separate the disk drive from the mounting bracket by removing the crosstip
screws that hold the disk drive to the mounting bracket using a P1 crosstip
screwdriver. The disk drive unit may have either two or four mounting
screws, depending on the vendor.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the disk drive.
NOTE. The disk drive housing must be well centered in the front casting to allow
the trim ring to fit properly.
6–72
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Touch Screen
Removal/Replacement for
CRT Display Instruments
1. Remove the front panel trim ring and the Front-Panel assembly. See the
previous Front Panel Removal/Replacement procedure for those instructions.
2. Remove the four T-10 Posidrive screws holding the touch screen to the
mounting brackets that are attached to the front casting.
3. Do not touch the rear surface of the touch screen. Keep it clean of fingerprints and dirt for reinstallation.
4. To reinstall the Touch Screen, line up the screw holes in the Touch Screen
mounting bracket with the holes in the mounting brackets on the front-panel
casting.
5. Loosely install all four T-10 Posidrive screws, then press firmly on each
corner of the Touch Screen and tighten each screw so that the Touch Screen
is firmly against the back of the slotted alignment holes in the mounting
bracket. Then tighten each screw snugly.
6. Reinstall the Front Panel, XLR bezel, and trim ring. Refer to the Front Panel
Removal/Replacement procedure to complete the installation.
CRT Picture Monitor
Assembly (A10)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the DSP board (A7), the Main/CPU board (A6), and the Digital
Audio board (A3) (see the removal procedures for each of those boards).
2. Twelve T-15 screws hold the cover plate to the top of the power supply
compartment and the display monitor as shown in Figure 6–37. Remove
these screws.
3. Slide the cover back a little and lift it away from the instrument. Thread the
ribbon cable from the display monitor through the access hole as the cover is
separated from the chassis.
4. Remove the Front Panel board (A9), and the touch screen (see the removal
procedures for this board and the touch screen).
5. Disconnect the Fan lead, J11, from the Power Supply board and pull the lead
out of the way for the remainder of the removal process.
6. Disconnect the CRT socket connector, the four-wire deflection yoke
connector (P4), and the two-wire Trace Rotation coil connector (P7).
7. Remove the four T15 Torx screws holding the CRT in the front-panel
casting.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–73
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 6–37: Power supply and monitor board cover plate screws and cables (CRT
display version)
WARNING. The CRT is fragile and is under a high vacuum. Use a protective face
mask for safety when removing the CRT from the instrument. Place the CRT face
down on a soft surface in a protected area to prevent accidental breaking of the
CRT.
CAUTION. Be careful not to bump the connector end of the CRT against the front
casting when removing it from the instrument. The evacuation nipple is fragile
and very exposed to breaking it accidently.
8. Pull the CRT from the AM700 and set the CRT face down in front of the
instrument to allow room to disconnect the high voltage lead from the CRT.
6–74
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
CAUTION. The CRT can retain a high-voltage charge for a period of time after
operation of the instrument. Use a grounding probe to discharge the highvoltage contact of the CRT before attempting to disconnect it.
9. Ground the lead of a grounding probe to the chassis of the AM700. Slide the
probe tip beneath the rubber insulation cup of the high-voltage lead on the
CRT. Hold the probe in contact with the high-voltage wire for 10 to
15 seconds, remove the probe tip, then reground the high-voltage wire with
the probe for 10 to 15 second more.
10. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to release one side of the high-voltage
connector spring clip from the CRT. Use care not to break the CRT. Then
release the second side of the spring clip from the CRT.
11. Place the CRT face down in a protected area to prevent accidental breakage.
12. Disconnect the grounding lug from the rear chassis connector.
13. Disconnect J1 (from the power supply).
14. Remove the six T15 Posidrive screws holding the circuit board to the
chassis.
15. Tilt the board left side up to allow the board to clear the chassis edges and
lift the board out of the chassis.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the Display Monitor board and the CRT.
1. Position the CRT so that the high-voltage lead may be reconnected to the
CRT. The connection belongs on the left side of the CRT when inserting the
CRT into the front-panel casting.
CAUTION. Reground the high-voltage lead and the CRT anode connector to
chassis ground for safety.
2. Reconnect the anode lead to the CRT. Hook one end of the spring clip in the
contact hole of the CRT. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to compress the
spring to permit the other end of the spring connector to enter the contact
hole and release the spring. Make sure the anode connection is secure.
3. Align the four screw holes in the CRT mounting frame with the holes in the
front-panel casting and install the four T15 Posidrive screws to hold the CRT
in place. Leave all the screws loose until they are all in, then tighten each
snugly.
4. Reconnect all the connectors to the circuit board and the CRT socket to the
CRT. These are the deflection yoke connector, J4, the Trace Rotation yoke
connector, J7, the power supply connector, J1, and the ground lug connection
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–75
Removal and Replacement Procedures
on the rear panel of the chassis. The ribbon cable at J2 will have to be
reconnected if installing a new Display Monitor board. Otherwise it may
remain in place throughout the procedure.
5. Reroute and connect the Fan power wires to the Power Supply board at J11.
6. Reinstall the Touch Screen assembly. Do not touch the rear surface of the
touch screen. Keep it clean of fingerprints and dirt for reinstallation.
7. Line up the screw holes in the Touch Screen mounting bracket with the holes
in the mounting brackets on the front-panel casting.
8. Loosely install all four T-10 Posidrive screws, then press firmly on each
corner of the Touch Screen and tighten each screw so that the Touch Screen
is firmly against the back of the slotted alignment holes in the mounting
bracket. Then tighten each screw snugly.
9. Reinstall the Front Panel board, XLR bezel, and front-panel trim ring.
10. When reinstalling the front-panel trim ring, make sure the gasket around the
Touch Screen is not captured beneath the edges of the display area opening.
Use a blunt plastic tool to push back any area of the gasket that may be
under the edges of the front-panel trim ring.
LCD Flat Panel Display
Assembly (A14)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the cover. Refer to Cover Removal and Replacement on page 6–55
for more information.
2. Remove the DSP board. Refer to DSP Board Removal/Replacement on page
6–69 for more information. Removing this circuit board eases the removal
and rerouting of the cables between the LCD flat panel and the display driver
board.
3. Take the protective front cover off and remove the two screws holding
front-panel trim ring to the instrument using a crosstip, P1 tip, screwdriver.
See Figure 6–38 for screw locations.
CAUTION. Use care not to damage the door to the disk drive when removing the
trim ring. Make sure the disk drive door is not caught in the slot in the trim ring
for the disk drive as you remove the trim ring.
4. Pull the bottom of the ring out away from the face of the instrument. Then
lift it slightly to clear the disk drive front and the top of the chassis casting
and remove the trim ring from the instrument.
5. Push out on the top of the Front Panel assembly from the inside of the
AM700 to release it from the chassis casting.
6–76
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Cable retaining
bracket
Figure 6–38: Trim ring and LCD flat panel display retaining screws
6. Pull the Front Panel assembly out far enough to disconnect the ribbon cable
connector, J1, on the bottom of the assembly; the flexible circuit board
connector, J4, on the left side of the circuit board (looking from the front);
and the headphone cable, at J6.
7. Use a T-15 Torx tip to remove the two screws holding the display driver
cable retaining bracket, and remove the bracket from the chassis.
NOTE. With the cabinet is removed, disconnecting the ribbon cable to the front
panel from the CPU board at J50 permits easier removal of the Front Panel
assembly.
8. Remove the screws holding the LCD assembly to to the front casting (four
screws holding the touch screen and four screws holding the LCD assembly
rear shield).
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–77
Removal and Replacement Procedures
9. Disconnect the cables to the LCD assembly from the display driver board,
and remove the LCD assembly from the chassis. Note the dress and routing
of the cables for reinstallation.
10. Lift the touch screen with metal frame from the LCD assembly (see
Figure 6–39 or Figure 6–40). The touch screen cable is routed under the
LCD flat panel and out the side of the shield box. Note the cable routing for
reassembly.
LCD Flat Panel Handling Precautions.
6–78
H
The LCD panel contain LSI CMOS devices. Use static-sensitive handling
precautions at grounded work stations when handling the LCD panel.
H
Make certain the power is off before connecting or disconnecting the
interconnection cable to the panel.
H
The panel is made of glass and can break or crack if dropped or bumped on a
hard surface. Handle it with care.
H
Do not press hard on the surface of the panel. The liquid-crystal layer is
packed in the LCD panel. This layer is very thin and may be disturbed by
pressing on the surface with excessive force. Such a disturbance may cause a
transient display non-uniformity.
H
When installing the LCD panel ensure that it is not warped or twisted. The
added stress can damage the panel.
H
Be careful not to scratch the front polarizer; it is easily damaged.
H
Wipe off any water drops immediately. Long contact with water can cause
discoloration or spots.
H
If the LCD panel surface is dirty, wipe it with absorbent cotton or other soft
cloth. Blow off any dust accumulation on the polarizer using an ionized
nitrogen gas gun.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 6–39: Touch screen assembly removal B020253 to B020692
11. Remove the four screws holding the LCD flat panel to rear shield. The
AM700 was manufacuted with two versions of the LCD assembly. See
Figure 6–40 for the exploded view of the new version or see Figure 6–41 for
the exploded view previous assembly. Note that a ground wire is connected
with one of the screws.
The newer version flat panel display assembly has several notable differences. The touch screen lead comes out at a different location (the side rather
than the top) and there are two separate LCD backlight inverters as opposed
to one for the earlier version. The major difference is the display brightness
of the newer version flat panel display. The mechanical changes to the
assembly also simplify assembling the display module.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–79
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 6–40: Touch screen removal for serial number B020633 and above
6–80
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Figure 6–41: LCD assembly exploded view serial number B020100 to B020632
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–81
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Replacing the LCD
Assembly
1. Place the LCD assembly on the rear shield and align the holes at the corners
with the standoffs on the rear shield. Note that the touch screen cable is
routed beneath the flat panel display.
2. Reinstall the four screws at the corners and evenly tighten them.
3. Replace the touch screen with metal frame over the LCD panel. On the
earlier versions of the touch screen, use care to keep the touch screen cable in
the slot in the metal frame so as not to pinch it between the metal frame and
the rear shield. For the later version display assemblies, make sure the
backlight leads do not get pinched by the touch screen metal frame when you
reinstall it.
4. Guide the cables of the LCD assembly through the housing and align
mounting holes of the replacement LCD assembly with the screw holes in
the front casting.
5. Attach the LCD assembly to the front casting using four screws. Align the
assembly parallel with the top and bottom of the front casting and tighten the
screws evenly.
6. Route the cables to the display driver board as noted in step 9 of the
preceding procedure, and reconnect them to the Display Driver board.
7. Replace the cable retaining bracket using two screws.
8. Position the front panel assembly in the front-panel casting and reconnect the
touch screen connector at J4 on the front panel board, the front panel ribbon
cable connector to J50 on the CPU board, and the headphone cable connector
at J6.
9. Press the front panel assembly into the chassis casting to firmly seat it in the
grounding fingers around the edge.
10. After reinstalling the Front Panel assembly into the front-panel casting, if
you have removed the XLR bezel reinstall it now. Do this by tipping the
XLR bezel up to slip it over the PUSH release levers on the XLR connectors.
Then rotate the XLR bezel downward to snap it gently into place with the
top edge grips under the edge of the Front Panel.
11. Place the top of trim ring over the top of the front-panel casting, align it with
the disk drive housing, and press the trim ring into place so that it snaps into
place on the top of the front-panel casting. Install the two crosstip P1 screws
that hold it on to the front-panel casting.
12. Place the AM700 bottom down.
13. Replace the DSP board.
14. Reconnect the ribbon cable (at J1) to the DSP board.
6–82
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
15. Recheck all the cable connectors for a tight connection.
NOTE. You may want to run the instrument at this point to make certain the
installation went well, before you put on the cover.
16. Replace the cabinet of the AM700. Refer to Cabinet Removal and Replacement on page 6–55 for more information.
LCD Backlight and
Backlight Inverter
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the LCD assembly from the instrument and dissasemble the
assembly to gain access to the LCD backlights and backlight inverter board.
Refer to the LCD Flat Panel Display Assembly Remove and Replace
procedure on page 6–76 for directions.
NOTE. The next two steps are not needed for the newer version of LCD flat panel
display assembly. The LCD backlight cables can be easily disconnected from the
invertor boards. If you have the newer assembly with two inverter boards, go to
step 4.
2. Slide the LCD assembly to the side enough to gain access to the screws
holding down the backlight inverter board on the rear metal shield.
3. Remove the two screws holding the backlight inverter board to the LCD
assembly rear shield. Note orientation of the board on the shield for
reinstallation.
4. Disconnect the backlight connectors from the inverter board(s).
5. Turn the LCD flat panel over to gain access to the backlights.
6. Remove the small screw holding the backlight assembly to the LCD flat
panel (see Figure 6–42 for the location).
CAUTION. The backlights are easily broken if they are twisted or warped.
7. Gently push up on both ends of the plastic backlight assembly and rotate it
as shown in Figure 6–42 to unsnap the backlight from the LCD flat panel.
8. Repeat for the other backlight.
9. Place the retainers on the bottom edge of the new backlight assembly in the
holes in the LCD flat panel and press gently on both ends of the top edge of
the plastic backlight assembly to snap it into place.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–83
Removal and Replacement Procedures
1 Remove screw.
2 Grasp backlight assembly at both ends.
3 Slide in direction of arrow to release locking
tab, then rotate this edge upward.
Figure 6–42: Backlight removal
6–84
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
10. Repeat for the other backlight.
11. Connect the backlight connectors to the inverter boards (or board for the
earlier version).
NOTE. Step 12 is not needed for the newer assemblies because it is not necessary
to remove the inverter boards to disconnect and reconnect the backlight
connectors. Go to step 13.
12. Align the inverter board with the standoffs on the rear shield and install the
two screws to reattach the inverter board to the shield.
13. Position the LCD flat panel back in place and align the four corner holes
with the standoff on the rear shield.
14. Reroute the touch screen cable under the LCD flat panel and install the four
screws to hold the flat panel to the rear shield. Reconnect the grounding wire
at the screw shown in Figure 6–43.
15. Replace the touch screen with metal frame over the LCD panel as shown in
Figure 6–43. Use care to keep the touch screen cable in the slot in the metal
frame (as shown for the early versions of touch screen) so as not to pinch it
between the metal frame and the rear shield. Use the end of the touch screen
cable coming from underneath the LCD flat panel as a guide to assist you to
keep the cable in the slot as you place the touch screen over the LCD flat
panel.
16. Reinstall the LCD assembly into the instrument. Refer to the LCD Assembly
Remove and Replace procedure on page 6–76 for directions.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–85
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Grounding wire
Slot
Note: The touch screen cable comes
out the side of the new version of
touch screen.
Figure 6–43: Touch panel reinstallation
Power Supply (A11)
Removal/Replacement
1. Remove the DSP board (A7), the Main/CPU board (A6), and the Digital
Audio board (A3) (see the removal procedures for each of those boards).
2. Disconnect the Power connectors at the right side of the power supply board.
3. Twelve T-15 screws hold the cover plate to the top of the power supply
compartment and the display monitor. Remove these screws.
4. Slide the cover back a little and lift it away from the instrument. Thread the
ribbon cable from the display monitor through the access hole as the cover is
separated from the chassis.
6–86
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
5. Disconnect the four connectors at the left front of the power supply board.
CONNECTORS:
J11 A two-wire connector to the fan.
J5 Ribbon cable to J48 on the CPU board.
J10 A two-wire connector to the display monitor board
J6 A two-wire connector to the Stby/On switch.
6. Use a T-10 Torx screwdriver to remove the five screws holding transistors
Q2, Q3, Q6, Q7, and rectifier CR26 to the heat sink on the left side of the
power supply board. Do not remove the screws at either end of the heat sink
as these hold the heat sink bar to the circuit board (see Figure 6–44).
Do not remove these screws.
J10 J5
J11
J6
CR26
Q7 Q6
Power connectors
Q3 Q2
EMI Line
filter
Figure 6–44: Power supply connector locations
7. Remove the two P1 cross-tip screws that hold the EMI line filter to the rear
chassis.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–87
Removal and Replacement Procedures
NOTE. The EMI line filter is mounted on the power supply board in early
versions of the measurement set. The EMI line filter in later versions of the
power supply is mounted to the rear panel.
8. Remove the green ground wire attached to the chanssis.
9. Use a 1/4-inch nut driver to remove the two standoff posts in the center area
of the board. Hint: for reassembly, look for the hex outline that is
silk-screened on the circuit board to locate where the standoff post are to be
reinstalled.
10. Use the Torx screwdriver with T15 tip to remove the remaining screws
holding the power supply board to the chassis.
11. Lift the left side of board first to clear the connector pins on the right side of
the board, then lift the power supply board clear of the chassis.
12. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the power supply. When reinstalling the
screws that hold Q2, Q3, Q6, and CR26, they must be tightened to 8 inchpounds of torque.
Replacing the NVRAM
Backup Battery
At power up, all the interrupt levels are enabled, so a low-battery interrupt will
be seen and the low-battery warning issued if the backup battery is low. The
back-up battery must be replaced to prevent loss of stored information in the
NVRAM during power off. The life of a newly installed fresh battery is 10 years
or more unless stored in higher than normal temperatures for long periods of
time.
1. Disconnect power from the AM700 and remove the cover. Refer to Cover
Removal and Replacement on page 6–55 for more information.
2. Locate the battery pins on the CPU board. See Figure 6–45 and Figure 6–46
for the location of the battery.
3. Solder the battery leads to the + and – battery pins on the CPU board.
4. Immediately cut the positive lead of the old battery to prevent reverse current
through the old battery from the new battery.
5. Secure the replacement battery to the old battery using a cable tie to hold it
in place.
If the old battery has discharged too low, stored data in the NVRAM may be
corrupted. In this case, you may have to use the NVRAM clearning process (see
NVRAM State Clearing on page 6–8) to remove corrupted data to permit the
AM700 to boot up for a normal turn on.
6–88
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Removal and Replacement Procedures
Backup battery
Figure 6–45: Location of the backup battery in the AM700
Figure 6–46: Partial CPU board showing location of BT1, the backup battery
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–89
Removal and Replacement Procedures
6–90
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Firmware Upgrade Procedure
These instructions are used to upgrade the operating firmware stored in
EEPROM through the AM700 disk drive when new upgrades are provided.
Upgrading takes approximately 15 minutes to complete.
The upgrade firmware is provided on three 3 1/2 inch diskettes. These disks are
the AM700 Firmware Reprogrammer disk containing the Flash Burn Program
reprogramming instructions and two AM700 Program Data disks (Disk #1 and
Disk #2) containing the binary programming data that is uploaded to the
EEPROM.
The AM700 boot ROM contains the routines that allow binary code to be
executed from a diskette through the disk drive. These boot ROM routines are
used execute the binary formatted files stored on the upgrade diskettes.
Reprogramming Procedure
1. Set the AM700 on a flat surface, feet side down, to run the upgrade
procedure. This assures that the disk drive is properly positioned to prevent it
from being damaged.
2. Turn the AM700 off to start the procedure steps.
3. Press and hold the Menu button in and turn on the power.
4. After the AM700 beeps twice, release the Menu button. The boot up
procedure continues to initialize in low-level diagnostics mode.
5. When the diagnostics Startup Menu appears, turn the large control knob to
highlight the U... Ć UTILITIES Ć Menu choice.
6. Press the Select button (located next to the large control knob) to display the
Utilities Menu.
7. With the Utilities Menu displayed, use the large control knob to highlight the
F... Reprogram ć FLASH EEPROMS ć selection.
8. Press the Select button, then follow the instruction that appears on the screen
to insert the Flash Burn Program disk (AM700 Firmware Reprogrammer).
The disk must be inserted with the label facing the screen. The AM700
begins reading the disk immediately.
9. After the Firmware Reprogrammer disk is read, the upgrade program begins
running.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–91
Firmware Upgrade Procedure
10. Follow the instructions that appear on the AM700 screen to complete the
reprogramming procedure.
11. Press Enter or Sweep/Run to continue, or press Clear Menu to stop the
upgrade procedure. You will need Disk #1 and Disk #2 ready to insert when
asked to do so.
Each disk is read and verified before the firmware is upgraded. If an error
occurs while reading the upgrade data disks, the upgrade procedure is
terminated without changing the loaded firmware.
12. When both data disk have loaded the upgrade data a CRC is calculated, and
you will be given the choice of programming the Flash EEPROM or
aborting without affecting the stored data.
13. Press Sweep/Run to continue programming the Flash EEPROM. The old
code is erased and the new code is uploaded. Loading time is approximately
seven minutes.
14. Press Sweep/Run or Clear Menu to reboot the AM700 and run the upgraded
firmware.
15. After the AM700 has rebooted and is running, press the Configure button.
16. Touch the State Saving soft key to display the menu used to either save state
or to restore factory defaults.
17. Select Restore Factory defaults and confirm that you want to restore the
factory defaults. This loads the new factory defaults that are modified in the
new firmware.
6–92
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
The AM7FR1 Rackmounting adapter enables mounting the Tektronix AM700
Audio Measurement Set in a standard 19-inch (483 mm) rack with an 8.75 inch
vertical opening (five rack units). The adapter consists of a folded metal tray
with attached front panel and slide-out assemblies.
CAUTION. To prevent static discharge damage, service the measurement set only
in an antistatic work station. Observe standard handling precautions for
static-sensitive devices while installing this kit. Always wear a grounded wrist
strap, grounded foot strap, and static resistant apparel while installing this kit.
Slide-out Tracks
The slide-out tracks consist of a complete assembly for the left and right sides of
the rackmounting adapter. Each assembly consists of three sections: the
stationary section, the chassis section, and the intermediate section. The
stationary section of each assembly attaches to the front and rear rails of the
cabinet rack. The chassis sections are attached to the adapter at the factory. The
intermediate sections slide between the stationary and chassis sections and allow
the instrument to be extended out of the rack.
When the rackmounting adapter is shipped, the stationary and intermediate
sections of the tracks are packaged as matched sets and should not be separated.
When mounted in the cabinet rack, the automatic latch should be at the top of
both assemblies. The rackmount adapter and one slide-out track assembly are
illustrated in Figure 6–47.
WARNING. If the left and right slide-out tracks are reversed, the safety latch can
be defeated, allowing the instrument to be pulled out of the rack. There are green
labels on each track near the mounting flange that are stamped with LH or RH
to indicate left- hand and right-hand tracks, respectively. Be sure to mount the
tracks on the correct sides, and only as directed in these instructions.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–93
Rack Adapter Instructions
Extra hardware is provided with the slide-out track assemblies. Since the
hardware is intended to make the tracks compatible with a variety of cabinet
racks and installation methods, not all of the hardware will be used for any
installation procedure.
Rackmount
cradle
Chassis
section
Automatic
latch
10-32
PHS
screws
10-32
PHS
screws
Rear
mounting
Retaining screw
Bar nuts
10-32
PHS
screws
Stationary
section
Stop latch hole
Automatic
latch
Bar nut
Intermediate
section
NOTE: Right-hand and left-hand stationary sections are
designated by the RH and the LH marked on the rails. Stop
latch holes should be towards the bottom when slides are in
place. (The right hand rail is shown above.)
Figure 6–47: Exploded view of the slide-out track assembly
6–94
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
Installation
Procedure
The following procedure describes how to attach the stationary section to
untapped rack rails using the hardware provided, adjust the slide-out track
alignment, and mount the rack-adapted instrument in the cabinet rack. If the rack
rails are tapped for 10-32 screws, the slide-out tracks can be mounted in front of
the front rails and in back of the rear rack rails using pan head screws. The flat
bar nuts are not needed.
0.500 in.
1.75 in.
Adjacent equipment
Figure 6–48: Locating mounting holes on front Rrails of equipment rack
1. Select appropriate mounting holes in the front rails of the equipment rack,
observing the clearance measurements shown in Figure 6–48. The front of
the rack adapter is designed to fit in a 8.75-inch high opening.
2. Mount the stationary sections (with the bracket extensions) to the untapped
front rack rails using either of the following methods as shown in
Figure 6–49.
a. If the front rails are not countersunk, use the truss head screws and bar
nuts.
b. If the front rails are countersunk, use the flat head screws and bar nuts.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–95
Rack Adapter Instructions
Front rack rail
Bar nut
(use if front rack rail
is not tapped)
10-32 PHS screws
Figure 6–49: Mounting the slide to the front rail
3. Mount the stationary sections to the rear rails on the equipment rack using
mounting holes in the rear rails that correspond to the same level as the front
rail holes selected in step 1. If the rear-rail mounting holes are tapped, the
bar nut is not used to attach the extensions. If the rear-rail mounting holes
are not tapped, use the bar nut on the inside of the rail, as show in
Figure 6–50, or suitable captive nut clips (not supplied).
Rear rack rail
10-32 PHS
screws
10-32 PHS
screws
Bar nut
(use if rear
rail is not
tapped)
Bar nut
Figure 6–50: Installing bracket extensions
4. Pull the extension sections of each slide-out track out to its fully extended
position.
6–96
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
5. Insert the chassis sections attached to the AM7FR1 rack adapter into the
intermediate sections.
6. Press both stop latches, and push the adapter into the cabinet rack until the
latches snap into the stop latch holes.
7. Adjust the alignment of the stationary sections according to the following
procedure.
a. Loosen the mounting screws at the front of both stationary sections.
b. Allow the tracks to seek their normal positions with the adapter centered
in the rack.
c. Tighten the mounting screws.
d. If the tracks do not slide smoothly, check for correct spacing between the
rear supports.
e. Check the vertical positioning of the instrument front panel with respect
to adjacent instruments or panels and the alignment of the thumb screw.
If not correct, reposition as necessary.
f.
Slide-Out Track
Lubrication
When the track operates smoothly, install the measurement set into the
AM7FR1 rack adapter.
The special finish on the sliding surfaces of the tracks provides permanent
lubrication. However, if the tracks do not slide smoothly even after proper
adjustment, a thin coating of paraffin rubbed onto the sliding surfaces may
improve the slides operations.
Mounting the AM700 in the Adapter
The following steps describe how to remove the handle of the AM700 to install
the AM700 in the rackmount adapter. Place all the small parts in a container for
safekeeping in case the handle is reinstalled at a later time.
1. Disconnect the power cord from the AM700.
2. Place the handle so that it is in a forward position.
3. Place the measurement set, bottom down, on a secure flat work surface.
4. Using a 1/16 inch or smaller, flat-bit screwdriver, insert the tip of the blade
under the edge of the plastic cover over the handle screws, as shown in
Figure 6–51, and gently pry the cover off to expose the handle screw. Either
cover is okay; only one of the handle screws must be loosened to permit the
handle swing arms to be removed from the measurement set.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–97
Rack Adapter Instructions
Figure 6–51: Removing the plastic handle screw cover
NOTE. If reinstalling the handle to the AM700, this screw must be firmly
tightened to prevent the handle crosspiece from rotating with respect to the
handle swing arm.
5. Using either a PoziDriveR screwdriver with P2 cross-tip bit or a 3 mm
hexagonal wrench, as necessary, loosen several turns, but do not remove the
screw that holds the handle to the swing arm. This permits the swing arms to
easily clear the cabinet of the measurement set for removal.
6. Using the small screwdriver again, locate one of the four slots on the thumb
release button, and insert the tip in the slot as shown in Figure 6–52. Gently
pry up on the thumb release button to remove it from the swing arm. Put the
thumb release button and the spring in the container for safekeeping.
CAUTION. The thumb release button is under spring tension and the spring may
jump out when the button is detached.
7. Repeat step 6 to remove the thumb release button from the other side arm.
6–98
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
Figure 6–52: Removing the thumb release button from the swing arm
CAUTION. Do not reinsert the swing handle screws in the cabinet screw holes;
they are too long and will damage internal components.
8. Using a TorxR screwdriver with T15 bit, remove the screws and washers, as
shown in Figure 6–53, that hold both swing arms to the cabinet of the
measurement set.
9. Insert the blade of the 1/16 inch screwdriver about 3/4 inch into the center
screw hole of the plastic holder for the star sprocket. Pry gently forward and
then backward to detach the holder from the cabinet. Repeat for the other
side.
10. Put the screws, handle, and other hardware away for safekeeping for possible
future reassembling. The removed screws will not be used in mounting the
measurement set to the adapter.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–99
Rack Adapter Instructions
Figure 6–53: Removing the retaining screws holding the swing arms to the cabinet
11. Pull the rack adapter to its full extension.
12. Place the AM700 into the adapter and position it fully forward to align the
holes in the sides of the adapter with the handle holes of the measurement
set.
CAUTION. Do not use the long screws removed from the measurement set to
attach the adapter. The long screws can damage the internal components.
13. Install the short Torx head screws supplied with the rack adapter kit to hold
the AM700 to the adapter using a Torx screwdriver with a T15 tip.
14. Release the stop latches on the rack slides and push the instrument all the
way into the rack.
15. At the rear of the rack, install the instrument power cord and any other
cabling required, such as printer cables, GPIB remote control cable, or VGA
monitor cable. This may be done from the front with the measurement set
fully extended on the tracks to make sure all the cables will be long enough
to permit full extension of the rackmounted AM700.
6–100
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
Removing the Measurement Set from the Rack
The rackmounted measurement set and adapter may be easily removed from the
rack. The slide-out tracks permit the rack-adapted AM700 to be extended out of
the rack for access to the rear-panel connectors. Before attempting to operate the
instrument in the extended position, be sure the power cord and any other
connected cabling is long enough to permit full extension.
1. Loosen the front-panel thumb screw that secures the rackmounted measurement set into the rack.
2. Extend the tracks to the stops and disconnect all the rear-panel cabling from
the measuerment set.
3. Press both stop latch releases and pull the adapter out of the slide tracks. The
procedure is illustrated in Figure 6–54.
TO INSTALL:
1. Pull the slide-out track section to the
fully extended position.
2. Insert the instrument chassis sections
into the slide-out sections.
3. Press the stop latches and push the
instrument toward the rack until the
latches snap into their holes.
4. Again press the stop latches and push
the instrument fully into the rack.
5. Tighten the front-panel thumb screw.
TO REMOVE:
1. Loosen retaining screw and pull
instrument outward until the stop latches
snap into the holes.
2. Disconnect the rear-panel cables.
3. Press stop latches and remove
instrument.
Figure 6–54: Installing and removing the AM700 Audio Measurement Set from the
rack
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–101
Rack Adapter Instructions
Manufacturers cross index
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
TK0435
LEWIS SCREW CO
4300 S RACINE AVE
CHICAGO IL 60609-3320
TK0941
BEARINGS INC (DIST)
2720 NW 29TH
PO BOX 3005
PORTLAND OR 97210-1702
0KB01
STAUFFER SUPPLY
810 SE SHERMAN
PORTLAND OR 97214
06666
GENERAL DEVICES CO INC
1410 S POST RD
PO BOX 39100
INDIANAPOLIS IN 46239-9632
09422
PLASTIC STAMPING CORP
2216 W ARMITAGE AVE
CHICAGO IL 60647-4461
80009
TEKTRONIX INC
14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR
PO BOX 500
BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001
Replaceable parts list
Fig. &
index
number
Tektronix part
number
6–55
Qty
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
016-1343-00
1
RACKMOUNT KIT:AM700 CRADLE MOUNT
80009
016134300
1
407-4353-00
1
.BRACKET,STIFFENER:
*MOUNTING PARTS*
80009
407435300
2
210-0457-00
3
.NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312,STL CD PL
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
3
436-0291-00
1
.TRAY,RACKMOUNT:AM700 RACK ADAPTER KIT OPT1R
80009
436029100
4
351-0104-03
1
.SL SECT,DWR EXT:12.625 L,W/O HARDWARE
*MOUNTING PARTS*
06666
C-720-3
5
210-0458-00
8
.NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:8-32 X 0.344,STL CD PL
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
0KB01
210-0458-00
6
210-0457-00
5
.NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6-32 X 0.312,STL CD PL
*END MOUNTING PART*
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
7
354-0025-00
1
.RING,RETAINING:EXTERNAL,U/O 0.187 DIA SFT
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
TK0941
555-18MI
8
210-0894-00
1
.WASHER,FLAT:0.19 ID X 0.438 OD X 0.031 POLTHN
09422
ORDER BY DESC
9
212-0506-00
4
.SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.375,FLH,100 DEG,STL
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
10
333-4149-00
1
.PANEL,FRONT:AM700 RACK ADAPTER,ALUM,OPT1R
*MOUNTING PARTS*
80009
333414900
11
213-0940-00
1
.THUMBSCREW:10-32 X 1.15,0.375 OD,SST
*MOUNTING PARTS*
80009
213094000
12
367-0366-00
2
.HANDLE,CARRYING:AM700
*MOUNTING PARTS*
80009
367036600
211-0721-00
351-0636-00
063-1830-00
2
1
1
0KB01
06666
80009
ORDER BY DESC
C-1252
063183000
6–102
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
STANDARD ACCESSORIES
.SCREW,MACH:6-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL,CDPL,T-1.5 TORX DR
.SLIDE,DWR,EXT:20.0 X 1.69,PAIR,R&L
.SHEET,TECH:AM7FR1,INSTRUCTIONS
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Rack Adapter Instructions
3
2
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Figure 6–55: Exploded view of the rack adapter assembly
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
6–103
Rack Adapter Instructions
6–104
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Options
The current options for the AM700 consist of the power cord options: A1, A2,
A3, and A5 plus two servicing options: M2 and M9. The power cord options are
described in Table 1–1 of the Specification section. Servicing option M2
provides for remedial service support and Servicing option M9 is a repair
protection plan.
For those owners that want to change from the CRT display to the flat-panel
color display, there is a option to purchase a factory upgrade to install the color
display. Contact your nearest Tektronix representative for more information on
this upgrade.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
7–1
Options
7–2
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
This section contains a list of the electrical components for the <instrument>.
Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.
Parts Ordering Information
Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or
representative.
Changes to Tektronix products are sometimes made to accommodate improved
components as they become available and to give you the benefit of the latest
improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to include the
following information in your order:
H
Part number
H
Instrument type or model number
H
Instrument serial number
H
Instrument modification number, if applicable
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any
change in part number.
Change information, if any, is located at the rear of this manual.
Using the Replaceable Electrical Parts List
The tabular information in the Replaceable Electrical Parts List is arranged for
quick retrieval. Understanding the structure and features of the list will help you
find all of the information you need for ordering replacement parts. The
following table describes each column of the electrical parts list.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–1
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Parts list column descriptions
Column
Column name
Description
1
Component number
The component number appears on diagrams and circuit board illustrations, located in the diagrams
section. Assembly numbers are clearly marked on each diagram and circuit board illustration in the
Diagrams section, and on the mechanical exploded views in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts list
section. The component number is obtained by adding the assembly number prefix to the circuit
number (see Component Number illustration following this table).
The electrical parts list is arranged by assemblies in numerical sequence (A1, with its subassemblies and parts, precedes A2, with its subassemblies and parts).
Chassis-mounted parts have no assembly number prefix, and they are located at the end of the
electrical parts list.
2
Tektronix part number
Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.
3 and 4
Serial number
Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective. Column four indicates
the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No entry indicates the part is good for all
serial numbers.
5
Name & description
An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an item
name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S. Federal Catalog handbook H6-1 for
further item name identification.
6
Mfr. code
This indicates the code number of the actual manufacturer of the part.
7
Mfr. part number
This indicates the actual manufacturer’s or vendor’s part number.
Abbreviations
Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1–1972.
Component Number
Component Number
A23A2R1234
A23
Assembly number
A2
R1234
Subassembly Number
(optional)
Circuit Number
Read: Resistor 1234 (of Subassembly 2) of Assembly 23
List of Assemblies
Chassis Parts
Mfr. Code to Manufacturer
Cross Index
8–2
A list of assemblies is located at the beginning of the electrical parts list. The
assemblies are listed in numerical order. When a part’s complete component
number is known, this list will identify the assembly in which the part is located.
Chassis-mounted parts and cable assemblies are located at the end of the
Replaceable Electrical Parts List.
The table titled Manufacturers Cross Index shows codes, names, and addresses
of manufacturers or vendors of components listed in the parts list.
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
00213
MSD INC
700 ORANGE ST
DARLINGTON, SC 29532
00779
AMP INC
2800 FULLING MILL
PO BOX 3608
HARRISBURG PA 17105
01295
TEXAS INSTRUMENTS INC
SEMICONDUCTOR GROUP
13500 N CENTRAL EXPY
PO BOX 655303
DALLAS TX 75262–5303
02113
COILCRAFT INC
1102 SILVER LAKE RD
CARY IL 60013–1658
02660
AMPHENOL CORP
INDUSTRIAL TECHNOLOGY DIVISION (ITD)
720 SHERMAN AVENUE
HAMDEN CT 06514
04222
AVX/KYOCERA
DIV OF AVX CORP
19TH AVE SOUTH
P O BOX 867
MYRTLE BEACH SC 29577
04426
ITW SWITCHES
DIV OF ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC
6615 W IRVING PARK RD
CHICAGO IL 60634–2410
04713
MOTOROLA INC
SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS SECTOR
5005 E MCDOWELL RD
PHOENIX AZ 85008–4229
05245
CORCOM INC
1600 WINCHESTER RD
LIBERTYVILLE IL 60048–1267
05292
ITT COMPONENTS DIV
05820
EG AND G WAKEFIELD ENGINEERING
60 AUDUBON RD
WAKEFIELD MA 01880–1203
06090
RAYCHEM CORP
300 CONSTITUTION DRIVE
MENLO PARK CA 94025–1111
06383
PANDUIT CORP
17303 RIDGELAND AVE
TINLEY PARK, IL 60477–3048
07933
RAYTHEON CO
SEMICONDUCTOR DIV HQ
350 ELLIS ST
MOUNTAIN VIEW CA 94042
09023
CORNELL–DUBILIER ELECTRONICS
DIV FEDERAL PACIFIC ELECTRIC CO
2652 DALRYMPLE ST
SANFORD NC 27330
09922
BURNDY CORP
1 RICHARDS AVE
NORWALK CT 06856
09969
DALE ELECTRONICS INC
EAST HIGHWAY 50
P O BOX 180
YANKTON SD 57078
0AGS1
MICRO LINEAR CORPORATION
2092 CONCOURSE DRIVE
SAN JOSE CA 95131
0A384
CRYSTAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP
4210 S INDUSTRIAL DR
PO BOX 17847
AUSTIN TX 78760
0BYG1
TADIRAN ELECTRONIC IND INC
40 SEAVIEW BLVD
PORT WASHINGTON NY 11050
0B0A9
DALLAS SEMICONDUCTOR CORP
4350 BELTWOOD PKWY SOUTH
DALLAS TX 75244
0CVK3
ALLEGRO MICROSYSTEMS INC
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS DIV
115 NE CUTOFF
PO BOX 2036
WORCHESTER MA 01613–2036
0FMA6
NEUTRIK USA INC
195–3 LEHIGH AVE
LAKEWOOD NJ 08701–4527
0H1N5
TOSHIBA MARCON ELECTRONICS
AMERICA CORPORATION
998 FIRST EDGE DRIVE
VERNON HILLS IL 60061
0JR03
ZMAN MAGNETICS INC
7633 S 180th
KENT WA 98032
0JR04
TOSHIBA AMERICA INC
ELECTRONICS COMPONENTS DIV
9775 TOLEDO WAY
IRVINE CA 92718
0J9R2
HARISON ELECTRIC CO LTD
ASAHIMACHI 5–CHOME IMABARI
EHIME JAPAN
0KB01
STAUFFER SUPPLY
810 SE SHERMAN
PORTLAND OR 97214
0LUA3
PHILIPS COMPONENTS
100 PROVIDENCE PIKE
SLATERSVILLE, RI 02876
0LXM2
LZR ELECTRONICS INC
8051 CESSNA AVENUE
GAITHERSBURG MD 20879
CLIFTON NJ
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–3
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index (cont.)
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
0MS63
QUALITY TECHNOLOGIES CORP
610 N MARY AVENUE
SUNNYVALE CA 94086
0TJ19
QUALITY SEMICONDUCTOR INC
851 MARTIN AVENUE
SANTA CLARA CA 95050–2903
11236
CTS CORPORATION
RESISTOR NETWORKS DIVISION
406 PARR ROAD
BERNE IN 46711–9506
11502
IRC, INC
BOONE NC 28607–1860
PO BOX 1860
12954
MICROSEMI CORP – SCOTTSDALE
8700 E THOMAS RD
P O BOX 1390
SCOTTSDALE AZ 85252
13103
THERMALLOY CO INC
2021 W VALLEY VIEW LN
PO BOX 810839
DALLAS TX 75381
13919
BURR–BROWN RESEARCH CORP
6730 S TUCSON BLVD
P O BOX 11400
TUCSON AZ 85734
14301
ANDERSON ELECTRONICS INC
HOLLIDAYSBURG PA 16648–0089
PO BOX 89
14552
MICROSEMI CORP
2830 S FAIRVIEW ST
SANTA ANA CA 92704–5948
14752
ELECTRO CUBE INC
1710 S DEL MAR AVE
SAN GABRIEL CA 91776–3825
14936
GENERAL INSTRUMENT CORP
POWER SEMICONDUCTOR DIV
600 W JOHN ST
HICKSVILLE NY 11802–0709
15454
KETEMA
RODAN DIVISION
2900 BLUE STAR STREET
ANAHEIM CA 92806–2591
15542
MINI–CIRCUITS LABORATORY
2625 E 14TH ST
BROOKLYN NY 11235–3915
15912
THOMAS AND BETTS CORP
ELECTRONICS GROUP
76 FAIRBANKS
IRVINE CA 92718
16237
CONNECTOR CORP
4720 Y
ENDER RD
LISLE, IL 60532
16546
PHILIPS COMPONENTS
CHIP CAP/CHIP RES FACILITY
4561 COLORADO BLVD
LOS ANGELES, CA 90039–1103
17856
SILICONIX INC
2201 LAURELWOOD RD
SANTA CLARA CA 95054–1516
19701
PHILIPS COMPONENTS
DISCRETE PRODUCTS DIV
RESISTIVE PRODUCTS FACILITY
AIRPORT ROAD
PO BOX 760
MINERAL WELLS TX 76067–0760
1CH66
PHILIPS SEMICONDUCTORS
811 E ARQUES AVENUE
PO BOX 3409
SUNNYVALE CA 94088–3409
1ES66
MAXIM INTEGRATED PRODUCTS INC
120 SAN GABRIEL DRIVE
SUNNYVALE CA 94086
21022
CONNOR–WINFIELD CORP
2111 COMPREHENSIVE DRIVE
AURORA, IL 60505
22526
BERG ELECTRONICS INC (DUPONT)
857 OLD TRAIL RD
ETTERS PA 17319
22929
DALE ELECTRONICS CORP
FREQUENCY CONTROL GROUP
1155 W 23RD ST
TEMPE AZ 85282–1822
23875
M–TRON INDUSTRIES INC
PO BOX 630
100 DOUGLAS ST
YANKTON SD 57078–0630
24226
GOWANDA ELECTRONICS CORP
NO 1 INDUSTRIAL PL
GOWANDA NY 14070–1409
24355
ANALOG DEVICES INC
1 TECHNOLOGY DRIVE
NORWOOD MA 02062
24546
DALE ELECTRONICS
A VISHAY INTERTECHNOLOGY INC CO
550 HIGH ST
BRADFORD PA 16701–3737
8–4
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index (cont.)
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
25088
SIEMENS CORP
186 WOOD AVE S
ISELIN NJ 08830–2704
26364
COMPONENTS CORP
6 KINSEY PLACE
DENVILLE NJ 07834–2611
26742
METHODE ELECTRONICS INC
7447 W WILSON AVE
CHICAGO IL 60656–4548
27014
NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR CORP
2900 SEMICONDUCTOR DR
SANTA CLARA CA 95051–0606
27264
MOLEX INC
2222 WELLINGTON COURT
LISLE IL 60532–1613
28733
CERAMIC MAGNETICS INC
16 LAW DR
FAIRFIELD NJ 07006
2K262
BOYD CORP
6136 NE 87th AVE
PO BOX 20038
PORTLAND OR 97220
2N936
VISHAY ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
1122 23RD STREET
COLUMBUS, NE 68601
30161
AAVID ENGINEERING INC
ONE KOOL PATH
PO BOX 400
LACONIA NH 03247
30983
PHILIPS COMPONENTS
1440 W INDIANTOWN ROAD
PO BOX 689605
JUPITER, FL 33468–9605
31433
KEMET ELECTRONICS CORP
NATIONAL SALES HEADQUARTERS
PO BOX 5928
GREENVILLE SC 29606
31918
ITT SCHADOW INC
8081 WALLACE RD
EDEN PRAIRIE MN 55344–2224
34371
HARRIS CORP
HARRIS SEMICONDUCTOR PRODUCTS
GROUP
200 PALM BAY BLVD
PO BOX 883
MELBOURNE FL 32919
34899
FAIR RITE PRODUCTS CORP.
1 COMMERCIAL ROW
PO BOX J
WALLKILL, NY 12589
48726
UNITRODE INTEGRATED CIRCUITS CORP
(UICC)
7 CONTINENTAL BLVD
PO BOX 399
MERRIMACK NH 03054–0399
49588
S B ELECTRONICS INC
131 S MAIN ST
BARRE VT 05641
50139
ALLEN–BRADLEY CO
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
1414 ALLEN BRADLEY DR
EL PASO TX 79936
50356
TEAC AMERICA INC
7733 TELEGRAPH RD
PO BOX 750
MONTEBELLO, CA 90640–6537
50434
HEWLETT–PACKARD CO
OPTOELECTRONICS DIV
370 W TRIMBLE RD
SAN JOSE CA 95131–1008
50558
ELECTRONIC CONCEPTS INC
526 INDUSTRIAL WAY W
EATONTOWN NJ 07724–2212
50579
SIEMENS COMPONENTS INC
OPTOELECTRONICS DIV
19000 HOMESTEAD RD
CUPERTINO CA 95014–0712
50783
WINTRON INC
(FORMERLY: PENN–TRAN CORP)
250 RUNVILLE ROAD
BELLEFONTE, PA 16823
53387
3M COMPANY
ELECTRONIC PRODUCTS DIV
3M AUSTIN CENTER
AUSTIN TX 78769–2963
54893
HEWLETT PACKARD
MICROWAVE SEMICONDUCTOR DIVISION
350 TRIMBLE
SAN JOSE CA 95131–1008
54972
CLINTON ELECTRONICS
6701 CLINTON ROAD
ROCKFORD, IL 61111
55680
NICHICON /AMERICA/ CORP
927 E STATE PKY
SCHAUMBURG IL 60195–4526
56427
CALIFORNIA MICRO DEVICES CORP
215 TOPAZ ST
MILPITAS CA 95035–5430
56845
DALE ELECTRONICS INC
2300 RIVERSIDE BLVD
PO BOX 74
NORFOLK NE 68701–2242
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–5
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index (cont.)
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
57027
INTERNATIONAL RESISTIVE PRODUCTS INC
4222 S STAPLES
CORPUS CHRISTI TX 78411–2702
57668
ROHM CORPORATION
15375 BARRANCA PARKWAY
SUITE B207
IRVINE CA 92718
57924
BOURNS INC
INTEGRATED TECHNOLOGY DIVISION
1400 NORTH 1000 WEST
LOGAN UT 84321
58050
TEKA PRODUCTS INC
45 SALEM ST
PROVIDENCE RI 02907
53279
XENTEK INC
1770 LA COSTA MEADOW DR
SAN MARCOS, CA 92069
57668
ROHM CORPORATION
15375 BARRANCA PARKWAY
SUITE B207
IRVINE, CA 92718
59640
SUPERTEX INC
1225 BORDEAUX DR
SUNNYVALE, CA 94086
59660
TUSONIX INC
7741 N BUSINESS PARK DR
PO BOX 37144
TUCSON AZ 85740–7144
60211
VOLTAGE MULTIPLIERS INC
8711 W ROOSEVELT
VISALIA CA 93291–9458
61429
FOX ELECTRONICS
DIV OF FOX ELECTRONICS INC
5842 CORPORATION CIRCLE
FOR MEYERS FL 33905
61529
AROMAT CORP
629 CENTRAL AVE
NEW PROVIDENCE NJ 07974
61857
SAN–0 INDUSTRIAL CORP
91–3 COLIN DRIVE
HOLBROOK NY 11741
61935
SCHURTER INC
1016 CLEGG COURT
PETALUMA CA 94952–1152
62643
UNITED CHEMICON INC
9801 W HIGGINS ST
SUITE 430
ROSEMONT, IL 60018–4771
63791
STAR MICRONICS INC
200 PARK AVE
SUITE 2308
NEW YORK NY 10166–0001
64155
LINEAR TECHNOLOGY CORP
1630 MCCARTHY BLVD
MILPITAS CA 95035–7417
64762
ELANTEC INC
1996 TAROB COURT
MILPITAS CA 95035–6824
65238
NOVACAP
25111 ANZA DRIVE
VALENCIA CA 91335
65786
CYPRESS SEMICONDUCTOR CORP
3901 N 1ST ST
SAN JOSE CA 95134–1506
66958
SGS THOMSON MICROELECTRONICS
1000 E BELL RD
PHOENIX AZ 85022–2649
6Y440
MICRON TECHNOLOGY INC
2805 E COLUMBIA ROAD
BOISE ID 83706
71279
INTERCONNECTION PRODUCTS INC
C/O ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
SALES
PO BOX 231149
PORTLAND, OR 97223
71400
BUSSMANN
DIV OF COOPER INDUSTRIES INC
114 OLD STATE RD
PO BOX 14460
ST LOUIS MO 63178
74594
COMPONENT RESOURCES INC (DIST)
DIV OF CPI INTERNATIONAL CORP
14525 SW WALKER ROAD
BEAVERTON OR 97006
75042
IRC ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
PHILADELPHIA DIV
TRW FIXED RESISTORS
401 N BROAD ST
PHILADELPHIA PA 19108–1001
75378
CTS KNIGHTS INC
400 REIMANN AVE
SANDWICH IL 60548–1846
75915
LITTELFUSE TRACOR INC
SUB OF TRACOR INC
800 E NORTHWEST HWY
DES PLAINES IL 60016–3049
80009
TEKTRONIX INC
14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR
PO BOX 500
BEAVERTON OR 97077–0001
8–6
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index (cont.)
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
81073
GRAYHILL INC
561 HILLGROVE AVE
PO BOX 10373
LA GRANGE IL 60525–5914
91637
DALE ELECTRONICS INC
2064 12TH AVE
PO BOX 609
COLUMBUS NE 68601–3632
98978
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRONIC RESEARCH
CORP
135 W MAGNOLIA BLVD
PO BOX 7704
BURBANK CA 91502
D5243
ROEDERSTEIN ERNST GMBH
LUDMILLASTRASSE 23
8300 LANDSHUT GERMANY
K1072
GREENPAR CONNECTORS LTD
PO BOX 15
HARLOW ESSEX, CM20 2ER UK
S4206
TOYO COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
TORANOMON BLDG 15 SHIBA TORANO
MINATO KU
TOKYO, JAPAN
TK0AY
JAPAN SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG CO LTD
1–4–1 HIGASH I–MACHI
SHINSENRI TOYONAKA–CITY
OSAKA JAPAN
TK0IR
MONITRONICS INC TAIWAN
8 SOUTH 6TH ROAD
KEPZ KAOHSIUNG TAIWAN
TK0198
HAMILTON HALLMARK
9750 SW NIMBUS AVE
BEAVERTON, OR 97005
TK0435
LEWIS SCREW CO
4300 S RACINE AVE
CHICAGO IL 60609–3320
TK0515
EVOX–RIFA INC
100 TRI–STATE INTERNATIONAL
SUITE 290
LINCOLNSHIRE IL 60015
TK0875
MATSUO ELECTRONICS INC
831 S DOUBLAS ST
EL SEGUNDO CA 92641
TK0891
MICONICS
1 FAIRCHILD AVE
PLAINVIEW NY 11803
TK0977
ELECTRICAL INSULATION SUPPLIERS, INC
–(DIST)
3549 N W YEON
PORTLAND OR 97210
TK1124
LUMEX OPTO/COMPONENTS INC
292 E HELLEN RD
PALATINE IL 60067–6955
TK1158
POWEL AND ASSOCIATES
111 S FINDLAY ST
SEATTLE WA 98108–2427
TK1177
BELL INDUSTRIES (DIST)
6024 SW JEAN ROAD
LAKE OSWEGO OR 97034
TK1326
NORTHWEST FOURSLIDE INC
18224 SW 100TH CT
TUALATIN OR 97062
TK1416
SHARP CORP
22–22 NAGAIKE–CHO
ABENO–KU
OSAKA, JAPAN,
TK1441
GFS MANUFACTURING INC
6 PROGRESS DR
PO BOX 1409
DOVER NH 03820
TK1462
YAMAICHI ELECTRONICS CO LTD
2ND FLOOR NEW KYOEI
BLDG 17–11
3–CHROME SHIBAURA
MINATO–KU
TOKYO JAPAN
TK1499
AMLAN INC
97 THORNWOOD RD
STAMFORD CT 06903–2617
TK1601
PULSE ENGINEERING INC
2801 MOORPARK AVE
SUITE 7
SAN JOSE CA 95128
TK1719
NEDELCO BV (THOMAS & BETTS)
POSTBUS 6431
3002 AK ROTTERDAM THE NETHERLANDS
TK1727
PHILIPS NEDERLAND BV
AFD ELONCO
POSTBUS 90050
5600 PB EINDHOVEN THE NETHERLANDS
TK1743
UNITRODE (UK) LTD
6 CRESSWELL PARK
BLACKHEATH
LONDON SE 3 9RD ENGLAND
TK1913
WIMA
THE INTER–TECHNICAL GROUP IND
2269 SAW MILL RIVER ROAD
PO BOX 127
ELMSFORD NY 10523
TK2058
TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA
1600 FEEHANVILLE DRIVE
MOUNT PROSPECT, IL 60056
TK2073
TOKYO AMERICA INC
565 W GULF ROAD
ARLINGTON HEIGHTS IL 60005
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–7
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Manufacturers cross index (cont.)
Mfr.
code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
TK2096
KELVIN ASSOCIATES
14724 VENTURA BLVD
SUITE 1003
SHERMAN OAKS CA 91403–3501
TK2248
WESTERN MICRO TECHNOLOGY
1800 NW 169TH PL
SUITE B–300
BEAVERTON OR 97006
TK2262
RPM ENTERPRISES
SUB OF MICROSEMI CORP
3305 W CASTOR ST
SANTA ANA CA 92704
TK2319
COLLMER
14368 PROTON RD
DALLAS TX 75244
TK2501
K–TRONICS INC
PO BOX 4398
BISBEE AZ 85603–5603
TK2520
NEC WORLD PRODUCTS
19654 8TH STREET
PO BOX 517
SONOMA CA 95476
TK2538
UNITED SILICON STRUCTURES INC
1971 CONCOURSE DRIVE
SAN JOSE CA 95131
TK2569
SHARP CORPORATION
C/O TJBO LIAISON
M/S 78–210
BEAVERTON, OR 97077
TK2611
STACKPOLE CORPORATION
PO BOX 14466
RALEIGH, NC 27610
TK6138
VANTIS CORPORATION
C/O DELTA TECHNICAL SALES INC
15050 SW KOLL PKWY, SUITE 2D
BEAVERTON, OR 97006
8–8
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable Electrical Parts List
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
671–2897–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION
80009
671–2897–00
A1A1
671–2897–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION
80009
671–2897–01
A1A2
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671–2989–00
A1A3
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671–2989–00
A1A4
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671–2989–00
A1A5
A1A6
671–2989–00
–––––––––––
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
CIRCUIT BD SUBASSY:CONTROL SHIFT REGISTER
80009
671–2989–00
A1A7
671–2801–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:OVER/UNDER RANGE
80009
671–2801–00
A2
671–2917–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR
80009
671–2917–00
A2
671–2917–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR
80009
671–2917–01
A3
671–2915–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–00
11/18/94
B010248
A3
671–2915–01
B010249
A3
671–2915–02
B010422
A4
671–2916–00
A5
671–2797–00
A5
671–2797–01
B010330
A5
671–2797–02
A5A3
671-3873-00
A5A4
B010421
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–02
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL
80009
671–2916–00
B010329
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–00
B019999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–01
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–01
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:RELAY
80009
671-3873-00
671-3873-00
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:RELAY
80009
671-3873-00
A6
671–2666–00
B010100
B010324
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–00
A6
671–2666–01
B010325
B010348
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–01
A6
671–2666–02
B010349
B019999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–02
A6
671–2666–03
B020100
7/28/97
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–03
A6
671–2666–04
7/28/97
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–04
A7
671–2900–00
B010100
B010140
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DSP
80009
671–2900–00
A7
671–2900–01
B010141
B019999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DSP
80009
671–2900–01
A7
671–2900–02
B020633
A9
671–2798–00
A9
671–2798–01
6/15/95
A10
672–0338–00
B010100
A10
672–0338–01
B010284
A10A1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DSP
80009
671–2900–02
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL
80009
671–2798–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:FRONT PANEL
80009
671–2798–01
B010283
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MONITOR
80009
672–0338–00
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MONITOR (W XFMR)
80009
672–0338–01
671–2843–01
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:MONITOR (WO XFMR)
80009
671–2843–01
A10A2
671–2869–00
B020100
A11
671–2841–00
A11
671–2841–01
A11
671–3891–00
B020100
A11
671–3891–01
6/18/97
A12
119–4547–01
A12
119–5413–01
B019999
B020100
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:TRANSFORMER
80009
671–2869–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: POWER SUPPLY
80009
671–2841–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: POWER SUPPLY
80009
671–2841–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: POWER SUPPLY
80009
671–3891–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: POWER SUPPLY
80009
671–3891–01
DISK DRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5 INCH,2MB,0.5 INCH,DSDD
50356
FD–05HF–BLACK
DISK DRIVE:FLOPPY,3.5 INCH,2MB,0.5 INCH,DSDD
50356
119–5413–01
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–9
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable Electrical Parts List (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
A13
671-3872-00
B020100
B020632
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER BOARD
80009
671-3872-00
A13
671-3872-01
B020633
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DISPLAY DRIVER BOARD
80009
671-3872-01
A14
440–4145–00
B020100
B020632
DISPLAY ASSY:FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
80009
440–4145–00
A14
440–4145–01
B020633
DISPLAY ASSY:FLAT PANEL DISPLAY
80009
440–4145–01
8–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1
671–2897–00
A1A1
671–2897–01
Serial no.
effective
B020100
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
B019999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION
80009
671289700
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:ACQUISITION
80009
671289701
*ATTACHED PARTS*
129–0565–00
SPACER,POST:1.281 L,6–32,AL,0.312 HEX
(QUANTITY 2)
80009
129056500
162–0532–00
INSUL SLVG,ELEC:HT SHRINK,0.375 IDPOLYOLEFIN,
BLK,0.022 THK W
06090
VERSAFIT
210–0457–00
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:6–32 X 0.312,STL CD PL
(QUANTITY 2)
TK0435 ORDER BY DESC
210–0967–00
WASHER,SHLDR:0.156 ID X 0.375 OD X 0.094 THK,NYL
0KB01
ORDER BY DESC
211–0558–00
SCREW,MACHINE:6–32 X 0.25,BDGH,NYL
(QUANTITY 2)
TK1158
ORDER BY DESC
211–0722–00
SCREW,MACH:6–32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,CDPL,T–15 TORX DR
(QUANTITY 2)
0KB01
ORDER BY DESC
337–4026–00
SHIELD,ELECT:BRASS,AM700
80009
337402600
385–0018–00
SPACER,POST:1.25 L W/6–32 THD EA END,NYL
74594
1763–632–N–0
A1A1C1
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C2
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C3
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C4
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C5
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C6
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C7
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C8
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C9
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C18
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C20
283–0665–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:190PF,1%,100V
09023
CDA15FD191F03
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A1A1C21
283–0665–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:190PF,1%,100V
09023
CDA15FD191F03
A1A1C22
295–0203–00
CAP SET,MATCHED:2.2UF MATCHED TO 1% OF EACH
80009
295020300
A1A1C23
295–0203–00
CAP SET,MATCHED:2.2UF MATCHED TO 1% OF EACH
80009
295020300
A1A1C24
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C25
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C26
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C27
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C29
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C30
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C32
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C106
281–0707–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:15000PF,10%,200V
04222
MA302C153KAA
A1A1C107
281–0707–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:15000PF,10%,200V
04222
MA302C153KAA
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–11
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1C108
283–0642–01
A1A1C109
A1A1C110
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C111
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C112
295–0203–00
CAP SET,MATCHED:2.2UF MATCHED TO 1% OF EACH
80009
295020300
A1A1C113
283–0665–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:190PF,1%,100V
09023
CDA15FD191F03
A1A1C114
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C118
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C119
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C120
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C121
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C122
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C123
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C124
295–0203–00
CAP SET,MATCHED:2.2UF MATCHED TO 1% OF EACH
80009
295020300
A1A1C125
283–0665–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:190PF,1%,100V
09023
CDA15FD191F03
A1A1C126
283–0620–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:470PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD471F03
A1A1C127
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A1A1C129
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C130
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C131
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C132
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C133
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A1A1C138
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C139
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C140
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD:3900 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 3900 1%/6
A1A1C141
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
A1A1C142
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C143
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C144
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
UPL1H100MDH1TD
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C145
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
A1A1C146
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD:3900 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 3900 1%/6
A1A1C151
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C152
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C201
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C202
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C203
283–0680–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:330PF,1%,500V
TK0891 RDM15FD331F03
A1A1C204
283–0605–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:678PF,1%,300V
09023
CDA15FC(678)F03
A1A1C205
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
8–12
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1C206
281–0775–02
A1A1C207
A1A1C208
A1A1C209
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
283–0680–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:330PF,1%,500V
TK0891 RDM15FD331F03
283–0605–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:678PF,1%,300V
09023
CDA15FC(678)F03
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C210
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C211
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C212
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C213
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C214
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C215
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C216
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C217
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C218
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C219
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C220
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C221
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C222
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C223
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C224
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C225
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C228
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C229
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C230
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C231
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C232
290–0973–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,20%,25VDC
0H1N5
CEUSM1E101
A1A1C233
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C235
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C236
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C237
285–1504–00
CAP,FXD:6800 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 6800 5%/6
A1A1C238
285–1504–00
CAP,FXD:6800 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 6800 5%/6
A1A1C239
285–1344–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:1000PF,100V,5%
TK1913 FKP2 1000 PF 5
A1A1C240
285–1344–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:1000PF,100V,5%
TK1913 FKP2 1000 PF 5
A1A1C241
285–1344–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:1000PF,100V,5%
TK1913 FKP2 1000 PF 5
A1A1C242
285–1344–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:1000PF,100V,5%
TK1913 FKP2 1000 PF 5
A1A1C243
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C244
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C245
285–1342–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:FILM & FOIL;220PF,5%,100V, 7.2 X 7MM
TK1913 FKP2 220 PF 5 P
A1A1C246
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
UPL1H100MDH1TD
8–13
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1C247
281–0775–02
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C248
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
A1A1C249
285–1342–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:FILM & FOIL;220PF,5%,100V,7.2 X 7MM
TK1913 FKP2 220 PF 5 P
A1A1C250
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C251
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C252
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C253
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C254
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C255
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C256
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C257
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C258
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C259
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C260
285–1349–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:0.1UF,5%,63VDC
TK1913 MKS2 .1/63/5
A1A1C261
281–0773–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V
TK1743 CGB103KEX
A1A1C262
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C263
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C264
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C265
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C266
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C267
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C268
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C269
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C274
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C277
290–0831–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:470UF,+50–20%,50V
55680
UVX1H471MHA
A1A1C278
290–0831–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:470UF,+50–20%,50V
55680
UVX1H471MHA
A1A1C279
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C280
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C281
290–1108–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,25V,ESR=0.034 OHMS
62643
LXF25VB102M12X2
A1A1C283
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C284
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C287
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C288
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C290
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C291
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C292
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C293
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C294
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
8–14
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A1A1C295
290–1311–00
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C296
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C297
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C298
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C299
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C300
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C301
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C302
283–0642–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:33PF,2%,500V
09023
CDA10ED330G03
A1A1C303
283–0601–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:22PF,10%,300V
TK0891 RDM15ED220K03
A1A1C304
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C305
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C306
283–0601–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:22PF,10%,300V
TK0891 RDM15ED220K03
A1A1C307
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C308
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C309
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C310
283–0601–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:22PF,10%,300V
TK0891 RDM15ED220K03
A1A1C311
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C312
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C313
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A1A1C314
283–0601–00
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:22PF,10%,300V
TK0891 RDM15ED220K03
A1A1C315
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
A1A1C316
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C317
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A1A1C318
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD:3900 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 3900 1%/6
A1A1C319
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD:3900 PF WIMA
TK1913 FKP 2 3900 1%/6
A1A1C320
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
A1A1C321
283–0648–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:10PF,5%,500V,TAPED & REELED
TK0891 RDM15CD100D03
A1A1C322
283–0648–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:10PF,5%,500V,TAPED & REELED
TK0891 RDM15CD100D03
A1A1C323
283–0648–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:10PF,5%,500V,TAPED & REELED
TK0891 RDM15CD100D03
A1A1C324
283–0648–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:10PF,5%,500V,TAPED & REELED
TK0891 RDM15CD100D03
A1A1C325
283–0772–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:497PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD(497)F03
A1A1C326
283–0634–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:65PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15ED650F03
A1A1C327
283–0772–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:497PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15FD(497)F03
A1A1C328
283–0634–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:65PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15ED650F03
A1A1C329
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C330
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C331
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C332
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
SA205C104MAA
SA102A330JAA
8–15
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1C333
281–0158–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,VAR,CER DI:7–45PF,100WVDC
59660
518–006 G 7–45
A1A1C334
283–0635–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:51PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15ED510F03
A1A1C335
281–0158–00
CAP,VAR,CER DI:7–45PF,100WVDC
59660
518–006 G 7–45
A1A1C336
283–0635–01
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:51PF,1%,500V
09023
CDA15ED510F03
A1A1C337
290–1313–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,8 X 11MM;105 DEG,RDL
55680
UET1H100MPH1TA
A1A1C338
290–1313–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,8 X 11MM;105 DEG,RDL
55680
UET1H100MPH1TA
A1A1C339
290–1313–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,8 X 11MM;105 DEG,RDL
55680
UET1H100MPH1TA
A1A1C340
290–1313–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,8 X 11MM;105 DEG,RDL
55680
UET1H100MPH1TA
A1A1C342
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1C343
290–0973–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25VDC
55680
UVX1E101MEA1TA
A1A1C344
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A1A1C345
281–0775–02
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,20%,50V,X7R,0.265
04222
SA205C104MAA
A1A1CR9
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR10
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR11
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR12
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR13
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR14
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR15
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR16
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR17
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR18
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR19
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR20
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR21
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR22
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR23
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR24
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR25
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR26
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR27
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR28
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR29
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR30
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR31
152–0322–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;15V,410MVF AT 1MA,1.2PF
50434
5082–2672–T25
A1A1CR32
152–0322–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;15V,410MVF AT 1MA,1.2PF
50434
5082–2672–T25
A1A1CR33
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR34
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
8–16
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1CR35
152–0141–02
A1A1CR36
A1A1CR39
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR40
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR41
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR42
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR43
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR44
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR45
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1CR46
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A1A1DS1
150–0169–00
LAMP,INCAND:120V,0.025A WIRE LEAD
TK1124
IFL–LX120PS–185
A1A1DS2
150–0169–00
LAMP,INCAND:120V,0.025A WIRE LEAD
TK1124
IFL–LX120PS–185
A1A1DS3
150–0169–00
LAMP,INCAND:120V,0.025A WIRE LEAD
TK1124
IFL–LX120PS–185
A1A1DS4
150–0169–00
LAMP,INCAND:120V,0.025A WIRE LEAD
TK1124
IFL–LX120PS–185
A1A1F2
159–0195–00
FUSE,RADIAL LD:7A,125V,0.125 SEC
61857
SP7–7A
A1A1F3
159–0194–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:5A,125V,0.125 SEC
61857
SP5–5A LEAD TAP
A1A1F4
159–0194–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:5A,125V,0.125 SEC
61857
SP5–5A LEAD TAP
A1A1FL1
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL2
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL3
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL4
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL5
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL6
131–0566–00
BUS,CNDCT:DUMMY RES,0.094 OD X 0.225L
24546
OMA0207
A1A1FL10
119–4641–00
FILTER:AM700,80 KHZ LPF
80009
119464100
A1A1FL11
119–4641–00
FILTER:AM700,80 KHZ LPF
80009
119464100
A1A1J1
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A1A1J2
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A1A1J25
131–5675–00
CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 5,0.1 CTR
27264
26–65–5050
A1A1J26
131–5672–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1 CTR
TK1462 NFP–040A–0114–A
A1A1J27
131–5672–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1 CTR
TK1462 NFP–040A–0114–A
A1A1J28
131–4530–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 3,0.1 CTR
00779
104344–1
A1A1J29
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A1A1J30
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A1A1K1
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K2
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K4
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K5
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K6
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–17
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1K7
148–0235–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K8
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K10
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K11
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL,
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K12
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K13
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K20
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K21
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K22
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K23
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K24
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K25
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K26
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K27
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K28
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K29
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K30
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1K31
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD CLAD SIL
61529
TF2E–5V
A1A1L1
108–0554–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,POWER;5UH,20%,I<10 A
0JR03
108–0554–00
A1A1L2
108–0422–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,POWER;80UH,20%,IDC<2 A
0JR03
108–O422–00
A1A1L3
108–0422–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,POWER;80UH,20%,IDC<2 A
0JR03
108–O422–00
A1A1Q1
151–0254–03
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;30V,500MA,125MHZ
0JR04
MPSA14, TPE2
98978
7–363–BA
0JR04
MPSA14, TPE2
98978
7–363–BA
0JR04
MPSA14, TPE2
98978
7–363–BA
09969
CCF502G47R50F
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–3036–00
HEAT SINK,SEMIC:TRANSISTOR,TO–220;ALUMINUM
151–0254–03
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;30V,500MA,125MHZ
214–3036–00
HEAT SINK,SEMIC:TRANSISTOR,TO–220;ALUMINUM
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A1A1Q2
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A1A1Q3
151–0254–03
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;30V,500MA,125MHZ
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–3036–00
HEAT SINK,SEMIC:TRANSISTOR,TO–220;ALUMINUM
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A1A1R24
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
A1A1R25
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A1A1R29
321–0042–00
RES,FXD,FILM:26.7 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRB14 FXE 26.7
A1A1R30
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
A1A1R32
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
8–18
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1R33
321–0603–07
A1A1R34
A1A1R35
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE15K00B
321–0603–07
RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE15K00B
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R39
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R40
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R61
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R62
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R63
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R64
321–1684–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.162K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE2K162B
A1A1R65
321–0106–00
RES,FXD,FILM:124 OHM 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–1
A1A1R66
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
A1A1R67
321–1684–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.162K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE2K162B
A1A1R68
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R70
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R71
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R75
321–0106–00
RES,FXD,FILM:124 OHM 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–1
A1A1R94
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R95
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R96
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R97
321–1684–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.162K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE2K162B
A1A1R98
321–0106–00
RES,FXD,FILM:124 OHM 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–1
A1A1R99
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R100
321–1684–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.162K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE2K162B
A1A1R101
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R102
321–0106–00
RES,FXD,FILM:124 OHM 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–1
A1A1R103
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R104
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A1A1R120
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A1A1R122
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R123
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R124
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A1A1R127
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R128
321–0603–07
RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE15K00B
A1A1R129
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
A1A1R130
321–0603–07
RES,FXD,FILM:15K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE15K00B
A1A1R131
321–0042–00
RES,FXD,FILM:26.7 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRB14 FXE 26.7
A1A1R136
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R137
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
5033RE1K000B
8–19
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1R138
321–0222–07
A1A1R139
A1A1R140
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
321–0263–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.36K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
19701
5043ED5K360F
A1A1R141
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R142
321–1701–04
RES,FXD,FILM:5.22K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
19701
5033RC5K220B
A1A1R143
321–0318–07
RES,FXD,FILM:20.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE20K00BCM
A1A1R144
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R145
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R146
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R147
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R148
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R149
321–0263–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.36K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
19701
5043ED5K360F
A1A1R150
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R151
321–1701–04
RES,FXD,FILM:5.22K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
19701
5033RC5K220B
A1A1R152
321–0318–07
RES,FXD,FILM:20.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE20K00BCM
A1A1R153
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R154
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9 MI
19701
5033RE2K000B
A1A1R215
131–4566–00
BUS,CNDCT:0 OHM,300 SPACING,SM BODYMI,DUMMY RES
91637
FRJ–50
A1A1R216
322–3164–00
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G499ROF
A1A1R217
322–3177–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2G681R0F
A1A1R218
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R219
322–3241–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.16K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF502G3161FT
A1A1R220
322–3308–00
RES,FXD,FILM:15.8K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G15801F
A1A1R221
131–4566–00
BUS,CNDCT:0 OHM,300 SPACING,SM BODYMI,DUMMY RES
91637
FRJ–50
A1A1R222
322–3164–00
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G499ROF
A1A1R223
322–3177–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2G681R0F
A1A1R224
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R225
322–3241–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.16K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF502G3161FT
A1A1R226
322–3308–00
RES,FXD,FILM:15.8K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G15801F
A1A1R227
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A1A1R228
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A1A1R229
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R230
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R231
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R232
322–3222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM,0.1%,0.2W TC=T9,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501C20000B
A1A1R239
322–3058–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–1G39R20F
A1A1R240
322–3058–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–1G39R20F
A1A1R241
322–3058–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–1G39R20F
8–20
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1R242
322–3058–00
A1A1R243
A1A1R244
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–1G39R20F
322–3322–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22101F
322–3402–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G15002F
A1A1R245
311–2237–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;25K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ
TK2073 GF06UT2 253 M L
A1A1R246
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A1A1R247
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
A1A1R248
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
A1A1R249
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A1A1R250
322–3402–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G15002F
A1A1R251
322–3322–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22101F
A1A1R252
311–2237–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;25K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ
TK2073 GF06UT2 253 M L
A1A1R253
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A1A1R254
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A1A1R255
322–3326–00
RES,FXD,FILM:24.3K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC–T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2F24301F
A1A1R256
322–3314–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;18.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18201F
A1A1R257
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A1A1R258
322–3261–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.11K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50G5111FT
A1A1R259
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A1A1R274
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R275
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R276
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R277
308–0299–00
RES,FXD,WW:300 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–300ROF
A1A1R278
308–0299–00
RES,FXD,WW:300 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–300ROF
A1A1R283
308–0299–00
RES,FXD,WW:300 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–300ROF
A1A1R284
308–0299–00
RES,FXD,WW:300 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–300ROF
A1A1R289
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R290
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A1A1R291
322–3319–02
RES,FXD,FILM:20.5K OHM,0.5%,0.2W,TC=T2
91637
CCF501D20501D
A1A1R292
321–0026–00
RES,FXD,FILM:18.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–0
A1A1R293
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A1A1R294
322–3261–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.11K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50G5111FT
A1A1R295
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A1A1R296
321–0026–00
RES,FXD,FILM:18.2 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
TK1727 MR25 2322–151–0
A1A1R297
322–3319–02
RES,FXD,FILM:20.5K OHM,0.5%,0.2W,TC=T2
91637
CCF501D20501D
A1A1R298
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A1A1R299
322–3261–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.11K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50G5111FT
A1A1R300
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A1A1R301
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–21
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A1A1R302
308–0736–00
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,WW:200 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–B200R0F T/
A1A1R303
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R304
322–3423–00
RES,FXD,FILM:249K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G24902F
A1A1R305
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R306
308–0736–00
RES,FXD,WW:200 OHM,1%,3W
91637
RS2B–B200R0F T/
A1A1R307
322–3423–00
RES,FXD,FILM:249K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G24902F
A1A1R308
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A1A1R309
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A1A1R310
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R311
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R312
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R313
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R314
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R315
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R316
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R317
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R318
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R319
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A1A1R320
322–3251–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.02K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G40200F
A1A1R321
322–3251–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.02K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G40200F
A1A1R322
322–3139–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G274ROF
A1A1R323
322–3139–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G274ROF
A1A1R326
322–3231–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2.49K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–1G24900F
A1A1R327
322–3231–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2.49K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–1G24900F
A1A1R329
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R330
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R331
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R332
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A1A1R333
307–0648–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,100 OHM,2%,0.125 W
11236
761–3–R100
A1A1R334
322–3155–00
RES,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G402ROF
A1A1R335
322–3155–00
RES,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G402ROF
A1A1R336
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R337
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R338
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A1A1R339
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R339
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A1A1R340
311–2234–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;5K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ
TK2073 GF06UT2 502 M L
A1A1R340
322–3206–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.37K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
8–22
CCF501G13700F
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1R341
322–3193–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A1A1R342
322–3206–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.37K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G13700F
A1A1TP2
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP3
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP4
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP5
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP6
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP7
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP8
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP9
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP10
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP11
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP12
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP18
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP19
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP20
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP21
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP22
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP23
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP25
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP26
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP27
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP28
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP29
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP30
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP31
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP32
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP33
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP34
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP35
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP36
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP37
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP38
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP39
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP40
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP41
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP42
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP43
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–23
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1TP45
214–4085–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP46
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP47
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP48
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP49
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP50
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP51
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP52
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP53
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP54
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP55
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1TP56
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A1A1U1
156–4411–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,140UV VOS,8.0MHZ
64155
LT1124CN8
A1A1U2
156–1338–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5534AP
A1A1U3
156–4411–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,140UV VOS,8.0MHZ
64155
LT1124CN8
A1A1U4
156–1338–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5534AP
A1A1U5
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U8
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U17
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U20
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U29
156–2400–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A;12 BIT,CURRENT OUT,MULTIPLYING
24355
AD7541ABQ
A1A1U30
156–2400–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A;12 BIT,CURRENT OUT,MULTIPLYING
24355
AD7541ABQ
A1A1U31
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U32
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U33
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U34
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U35
156–3166–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL DPST,55 OHM,+/–15V
1ES66
DG405DJ/C30251
A1A1U36
156–4038–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL SPDT,45 OHM
1ES66
DG403DJ/C30244
A1A1U37
156–2400–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A;12 BIT,CURRENT OUT,MULTIPLYING
24355
AD7541ABQ
A1A1U38
156–2400–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A;12 BIT,CURRENT OUT,MULTIPLYING
24355
AD7541ABQ
A1A1U39
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U40
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U41
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U42
156–4412–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD,SPST NO,+/–15V
1ES66
DG412DJ
A1A1U43
156–4038–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL SPDT,45 OHM
1ES66
DG403DJ/C30244
A1A1U44
156–2093–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,GATE;QUAD 2–INPUT
01295
SN74ALS32N
A1A1U45
156–1688–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL,LOW OFFSET,LOW DRIFT
01295
TL287CP
A1A1U57
156–1688–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL,LOW OFFSET,LOW DRIFT
01295
TL287CP
8–24
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1U58
156–4413–00
A1A1U59
A1A1U60
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D;18–BIT,50 KHZ,DUAL,DELTA SIGMA
0A384
CS5389KP
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
156–1272–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT DRIVE
01295
NE5532P
A1A1U61
156–0277–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;POSITIVE,5.0V,1.0A,4%
01295
UA7805CKC
A1A1U62
156–0846–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;NEGATIVE,–5.0V,1.0A,4.0%
27014
LM320T–5.0
A1A1U67
156–4414–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D;18–BIT,DUAL,INT REF
13919
PCM1750P
A1A1U75
156–4415–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,FILTER;1/4 RO 1/2 DECIMATING DIGITAL FILTER
13919
DF1750P
A1A1U76
156–3608–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,V REF;POS,5.0V,0.05%,20PPM,SERIES
64155
LT1021CCN8–5
A1A1U77
156–0402–00
IC,MISC:BIPOLAR,TIMER
27014
LM555CN
A1A1U78
156–4038–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL SPDT,45 OHM
1ES66
DG403DJ/C30244
A1A1U79
156–1756–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,FLIP FLOP;DUAL D–TYPE W/CLEAR
01295
SN74ALS74AN
A1A1U80
156–4416–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,WAVEFORM GENERATOR
0AGS1
ML2036CP
A1A1U81
156–4417–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A;8–BIT,OCTAL
24355
DAC8840FP
A1A1U82
156–1245–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,TRANSISTOR ARRAY;7,NPN,DARLINGTON
0CVK3
ULN2003A
A1A1U98
156–0277–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;POSITIVE,5.0V,1.0A,4%
01295
UA7805CKC
A1A1U101
156–1150–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;NEGATIVE,–5.0V,100MA,4%
27014
LM79L05ACZ/T4
A1A1U102
156–1245–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,TRANSISTOR ARRAY;7,NPN,DARLINGTON
0CVK3
ULN2003A
A1A1U103
156–1245–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,TRANSISTOR ARRAY;7,NPN,
DARLINGTON,COMMON EMITTER,OC W/CLAMP DIODES
0CVK3
ULN2003A
A1A1U104
156–2110–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,SHIFT RGTR;8–BIT
01295
SN74ALS164AN
A1A1U105
156–2110–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,SHIFT RGTR;8–BIT
01295
SN74ALS164AN
A1A1U106
156–2094–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,GATE;HEX INV
01295
SN74ALS04BN
A1A1U109
156–4418–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,SHIFT RGTR;8–BIT SI/PISO WITH CLEAR
01295
SN74ALS166N
A1A1U110
156–3314–00
IC,MISC:TTL,INTERFACE;DIFFERENTIALLINE DRVR/RCVR PAIR
27014
DS8921A
A1A1U111
156–3435–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,SHMITT TRIG;HEX INV
04713
MC74HCT14AN
A1A1U112
156–4419–00
IC,OPTO:ISOLATOR;INFRARED LED,AC INPUT,60MA,XSTR OUT
04713
H11AA1
A1A1U113
156–1756–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,FLIP FLOP;DUAL D–TYPE W/CLEAR
01295
SN74ALS74AN
A1A1U114
156–4419–00
IC,OPTO:ISOLATOR;INFRARED LED,AC INPUT,60MA,XSTR OUT
04713
H11AA1
A1A1U115
156–1756–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,FLIP FLOP;DUAL D–TYPE W/CLEAR
01295
SN74ALS74AN
A1A1U117
160–9912–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OPT,5032,32 MACROCELL,20NS
80009
160–9912–00
A1A1U118
160–9914–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OPT,ATV2500,24 MACROCELL,14 INP
80009
160–9914–00
A1A1U119
160–9913–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,22V10,25NS,33.3MHZ,130MA
80009
160–9913–00
00779
2–641932–3
80009
156669802
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–0925–00
SOCKET,DIP:PCB;24 POS,2 X 12,0.1 X 0.3 CTR
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A1A1U120
156–6698–02
IC,ASIC:CMOS,CUSTOM;TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER,ADG312C
A1A1U121
156–2707–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,BUFFER;QUAD BUFFER, /OE, 3–STATE
01295
SN74HC125N
A1A1U122
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A1A1U123
156–4521–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,PWR SUPPLY SUPERVISOR;MPU RESET GEN
0B0A9
DS1233–10
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–25
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A1VR1
152–0514–00
A1A1VR2
A1A1VR3
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W
04713
MZ4104D
152–0514–00
DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W
04713
MZ4104D
152–0514–00
DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W
04713
MZ4104D
A1A1VR4
152–0514–00
DIODE,ZENER:10V,1%,0.4W
04713
MZ4104D
A1A1VR5
152–0395–00
DIODE,ZENER:4.3V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N749ARL
A1A1VR6
152–0395–00
DIODE,ZENER:4.3V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N749ARL
A1A1VR7
152–0744–00
DIODE,ZENER:3.6V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N747ARL
A1A1VR8
152–0744–00
DIODE,ZENER:3.6V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N747ARL
A1A1VR9
152–0278–00
DIODE,ZENER:3V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N4372ARL
A1A1XU116
136–1230–00
SOCKET,SIMM:PCB,SIMM II,FEMALE,STR,1 X80,0.05 CTR
80009
136123000
A1A1Y1
119–4698–00
OSCILLATOR:VCXO;12.288MHZ,5PPM,0.5 TO4.5VDC
21022
H10BV–12.288MHZ
A1A2
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671298900
A1A2J1
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A2R28
321–0986–07
RES,FXD,FILM:25K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A2R41
321–1296–07
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A2R42
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A2R46
321–0756–04
RES,FXD,FILM:50K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2MI
19701
5033RE50K00B
A1A2R49
321–1696–07
RES,FXD,FILM:6K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE6K00B
A1A2R50
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A2R51
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE3K010B
A1A2R52
321–0103–00
RES,FXD,FILM:115 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0
19701
5043ED115R0F
A1A2R53
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A2R54
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A2R281
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A2R282
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A3
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671298900
A1A3J1
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A3R28
321–0986–07
RES,FXD,FILM:25K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A3R41
321–1296–07
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A3R42
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A3R46
321–0756–04
RES,FXD,FILM:50K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2MI
19701
5033RE50K00B
A1A3R49
321–1696–07
RES,FXD,FILM:6K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE6K00B
A1A3R50
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A3R51
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE3K010B
A1A3R52
321–0103–00
RES,FXD,FILM:115 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0
19701
5043ED115R0F
A1A3R53
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
8–26
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A1A3R54
321–0077–00
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A3R281
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A3R282
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A4
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671298900
A1A4J1
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A4R28
321–0986–07
RES,FXD,FILM:25K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A4R41
321–1296–07
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A4R42
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A4R46
321–0756–04
RES,FXD,FILM:50K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2MI
19701
5033RE50K00B
A1A4R49
321–1696–07
RES,FXD,FILM:6K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE6K00B
A1A4R50
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A4R51
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE3K010B
A1A4R52
321–0103–00
RES,FXD,FILM:115 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0
19701
5043ED115R0F
A1A4R53
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A4R54
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A4R281
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A4R282
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A5
671–2989–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:INPUT ATTN
80009
671298900
A1A5J1
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A5R28
321–0986–07
RES,FXD,FILM:25K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A5R41
321–1296–07
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A5R42
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A5R46
321–0756–04
RES,FXD,FILM:50K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2MI
19701
5033RE50K00B
A1A5R49
321–1696–07
RES,FXD,FILM:6K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE6K00B
A1A5R50
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
TK1727 MPR24–2322–141–
A1A5R51
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE3K010B
A1A5R52
321–0103–00
RES,FXD,FILM:115 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0
19701
5043ED115R0F
A1A5R53
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A5R54
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A5R281
321–0210–07
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=25 PPM
91637
CMF55116C15000B
A1A5R282
321–0077–00
RES,FXD,FILM:61.9 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=T0MI
57668
CRRB14 FXE 61.9
A1A6
––––––––––
CIRCUIT BD SUBASSY:CONTROL SHIFT REGISTER
A1A6C290
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1E104K–
A1A6C291
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1E104K–
A1A6C292
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1E104K–
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–27
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A1A6C293
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1E104K–
A1A6U83
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U84
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U85
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U86
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U87
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U88
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U89
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U90
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A6U91
156–5480–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SHIFT RGTR
0JR04
TC74HC595AFN(EL
A1A7
671–2801–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:OVER/UNDER RANGE
80009
671280100
A1A7C5
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1H103K–
A1A7C6
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1H103K–
Mfr. part number
A1A7C7
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1H103K–
A1A7C8
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,1206
TK2058 C3216X7R1H103K–
A1A7C9
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
T
A1A7C10
283–5197–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;330PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206
04222
12061A331JAT1A
A1A7C11
283–5197–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;330PF,5%,100V,NPO,1206
04222
12061A331JAT1A
A1A7J1
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A7J2
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1CTR
22526
65521–136
A1A7Q1
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A1A7Q2
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A1A7Q3
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A1A7Q4
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A1A7R1
321–5024–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK3321FT
A1A7R2
321–5013–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100
50139
BCK3920FT
A1A7R3
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100
50139
BCK3320FT
A1A7R4
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100
50139
BCK3320FT
A1A7R5
321–5013–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100
50139
BCK3920FT
A1A7R6
321–5024–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK3321FT
A1A7R15
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R16
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R17
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R18
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R19
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R20
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R21
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
8–28
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A1A7R22
321–5032–00
A1A7R23
A1A7R24
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R25
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R26
321–5032–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;15.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1502FT
A1A7R27
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM;1.0K OHM,1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM
50139
BCK1001FT
A1A7U1
156–5262–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,COMPARATOR;QUAD,SINGLE SUPPLY
01295
LM339DR
A1A7U2
156–5262–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,COMPARATOR;QUAD,SINGLE SUPPLY
01295
LM339DR
A1A7U3
156–5145–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,FLIP FLOP;DUAL D–TYPE
01295
SN74HCT74D
A1A7U4
156–5145–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,FLIP FLOP;DUAL D–TYPE
01295
SN74HCT74D
A1A7U5
156–5309–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,MUX;QUAD 2–TO–1 DATA SELECTOR
01295
SN74HCT157D
A1A7VR1
152–5023–00
DIODE,ZENER:5.1V,5%,225MW
04713
MMBZ5231BLT1
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–29
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A2
671–2917–00
A2
671–2917–01
Serial no.
effective
11/18/94
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR
80009
671–2917–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:XLR
80009
671–2917–01
337310400
*ATTACHED PARTS*
337–3104–00
SHIELD,ELEC:CKT BD
(QUANTITY 3)
80009
343–0549–00
STRAP,TIEDOWN,E:0.098 W X 4.0 L,ZYTEL
(QUANTITY 5)
TK1499 HW–047
A2C5
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A2C6
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A2C7
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A2C8
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A2C9
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
A2C10
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A2C11
283–0060–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,200V
59660
855–535U2J101J
A2C12
283–0060–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,200V
59660
855–535U2J101J
A2C13
283–0211–02
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,10%,200WVDC,X7R,T&A
04222
SR302C104KAAAP1
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
SA102A330JAA
A2C14
283–0060–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,200V
59660
855–535U2J101J
A2C15
283–0060–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,200V
59660
855–535U2J101J
A2C16
283–0211–02
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.1UF,10%,200WVDC,X7R,T&A
04222
SR302C104KAAAP1
A2C17
281–0788–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170
04222
SA102C471KAA
A2C18
281–0788–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170
04222
SA102C471KAA
A2C19
281–0814–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;100 PF,10%,100V,0.100 X
TK1743 CGB101KEN
A2C20
281–0814–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;100 PF,10%,100V,0.100 X
TK1743 CGB101KEN
A2C21
281–0814–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;100 PF,10%,100V,0.100 X
TK1743 CGB101KEN
A2C22
281–0814–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;100 PF,10%,100V,0.100 X
TK1743 CGB101KEN
A2J1
131–3987–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB,AUDIO;MALE,RTANG,3 POS,1.22H X 1.024 W
0FMA6
NC3MD–H
A2J2
131–5230–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB/PNL,AUDIO;FEMALE,RTANG,3 POS
0FMA6
NC3FDH
A2J3
131–3987–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB,AUDIO,;MALE,RTANG,3 POS,1.22H X 1.024 W
0FMA6
NC3MD–H
A2J4
131–3987–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB,AUDIO,;MALE,RTANG,3 POS,1.22H X 1.024 W
0FMA6
NC3MD–H
A2J5
131–5230–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB/PNL,AUDIO;FEMALE,RTANG,3 POS
0FMA6
NC3FDH
A2J6
131–5230–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB/PNL,AUDIO;FEMALE,RTANG,3 POS
0FMA6
NC3FDH
A2J7
131–3358–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,RTANG,2 X 5,0.1 CTR
53387
2510–5002UB
A2J8
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A2J9
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A2J10
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A2J11
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,;MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR
53387
2404–6112TB
A2R1
322–3050–00
RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G32R40F
A2R2
322–3050–00
RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G32R40F
8–30
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A2R3
322–3050–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G32R40F
A2R4
322–3050–00
RES,FXD,FILM:32.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G32R40F
A2T1
120–1933–00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:WIDEBAND;0.02–100MHZ,INSERT
15542
T 1.5–6 X65
A2T2
120–1959–00
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
A2T2
120–1860–00
A2T4
120–1959–00
A2T4
120–1860–00
A2T5
120–1860–00
A2T6
120–1959–00
A2T6
120–1860–00
A2T7
120–1860–00
A2T8
120–1959–00
A2T8
120–1860–00
A2T9
120–1959–00
A2T10
120–1959–00
A2T10
120–1860–00
A2T11
120–1959–00
A2T11
120–1860–00
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
11/18/94
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
0JR03
Z–93145B
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
0JR03
Z–93145B
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
0JR03
Z–93145B
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
0JR03
Z–93145B
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
0JR03
Z–93145B
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
80009
Z–93145B
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
80009
Z–93145B
XFMR,TOROID:AM700 XLR
80009
120-1959-00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:TOROID;1:1,22UH/WINDING
80009
Z–93145B
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–31
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3
671–2915–00
Serial no.
effective
A3
671–2915–01
B010249
A3
671–2915–02
B010422
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
B010248
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–00
B010432
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DIGITAL AUDIO
80009
671–2915–02
80009
337–4002–00
*ATTACHED PARTS*
337–4002–00
SHIELD,ELEC:AM700 (DIGITAL AUDIO),AM700
(QUANTITY 4)
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A3C1
281–0772–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;4700PF,10%,100V
04222
SA101C472KAA
A3C5
281–0765–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V
04222
SA102A101JAA
A3C6
281–0765–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V
04222
SA102A101JAA
A3C7
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C8
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C9
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C10
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C11
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C21
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C23
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C24
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C25
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C26
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C27
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C28
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A3C29
283–0142–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.0027UF,5%,200V
TK2058 CK45YE2D272J–A
A3C31
281–0812–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;1000PF,10%,100V
04222
A3C32
283–0142–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.0027UF,5%,200V
TK2058 CK45YE2D272J–A
A3C33
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
A3C33
283–0142–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.0027UF,5%,200V
TK2058 CK45YE2D272J–A
A3C34
281–0765–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V
04222
SA102A101JAA
A3C35
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C37
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C40
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C42
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C44
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C47
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C48
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C49
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C50
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C51
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C53
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
8–32
SA101C102KAA
SA105E104MAA
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3C56
281–0775–01
A3C57
A3C61
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C62
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C63
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C64
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C65
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C66
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C67
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C68
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C69
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C70
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C71
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C75
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C76
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C78
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C81
285–1340–00
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.01UF,10%,63V,POLYEST
TK1913 MKS2 .01/63/10
A3C84
285–1340–00
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.01UF,10%,63V,POLYEST
TK1913 MKS2 .01/63/10
A3C85
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
A3C86
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C87
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C89
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C90
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C91
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C92
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C93
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C94
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C95
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C96
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C97
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C98
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C99
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C100
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C101
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C102
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C103
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C104
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C105
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
SA105E104MAA
8–33
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3C106
281–0775–01
A3C107
A3C108
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C109
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C110
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C111
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C112
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C113
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C114
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C115
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C116
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C117
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C118
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C119
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C120
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C121
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C122
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C123
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C124
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C125
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C126
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C127
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C129
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C130
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C131
281–0916–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.047UF,+/–10%,50V,AXIAL,0.120 INCH DIA
04222
SA115C473KAA
A3C132
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C133
281–0916–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:0.047UF,+/–10%,50V,AXIAL,0.120 INCH DIA
04222
SA115C473KAA
A3C134
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C135
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C136
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C137
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C138
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C139
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C140
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C141
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C142
281–0773–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V
TK1743 CGB103KEX
A3C143
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C144
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
8–34
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3C147
281–0775–01
A3C148
A3C149
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C150
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A3C151
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C152
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C153
281–0773–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;0.01UF,10%,100V
TK1743 CGB103KEX
A3C154
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C155
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C157
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A3C158
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C160
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A3C161
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C162
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C163
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C164
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C165
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C166
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C167
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C168
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C170
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C171
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C172
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C173
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C174
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C175
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C177
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C179
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C180
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C181
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C182
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C183
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C184
285–1345–00
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:FILM & FOIL;2200PF,5%,100V,POLYESTER
TK1913 2200 PF 5 PERCE
A3C185
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
A3C186
283–0594–02
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A
09023
CDA15FA102F03
A3C187
283–0594–02
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A
09023
CDA15FA102F03
A3C188
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C189
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
B010248
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
SA105E104MAA
8–35
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3C190
283–0594–02
A3C191
A3C192
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A
09023
CDA15FA102F03
283–0594–02
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A
09023
CDA15FA102F03
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C193
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C194
283–0594–02
CAP,FXD,MICA DI:1000PF,1%,100V,T&A
09023
CDA15FA102F03
A3C195
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C196
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C197
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C199
281–0811–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;10PF,10%,200V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A100KAA
A3C202
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50V,TAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A3C203
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
A3C204
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C205
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C206
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C207
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C208
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C209
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C210
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C211
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C212
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C213
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C214
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C215
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C216
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C217
281–0816–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;82 PF,5%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
TK1743 CGB820JEN
A3C218
281–0864–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;430PF,5%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA101A431JAA
A3C219
281–0851–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;180PF,5%,100VDC
04222
SA101A181JAA
A3C220
281–0788–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;470PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C471KAA
A3C221
281–0765–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:100PF,5%,100V
04222
SA102A101JAA
A3C222
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C223
290–0524–01
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:4.7UF,20%,10V
31433
T350A475M010AS
A3C224
290–0512–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:22UF,20%,15V
2N936
199D226X0015DA1
A3C226
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C227
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C230
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C232
290–1296–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,20%,25V,8 X 9MM;105 DEG,RDL,T&A
55680
URT1E101MNH1TA
A3C234
285–1378–01
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,
POLYESTER,0.394 X 0.098
TK1913 MKS33 0.1/63/20
A3C235
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170
04222
8–36
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
SA102C271KAA
SA102C271KAA
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3C236
281–0791–00
A3C237
A3C238
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
285–1378–01
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,POLYESTER
TK1913 MKS33 0.1/63/20
285–1378–01
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,POLYESTER
TK1913 MKS33 0.1/63/20
A3C239
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C240
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C241
285–1378–01
CAP,FXD,PLSTC:MTLZD FILM;0.1UF,20%,63V,POLYESTER
TK1913 MKS33 0.1/63/20
A3C242
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C243
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C244
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C245
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C246
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A3C247
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A3C248
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A3C250
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C251
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C252
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C253
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C254
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C255
290–1311–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=1.4 OHM(100KHZ,20C)
55680
UPL1H100MDH1TD
A3C256
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A3C257
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C258
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C259
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C260
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C261
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A3C262
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C263
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A3C264
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A3C265
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A3C266
281–0819–00
A3C267
281–2515–00
A3C267
281–0812–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA101C102KAA
A3C268
283–0193–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:510PF,2%,100V
04222
SR201A511GAA
A3C269
283–0193–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:510PF,2%,100V
04222
SR201A511GAA
A3C270
281–0791–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;270PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102C271KAA
A3C271
281–0816–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;82 PF,5%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
TK1743 CGB820JEN
A3C272
281–0785–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;68PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A680KAA
A3C273
281–0812–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,10%,100V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA101C102KAA
B010248
B010249
B010248
B010248
B010249
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–37
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
A3C274
290–0524–01
B010249
A3CR3
A3CR7
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,TANT:4.7UF,20%,10V, RADIAL
2N936
199D475X0010AB1
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
152–0964–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;ARRAY,6 COM CATH/COMANODE PAIR
TK2262 DM 308BT100SP–4
A3CR8
152–0964–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;ARRAY,6 COM CATH/COMANODE PAIR
TK2262 DM 308BT100SP–4
A3CR9
152–0673–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC;18V,500PF,12%,C1/C15=15,Q=150
04713
MVAM115
A3CR16
152–0673–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC;18V,500PF,12%,C1/C15=15,Q=150
04713
MVAM115
A3CR18
152–0673–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC;18V,500PF,12%,C1/C15=15,Q=150
04713
MVAM115
A3CR19
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR21
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR22
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A3CR23
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A3CR24
152–0673–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC;18V,500PF,12%,C1/C15=15,Q=150
04713
MVAM115
A3CR25
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A3CR27
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR30
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR31
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A3CR32
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR33
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR34
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR35
152–0951–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY;60V,2.25PF
66958
1N6263
A3CR36
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST;40V,150MA,4NS,2PF
27014
FDH9427
A3DS1
150–1160–00
DIODE,OPTO:LED;GRN,569NM,4,2MCD AT 10MA
50434
QLMP–1587
A3DS2
150–1022–00
LAMP,LED RDOUT:7 SEG NUMERIC,LH DEC ORANGE
0MS63
MAN72A
A3F1
307–1593–00
RES,THERMAL:CIRCUIT PROTECTOR,0.2 AMP
06090
RXE–020
A3F2
307–1593–00
RES,THERMAL:CIRCUIT PROTECTOR,0.2 AMP
06090
RXE–020
A3F3
159–0208–02
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:2A,125V AC/DC,5 SEC,AXIAL LEAD,T & R
75915
R251 002–T1
A3J1
131–1857–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230
58050
082–3644–SS10
A3J2
131–4751–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,1 X 16,0.1 CTR,0.235
53387
2416–6132–TB
A3J4
131–3520–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,2 X 5,0.1 CTR,0.365H X 0.112 TAIL
53387
2510–6002UB
A3J27
131–4048–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,2 X 17,0.05 X 0.1CTR
TK1462 NFP–34A–0112A
A3J29
131–3520–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,STR,2 X 5,0.1 CTR,0.365H X 0.112 TAIL
53387
2510–6002UB
26–65–5080
A3J30
131–5674–00
CONN,HDR PWR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,1 X 8,0.156 CTR
27264
A3J31
131–5630–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1CTR
TK1462 NFP–040A–112–AF
A3J32
131–5630–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1CTR
TK1462 NFP–040A–112–AF
A3J33
131–3358–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,2 X 5,0.1 CTR
53387
2510–5002UB
A3L1
114–0494–00
INDUCTOR,VAR:SIGNAL,SHIELDED;2.2–3.2UH,RDC<0.466 OHM
02113
7M3–272
A3L2
108–1243–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5 OHM
24226
ML10–272G
A3L5
114–0494–00
INDUCTOR,VAR:SIGNAL,SHIELDED;2.2–3.2UH,RDC<0.466 OHM
02113
7M3–272
8–38
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3L6
108–1243–00
A3L7
114–0494–00
A3L8
108–1243–00
A3L10
108–1263–00
A3L11
108–1263–00
A3L13
108–1263–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
B010248
B010248
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5 OHM
24226
ML10–272G
INDUCTOR,VAR:SIGNAL,SHIELDED;2.2–3.2UH,RDC<0.466 OHM
02113
7M3–272
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5 OHM
24226
ML10–272G
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
B010248
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;2.2MH,5%,IDC<75 MA,RDC<45.6 OHM
TK1177
ORDER BY DESC
B010248
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;1.8UH,10%,ON FORM 276–0153–00
0JR03
108–0345–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,POWER,3.9UH,10%,IDC<800
MA,RDC<0.264 OHM,Q>35@7.9MHZ,SRF>61MHZ,AXIAL
0JR03
108–0245–01
7M3–272
A3L14
108–0654–00
A3L15
108–0345–00
A3L15
108–0245–01
A3L16
114–0494–00
INDUCTOR,VAR:SIGNAL,SHIELDED;2.2–3.2UH,RDC<0.466 OHM
02113
A3L18
108–1281–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;2.2UH,10%,IDC<630 MA
TK2058 SPT03O5–2R2K
A3L19
108–0654–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;2.2MH,5%,IDC<75 MA,RDC<45.6 OHM
TK1177
A3L20
108–1263–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043
OHM,Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
A3L21
108–0436–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,SIGNAL;240UH,Q>54@25MHZ
0JR03
108–0436–00
A3L22
108–0182–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,SIGNAL;293NH,10%,Q>59@25MHZ
0JR03
108–0182–00
A3L23
108–0182–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,SIGNAL;293NH,10%,Q>59@25MHZ
0JR03
108–0182–00
B010249
ORDER BY DESC
A3L24
108–0436–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:CUSTOM,SIGNAL;240UH,Q>54@25MHZ
0JR03
108–0436–00
A3Q4
151–0188–05
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3906RLRP
A3Q7
151–0711–02
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;25V,50MA,650MHZ,AMPL
04713
MPSH10RLRP
A3Q8
151–0711–02
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;25V,50MA,650MHZ,AMPL
04713
MPSH10RLRP
A3Q10
151–0188–05
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3906RLRP
A3Q11
151–0188–05
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3906RLRP
A3Q12
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q13
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q14
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q15
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q16
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q17
151–0190–09
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN;40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3904RLRP
A3Q18
151–0188–05
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP;40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL
04713
2N3906RLRP
A3Q19
151–1025–03
TRANSISTOR,SIG:JFET,N–CH;6V,15MA,4.5MS,AMPL
17856
J304TA
A3Q20
151–1121–01
TRANSISTOR,PWR:MOS,N–CH;60V,0.5A,3.0 OHM
17856
VN0606L–TA
A3Q21
151–1121–01
TRANSISTOR,PWR:MOS,N–CH;60V,0.5A,3.0 OHM
17856
VN0606L–TA
A3Q22
151–0190–09
B010249
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,
AMPLIFIER,2N3904,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3904RLRA
A3Q23
151–0188–05
B010249
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPLIFIE
R,2N3906,TO–92 EBC,T&A
04713
2N3906RLRA
A3R1
307–0383–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:13,4.7K OHM,2%,0.25W
91637
MDP14–01–472G
A3R2
307–0383–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:13,4.7K OHM,2%,0.25W
91637
MDP14–01–472G
B010248
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–39
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R3
307–0383–00
A3R5
A3R6
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:13,4.7K OHM,2%,0.25W
91637
MDP14–01–472G
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R7
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R8
322–3162–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G475R0F
A3R17
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R19
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R21
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R22
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R107
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R108
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R109
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R110
322–3258–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;4.75K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
56845
CCF50–2–G4751FT
A3R111
307–0649–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,33 OHM,2%,0.125W
11236
761–3–R33 OHM
A3R112
307–0649–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,33 OHM,2%,0.125W
11236
761–3–R33 OHM
A3R113
322–3068–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;49.9 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G49R90F
A3R122
322–3051–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
A3R123
307–0649–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,33 OHM,2%,0.125W
11236
761–3–R33 OHM
A3R124
307–1267–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:9,1.2K OHM,2%
11236
750–101–R1.2K O
A3R128
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R129
321–0318–07
RES,FXD,FILM:20.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE20K00BCM
A3R131
321–0318–07
RES,FXD,FILM:20.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE20K00BCM
A3R132
322–3414–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;200K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20002F
A3R136
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A3R137
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE1K000B
A3R138
321–0289–07
RES,FXD,FILM:10.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE10K00B
A3R139
321–0289–07
RES,FXD,FILM:10.0K OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
19701
5033RE10K00B
A3R140
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R144
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
A3R145
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R146
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
A3R148
322–3186–00
RES,FXD,FILM:845 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G845ROF
A3R150
322–3128–00
RES,FXD,FILM:210 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G210R0F
A3R151
322–3089–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;82.5 OHM,1%.0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20 FXE 82E5
A3R152
322–3110–00
RES,FXD,FILM:137 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–137R0F
A3R153
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R156
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R158
322–3034–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
8–40
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R162
322–3051–00
A3R165
A3R166
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
321–0185–07
RES,FXD,FILM:825 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
57027
RC55–D–825R0–B–
321–0126–07
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
19701
5033RE200R0B
A3R170
322–3165–00
RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G511R0F
A3R173
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R174
322–3034–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
A3R175
322–3039–00
RES,FXD,FILM:24.9 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G24R90F
A3R176
322–3165–00
RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G511R0F
A3R177
322–3274–00
RES,FXD,FILM:6.98K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G–69800
A3R178
322–3274–00
RES,FXD,FILM:6.98K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G–69800
A3R179
322–3065–00
RES,FXD,FILM:46.4 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF50–2F46R40F
A3R181
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R182
322–3109–00
RES,FXD,FILM:133 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2F133R0F
A3R183
322–3181–00
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G750ROF
A3R185
322–3039–00
RES,FXD,FILM:24.9 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G24R90F
A3R186
322–3177–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2G681R0F
A3R187
322–3197–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G11000F
A3R188
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R193
322–3165–00
RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G511R0F
A3R197
322–3181–00
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G750ROF
A3R198
322–3039–00
RES,FXD,FILM:24.9 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G24R90F
A3R199
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R213
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R214
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R216
322–3112–00
RES,FXD,FILM:143 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G143R0F
A3R218
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R219
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R221
322–3306–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1502F
A3R222
322–3306–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1502F
A3R224
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R225
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R227
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R228
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R229
307–0649–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,33 OHM,2%,0.125 W
11236
761–3–R33 OHM
A3R231
307–0648–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,100 OHM,2%,0.125 W
11236
761–3–R100
A3R232
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R233
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R234
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–41
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R235
322–3097–00
A3R236
A3R238
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R240
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R241
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R244
322–3240–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.09K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2G30900F
A3R245
322–3249–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.83K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
56845
CCF50–2–G3831FT
A3R246
322–3184–00
RES,FXD,FILM:806 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G806FOR
A3R247
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R248
322–3184–00
RES,FXD,FILM:806 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G806FOR
A3R249
322–3089–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;82.5 OHM,1%.0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20 FXE 82E5
A3R250
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R251
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R252
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A3R253
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A3R256
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R257
322–3306–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1502F
A3R258
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R259
322–3418–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G22102F
A3R260
322–3481–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM.1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G10003F
A3R266
322–3147–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G332R0F
A3R267
322–3165–00
RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G511R0F
A3R268
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R269
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R273
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R274
322–0139–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R284
322–3155–00
RES,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G402ROF
A3R285
322–3210–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G15000F
A3R286
322–3481–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM.1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G10003F
A3R287
322–3181–00
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G750ROF
A3R290
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R292
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R293
322–3481–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM.1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G10003F
A3R294
308–0142–00
RES,FXD,WW:30 OHM,5%,3W
TK2096 KM300 30 OHM 1
A3R297
322–3201–00
B010248
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
A3R298
311–2271–00
B010248
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;5K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ
TK2073 GF06VT2 502 M L
B010248
CCF501G12100F
A3R299
307–0636–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:8,330 OHM,2%,0.125 W
11236
761–3–R330OHM
A3R304
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
8–42
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R307
322–3485–00
A3R315
A3R316
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R317
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R318
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R319
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R320
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R323
322–3281–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;8.25K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G82500F
A3R324
322–3228–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2.32K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–1G2320F
A3R325
322–3280–00
RES,FXD,FILM:8.06K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G80600F
A3R326
322–3235–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.74K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G27400F
A3R327
322–3177–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;681 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2G681R0F
A3R328
322–3147–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G332R0F
A3R329
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
A3R330
322–3138–00
RES,FXD,FILM:267 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G267R0F
A3R331
322–3257–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.64K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G46400F
A3R332
322–3252–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G41200F
A3R333
322–3169–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;562 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2F562R0F
A3R334
322–3254–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.32K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF502G4321FT
A3R335
322–3249–00
A3R338
322–3354–00
A3R338
322–3331–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,27.4K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20 FXE 27K4
A3R339
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R340
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R341
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R342
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R343
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R344
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R346
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R347
322–3191–00
RES,FXD,FILM:953 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G953ROF
A3R348
322–3177–02
RES,FXD,FILM:681 OHM,0.5%,0.2W,TC=T2
91637
CMF501D681ROD
A3R350
322–3162–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G475R0F
A3R351
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R352
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R353
322–3162–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;475 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G475R0F
A3R355
322–3139–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G274ROF
A3R356
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R357
322–3132–00
RES,FXD,FILM:232 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF50–2–G232ROF
B010421
B010422
RES,FXD,FILM:3.83K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
56845
CCF50–2–G3831FT
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–43
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R358
322–3154–00
A3R361
A3R362
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R364
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R365
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R366
322–3217–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.78K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G17800F
A3R367
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R370
322–3181–00
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G750ROF
A3R371
322–3181–00
RES,FXD,FILM:750 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G750ROF
A3R373
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R374
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R375
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R376
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R377
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R378
322–3306–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1502F
A3R379
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R380
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R381
322–3306–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;15K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1502F
A3R382
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A3R383
322–3385–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10002F
A3R384
322–3346–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;39.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF50–2–G39201F
A3R385
322–3351–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;44.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G4422FT
A3R386
322–3051–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
A3R387
322–3043–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM; 27.4 OHM, 1%, 0.2W, TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE27E4
A3R388
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A3R390
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R391
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R394
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R395
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R396
322–3097–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;100 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G100R0F
A3R397
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R398
322–3252–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G41200F
A3R399
308–0142–00
RES,FXD,WW:30 OHM,5%,3W
TK2096 KM300 30 OHM 1
A3R400
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
A3R401
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
A3R402
322–3252–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G41200F
A3R403
322–3252–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G41200F
A3R404
322–3252–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.12K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
91637
CCF501G41200F
8–44
B010248
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R409
322–3066–00
A3R411
A3R412
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
322–3051–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R415
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R416
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R417
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R418
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R419
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R420
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A3R421
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R422
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R423
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A3R424
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R425
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R426
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A3R427
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R428
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R429
322–3354–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G47501F
A3R430
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R431
322–3210–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.5K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G15000F
A3R432
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R434
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R435
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R436
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R437
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R438
322–3130–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;221 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
RB20FX221E
A3R441
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R442
322–3154–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
A3R443
322–3105–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;121 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G121ROF
A3R444
322–3051–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
A3R445
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R446
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R447
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R448
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R449
322–3114–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;150 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G1500F
A3R450
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R451
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R452
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–45
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R453
322–3051–00
A3R454
A3R455
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20FXE33E2
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R456
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R457
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R458
322–3318–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20001F
A3R459
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R460
322–3243–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;3.32K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF50–1–G33200F
A3R461
322–3254–00
RES,FXD,FILM:4.32K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF502G4321FT
A3R462
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R464
322–3034–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
A3R465
322–3034–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
A3R466
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R467
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G10001F
A3R468
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R469
322–3485–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.0K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=TO,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G50000F
A3R470
322–3147–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G332R0F
A3R471
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R472
322–3226–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G22100F
A3R473
322–3185–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;825 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G825ROF
A3R474
322–3126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G200ROF
A3R475
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R476
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R477
322–3147–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G332R0F
A3R478
322–3335–00
A3R478
322–3361–00
A3R479
322–3222–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G20000F
A3R480
322–3201–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.21K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G12100F
A3R482
322–3147–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;332 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G332R0F
A3R483
311–2271–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET;5K OHM,20%,0.5W,0.197 SQ
TK2073 GF06VT2 502 M L
A3R484
322–3339–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;33.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF50–2–G3322FT
A3R485
322–3193–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10000F
A3R486
322–3139–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;274 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G274ROF
A3R487
322–3481–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1M OHM.1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G10003F
A3R488
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A3R489
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A3R490
322–3066–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;47.5 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
09969
CCF502G47R50F
A3R491
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
8–46
B010421
B010422
RES,FXD,FILM:30.1K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G30101F
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,56.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2F56201F
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A3R492
322–3154–00
A3R493
A3R494
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;392 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G392R0F
322–3218–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;1.82K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G18200F
322–3030–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G20R00F
A3R495
322–3030–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;20 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50G20R00F
A3R496
322–3034–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
A3R497
322–3289–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,10K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20T29EFX1002
A3R497
322–3331–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,27.4K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB20 FXE 27K4
A3R498
322–3414–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,200K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
57668
CRB 20 FXE
A3R498
322–3361–00
B010422
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,56.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF50–2F56201F
A3R499
322–3339–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,33.2K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL
91637
CCF50–2–G3322FT
A3R500
322–3089–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,82.5 OHM,1%.0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL
57668
CRB20 FXE 82E5
A3R501
322–3258–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,4.75K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL
56845
CCF50–2–G4751FT
A3R502
322–3034–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,22.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM,AXIAL
91637
CCF50–2–G22R10F
A3R510
322–3258–00
B010249
RES,FXD:METAL FILM,4.75K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
56845
CCF50–4751F–R36
A3RC1
307–1587–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:TERMN NTWK
91637
CSRC–09C30–101J
A3RC2
307–1587–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:TERMN NTWK
91637
CSRC–09C30–101J
B010248
B010421
A3RC3
307–1587–00
RES NTWK,FXD,FI:TERMN NTWK
91637
CSRC–09C30–101J
A3TP1
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP3
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP4
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP5
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP8
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP10
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP11
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP12
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP13
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP14
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP15
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP16
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP17
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP18
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3TP19
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIAPCB
26364
104–01–02
A3U2
156–4229–00
IC,LIN:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;120MHZ,UNCOMPENSATED
24355
AD829AQ
A3U3
156–2873–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
04713
MC34082P
A3U4
156–6708–01
IC,PROCESSOR:CMOS,DSP;24 BITS,40MHZ,PLL
80009
156670801
A3U5
160–9862–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,22V10,7.5NS,140MA
80009
160–9862–00
136–0925–00
SOCKET,DIP:PCB;24 POS,2 X 12,0.1 X 0.3 CTR
00779
2–641932–3
*MOUNTING PARTS*
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–47
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Name & description
Mfr. part number
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U21
156–2873–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
04713
MC34082P
A3U39
156–3095–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;DUAL,0.8MV VOS,30NA IB
64155
LT1013CN8
A3U59
160–9863–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,26V12,20NS,105MA
80009
160–9863–00
136–1038–00
SOCKET,DIP:PCB;STR,28 POS,2 X 14,0.1X 0.3CTR
00779
2–382571–1
A3U64
156–0266–00
IC,LINEAR:ECL,MISC;VCO,200MHZ
04713
MC1648P
A3U71
156–4038–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL SPDT,45 OHM
1ES66
DG403DJ/C30244
A3U72
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U74
156–4408–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,AMPLIFIER;DIFFERENCE AMPL,35MHZ
64155
LT1194CN8
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U75
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U76
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U78
156–0266–00
IC,LINEAR:ECL,MISC;VCO,200MHZ
04713
MC1648P
A3U79
156–0266–00
IC,LINEAR:ECL,MISC;VCO,200MHZ
04713
MC1648P
A3U81
156–4274–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,FREQ SYNTH;W/PLL,SERIAL DATA INPUT
04713
MC145170P
A3U82
156–4274–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,FREQ SYNTH;W/PLL,SERIAL DATA INPUT
04713
MC145170P
A3U83
156–0846–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;NEGATIVE,–5.0V,1.0A,4.0%
27014
LM320T–5.0
A3U84
156–2559–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;NEGATIVE,–12V,1.5A,2%
48726
UC7912ACT
A3U85
156–2558–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;POSITIVE,12V,1.5A,2%
01295
TL780–12CKC
A3U86
156–4409–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,MISC;DIGITAL AUDIO INTER RECEIVER
0A384
CS8412–CP
A3U87
156–4409–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,MISC;DIGITAL AUDIO INTER RECEIVER
0A384
CS8412–CP
A3U88
156–4410–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,MISC;DIGITAL AUDIO INTERACE
0A384
CS8402A–CP
A3U89
156–1315–00
IC,MISC:LSTTL,INTERFACE;QUAD DIFFERENTIAL LINE RECVR
27014
DS26LS32N
A3U93
156–2834–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER;8–BIT PISO,WITH CLEAR
01295
SN74HC166N
A3U94
156–2834–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER;8–BIT PISO,WITH CLEAR
01295
SN74HC166N
A3U95
156–2349–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SIPO,LATCHED 3–STATE
0JR04
TC74HC595AP
A3U96
156–2349–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SIPO,LATCHED 3–STATE
0JR04
TC74HC595AP
A3U97
156–2349–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SIPO,LATCHED 3–STATE
0JR04
TC74HC595AP
A3U98
156–4443–00
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SRAM;128K X 32 MODULE,25NS
6Y440
MT4S12832M–25
00779
91–1744–14–64
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1235–00
SOCKET,SIMM:PCB,SIMM II;FEMALE,22.5 DEG,1 XLZ
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U99
156–4519–00
IC,DIGITAL:FCTCMOS,TRANSCEIVER;OCTAL
0TJ19
QS74FCT2245TP
A3U100
156–4387–00
IC,DIGITAL:FCTCMOS,BUFFER;OCTAL
0TJ19
QS74FCT2244TP
A3U101
156–6698–02
IC,ASIC:CMOS,CUSTOM;TRANSMITTER/RCVR,ADG312C
80009
156669802
A3U102
160–9864–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OTP,ATV2500,24 M/C,14 IN,24 I/O
80009
160–9864–00
*MOUNTING PARTS*
8–48
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
00779
821575–1
A3U103
156–1638–00
IC,CONVERTER:BIPOLAR,D/A;10 BIT,150NS,CURRENT OUT
24355
DAC10GP
A3U104
160–9866–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 210,64 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
80009
160–9866–00
136–1047–00
SOCKET,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
00779
821575–1
160–9868–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OTP,5032,32 MACROCELL,20NS
80009
160–9868–00
00779
2–382571–1
Mfr. part number
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U105
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1038–00
SOCKET,DIP:PCB;STR,28 POS,2 X 14,0.1X 0.3CTR
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U106
156–3750–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,AMPL;UNITY GAIN BUFFER,100MHZ
64762
EL2003CN
A3U107
156–1638–00
IC,CONVERTER:BIPOLAR,D/A;10 BIT,150NS,CURRENT OUT
24355
DAC10GP
A3U108
160–9869–00
B010100
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 220,96 M/C,48 I/O,8 IN
80009
160–9869–00
A3U108
160–9869–01
B010249
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 220,96 M/C,48 I/O,8 IN
80009
160–9869–00
00779
3–821574–1
17856
DG444DJ
B010248
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–0871–00
SOCKET,PLCC:PCB;68 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X0.125 TAIL,TIN
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U109
156–3972–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD SPST,100 OHM,400NS
A3U110
156–4275–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,AMPLIFIER;DUAL,VARIABLE GAIN
24355
AD602JN
A3U111
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U112
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A3U113
156–2873–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
04713
MC34082P
A3U114
160–9867–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH210,64 M/C,32
80009
160–9867–00
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
00779
821575–1
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 110,32 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
80009
160–9871–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OPT,ATV2500,24 MACROCELL, 14
INPUTS, 24 I/O,48 FLIP FLOPS,35NS;ATV2500H–35
80009
160–9871–01
00779
821575–1
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U115
160–9871–00
B010100
A3U115
160–9871–01
B010249
B010248
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U116
156–2584–00
A3U117
160–9872–00
B010100
A3U117
160–9872–01
B010249
B010248
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,FLIP FLOP;OCTAL D–TYPE, CLEAR
0JR04
TC74HC273AP
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 110,32 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
80009
160–9872–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 110,32 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
80009
160–9872–01
00779
821575–1
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–49
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A3U118
156–3063–00
Mfr. part number
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,DEMUX/DECODER;2–TO–4
01295
SN74HC139N
A3U122
156–4274–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,FREQ SYNTH;W/PLL,SERIAL DATA INPUT
04713
MC145170P
A3U123
156–0266–00
IC,LINEAR:ECL,MISC;VCO,200MHZ
04713
MC1648P
A3U124
156–4171–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D;8–BIT,30MSPS,2–STEP FLASH
07933
TMC1175N2C30
A3U125
156–0858–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD SPST
1ES66
DG201ACJ/C30248
A3U126
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A3U127
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A3U128
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A3U129
156–3972–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;QUAD SPST,100 OHM,400NS
17856
DG444DJ
A3U130
160–9865–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;OTP,ATV2500,24 M/C,14 IN,24 I/O,48 FLIP
FLOPS,35NS
80009
160–9865–00
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
00779
821575–1
A3U132
156–4275–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,AMPLIFIER;DUAL,VARIABLE GAIN
24355
AD602JN
A3U133
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U134
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U135
156–4273–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP;CURRENT FEEDBACK,100MHZ
64762
EL2120CN
A3U136
156–2460–00
IC,MISC:BIPOLAR,MOD/DEMOD;BALANCED
04713
MC1496P
A3U137
156–3905–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,A/D;12–BIT,13US,SAR,8CHAN
64155
LTC1290 (DCN OR
A3U138
156–3608–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,V REF;POS,5.0V,0.05%,20PPM,SER
64155
LT1021CCN8–5
A3U139
160–9873–00
IC.DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 110,32 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
80009
160–9873–00
00779
821575–1
80009
160–9870–00
00779
821575–1
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U140
160–9870–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD;EEPLD,MACH 110,32 M/C,32 I/O,6 IN
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
A3U141
156–2349–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SIPO,LATCHED 3–STATE
0JR04
TC74HC595AP
A3U142
156–2349–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,RGTR;8–BIT SIPO,LATCHED 3–STATE
0JR04
TC74HC595AP
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A3U143
156–2698–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VR;POSITIVE,5.0V,1.0A,2%
01295
TL780–05CKC
A3U144
156–1722–00
IC,DIGITAL:FTTL,GATE;HEX INV
04713
MC74F04N
A3U145
156–4038–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH;DUAL SPDT,45 OHM
1ES66
DG403DJ/C30244
A3U146
156–1191–00
IC,LINEAR:BIFET,OP–AMP;DUAL
01295
TL072CP
A3U148
156–4521–00
IC,MISC:CMOS,PWR SUPPLY SUPERVISOR;MPU RESET GEN
0B0A9
DS1233–10
A3U149
156–1150–01
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE
REGULATOR,NEGATIVE,–5.0V,100MA,4%,MC79L05ACP,TO–92
04713
MC79L05ACPRP
8–50
B010249
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
A3U150
156–1150–01
B010249
A3VR1
152–0166–00
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE
REGULATOR,NEGATIVE,–5.0V,100MA,4%,MC79L05ACP,TO–92
04713
MC79L05ACPRP
DIODE,ZENER:6.2V,5%,0.4W
04713
1N5995BRL
Name & description
A3VR2
152–0226–00
B010248
DIODE,ZENER:5.1V,5%,0.4W
14552
TD3810980
A3Y1
119–4698–00
B010248
OSCILLATOR:VCXO;12.288MHZ,5PPM,0.5 TO4.5VDC
21022
H10BV–12.288MHZ
A3Y1
119–4642–00
OSCILLATOR:CRYSTAL CONTROLLED,12.288000 MHZ,100
PPM,HCMOS,4 PIN DIP,14 PIN DIP COMPATIBLE
14301
012–401–01525
B010248
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–51
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A4
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
671–2916–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:REAR PANEL
80009
671291600
333–4109–00
PANEL,REAR:AES,AM700
80009
333410900
A4C1
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A4C2
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A4C3
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A4C4
281–0775–01
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MCL;0.1UF,20%,50V,Z5U,0.170
04222
SA105E104MAA
A4C5
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50VTAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A4C6
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50VTAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A4C7
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50VTAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A4C8
285–1338–00
CAP,FXD,MTLZD:1.0UF,10%,50VTAPE & AMMO PACK
TK1913 MKS 2 1.0/63/10
A4C9
281–0797–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%,100V
04222
SA102A150KAA
A4C10
281–0797–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%,100V
04222
SA102A150KAA
A4C11
281–0797–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%,100V
04222
SA102A150KAA
A4C12
281–0797–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;15PF,10%,100V
04222
SA102A150KAA
A4C13
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A4C14
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A4C15
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A4C16
281–0819–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC;33 PF,5%,50V,0.100 X 0.170
04222
SA102A330JAA
A4FL1
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI;50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MODE CHOKE COILS
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A4FL2
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI;50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MODE CHOKE COILS
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A4FL3
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI;50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MODE CHOKE COILS
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A4J1
131–4046–00
CONN,DSUB:PCB/PNL;FEMALE,RTANG,15 POS,0.318 MLG X
0.125 TAIL,4–40 THD INSERTS,BD RETENTION
00779
A4J2
131–4048–00
CONN,HDR:PCB;MALE,RTANG,2 X 17,0.05 X 0.1CTR,0.326 H X
0.106TAIL,0.075 STAGGERED PCB,W/EJECTOR LATCH
TK1462 NFP–34A–0112A
A4J3
131–5230–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB/PNL,AUDIO;FEMALE,RTANG,3 POS,0.984 H X
0.16 TAIL,0.492 MATING CL,LATCHING
0FMA6
NC3FDH
A4J4
131–3987–00
CONN,CIRC:PCB,AUDIO;MALE,RTANG,3 POS,1.22H X 1.024
W,CTR PLZ,LATCHING
0FMA6
NC3MD–H
A4J5
131–0955–00
CONN,RF JACK:BNC;50 OHM,FEMALE,STR,SLDR CUP/FRONT
PNL,GOLD,0.520 MLG X 0.490 TAIL,0.092 L SLDR
CUP,0.375–32/D/1 FLAT
(QUANTITY 2)
K1072
G35152BN
80009
196341100
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
747845–4
*ATTACHED PARTS*
196–3411–00
LEAD,ELECTRICAL:FLAT FLEX;FLX,27 AWG,3.0 L,PCB TERM
BOTH ENDS,STR,(STRAIN RELIEF TERMS)
(QUANTITY 2)
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
8–52
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A4J6
131–5678–00
A4J7
131–5679–00
A4L1
108–1263–00
A4L2
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CONN:TORX176
80009
131567800
CONN:TOTX176
80009
131567900
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043
OHM,Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
108–1263–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER;10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043
OHM,Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN
TK2058 TSL0707–100K1R9
A4L3
108–1243–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5
OHM,Q>50 (2.5MHZ),SRF>20 MHZ
24226
ML10–272G
A4L4
108–1243–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:SIGNAL;27UH,2%,IDC<135 MA,RDC<3.5
OHM,Q>50 (2.5MHZ),SRF>20 MHZ
24226
ML10–272G
A4R1
322–3069–00
RES,FXD,FILM:51.1 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL
91637
CCF501G51R10F
A4R2
322–3165–00
RES,FXD,FILM:511 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0MI,SMALL BODY
91637
CCF501G511R0F
A4R3
322–3281–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;8.25K OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100
91637
CCF501G82500F
A4R4
321–0097–07
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
57668
CRB14 BZE 100 O
A4R5
321–0097–07
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
57668
CRB14 BZE 100 O
A4R6
321–0097–07
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
57668
CRB14 BZE 100 O
A4R7
321–0097–07
RES,FXD,FILM:100 OHM,0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9MI
57668
CRB14 BZE 100 O
A4R8
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A4R9
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A4R10
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A4R11
322–3001–00
RES,FXD:METAL FILM;10 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=100 PPM
91637
CCF501G10R00F
A4T1
120–1933–00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:WIDEBAND;0.02–100MHZ,INSERT
15542
T 1.5–6 X65
A4T2
120–1933–00
TRANSFORMER,SIG:WIDEBAND;0.02–100MHZ,INSERT
15542
T 1.5–6 X65
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–53
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5
671–2797–00
Serial no.
effective
A5
671–2797–01
B010330
A5
671–2797–02
B020100
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
B010329
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–00
B019999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–01
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:AUDIO GENERATOR
80009
671–2797–02
*ATTACHED PARTS*
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C;220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V,178 OHM
(QUANTITY 9)
TK2520
EB2–5NUL
211–0722–00
SCREW,MACH:6–32 X 0.250,PNH,STL,CDPL,T–15 TORX DR
0KB01
ORDER BY DESC
337–4005–00
SHIELD.ELEC:GENERATOR CROSS TALK,AM700
80009
337-4005-00
385–0018–00
SPACER,POST:1.25 L W/6–32 THD EA END,NYL
74594
1763–632–N–0
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5C1
283–5211–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,4700PF,10%,50V,X7R,1206,8MM
04222
12065C472KAT2A
A5C2
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C3
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C6
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C7
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C8
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C9
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C10
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C11
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A5C12
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C13
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C14
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C15
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C16
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C17
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C18
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C19
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C20
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C21
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C22
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C23
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C24
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C25
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C26
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C27
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C28
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C29
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C30
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C31
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A102JAT1A
8–54
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5C32
290–5039–00
A5C33
A5C34
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C35
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C36
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C37
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C38
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C39
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C40
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C41
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C42
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C43
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C44
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C45
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C46
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C47
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C48
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C49
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C50
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C51
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C52
290–0848–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:47UF,20%,16V,ESR=7.05
OHM(120HZ,25C),10X12MM,RADIAL.
62643
CEBPM1E470M
A5C53
290–0848–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:47UF,20%,16V,ESR=7.05
OHM(120HZ,25C),10X12MM,RADIAL.
62643
CEBPM1E470M
A5C53
290–5039–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,6.3MM,SMD,16MM
62643
MVK50VC10RMF60TPX
A5C54
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C55
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C56
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C57
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C58
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C59
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C60
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C61
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C62
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C63
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C64
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C65
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C66
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C67
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–55
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5C68
283–5004–00
A5C69
A5C70
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C71
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C72
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C73
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C74
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C75
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C76
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C77
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C78
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C79
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C80
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C81
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C82
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C83
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C99
290–0973–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,20%,25VDC ALU NUM
55680
UVX1V101MPA
A5C102
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C103
283–5001–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,100PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A101JAT1A
A5C104
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C105
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C127
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A5C129
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C130
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C131
290–0974–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=16.58 OHM
(120HZ,20C),RADIAL
55680
UVX1H100MDA
A5C132
290–0974–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=16.58 OHM
(120HZ,20C),RADIAL
55680
UVX1H100MDA
A5C133
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A5C138
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C139
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C140
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD,FILM:3900 PF,1%,63V
TK1913
FKP 2 3900 1%/63V
A5C141
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C142
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C143
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C144
290–0974–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=16.58 OHM
(120HZ,20C),RADIAL
55680
UVX1H100MDA
A5C145
290–0974–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,50V,ESR=16.58 OHM
(120HZ,20C),RADIAL
55680
UVX1H100MDA
A5C146
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD,FILM:3900 PF,1%,63V
TK1913
FKP 2 3900 1%/63V
8–56
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A5C151
283–5004–00
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C152
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C300
290–1069–00
B020100
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%, 25V,ESR=0.23 OHM
(120HZ,20C),12.5 X 25MM,RADIAL
62643
CEUFM0J102–E
A5C301
290–1069–00
B020100
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%, 25V,ESR=0.23 OHM
(120HZ,20C),12.5 X 25MM,RADIAL
62643
CEUFM0J102–E
A5C303
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C304
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C305
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C306
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C307
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C308
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C309
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C310
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C311
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C312
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C313
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A5C314
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C315
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C316
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C317
285–1305–00
CAP,FXD,PLASTIC:0.1UF,1%,50V
14752
(D) 650D1A104F
A5C318
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD,FILM:3900 PF,1%,63V
TK1913
FKP 2 3900 1%/63V
A5C319
285–1503–00
CAP,FXD,FILM:3900 PF,1%,63V
TK1913
FKP 2 3900 1%/63V
A5C325
283–0772–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:497 PF,1%,500V
09023
CD15FD(497)F03
A5C326
283–0634–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:65PF,1%,100V
09023
CD15ED650F03
A5C327
283–0772–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:497 PF,1%,500V
09023
CD15FD(497)F03
A5C328
283–0634–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:65PF,1%,100V
09023
CD15ED650F03
A5C329
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C330
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C331
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C332
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C333
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C334
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C335
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C336
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C337
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C338
283–0594–00
CAP,FXD, CA DI:0.001UF,1%,100V
09023
CD15FA102F03
A5C339
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C340
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–57
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5C341
283–5004–00
A5C342
A5C343
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C344
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C345
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C346
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C347
290–5034–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:33UF,20%,10V,5.7MM(0.224),SMD,
62643
MVK10VC33RME60TPX
A5C348
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C349
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C350
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C351
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C352
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C353
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C354
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C356
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C359
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C360
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C361
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C362
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C363
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C364
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C365
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C366
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C367
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C368
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C369
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C370
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C371
290–5034–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:33UF,20%,10V,5.7MM(0.224),SMD,
62643
MVK10VC33RME60TPX
A5C372
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C373
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C374
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C375
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C376
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C377
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C378
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C380
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C381
283–0108–00
04222
SR152A221KAA
*TEST SELECTABLE COMPONENTS*
8–58
B020642
CAP,FXD,CER DI:220PF,10%,200V SQUARE
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
A5C381
283–0139–00
B020642
A5C381
283–0330–00
A5C382
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,150PF,10%,50V,COG,0.138 X
0.120,RADIAL,BULK
04222
SR15A151KAT
B020642
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:100PF,5%,50V,0.200 X
0.200,0.1LS,RADIAL (NOMINAL CHOICE IF NEEDED)
16546
CN15C101J
283–0108–00
B020642
CAP,FXD,CER DI:220PF,10%,200V SQUARE
04222
SR152A221KAA
A5C382
283–0139–00
B020642
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,150PF,10%,50V,COG,0.138 X
0.120,RADIAL,BULK
04222
SR15A151KAT
A5C382
283–0330–00
B020642
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:100PF,5%,50V,0.200 X
0.200,0.1LS,RADIAL (NOMINAL CHOICE IF NEEDED)
16546
CN15C101J
A5C383
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C384
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C385
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R,8MM
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A5C386
283–5217–00
CAP,FXD,CER,DI:2.2UF,10%,50V,Z5U,2221 PKG
65238
2221Z225K500NXT
A5C387
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C388
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C389
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C390
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C391
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C392
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C393
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C394
290–0942–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,+100–10%,25V, ALUNUM
62643
CEUFM1E101
A5C395
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
Name & description
*END OF SELECTABLE COMPONENTS*
A5C396
290–1235–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,35V RADIAL LEAD
55680
UVZ1V102MRH
A5C397
290–0919–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:470UF,+50–20%,35V,10 X 20MM,RADIAL
61058
ECEA1VFS471
A5C398
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
A5C399
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
A5C400
290–0942–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,+100–10%,25V
62643
CEUFM1E101
A5C401
290–0919–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:470UF,+50–20%,35V,10 X 20MM,RADIAL
61058
ECEA1VFS471
A5C402
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
A5C403
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
A5C404
290–1235–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,35V RADIAL LEAD
55680
UVZ1V102MRH
A5C405
290–1235–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:1000UF,20%,35V RADIAL LEAD
55680
UVZ1V102MRH
A5C406
283–5016–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1UF,10%,50V,X7R,0.225 X
0.250,2225,SMD,12MM
04222
22255C105KAT1A
A5C407
290–0942–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,+100–10%,25V
62643
CEUFM1E101
A5C409
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
,ALU NUM
,ALU NUM
8–59
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5C410
283–5004–00
A5C412
A5C415
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C416
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C417
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C418
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C419
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C420
283–5009–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,15PF,5%,50V,NPO,0.126 X 0.063,8MM
04222
12065A150JAT1A
A5C421
283–5009–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,15PF,5%,50V,NPO,0.126 X 0.063,8MM
04222
12065A150JAT1A
A5C422
283–5009–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,15PF,5%,50V,NPO,0.126 X 0.063,8MM
04222
12065A150JAT1A
A5C423
283–5009–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,15PF,5%,50V,NPO,0.126 X 0.063,8MM
04222
12065A150JAT1A
A5C424
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C425
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C426
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C427
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C428
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C429
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C430
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C431
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C432
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C433
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C434
283–5196–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,47PF,5%,100V,NPO,8MM
04222
12061A470JAT1A
A5C435
283–5196–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,47PF,5%,100V,NPO,8MM
04222
12061A470JAT1A
A5C436
290–0848–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:47UF,20%,16V,ESR=7.05
OHM(120HZ,25C),10X12MM,RADIAL.
62643
CEBPM1E470M
A5C437
290–0848–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:47UF,20%,16V,ESR=7.05
OHM(120HZ,25C),10X12MM,RADIAL.
62643
CEBPM1E470M
A5C438
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C439
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C440
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C441
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C443
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C444
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C445
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C446
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R,8MM
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A5C447
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C448
283–5107–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,22PF,5%,200V,NPO,8MM
04222
12062A220JAT2A
A5C449
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A5C450
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A221JAT1A
8–60
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5C451
283–5025–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A5C452
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO,8MM
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A5C453
283–5098–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,+80%–20%,50V,Z5U,8MM
04222
12065E104ZAT3A
A5C454
283–5098–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,0.1UF,+80%–20%,50V,Z5U,8MM
04222
12065E104ZAT3A
A5C455
283–5203–00
CAP,FXD,CERA C:MLC,1000PF,10%,100V,X7R,8MM
04222
12061C102KAT1A
A5C456
290–0942–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,+100–10%,25V
,ALU NUM
62643
CEUFM1E101
A5C457
290–0942–00
CAP,FXD,ELCTLT:100UF,+100–10%,25V
,ALU NUM
62643
CEUFM1E101
A5C458
283–0059–00
B020100
CAP,FXD,CER DI:1UF,+80–20%,50V SQUARE
04222
SR305C105MAA
A5C459
283–0059–00
B020100
CAP,FXD,CER DI:1UF,+80–20%,50V SQUARE
04222
SR305C105MAA
A5CR1
152–5010–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC,30V,29PF,C3/25=5.75,MMBV109L,TO–236/SO
T–23,8MM
04713
MMBV109LT1
A5CR2
152–5073–00
DIODE,RECT:BRIDGE,600V,1A,1.1VF,DF06S,
14936
DF06S–TR
A5CR4
152–5010–00
DIODE,SIG:VVC,30V,29PF,C3/25=5.75,MMBV109L,TO–236/SO
T–23,8MM
04713
MMBV109LT1
A5CR5
152–5073–00
DIODE,RECT:BRIDGE,600V,1A,1.1VF,DF06S,
14936
DF06S–TR
A5CR10
152–5027–00
DIODE,RECT:SCHOTTKY,40V,1.0A,40A
IFSM,MBRS140,DO–214AA/SMB,12MM
04713
MBRS140T3
A5CR11
152–5027–00
DIODE,RECT:SCHOTTKY,40V,1.0A,40A
IFSM,MBRS140,DO–214AA/SMB,12MM
04713
MBRS140T3
A5CR12
152–5027–00
DIODE,RECT:SCHOTTKY,40V,1.0A,40A
IFSM,MBRS140,DO–214AA/SMB,12MM
04713
MBRS140T3
A5CR14
152–0843–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY,SER–PAIR,20V,410MV,1.3PF,HSMS–281,
SOT–23,
50434
HSMS–2812–T31
A5CR15
152–0843–00
DIODE,SIG:SCHTKY,SER–PAIR,20V,410MV,1.3PF,HSMS–281,
SOT–23,
50434
HSMS–2812–T31
A5CR16
152–5000–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA
FAST,70V,0.15A,6NS,COM–CATH,BAV70,TO–236/SOT–23,8M
M
04713
BAV70LT1
A5CR17
152–5047–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,DUAL,COMMON
CATHODE,100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF,MMBD1204,TO–236/SOT–2
3,8MM
07263
MMBD1204
A5CR18
152–5047–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,DUAL,COMMON
CATHODE,100V,0.74VF,4NS,2.0PF,MMBD1204,
TO–236/SOT–23, 8MM
07263
MMBD1204
A5DS1
150–1132–00
DIODE,OPTO:LED,GRN,569MCD,10.6MCD AT 10MA,40 DEG
VIEW ANGL,HLMP–3568,T–1 3/4,LOW PROFILE
50434
HLMP–3568
A5DS2
150–1022–00
DISPLAY,OPTO:LED,RED,660NM,7SEG,0.3” DISPLAY,125UCD
PER SEGMENT AT10MA,COMMON ANODE,LEFT HAN
0MS63
MAN72A
A5E12
276–0614–00
CORE,EM:TOROID,FERRITE 0.375 OD X 0.125 X 0.21
28733
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
A5E15
276–0614–00
CORE,EM:TOROID,FERRITE 0.375 OD X 0.125 X 0.21
28733
ORDER BY DESCRIPTION
A5F1
159–5000–00
FUSE,SMD:2.5A,125V,FAST,SMD,R459 02.5, ,
75915
R459 02.5
A5F12
159–0363–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:4A,125V,FAST BLOW,ULREC,CSA CERT,
75915
251004
129–0222–00
SPACER,POST:0.27 L,4–40 THRU,PLSTC,0.25 OD
80009
129022200
*ATTACHED PARTS*
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–61
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
75915
251004
80009
129022200
75915
251004
80009
129022200
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5F13
159–0363–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:4A,125V,FAST BLOW,ULREC,CSA CERT,
*ATTACHED PARTS*
129–0222–00
SPACER,POST:0.27 L,4–40 THRU,PLSTC,0.25 OD
159–0363–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:4A,125V,FAST BLOW,ULREC,CSA CERT,
129–0222–00
SPACER,POST:0.27 L,4–40 THRU,PLSTC,0.25 OD
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5F15
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5FL1
119–4641–00
FILTER:AM700,80 KHZ LPF
1P546
80KHZ LOW PASS FIL
A5FL2
119–4641–00
FILTER:AM700,80 KHZ LPF
1P546
80KHZ LOW PASS FIL
A5J1
131–1857–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X
0.100 TAIL,GOLD,
22526
65507–136
A5J2
131–1857–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X
0.100 TAIL,GOLD,
22526
65507–136
A5J4
131–4529–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,2 X 5,0.1 CTR,0.365 H X 0.112
TAIL,SHRD/4 SIDES,CTR PLZ,
53387
2510–6002UB
A5J5
131–4530–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 3,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X 0.120
TAIL,30 GOLD,BD RETENTION,
00779
104344–1
A5J8
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,SAFETY
53387
2404–6112TB
A5J9
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,SAFETY
53387
2404–6112TB
A5J13
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,SAFETY
53387
2404–6112TB
A5J14
131–2919–01
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,SAFETY
53387
2404–6112TB
A5J15
131–4794–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,W/BD RET
53387
2402–6112 UB
A5J16
131–3945–00
CONN,HDR PWR::PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 8,0.156 CTR,0.450
MLG X 0.172 TAIL,PLZ WALL,W/FRICTION LOCK,20
27264
26–48–2085
A5J17
131–5672–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,2 X 20,0.05 X 0.1 CTR,0.933 H X
0.106 TAIL,SHRD/4 SIDES,CTR PLZ,30
TK1462
NFP–040A–0114–AF
A5J30
131–2919–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
A5J31
131–5228–00
CONN,DIN:PCB,MALE,STR,2 X 32,0.1 CTR,0.457 H X 0.114
TAIL,ROWS A & C LOADED,
56501
211–66430–6008 OR
MQ064–021–2
A5J31
131–2919–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
A5J32
131–4794–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR,0.235 MLG X 0.112
TAIL,30GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,W/BD RET
53387
2402–6112 UB
A5K1
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
8–62
B010329
B020100
B019999
B020100
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5K2
148–1023–00
A5K3
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K4
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K7
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K8
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K9
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K10
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K11
148–1023–00
RELAY,ARM:2 FORM C,220V, 1A, 30W, COIL 5V, 178 OHM,
.30H X .37W X .56L, SMD, EB2–5NUL
TK2601
148–1023–00
A5K30
148–0235–00
B020100
RELAY,ARMATURE:2 FORM C,5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD
CLAD SILVER,MAX SW AT 110VDC,125VAC,30W,1A,INITI
61529
TF2E–5V
A5K31
148–0235–00
B020100
RELAY,ARMATURE:2 FORM C,5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD
CLAD SILVER,MAX SW AT 110VDC,125VAC,30W,1A,INITI
61529
TF2E–5V
A5L1
108–1570–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,20%,I<2.0A,RDC<0.02 OHM,
Z–94114B,POWDERED IRON TOROID,VERT MOUNT
0JR03
108–1570–00
A5L2
108–1570–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,20%,I<2.0A,RDC<0.02 OHM,
Z–94114B,POWDERED IRON TOROID,VERT MOUNT
0JR03
108–1570–00
A5L3
108–1570–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,20%,I<2.0A,RDC<0.02 OHM,
Z–94114B,POWDERED IRON TOROID,VERT MOUNT
0JR03
108–1570–00
A5L4
108–1570–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,20%,I<2.0A,RDC<0.02 OHM,
Z–94114B,POWDERED IRON TOROID,VERT MOUNT
0JR03
108–1570–00
A5L5
108–1571–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,720UH,11%,I<0.6A,RDC<0.5 OHM,
Z–93092D,FERRITE TORROID W/HOLDER,VERTICAL MO
0JR03
Z–93092D
A5L6
108–1262–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,100UH,10%,I<0.75A,RDC<0.23
OHM, Q>15,SRF>5.4MHZ,BOBBIN CORE,TSL0807–101K,RA
TK2058
TSL0807–101KR75
A5L7
108–1262–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,100UH,10%,I<0.75A,RDC<0.23
OHM, Q>15,SRF>5.4MHZ,BOBBIN CORE,TSL0807–101K,RA
TK2058
TSL0807–101KR75
A5L8
108–1571–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,720UH,11%,I<0.6A,RDC<0.5 OHM,
Z–93092D,FERRITE TORROID W/HOLDER,VERTICAL MO
0JR03
Z–93092D
A5L9
108–1262–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,100UH,10%,I<0.75A,RDC<0.23
OHM, Q>15,SRF>5.4MHZ,BOBBIN CORE,TSL0807–101K,RA
TK2058
TSL0807–101KR75
A5L10
108–1571–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,720UH,11%,I<0.6A,RDC<0.5 OHM,
Z–93092D,FERRITE TORROID W/HOLDER,VERTICAL MO
0JR03
Z–93092D
A5L11
108–1263–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM,
Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN,RADIAL
TK2058
TSL0707–100K1R9
A5L14
108–1263–00
INDUCTOR,FXD:POWER,10UH,10%,I<2.1A,RDC<0.043 OHM,
Q>20,SRF>19MHZ,BOBBIN,RADIAL
TK2058
TSL0707–100K1R9
A5P5
131–0993–00
CONN,BOX:SHUNT,FEMALE,STR,1 X 2,0.1 CTR,0.385 H,30
GOLD,BLACK,JUMPER,
00779
530153–2
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–63
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5Q1
151–5001–00
A5Q2
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
151–0188–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
2N3906,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3906
A5Q3
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q4
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q5
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q6
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q7
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q8
151–0190–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
2N3904,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3904
A5Q9
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
TK1326
214–0973–00
Name & description
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q11)
A5Q10
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
A5Q11
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q9)
04713
MPSW06
A5Q12
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
TK1326
214–0973–00
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q13)
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5Q13
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q12)
04713
MPSW56
A5Q14
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
A5Q15
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q16
151–0188–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
2N3906,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3906
A5Q17
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q18
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
8–64
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5Q19
151–5001–00
A5Q20
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q21
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q22
151–0190–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
2N3904,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3904
A5Q23
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
TK1326
214–0973–00
Name & description
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q25)
A5Q24
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
A5Q25
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q23)
04713
MPSW06
A5Q26
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
TK1326
214–0973–00
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q27)
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5Q27
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q26)
04713
MPSW56
A5Q28
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
A5Q29
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q30
151–0188–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
2N3906,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3906
A5Q31
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q32
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q33
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q34
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q35
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q36
151–0190–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
2N3904,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3904
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–65
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5Q37
151–0590–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
04713
MPSW06
TK1326
214–0973–00
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q39)
A5Q38
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
A5Q39
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q37)
04713
MPSW06
A5Q40
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
TK1326
214–0973–00
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q41)
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5Q41
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q40)
04713
MPSW56
A5Q42
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
A5Q43
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q44
151–0188–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
2N3906,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3906
A5Q45
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q46
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q47
151–5001–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3904L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3904LT1
A5Q48
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q49
151–5000–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,40V,200MA,250MHZ,AMPL,
MMBT3906L,TO–236/SOT–23,8MM
04713
MMBT3906LT1
A5Q50
151–0190–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,40V,200MA,300MHZ,AMPL,
2N3904,TO–92 EBC
04713
2N3904
A5Q51
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW06
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q53)
TK1326
214–0973–00
04713
MPSW06
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5Q52
8–66
151–0590–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5Q53
151–0590–00
A5Q54
151–0591–00
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,NPN,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW06,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q51)
04713
MPSW06
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
TK1326
214–0973–00
Name & description
*ATTACHED PARTS*
214–0973–00
HEAT SINK,XSTR:TO–92,CU BE CD PL
(USED WITH A5Q55)
A5Q55
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC (SEE A5Q54)
04713
MPSW56
A5Q56
151–0591–00
TRANSISTOR,SIG:BIPOLAR,PNP,80V,500MA,50MHZ,AMPL,
MPSW56,TO–226AE EBC
04713
MPSW56
A5R4
321–5008–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,150 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1500FT
A5R5
321–5205–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.33K OHM, 1%,0.125,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–1331F–RT1
A5R6
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R7
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R10
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R11
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R12
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R13
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R14
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R15
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R16
301–0202–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 5%,0.5W
19701
5053CX2K000J
162–0026–00
INSUL SLVG,ELEC:0.059 ID,PTFE,CLEAR
TK0977
TFEX20(TW)–NAT
A5R17
321–5194–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,49.9 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B49R9FT
A5R18
311–5033–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET,500 OHM, 25%,0.1W,4MM SQ,TOP
ADJ,SMD
32997
3314J–1–501G
A5R24
311–5033–00
RES,VAR,TRMR:CERMET,500 OHM, 25%,0.1W,4MM SQ,TOP
ADJ,SMD
32997
3314J–1–501G
A5R30
321–5122–00
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–4990F–RT1
A5R31
321–5122–00
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–4990F–RT1
A5R32
321–5122–00
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–4990F–RT1
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–67
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R33
321–5122–00
A5R38
A5R43
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:499 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–4990F–RT1
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE10000B
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R46
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R47
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R50
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R60
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R62
321–0926–07
RES,FXD,FILM:4K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE40000B
A5R63
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R64
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE10000B
A5R65
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R66
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R67
321–0926–07
RES,FXD,FILM:4K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE40000B
A5R68
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R69
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE10000B
A5R70
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R71
321–0928–07
RES,FXD,FILM:250 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R72
321–0193–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE10000B
A5R73
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R74
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R76
321–0612–07
RES,FXD,FILM:500 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE500R0B
A5R77
321–0927–07
RES,FXD,FILM:125 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R78
321–0927–07
RES,FXD,FILM:125 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R79
321–0927–07
RES,FXD,FILM:125 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R80
321–0927–07
RES,FXD,FILM:125 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
50139
ADVISE
A5R81
321–1765–07
RES,FXD,FILM:720 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
57027
720 OHM CM55 T9 .1%
A5R82
321–0054–00
RES,FXD,FILM:35.7 OHM, 0.5%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
A5R83
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R84
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R85
321–1765–07
RES,FXD,FILM:720 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
57027
720 OHM CM55 T9 .1%
A5R86
321–0054–00
RES,FXD,FILM:35.7 OHM, 0.5%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
A5R87
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R88
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R89
321–1765–07
RES,FXD,FILM:720 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
57027
720 OHM CM55 T9 .1%
A5R90
321–0054–00
RES,FXD,FILM:35.7 OHM, 0.5%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
A5R91
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R92
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R93
321–1765–07
RES,FXD,FILM:720 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
57027
720 OHM CM55 T9 .1%
8–68
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R94
321–0054–00
A5R95
A5R96
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:35.7 OHM, 0.5%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
321–1008–04
RES,FXD,FILM:12.0 OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
50139
ADVISE
A5R97
321–0095–00
RES,FXD,FILM:95.3 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
ADVISE
A5R98
322–0126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM, 1%,0.25W,TC=T0,
19701
5043RD200R0F
A5R99
321–0095–00
RES,FXD,FILM:95.3 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
ADVISE
A5R100
322–0126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM, 1%,0.25W,TC=T0,
19701
5043RD200R0F
A5R101
321–0095–00
RES,FXD,FILM:95.3 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
ADVISE
A5R102
322–0126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM, 1%,0.25W,TC=T0,
19701
5043RD200R0F
A5R103
321–0095–00
RES,FXD,FILM:95.3 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
ADVISE
A5R104
322–0126–00
RES,FXD,FILM:200 OHM, 1%,0.25W,TC=T0,
19701
5043RD200R0F
A5R107
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R108
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R109
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R110
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R111
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R112
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R113
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R114
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R115
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R116
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R117
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R118
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R119
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R120
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R121
321–5305–00
RES,FXD,FILM:2K OHM, 0.1%,25PPM,0.125W,1206 PKG
91637
TNPW1206–2001B–RT1
A5R137
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R138
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R139
321–1701–04
RES,FXD,FILM:5.22K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
07716
CEAC52200B
A5R140
321–0263–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.36K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–69
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R144
321–0222–07
A5R145
A5R146
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R147
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R148
321–1701–04
RES,FXD,FILM:5.22K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T2
07716
CEAC52200B
A5R149
321–0263–00
RES,FXD,FILM:5.36K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=T0
50139
NOT AVAILABLE
A5R153
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R154
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R155
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R156
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R157
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R158
321–0222–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.0K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE20000B
A5R159
321–5049–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1M OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCA1004FT
A5R160
321–5049–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1M OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCA1004FT
A5R161
321–5049–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1M OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCA1004FT
A5R162
321–5049–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1M OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCA1004FT
A5R163
321–1746–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1.13K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
56845
CMF55116C11300B–BULK
A5R164
321–1789–07
RES,FXD,FILM:5.05K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C50500B–R36
A5R165
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R166
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R167
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R168
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R169
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE30100B
A5R170
321–0239–07
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
07716
CEAE30100B
A5R171
321–1789–07
RES,FXD,FILM:5.05K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C50500B–R36
A5R172
321–1746–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1.13K OHM, 0.1%,0.125W,TC=T9
56845
CMF55116C11300B–BULK
A5R173
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R174
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R175
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R176
321–1790–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.37K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C23700B–R36
A5R177
321–1792–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1.47K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C14700B–R36
A5R178
321–1793–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.43K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C24300B–R36
A5R179
321–1792–07
RES,FXD,FILM:1.47K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C14700B–R36
A5R180
321–1793–07
RES,FXD,FILM:2.43K,0.1%,T9
91637
CMF55116C24300B–R36
A5R181
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
8–70
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A5R182
321–5281–00
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R183
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R184
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R185
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R186
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R187
321–5176–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K,1%,0.125W,1206,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–3011F–RT1
A5R188
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R189
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R190
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R191
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R192
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R193
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R194
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R195
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R196
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R197
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R198
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R199
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R200
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R201
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R202
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R203
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R204
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R205
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R206
321–5176–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K,1%,0.125W,1206,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–3011F–RT1
A5R207
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R208
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R209
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R210
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R211
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R212
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R213
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–71
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R214
321–5026–00
A5R215
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R216
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R217
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R218
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R219
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R220
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R221
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R222
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R223
321–5064–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,200K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2003FT
A5R224
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R225
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R226
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R227
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
Name & description
A5R228
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R229
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R230
321–5176–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K,1%,0.125W,1206,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–3011F–RT1
A5R231
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R232
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R233
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R234
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R235
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R236
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R237
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R238
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R239
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R240
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R241
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R242
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R243
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
8–72
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A5R244
321–5281–00
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R245
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R246
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R247
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R248
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R249
321–5176–00
RES,FXD,FILM:3.01K,1%,0.125W,1206,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–3011F–RT1
A5R250
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R251
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R252
321–5090–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,20.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,100 PPM,1206
50139
BCK2002FT
A5R253
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R254
321–5298–00
RES,FXD,FILM:60.4 OHM, +/–1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–60R4F–RT1
A5R255
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R256
321–5281–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,2K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2001FT
A5R257
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R258
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R259
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R260
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R261
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R262
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R263
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R264
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R265
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R266
321–5064–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,200K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B2003FT
A5R267
308–0450–00
RES,FXD,WW:70 OHM, 1%,3W AXIAL LEADS
24165
242EX70R00FQ18
A5R268
308–0450–00
RES,FXD,WW:70 OHM, 1%,3W AXIAL LEADS
24165
242EX70R00FQ18
A5R269
308–0450–00
RES,FXD,WW:70 OHM, 1%,3W AXIAL LEADS
24165
242EX70R00FQ18
A5R270
308–0450–00
RES,FXD,WW:70 OHM, 1%,3W AXIAL LEADS
24165
242EX70R00FQ18
A5R272
307–5040–01
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
A5R273
307–5040–01
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
A5R274
307–5040–01
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–73
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R275
307–5040–01
A5R276
307–5040–01
A5R277
307–5040–01
A5R277
325–0483–00
B020100
A5R278
325–0483–00
B020100
RES,FXD,FILM:300 OHM, 1%, 3 W, 500V,0.515 X 0.225, AXIAL
24546
FP69 300 OHM 1%
A5R279
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R280
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R283
321–5205–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.33K OHM, 1%,0.125,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–1331F–RT1
A5R283
325–0483–00
RES,FXD,FILM:300 OHM, 1%, 3 W, 500V,0.515 X 0.225, AXIAL
24546
FP69 300 OHM 1% (BULK)
A5R284
321–5205–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.33K OHM, 1%,0.125,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–1331F–RT1
A5R284
325–0483–00
RES,FXD,FILM:300 OHM, 1%, 3 W, 500V,0.515 X 0.225, AXIAL
24546
FP69 300 OHM 1% (BULK)
A5R285
321–5205–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.33K OHM, 1%,0.125,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–1331F–RT1
A5R286
321–5205–00
RES,FXD,FILM:1.33K OHM, 1%,0.125,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–1331F–RT1
A5R287
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R288
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R290
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R291
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R292
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R293
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R294
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R295
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R296
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R297
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R298
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R299
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R300
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
8–74
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
B019999
B019999
B020100
B019999
B020100
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
RES,NTWK:THICK FILM,(8)33 OHM, 2%,0.16W EACH,TC=100
PPM,SO16.220 ,ISOLATED
57924
4816P–001–330
RES,FXD,FILM:300 OHM, 1%, 3 W, 500V,0.515 X 0.225, AXIAL
24546
FP69 300 OHM 1%
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R301
321–5026–00
A5R302
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R303
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R304
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R305
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R306
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R307
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R308
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R309
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R310
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R311
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R312
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R313
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R314
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R315
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R316
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R317
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R318
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R319
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R320
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R321
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R322
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R323
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–75
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R324
321–5026–00
A5R325
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R326
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R327
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R328
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R329
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R330
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R331
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R332
321–5388–00
RES,FXD,FILM:16.2 OHM, 1%,0.125W,1206,8MM
91637
CRCW1206–16R2F–RT1
A5R333
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R334
321–5194–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,49.9 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B49R9FT
A5R334
322–3155–00
RES,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
57668
CRB20 FXE 402E
A5R335
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R336
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R337
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R338
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R339
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R340
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R341
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R342
321–5306–00
RES,FXD,FILM:330 OHM, +/–5%,0.125W,TC=200PPM,1206
PKG,SMD
91637
CRCW1206–331J–RT1
A5R343
321–5026–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,4.75K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4751FT
A5R344
321–5194–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,49.9 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
59124
RK73H2B49R9FT
A5R344
322–3155–00
RES,FXD,FILM:402 OHM,1%,0.2W,TC=T0
57668
CRB20 FXE 402E
A5R345
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R346
321–5038–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4752FT
A5R347
321–5038–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,47.5K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4752FT
A5R348
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
8–76
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
B019999
B020100
B019999
B020100
Name & description
MI,SMALL BODY
MI,SMALL BODY
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R350
321–5030–00
A5R351
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R352
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R353
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R354
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R355
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R356
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R357
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R358
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R359
308–0388–00
RES,FXD,WW:47 OHM, 5%,3W AXIAL LEADS
05347
CS4 47 OHM 5 PERCENT
A5R360
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R361
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R362
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R363
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R364
321–5047–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,100K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1003FT
A5R365
321–5047–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,100K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1003FT
A5R366
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R367
321–5018–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,1.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1001FT
A5R368
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R369
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R370
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R372
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R374
321–5047–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,100K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1003FT
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–77
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5R375
321–5047–00
A5R376
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,100K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1003FT
321–5030–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,10.0K OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1002FT
A5R377
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R378
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R379
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R380
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R381
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R382
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R383
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R384
321–5000–00
RES,FXD,FILM:10 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,100V,1206,SMD
50139
BCD10R0FT
A5R385
321–5012–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,332 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK3320FT
A5R390
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R391
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R392
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R393
321–5014–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,475 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK4750FT
A5R395
308–0388–00
RES,FXD,WW:47 OHM, 5%,3W AXIAL LEADS
05347
CS4 47 OHM 5 PERCENT
A5R396
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R397
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R398
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R399
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R400
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R401
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R402
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R403
321–5051–00
RES,FXD:THICK FILM,0 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100 PPM,1206
50139
BCD0JUMPERT
A5R404
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
A5R405
321–5006–00
RES,FXD,FILM:THICK FILM,100 OHM, 1%,0.125W,TC=100
PPM,1206
50139
BCK1000FT
8–78
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A5RC1
307–5101–00
RCD,NTWK:16,47 OHM, 33 PF,SCHOTTKE DIODE, SOIC–20
56427
PRCD001470M330M OR
PRN244
A5RC2
307–5101–00
RCD,NTWK:16,47 OHM, 33 PF,SCHOTTKE DIODE, SOIC–20
56427
PRCD001470M330M OR
PRN244
A5RC3
307–5101–00
RCD,NTWK:16,47 OHM, 33 PF,SCHOTTKE DIODE, SOIC–20
56427
PRCD001470M330M OR
PRN244
A5S1
260–1965–00
SWITCH,ROCKER:DIP,RAISED ROCKER,4 POSITION,TOP
SEALED,150MA 30VDC,76SBO4S
00779
435166–2
A5TP3
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP4
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP5
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP6
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP7
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP8
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP9
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP12
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP13
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP14
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP15
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP16
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP17
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP18
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP19
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP20
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP21
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP22
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP23
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Mfr. part number
8–79
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5TP24
214–4085–00
A5TP25
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP26
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP28
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP31
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP32
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP33
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP34
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5TP35
214–4085–00
TERM,TEST POINT:0.070 ID,0.220 H,0.063 DIA PCB,0.015 X
0.032 BRASS,W/ RED NYLON COLLAR
26364
TP104–01–02
A5U2
156–4443–00
IC,MEMORY:CMOS,SRAM,128K X 32
MODULE,25NS,4A12832M–25,SIMM64
6Y440
MT4S12832M–25
00779
91–1744–14–64
Name & description
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1235–00
SOCKET,SIMM:PCB,SIMM II;FEMALE,22.5 DEG,1 XLZ
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U4
156–6708–01
IC,PROCESSOR:CMOS,DSP,24
BITS,40MHZ,PLL,DSP56002,132 PIN THRU–HOLEADAPTER
TK2651
SAMTEC–DSP:24BIT
A5U5
160–9909–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,OTP,22V10,7.5NS,111MHZ,190MA,22V
10–7,PRGM 156–6516–00,PLCC28–1,TUBE
80009
160–9909–00
A5U6
156–3314–00
IC, SC:TTL,INTERFACE,DIFFERENTIAL LINE
DRIVER/RECEIVER PAIR,MEETS RS–422 STANDARD,DS892
27014
DS8921AN
09922
DILB8P–108
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–0727–00
SKT,PL–IN ELEK: CROCKT,8 CONTACT
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U7
160–9908–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,EEPLD,22V10,130MA,15NS,22V10–15,
PRGM 156–3923–00,DIP24.3,TUBE
80009
160–9908–00
A5U8
156–6711–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,BUFFER,OCTAL,3–STATE,74ALS244,SO2
0.300,TUBE
01295
SN74ALS244BDW
A5U9
156–4039–00
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, DUAL CH,I OUT 16MA/CH, VCEO
7V/CH,10MBD,ISOL 2500V,CMR 1000V/US,TTL/LST
50434
HCPL–2631
136–0727–00
SKT,PL–IN ELEK: CROCKT,8 CONTACT
09922
DILB8P–108
50434
HCPL–2631
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U10
156–4039–00
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, DUAL CH,I OUT 16MA/CH, VCEO
7V/CH,10MBD,ISOL 2500V,CMR 1000V/US,TTL/LST
*MOUNTING PARTS*
8–80
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
136–0727–00
SKT,PL–IN ELEK: CROCKT,8 CONTACT
09922
DILB8P–108
A5U11
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U12
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U13
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U15
156–4407–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,20BIT,–90DB,SERIAL,200NS
SETTLING TIME,PCM63 P–K,DIP28.6
13919
PCM63P–K
09922
DILB28P–108
Mfr. part number
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–0755–00
SKT,DIP:PCB;FEM,STR,2 X 14,28 POS,0.1 X 0.6 CTR,0.175 H
X0.130 TAIL,BECU,TIN,ACCOM 0.008–0.0015 X 0.014–0.022
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U16
156–6710–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,ARITH FUNCT,8X OVERSAMPLING, DUAL
CHANNEL DIGITAL INTERPOLATION FILTER,DF17
13919
DF1700U
A5U18
156–4407–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,20BIT,–90DB,SERIAL,200NS
SETTLING TIME,PCM63 P–K,DIP28.6
13919
PCM63P–K
136–0755–00
SKT,DIP:PCB;FEM,STR,2 X 14,28 POS,0.1 X 0.6 CTR,0.175 H
X0.130 TAIL,BECU,TIN,ACCOM 0.008–0.0015 X 0.014–0.022
09922
DILB28P–108
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U19
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U20
156–4423–00
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, DUAL CH,I OUT 25MA,VCEO 10V, ISOL
2500V,20MBDCMR 1000V/US, DIP08.3, HCP
54893
HCPL–2430
136–0727–00
SKT,PL–IN ELEK: CROCKT,8 CONTACT
09922
DILB8P–108
*MOUNTING PARTS*
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U21
156–4423–00
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, DUAL CH,I OUT 25MA,VCEO 10V, ISOL
2500V,20MBDCMR 1000V/US, DIP08.3, HCP
54893
HCPL–2430
A5U22
156–0277–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE
REGULATOR,POSITIVE,5.0V,1.0A,4%,MC7805CT,TO–220
01295
UA7805CKC
210–0586–00
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4–40 X 0.25,STL CD PL
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
211–0008–00
SCREW,MACHINE:4–40 X 0.25,PNH,STL
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
214–3036–00
HEAT SINK,SE C:XSTR,TO–220;ALUM,BLACK ANODIZE
98978
7–363–BA
342–0355–00
INSULATOR,PLATE:TRANSISTOR,SILICONE RUBBER
2K262
CHR–1869
156–0846–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,VOLTAGE
REGULATOR,NEGATIVE,–5.0V,1.0A,4.0%,MC7905CT,TO–220
01295
UA7905CKC
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
*ATTACHED PARTS*
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5U23
*ATTACHED PARTS*
210–0586–00
NUT,PL,ASSEM WA:4–40 X 0.25,STL CD PL
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–81
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
211–0008–00
SCREW,MACHINE:4–40 X 0.25,PNH,STL
TK0435
ORDER BY DESC
214–3036–00
HEAT SINK,SE C:XSTR,TO–220;ALUM,BLACK ANODIZE
98978
7–363–BA
342–0355–00
INSULATOR,PLATE:TRANSISTOR,SILICONE RUBBER
2K262
CHR–1869
Mfr. part number
*END ATTACHED PARTS*
A5U24
156–6711–00
IC,DIGITAL:ALSTTL,BUFFER,OCTAL,3–STATE,74ALS244
01295
SN74ALS244BDW
A5U25
156–5291–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,TRANSISTOR
ARRAY,(7)NPN,50V,500MA,DARLINGTON,COMMON E
TTER,W/CLAMP DIOD
01295
ULN2003AD
A5U26
156–6311–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG MUX,8 CHANNEL,100 OHM,
250NS,DG408DY,SO16.150,TUBE
17856
DG408DY
A5U27
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U28
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U29
156–6311–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG MUX,8 CHANNEL,100 OHM,
250NS,DG408DY
17856
DG408DY
A5U30
156–6311–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG MUX,8 CHANNEL,100 OHM,
250NS,DG408DY
17856
DG408DY
A5U31
156–6311–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG MUX,8 CHANNEL,100 OHM,
250NS,DG408DY
17856
DG408DY
A5U32
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U33
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U34
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U35
156–6769–00
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO SHIFT,WITH
STORAGE,CLEAR,74HC594
01295
SN74HC594DW
A5U38
156–5456–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,MUX,QUAD
2–TO–1,ENABLE,74HC157,SO16.150,16MM T&R
04713
MC74HC157DR2
A5U39
156–5456–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,MUX,QUAD
2–TO–1,ENABLE,74HC157,SO16.150,16MM T&R
04713
MC74HC157DR2
A5U40
156–5356–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO
SHIFT,74HC164,SO14.150,16MM T&R
01295
SN74HC164DR
A5U41
156–5356–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO
SHIFT,74HC164,SO14.150,16MM T&R
01295
SN74HC164DR
A5U42
156–5356–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,REGISTER,8–BIT SIPO
SHIFT,74HC164,SO14.150,16MM T&R
01295
SN74HC164DR
A5U43
156–6707–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,DUAL SPDT,45 OHM,
DG403DY,SO16.150
17856
DG403DY
A5U44
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U45
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
8–82
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5U46
156–6706–00
A5U47
Serial no.
effective
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U48
156–5888–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,MULTIVIBRATOR,DUAL NON–RETRIG
MONOSTABLE,74HCT221,SO16.150,16MM
1CH66
74HCT221DT
A5U49
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U54
156–5888–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCTCMOS,MULTIVIBRATOR,DUAL NON–RETRIG
MONOSTABLE,74HCT221,SO16.150,16MM T&R
1CH66
74HCT221DT
A5U55
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U58
156–4538–00
IC,CONVERTER:20100–07135,A–D CONVERTER
4ICL7135CPI
80009
156–4538–00
A5U60
156–6715–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,DUAL,DPST NC,+/–15V,35
OHM, 100NS,DG405DY,SO16.150
17856
DG405DY
A5U61
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U62
156–6709–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,12 BIT,CURRENT
OUT,MULTIPLYING,AD7541AKR,SO18.300
24355
AD7541AKR
A5U63
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U64
156–6699–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,QUAD,SPST NC,+/–15V,35
OHM, 145NS,DG412DY,SO16.150
17856
DG412DY
A5U65
156–6709–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,12 BIT,CURRENT
OUT,MULTIPLYING,AD7541AKR,SO18.300
24355
AD7541AKR
A5U66
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U67
156–6707–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,DUAL SPDT,45 OHM,
DG403DY,SO16.150
17856
DG403DY
A5U68
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U69
156–6709–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,12 BIT,CURRENT
OUT,MULTIPLYING,AD7541AKR,SO18.300
24355
AD7541AKR
A5U70
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U71
156–6699–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,QUAD,SPST NC,+/–15V,35
OHM, 145NS,DG412DY,SO16.150
17856
DG412DY
A5U72
156–6709–00
IC,CONVERTER:CMOS,D/A,12 BIT,CURRENT
OUT,MULTIPLYING,AD7541AKR,SO18.300
24355
AD7541AKR
A5U73
156–6706–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,OP–AMP,DUAL,HIGH OUTPUT
DRIVE,LOW NOISE,NE5532D,SO16.300
1CH66
NE5532D
A5U74
156–6707–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,DUAL SPDT,45 OHM,
DG403DY,SO16.150
17856
DG403DY
A5U75
156–5291–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,TRANSISTOR ARRAY,NPN,50V,500MA,
DARLINGTON, COMMON EMITTER,W/ CLAMP DIODE
01295
ULN2003AD
B020100
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–83
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A5U81
156–6713–00
A5U82
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,SW–REGULATOR,STEP–DOWN/BUCK,1
5V,500MA,4%,SHUTDOWN,LM2574M–15,SO14.300
27014
LM2574M–15
156–6714–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,SW–REGULATOR,STEP–DOWN/BUCK,5.
0V,500MA,4%,SHUTDOWN,LM2574M–5.0,SO14.300
27014
LM2574M–5.0
A5U83
156–6713–00
IC,LINEAR:BIPOLAR,SW–REGULATOR,STEP–DOWN/BUCK,1
5V,500MA,4%,SHUTDOWN,LM2574M–15,SO14.300
27014
LM2574M–15
A5U85
156–6775–00
IC,DIGITAL:FCTCMOS,BUFFER,OCTAL,RESISTOR TER
NATED OUTPUTS,3–STATE,74FCT2244AT,SO20.300,TU
0TJ19
QS74FCT2244ATSO
A5U86
156–6774–00
IC,DIGITAL:FCTCMOS,TRANSCEIVER,OCTAL,RESISTOR
TER NATED OUTPUTS,3–STATE,74FCT2245AT,SO20.3
0TJ19
QS74FCT2245ATSO
A5U87
160–9910–00
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS.PLD,EEPLD,MACH 210,64 MACROCELL,32
I/O,6–INPUTS,2 CLOCK INPUTS,15NS,PRGM 15
80009
160–9910–00
00779
821575–1
Name & description
*MOUNTING PARTS*
136–1047–00
SKT,PLCC:PCB;44 POS,0.05 CTR,0.360H X 0.125 TAIL,TIN
*END MOUNTING PARTS*
A5U90
156–6712–01
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, VCEO 70V, ISOL 2500V, CTR 100%, SO8
SMD, ILD213T
50579
ILD213T
A5U91
156–6712–01
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, VCEO 70V, ISOL 2500V, CTR 100%, SO8
SMD, ILD213T
50579
ILD213T
A5U92
156–6712–01
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, VCEO 70V, ISOL 2500V, CTR 100%, SO8
SMD, ILD213T
50579
ILD213T
A5U93
156–6712–01
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, VCEO 70V, ISOL 2500V, CTR 100%, SO8
SMD, ILD213T
50579
ILD213T
A5U94
156–6712–01
IC,OPTO:COUPLER, VCEO 70V, ISOL 2500V, CTR 100%, SO8
SMD, ILD213T
50579
ILD213T
A5U95
156–5357–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,GATE,QUAD 2–INPUT
NOR,74HC02,SO14.150,16MM T&R
01295
SN74HC02DR
A5U96
156–5455–01
IC,DIGITAL:HCMOS,GATE,QUAD 2–INPUT
XOR,74HC86,SO14.150,16MM T&R
01295
SN74HC86D
A5U99
156–6481–01
IC, SC:CMOS,PWR SUPPLY SUPERVISOR,MPU RESET
GEN,5V SUPPLY SENSING,10%,350MS RESET TIME,
0B0A9
DS1233Z–10/TR
A5U100
156–6707–00
IC, SC:CMOS,ANALOG SWITCH,DUAL SPDT,45 OHM,
DG403DY,SO16.150
17856
DG403DY
A5U101
156–6481–01
IC, SC:CMOS,PWR SUPPLY SUPERVISOR,MPU RESET
GEN,5V SUPPLY SENSING,10%,350MS RESET TIME,
0B0A9
DS1233Z–10/TR
A5U117
160–9912–01
B020100
IC, DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,OTP,5032,32 M/C,16 I/O,8
IN,20NS,PRGM 156–3825–01,5032–20,DIP28.3,TUBE
80009
160–9912–01
A5U118
160–9914–00
B020100
IC,DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,OTP,ATV2500,24 M/C,14 IN,24 I/O,48
F/F,35NS,PRGM 156–6700–00,ATV2500H–3
80009
160–9914–00
A5U119
160–9913–01
B020100
IC, DIGITAL:CMOS,PLD,OPT,5032,32 M/C,16 I/O,8
IN,20NS,PRGM 156–3825–01,5032–20,DIP28.3
80009
160–9913–01
A5VR1
152–0756–00
DIODE,ZENER:47V,5%,1W,1N4756A,DO–41,TR
04713
1N4756ARL
A5VR1
152–0756–00
A5Y1
119–4642–00
8–84
B010329
DIODE,ZENER:47V,5%,1W,1N4756A,DO–41,TR
04713
1N4756ARL
OSCILLATOR:CRYSTAL CONTROLLED,12.288000 MHZ,100
PPM,HCMOS,4 PIN DIP,14 PIN DIP COMPATIBLE
14301
012–401–01525
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
A5A3
671–3873–00
B020100
A5A3CR1
152–0141–02
A5A3J1
131–2919–00
A5A3J2
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DRIVER
80009
671–3873–00
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35
01295
1N4152R
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
131–2919–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
A5A3J3
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X
0.090 TAIL,30 GOLD,STACKABLE,
22526
65521–136
A5A3K1
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARMATURE:2 FORM C,5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD
CLAD SILVER,MAX SW AT 110VDC,125VAC,30W,1A,INITI
61529
TF2E–5V
A5A4
671–3873–00
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:DRIVER
80009
671–3873–00
A5A4CR1
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35
01295
1N4152R
A5A4J1
131–2919–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
A5A4J2
131–2919–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 4,0.1 CTR,0.318 MLG X
0.110 TAIL,30 GOLD,0.035 DIA PCB,
00779
87232–4
A5A4J3
131–1425–00
CONN,HDR:PCB,MALE,RTANG,1 X 36,0.1 CTR,0.230 MLG X
0.090 TAIL,30 GOLD,STACKABLE,
22526
65521–136
A5A4K1
148–0235–00
RELAY,ARMATURE:2 FORM C,5VDC 312 OHM COIL,GOLD
CLAD SILVER,MAX SW AT 110VDC,125VAC,30W,1A,INITI
61529
TF2E–5V
B020100
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–85
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
A6
671–2666–00
B010100
B010324
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–00
A6
671–2666–01
B010325
B010348
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–01
A6
671–2666–02
B010349
B010999
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–02
4/25/97
A6
671–2666–03
B020100
A6
671–2666–04
4/25/97
A6BT1
146–0104–00
B010100
B010325
B010324
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–03
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:CPU
80009
671–2666–04
BATTERY,DRY:3.6V,LITHIUM,0.85AH,0.5AA,TL–5101
0BYG1
TL–5101
A6BT1
146–0116–00
BATTERY,DRY:3.0V,850MAH,LITHIUM,0.57X1,CR14250SE–T
S4091
CR14250SE–SP1-1
A6C1
290–1157–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:220UF,20%,25V,0.532 X 0.410,RADIAL
62643
CEAFM1E221M–T4
A6C2
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C3
290–1157–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:220UF,20%,25V,0.532 X 0.410,RADIAL
62643
CEAFM1E221M–T4
A6C6
290–5003–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:47UF,20%,10V,0.287 X
0.169,7343,SMD,13MM,T&R
04222
TAJD476M010
A6C7
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C8
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C9
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C10
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C11
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C12
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C13
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C14
290–5008–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:1UF,20%,35V,0.138 X 0.110,3528
04222
TAJB105M035
A6C15
290–5004–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:22UF,10%,20V,0.287 X 0.169,7343
04222
TAJD226K020R
A6C16
290–5035–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:3.3UF,20%,50V,5.7MM(0.224)
62643
MVK50VC3R3MD60
TPX
A6C17
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C18
290–5003–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:47UF,20%,10V,0.287 X
0.169,7343,SMD,13MM,T&R
04222
TAJD476M010
A6C19
290–5035–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:3.3UF,20%,50V,5.7MM(0.224)
62643
MVK50VC3R3MD60
TPX
A6C20
290–5035–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:3.3UF,20%,50V,5.7MM(0.224)
62643
MVK50VC3R3MD60
TPX
A6C21
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C22
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C23
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C24
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C25
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
8–86
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A6C26
290–5035–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:3.3UF,20%,50V,5.7MM(0.224)
62643
MVK50VC3R3MD60
TPX
A6C27
290–0963–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:220UF,20%,35WVDC,10 X 12MM,RADIAL
55680
UVX1V221MPA
A6C28
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C29
290–0963–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:220UF,20%,35WVDC,10 X 12MM,RADIAL
55680
UVX1V221MPA
A6C30
290–5003–00
CAP,FXD,TANT:47UF,20%,10V,0.287 X
0.169,7343,SMD,13MM,T&R
04222
TAJD476M010
A6C31
290–0950–00
CAP,FXD,ALUM:100UF,+50–20%,50V,10 X 12 MM,RADIAL
55680
UVX1J101MPA
A6C32
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C33
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C34
283–5279–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.47UF,10%,50V,X7R,.180X.250,CC1825
,SMD,12MM T/R
04222
18255C474KAT1A
A6C35
283–5279–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.47UF,10%,50V,X7R,.180X.250,CC1825
,SMD,12MM T/R
04222
18255C474KAT1A
A6C36
283–5279–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.47UF,10%,50V,X7R,.180X.250,CC1825
,SMD,12MM T/R
04222
18255C474KAT1A
A6C37
283–5279–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.47UF,10%,50V,X7R,.180X.250,CC1825
,SMD,12MM T/R
04222
18255C474KAT1A
A6C38
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C39
283–5218–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,4.7PF,+–0.5PF,50V,NPO,0805,SMD,8MM
04222
08055A4R7DAT2A
A6C40
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C41
283–5106–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,470PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A471JAT1A
A6C42
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C43
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C44
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C45
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C46
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C47
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C48
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C49
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C50
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C51
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C52
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C53
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C54
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C55
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C56
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Mfr. part number
8–87
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C57
283–5185–00
A6C58
A6C59
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C60
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C61
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C62
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C63
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C64
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C67
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C68
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C71
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C72
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C73
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C74
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C75
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C76
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C77
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C78
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C79
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C80
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C81
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C82
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C83
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C84
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C85
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C86
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C88
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C89
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C90
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C92
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C93
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C96
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C97
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C98
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C99
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C100
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C101
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C102
283–5068–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,2200PF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C222KAT1A
8–88
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C103
283–5004–00
A6C104
A6C105
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C106
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C107
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C108
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C109
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C110
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C111
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C112
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C113
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C114
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C115
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C116
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C117
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C118
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C120
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C121
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C122
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C123
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C124
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C125
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C126
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C127
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C128
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C129
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C130
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C131
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C132
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C133
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C134
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C135
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C136
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C137
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C138
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C140
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C141
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C142
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–89
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C143
283–5003–00
A6C144
A6C145
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C146
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C147
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C148
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C149
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C150
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C151
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C152
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C153
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C154
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C155
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C156
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C157
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C158
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C159
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C160
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C161
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C162
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C163
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C165
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C166
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C167
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C168
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C169
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C170
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C171
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C172
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C173
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C174
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C175
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C176
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C177
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C178
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C179
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C180
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C181
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
8–90
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C182
283–5003–00
A6C183
A6C184
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C185
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C186
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C187
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C188
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C189
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C190
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C191
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C192
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C193
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C194
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C195
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C196
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C197
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C198
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C199
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C200
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C201
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C202
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C203
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C204
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C205
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C206
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C207
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C208
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C209
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C210
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C211
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C212
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C213
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C214
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C215
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C216
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C217
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C218
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C219
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–91
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C220
283–5003–00
A6C221
A6C222
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C223
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C224
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C225
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C226
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C227
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C228
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C229
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C230
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C231
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C232
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C233
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C234
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C235
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C236
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C237
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C238
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C239
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C241
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C242
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C244
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C245
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C246
283–5195–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,10PF,5%,100V, NPO
04222
12061A100JAT1A
A6C247
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C248
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C249
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C250
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C251
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C252
283–5195–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,10PF,5%,100V, NPO
04222
12061A100JAT1A
A6C253
283–5195–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,10PF,5%,100V, NPO
04222
12061A100JAT1A
A6C254
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C255
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C256
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C257
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C258
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C259
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
8–92
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
A6C260
283–5003–00
A6C261
A6C262
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C263
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C264
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C265
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C266
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C267
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C268
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C269
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C270
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C271
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C272
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C273
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C282
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C284
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C285
290–5037–01
CAP,FXD,ALUM:10UF,20%,35V,5.7 H X 5 DIA MM
62643
MVK35VC10RME60
TPX
A6C286
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C287
283–5004–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.1UF,10%,25V,X7R
04222
12063C104KAT3A
A6C289
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C290
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C291
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C293
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C294
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C295
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C296
283–5188–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,100PF,5%,100V,NPO
04222
12061A101JAT1A
A6C297
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C298
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C299
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C300
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C301
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C302
283–5025–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,220PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A221JAT1A
A6C303
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C304
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C305
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C306
283–5185–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,1000PF,5%,50V,NPO
04222
12065A102JAT1A
A6C307
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C308
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
8–93
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
Name & description
Mfr.
code
A6C309
283–5022–00
Mfr. part number
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C310
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C311
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C312
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C313
283–5003–00
CAP,FXD,CERAMIC:MLC,0.01UF,10%,50V,X7R
04222
12065C103KAT060R
A6C314
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6C315
283–5022–00
CAP,FXD,CER DI:47PF,5%,50V NPO,1206 PKG, SMD,8MM
04222
12065A470JAT1A
A6CR1
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA
FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35,T&R
01295
1N4152R
A6CR4
152–0581–04
DIODE,RECT:SCHTKY,20V,1A,.450VF,25A IFSM,1N5817,T&R
04713
1N5817RL (TAPE &
REEL PACKAGE)
A6CR5
152–0601–01
DIODE,RECT:ULTRA FAST,150V,25NS,35A IFSM,MUR120,T&R
12969
UES1103
A6CR6
152–0601–01
DIODE,RECT:ULTRA FAST,150V,25NS,35A IFSM,MUR120,T&R
12969
UES1103
A6CR7
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA
FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35,T&R
01295
1N4152R
A6CR8
152–0141–02
DIODE,SIG:ULTRA
FAST,40V,150MA,4NS,2PF,1N4152,DO–35,T&R
01295
1N4152R
A6DS1
150–1037–00
DISPLAY,OPTO:LED,ORN,630NM,7 SEG,0.3” DISPLAY,COM
ANODE,RIGHT HANDDECIMAL,MAN3620A.3409
50579
DL307
A6DS2
150–1031–00
DIODE,OPTO:LED,RED,648NM,1MCD AT 20MA,70 DEG VIEW
ANGL,HLMP–1002,T1
01295
TIL 209A
A6E8
276–0850–00
BEAD:
80009
276–0850–00
A6E9
276–0850–00
BEAD:
80009
276–0850–00
A6E10
276–0850–00
BEAD:
80009
276–0850–00
A6E14
276–0850–00
BEAD:
80009
276–0850–00
A6F1
159–0145–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:15A,32V,10 SECONDS
61857
SP7–15A
61857
SP5–3A
61857
SP5–2A
A6F2
159–0220–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:3A,125V,FAST
A6F3
159–0208–00
FUSE,WIRE LEAD:2A,125V,5 SEC,SAFETY
A6FL1
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A6FL2
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL3
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL8
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A6FL9
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A6FL10
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A6FL11
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
8–94
CONTROLLED
AM700 Audio Measurement Set Service Manual
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Replaceable electrical parts list (cont.)
Component
number
Tektronix
part number
Serial no.
effective
Serial no.
discont’d
A6FL12
119–4472–00
FILTER,RF:EMI/RFI,50V,500MA,0.12 OHMS MAX DCR,200 OHMS
IMPEADANCE AT 20–300MHZ,4 COMMON MO
TK2058 ZJY51R5–8PA
A6FL13
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL14
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL15
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL16
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL17
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL18
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL19
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL20
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL21
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL22
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL23
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL24
119–3580–00
FILTER,EMI:T–CIRCUIT,140MHZ MAX,INS LOSS
15DB@30–800MHZ,25DB @70–200MHZ,1A,50V,1000PF,.094T
TK2058 ZJSR–5101–102TA
A6FL25
119–3580–00
FI